HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M750 Service Manual ENWW Laser Jet
User Manual: HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M750 shared.swissparts.ch - /Manuals/HP/LaserJet/Color Laserjet/
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 678
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Color LaserJet Enterprise M750 Service Manual M750n M750dn HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M750 Printer Series Service Manual Copyright and License Trademark Credits © 2013 Copyright Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Edition 1, 11/2013 Part number: D3L08-90966 Conventions used in this guide TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts. NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task. CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the product. WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury, catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product. ENWW iii iv Conventions used in this guide ENWW Table of contents 1 Theory of operation ....................................................................................................................................... 1 Basic operation ...................................................................................................................................................... 2 Major product systems ........................................................................................................................ 2 Product block diagram ........................................................................................................................ 2 Sequence of operation ........................................................................................................................ 3 Normal sequence of operation ......................................................................................... 3 Formatter-control system ..................................................................................................................................... 5 Sleep mode .......................................................................................................................................... 5 Input/output ........................................................................................................................................ 5 CPU ....................................................................................................................................................... 6 Memory ................................................................................................................................................ 6 Firmware ........................................................................................................................... 6 Nonvolatile memory ......................................................................................................... 6 PJL overview ........................................................................................................................................ 6 PML ...................................................................................................................................................... 6 Control panel ....................................................................................................................................... 6 Engine-control system .......................................................................................................................................... 7 DC controller ........................................................................................................................................ 8 Motors ............................................................................................................................. 11 Fans ................................................................................................................................. 13 Fuser-control circuit ....................................................................................................... 14 Fuser temperature control ........................................................................... 15 Fuser protective function ............................................................................. 16 Fuser failure detection ................................................................................. 17 Low-voltage power supply ............................................................................................. 18 Overcurrent/overvoltage protection ........................................................... 20 High-voltage power supply ............................................................................................ 21 Laser scanner system ....................................................................................................................... 23 Laser failure detection .................................................................................................... 23 Image-formation system .................................................................................................................................... 25 Electrophotographic process ............................................................................................................ 25 Image formation process .................................................................................................................. 27 ENWW v Latent-image formation block ....................................................................................... 28 Pre-exposure ................................................................................................ 28 Primary charging .......................................................................................... 28 Laser beam exposure ................................................................................... 29 Developing block ............................................................................................................ 30 Transfer block ................................................................................................................. 31 Primary transfer ........................................................................................... 31 Secondary transfer ....................................................................................... 31 Separation .................................................................................................... 32 Fusing block .................................................................................................................... 32 ITB cleaning block ........................................................................................................... 33 Drum cleaning block ....................................................................................................... 33 Print cartridges .................................................................................................................................. 34 Memory tag ..................................................................................................................... 35 Cartridge presence detection ......................................................................................... 35 Toner level detection ...................................................................................................... 35 Cartridge life detection ................................................................................................... 35 Developing unit engagement and disengagement control ........................................... 35 ITB unit .............................................................................................................................................. 37 Primary transfer roller engagement and disengagement control ................................ 38 ITB unit presence detection ............................................................................................ 39 ITB cleaning mechanism ................................................................................................. 39 Calibration ......................................................................................................................................... 40 Color-misregistration control ........................................................................................ 40 Environment change control .......................................................................................... 41 Image stabilization control ............................................................................................. 42 Image density control (DMAX) ...................................................................... 42 Image halftone control (DHALF) .................................................................. 42 Pickup, feed, and delivery system ...................................................................................................................... 43 Photo sensors ................................................................................................................................... 45 Motors and solenoids ........................................................................................................................ 46 Pickup and feed block ....................................................................................................................... 46 Tray 2 cassette pickup .................................................................................................... 46 Tray 2 cassette multiple-feed prevention ..................................................................... 47 Tray 2 cassette media-size detection and Tray 2 cassette-presence detection .......... 49 Tray 2 cassette lift-up operation ................................................................................... 50 Cassette media-presence detection .............................................................................. 52 Tray 1 (MP tray) paper pickup ........................................................................................................... 52 Tray 1 (MP tray) last-paper detection .............................................................................................. 53 Paper feed ......................................................................................................................................... 54 Skew-feed prevention .................................................................................................... 55 vi ENWW Media detection .............................................................................................................. 57 Feed-speed control ......................................................................................................... 58 Fusing and delivery block ................................................................................................................. 58 Loop control .................................................................................................................... 58 Pressure roller pressurization and depressurization control ....................................... 59 Output bin full detection ................................................................................................ 61 Duplex block (duplex models only) .................................................................................................. 62 Duplex reverse and duplex feed control ........................................................................ 62 Duplex operation ............................................................................................................ 63 Jam detection .................................................................................................................................... 64 Paper feeder ........................................................................................................................................................ 67 Paper-feeder motors ........................................................................................................................ 68 Paper-feeder paper pickup and feed ................................................................................................ 69 Cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection ................................................... 69 Paper-feeder cassette lift operation ................................................................................................ 70 Paper-feeder jam detection .............................................................................................................. 71 Optional 3X500-sheet paper deck ...................................................................................................................... 72 Motor control ..................................................................................................................................... 74 Pickup-and-feed operation ............................................................................................................... 75 Cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection ................................................... 76 Cassette lift-up operation ................................................................................................................. 77 Jam detection .................................................................................................................................... 78 2 Removal and replacement ............................................................................................................................ 81 Removal and replacement strategy .................................................................................................................... 82 Cautions during removal and replacement ...................................................................................... 82 Required tools ................................................................................................................................... 83 Types of screws ................................................................................................................................. 83 Service approach ............................................................................................................................... 83 Before performing service ................................................................................................................ 84 After performing service ................................................................................................................... 84 Parts removal order .......................................................................................................................... 84 Removal and replacement procedures ............................................................................................................... 85 Print cartridges .................................................................................................................................. 85 Toner-collection unit ........................................................................................................................ 88 Fuser .................................................................................................................................................. 90 Reset the New Fuser Kit setting at the control panel .................................................... 90 Pickup roller (Tray 1) ......................................................................................................................... 91 Separation pad (Tray 1) .................................................................................................................... 92 Separation roller assembly (Tray 2) ................................................................................................. 94 Pickup roller (Tray 2) ......................................................................................................................... 95 ENWW vii Pickup roller, separation roller, and feed roller (1 x 500-sheet and 3 x 500-sheet paper feeders) ............................................................................................................................................. 96 Secondary transfer roller .................................................................................................................. 97 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) ........................................................................................................ 98 Reset the New Transfer Kit setting at the control panel ............................................... 99 Formatter PCA ................................................................................................................................. 100 Hard Drive ........................................................................................................................................ 102 Remove the encrypted HDD ......................................................................................... 102 Remove the solid-state module ................................................................................... 104 Covers .............................................................................................................................................. 106 Identification and location ............................................................................................ 106 Right-front cover and control-panel assembly ........................................................... 108 Left cover ...................................................................................................................... 110 Rear cover ..................................................................................................................... 111 Remove the rear cover ............................................................................... 111 Toner collection unit access door ................................................................................ 112 Right-rear cover ............................................................................................................ 114 Reinstall the right-rear cover .................................................................... 114 Top cover ...................................................................................................................... 115 Remove the top cover ................................................................................ 115 Front-door assembly .................................................................................................... 117 Right-door assembly .................................................................................................... 120 Main assemblies .............................................................................................................................. 123 Formatter case ............................................................................................................. 123 Remove the formatter case ....................................................................... 123 Laser/scanner assembly .............................................................................................. 125 Remove the laser/scanner assembly ........................................................ 125 Paper pickup assembly ................................................................................................. 128 Remove the paper pickup assembly .......................................................... 128 Reinstall the paper pickup assembly ......................................................... 131 Registration sensor assembly ...................................................................................... 135 Remove the registration sensor assembly ................................................ 135 Lifter-drive assembly ................................................................................................... 138 Remove the lifter-drive assembly ............................................................. 138 ITB front guide assembly .............................................................................................. 141 ITB rear guide assembly ............................................................................................... 144 Residual toner full sensor ............................................................................................ 145 Remove the residual toner full sensor ...................................................... 145 Main drive assembly ..................................................................................................... 150 Remove the main drive assembly .............................................................. 150 Install the main drive assembly ................................................................. 159 viii ENWW Fuser drive assembly .................................................................................................... 164 Remove the fuser drive assembly ............................................................. 164 Install a replacement fuser drive assembly .............................................. 166 Fuser gear assembly ..................................................................................................... 168 Remove the fuser gear assembly .............................................................. 168 Install a replacement fuser gear assembly ............................................... 173 Paper delivery assembly .............................................................................................. 176 Remove the delivery assembly .................................................................. 176 Reinstall the paper delivery assembly ...................................................... 177 Duplex drive assembly (duplex models) ...................................................................... 179 Remove the duplex-drive assembly .......................................................... 179 Delivery drive assembly (simplex models) .................................................................. 181 Remove the delivery drive assembly ......................................................... 181 Residual-toner-feed assembly .................................................................................... 182 Remove the residual-toner-feed assembly .............................................. 182 ITB motor (M1) .............................................................................................................. 184 Remove the ITB motor ............................................................................... 184 Drum motor (M2) .......................................................................................................... 186 Remove the drum motor ............................................................................ 186 Developing motor (M3) ................................................................................................. 187 Remove the developing motor .................................................................. 187 Fuser motor (M4) .......................................................................................................... 188 Remove the fuser motor ............................................................................ 188 Developing-disengagement motor (M6) ..................................................................... 189 Remove the developing-disengagement motor ....................................... 189 Power-supply fan (FM1) ............................................................................................... 190 Remove the power-supply fan .................................................................. 190 Fuser fan (FM2) ............................................................................................................. 192 Remove the fuser fan ................................................................................. 192 Formatter fan (FM3) and ICB PCA ................................................................................. 194 Remove the formatter fan and ICB PCA ..................................................... 194 DC controller PCA .......................................................................................................... 197 Remove the DC controller PCA ................................................................... 197 Low-voltage power supply ........................................................................................... 199 Remove the low-voltage power supply ..................................................... 199 Imaging (developing) high-voltage power supply ....................................................... 202 Remove the imaging (developing) high-voltage power supply ................ 202 First transfer high-voltage power supply .................................................................... 203 Remove the first transfer high-voltage power supply ............................. 203 Second transfer high-voltage power supply ............................................................... 205 Remove the second transfer high-voltage power supply ......................... 205 ENWW ix Driver PCA ..................................................................................................................... 207 Remove the driver PCA ............................................................................... 207 Power switch PCA ......................................................................................................... 209 Remove the power switch PCA .................................................................. 209 Environmental sensor .................................................................................................. 210 Remove the environmental sensor ........................................................... 210 1 x 500-sheet paper feeder assembly ........................................................................................... 211 1 x 500 rear cover ......................................................................................................... 211 1 x 500 left cover .......................................................................................................... 212 1 x 500 right-front cover .............................................................................................. 214 1 x 500 front-upper cover ............................................................................................ 215 1 x 500 right door ......................................................................................................... 216 1 x 500 right-lower cover ............................................................................................. 218 1 x 500 pickup assembly .............................................................................................. 219 1 x 500 lifter-drive assembly ....................................................................................... 222 1 x 500 pickup motor .................................................................................................... 223 1 x 500 driver PCA ......................................................................................................... 224 3 x 500-sheet paper feeder (optional accessory) .......................................................................... 225 3 x 500 rear cover ......................................................................................................... 225 3 x 500 right and left cassette rails ............................................................................. 226 3 x 500 paper deck controller PCAs ............................................................................. 227 3 x 500 paper deck lifter-drive assembly .................................................................... 228 3 x 500 paper deck pickup motor ................................................................................. 229 3 x 500 front-lower cover ............................................................................................ 230 3 x 500 left cover .......................................................................................................... 231 3 x 500 right-corner cover ............................................................................................ 232 3 x 500 front-upper cover ............................................................................................ 233 3 x 500 right-door assembly ........................................................................................ 234 3 x 500 right-lower cover 1 .......................................................................................... 236 3 x 500 right-lower cover 2 .......................................................................................... 237 3 x 500 left-lower cover ............................................................................................... 238 3 x 500 rear-lower cover .............................................................................................. 239 Remove the 3 x 500 rear-lower cover ....................................................... 239 3 x 500 paper deck pickup assembly ........................................................................... 240 Remove the 3 x 500 paper deck pickup assembly .................................... 240 3 Solve problems .......................................................................................................................................... 243 Solve problems checklist .................................................................................................................................. 244 Menu map .......................................................................................................................................................... 246 Current settings pages .................................................................................................................... 246 Control panel menus ....................................................................................................................... 247 x ENWW Sign In menu .................................................................................................................................... 247 Retrieve Job From USB menu ......................................................................................................... 247 Retrieve Job From Device Memory menu ....................................................................................... 247 Supplies menu ................................................................................................................................. 248 Trays menu ...................................................................................................................................... 250 Administration menu ...................................................................................................................... 251 Reports menu ............................................................................................................... 251 General Settings menu ................................................................................................. 251 General Print Settings menu ........................................................................................ 255 Default Print Options menu .......................................................................................... 256 Display Settings menu .................................................................................................. 258 Manage Supplies menu ................................................................................................ 259 Manage Trays menu ..................................................................................................... 260 Network Settings menu ................................................................................................ 261 Troubleshooting menu ................................................................................................................... 264 Device Maintenance menu .............................................................................................................. 265 Backup/Restore menu .................................................................................................. 265 Calibration/Cleaning menu ........................................................................................... 266 USB Firmware Upgrade menu ...................................................................................... 266 Service menu ................................................................................................................ 267 Troubleshooting process .................................................................................................................................. 268 Determine the problem source ....................................................................................................... 268 Pre-troubleshooting checklist ..................................................................................... 268 Troubleshooting flowchart .......................................................................................... 269 Power subsystem ............................................................................................................................ 271 Power-on checks .......................................................................................................... 271 Power-on troubleshooting overview ......................................................... 271 Tools for troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................. 273 Component diagnostics .................................................................................................................. 273 LED diagnostics ............................................................................................................. 273 Understand lights on the formatter .......................................................... 273 Engine diagnostics ........................................................................................................ 276 Defeating interlocks ................................................................................... 277 Disable cartridge check .............................................................................. 278 Engine test button ...................................................................................... 279 Paper-path test ............................................................................................................ 279 Manual sensor test ....................................................................................................... 280 Front-door opening/closing switch (PS14) ............................................... 281 Right-door opening/closing sensor (PS15) ............................................... 282 TOP (top-of-page) sensor (PS5) ................................................................ 284 Fuser loop sensors 1 and 2 (PS7 and PS8) ................................................ 285 ENWW xi Fuser pressure-release sensor (PS9) ........................................................ 286 Fuser output sensor (PS6) ......................................................................... 287 Developer alienation sensor (PS11) .......................................................... 288 ITB alienation switch (SW5) ....................................................................... 289 Tray/Bin manual sensor test ........................................................................................ 290 Tray 1 paper sensor (PS2) .......................................................................... 292 Tray 2 paper present sensor (PS1) ............................................................ 293 Tray 2 paper surface sensor (PS4) ............................................................. 294 Tray 2 paper size switches (SW7 and SW8) ............................................... 295 Tray 3 paper sensor (SR3) .......................................................................... 296 Tray 3 paper surface sensor (SR2) ............................................................. 297 Tray 3 paper size sensors (SW2 and SW3) ................................................. 297 Tray 3 feed sensor (SR1) ............................................................................ 299 Tray 3 door opening/closing sensor (SW1) ............................................... 300 Tray 4 paper sensor (SR3) .......................................................................... 301 Tray 4 paper surface sensor (SR2) ............................................................. 301 Tray 4 paper size sensors (SW2 and SW3) ................................................. 301 Tray 4 feed sensor (SR1) ............................................................................ 301 Tray 4 door opening/closing door sensor (SW1) ....................................... 301 Tray 5 paper sensor (SR83) ........................................................................ 302 Tray 5 paper surface sensor (SR82) ........................................................... 302 Tray 5 paper size sensors (SW82 and SW83) ............................................ 302 Tray 5 feed sensor (SR81) .......................................................................... 302 Tray 5 door opening/closing sensor (SW1) ............................................... 302 Tray 6 paper sensor (SR93) ........................................................................ 302 Tray 6 paper surface sensor (SR92) ........................................................... 302 Tray 6 paper size sensors (SW92 and SW93) ............................................ 302 Tray 6 feed sensor (SR91) .......................................................................... 302 Tray 6 door opening/closing sensor (SW1) ............................................... 302 Output-bin-full sensor (PS10) ................................................................... 303 Paper-path sensors test ............................................................................................... 303 Print/stop test .............................................................................................................. 304 Component tests .......................................................................................................... 304 Component test (special-mode test) ......................................................... 304 Additional component tests ....................................................................... 307 Diagrams ......................................................................................................................................... 309 Block diagrams ............................................................................................................. 309 Plug/jack locations ....................................................................................................... 311 Location of connectors ................................................................................................. 312 DC controller connections .......................................................................... 312 Product connections .................................................................................. 314 xii ENWW Locations of major components ................................................................................... 321 General timing charts ................................................................................................... 328 General circuit diagram ................................................................................................ 330 Internal print-quality test pages .................................................................................................... 334 Print-quality-troubleshooting pages ........................................................................... 334 Diagnostics page .......................................................................................................... 337 Configuration page ....................................................................................................... 339 Configuration page ..................................................................................... 339 HP embedded Jetdirect page ..................................................................... 341 Finding important information on the configuration pages ..................... 342 Color-band test ............................................................................................................. 342 Print quality troubleshooting tools ................................................................................................ 344 Repetitive image-defect ruler ...................................................................................... 344 Calibrate the product .................................................................................................... 344 Control-panel menus ...................................................................................................................... 346 Administration menu .................................................................................................... 346 Reports menu ............................................................................................. 346 General Settings menu ............................................................................... 348 General Print Settings menu ...................................................................... 361 Default Print Options menu ....................................................................... 363 Display Settings menu ............................................................................... 365 Manage Supplies menu .............................................................................. 366 Manage Trays menu ................................................................................... 369 Network Settings menu ............................................................................. 370 Troubleshooting menu ............................................................................... 381 Device Maintenance menu ............................................................................................ 386 Backup/Restore menu ............................................................................... 386 Calibration/Cleaning menu ........................................................................ 387 USB Firmware Upgrade menu .................................................................... 389 Service menu .............................................................................................. 389 Interpret control-panel messages and event log entries .............................................................. 390 Control-panel message types ...................................................................................... 390 Control-panel messages and event log entries ........................................................... 390 10.0X.Y0 Supply memory error ................................................................. 390 10.22.50 ..................................................................................................... 391 10.22.51 ..................................................................................................... 391 10.22.52 ..................................................................................................... 391 10.23.50 ..................................................................................................... 392 10.23.51 ..................................................................................................... 392 10.23.52 ..................................................................................................... 392 10.23.70 Printing past very low ................................................................. 392 ENWW xiii 10.39.50 New Document Feeder Kit .......................................................... 393 10.39.53 ..................................................................................................... 393 10.39.55 Clean Document Feeder Rollers ................................................. 393 10.39.56 ..................................................................................................... 393 10.39.60 Document Feeder Kit low ........................................................... 393 10.39.69 Document Feeder Kit very low ................................................... 393 10.39.70 Scanning past very low ............................................................... 394 10.39.71 Document Feeder has stopped .................................................. 394 10.XX.34 Used supply in use ...................................................................... 394 10.XX.40 Genuine HP supplies installed .................................................... 394 10.XX.41 Unsupported supply in use ......................................................... 395 10.XX.70 Printing past very low ................................................................ 395 10.YY.15 Install.......................................................................... 396 10.YY.25 Wrong cartridge in slot .................................................. 397 10.YY.35 Incompatible ............................................................... 397 11.00.YY Internal clock error ..................................................................... 398 13.00.00 ..................................................................................................... 398 13.A3.D3 ..................................................................................................... 398 13.A3.D4 ..................................................................................................... 399 13.A3.D5 ..................................................................................................... 399 13.A3.D6 ..................................................................................................... 400 13.A3.FF ...................................................................................................... 400 13.A4.D4 ..................................................................................................... 400 13.A4.D5 ..................................................................................................... 401 13.A4.D6 ..................................................................................................... 402 13.A4.FF ...................................................................................................... 402 13.A5.A5 ..................................................................................................... 402 13.A5.D6 ..................................................................................................... 403 13.A5.FF ...................................................................................................... 403 13.A6.D6 ..................................................................................................... 403 13.A6.FF ...................................................................................................... 404 13.AA.EE ..................................................................................................... 404 13.AB.EE ..................................................................................................... 404 13.B2.AX ..................................................................................................... 405 13.B2.DX ..................................................................................................... 406 13.B2.FF ...................................................................................................... 407 13.B4.FF ...................................................................................................... 407 13.B9.AZ ..................................................................................................... 408 13.B9.CZ ..................................................................................................... 409 13.B9.DZ ..................................................................................................... 411 13.B9.FF ...................................................................................................... 412 xiv ENWW 13.B9.YZ Fuser Area Jam ........................................................................... 412 13.BA.EE ..................................................................................................... 414 13.BB.EE ..................................................................................................... 414 13.E1.DZ ..................................................................................................... 414 13.FF.FF ...................................................................................................... 416 20.00.00 Insufficient memory: To continue, touch “OK” .......... 416 21.00.00 Page too complex To continue, touch “OK” ............................... 416 32.1C.XX ..................................................................................................... 416 33.02.01 ..................................................................................................... 421 33.02.02 ..................................................................................................... 421 33.02.03 ..................................................................................................... 422 33.03.01 ..................................................................................................... 422 33.03.02 ..................................................................................................... 422 40.00.01 USB I/O buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK” ..................... 422 40.00.02 Embedded I/O buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK” ........... 422 40.00.04 Unsupported USB accessory detected To continue, touch “OK” ............................................................................................................ 423 40.00.05 Embedded I/O bad transmission To continue, touch “OK” ........ 423 40.08.0X USB storage accessory removed ................................................ 423 40.0X.05 USB storage accessory removed ................................................ 423 41.01.YZ ..................................................................................................... 423 41.02.00 Error ............................................................................................ 425 41.02.0Z Error ............................................................................................ 425 41.03.YZ Unexpected size in Tray ...................................................... 425 41.03.YZ Unexpected size in Tray To use another tray, touch "Options" ..................................................................................................... 426 41.04.YZ ..................................................................................................... 427 41.05.YZ Unexpected type in Tray ..................................................... 428 41.05.YZ Unexpected type in Tray To use another tray, touch "Options" ..................................................................................................... 429 41.07.YZ Error To continue, touch “OK” .................................................... 430 41.WX.YZ Error To use another tray, touch "Options" .............................. 432 42.XX.YY ..................................................................................................... 433 47.00.00 ..................................................................................................... 433 47.00.XX ..................................................................................................... 433 47.01.XX ..................................................................................................... 433 47.02.XX ..................................................................................................... 434 47.03.XX ..................................................................................................... 434 47.04.XX ..................................................................................................... 434 47.05.00 ..................................................................................................... 434 47.06.XX ..................................................................................................... 434 ENWW xv 47.WX.YZ Printer calibration failed To continue, touch “OK” ................... 435 48.01.XX Error ............................................................................................ 436 49.XX.YY Error To continue turn off then on ............................................. 436 50.WX.YZ Fuser error To continue turn off then on .................................. 437 51.00.YY Error To continue turn off then on ............................................. 440 52.00.00 or 52.20.00 To continue turn off then on .................................. 441 54.0X.07 ..................................................................................................... 441 54.11.05 or 54.12.05 ................................................................................. 441 54.XX.YY Error ............................................................................................ 442 55.XX.YY DC controller error To continue turn off then on ....................... 443 56.00.01 Illegal Input Printer Error To continue turn off then on ............ 443 56.00.02 Selected media output bin unavailable ..................................... 444 56.00.03 Media input path operation error ............................................... 444 57.00.0Y Error To continue turn off then on ............................................. 444 58.00.02 environmental sensor malfunction ........................................... 445 58.00.04 Error To continue turn off then on ............................................. 445 59.00.YY Error To continue turn off then on ............................................. 446 59.0X.50 Error To continue turn off then on ............................................. 447 59.0X.60 Error To continue turn off then on ............................................. 447 59.0X.70 Error To continue turn off then on ............................................. 448 59.0X.80 Error To continue turn off then on ............................................. 448 60.00.0Y Tray lifting error .................................................................. 449 60.10.0Y Media input source pickup mechanism malfunction .......... 450 61.00.01 ..................................................................................................... 450 62.00.00 No system To continue turn off then on .................................... 451 69.11.YY Error To continue, touch “OK” .................................................... 451 70.00.00 Error To continue turn off then on ............................................. 451 80.0X.YY Embedded Jetdirect Error ........................................................... 451 81.WX.00 Wireless Network Error To continue turn off then on .............. 453 81.WX.YZ Embedded Jetdirect Error To continue turn off then on .......... 453 98.00.0X Corrupt data in X volume ............................................................ 454 99.00.01 Upgrade not performed file is corrupt ....................................... 454 99.00.02 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive ........................ 454 99.00.03 Upgrade not performed error writing to disk ............................ 454 99.00.04 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive ........................ 455 99.00.05 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive ........................ 455 99.00.06 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade ......................... 455 99.00.07 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade ......................... 455 99.00.08 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade ......................... 456 99.00.09 Upgrade canceled by user .......................................................... 456 99.00.10 Upgrade canceled by user .......................................................... 456 xvi ENWW 99.00.11 Upgrade canceled by user .......................................................... 456 99.00.12 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid .................................. 456 99.00.13 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid .................................. 457 99.00.14 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid .................................. 457 99.00.2X ..................................................................................................... 457 99.01.XX ..................................................................................................... 458 99.02.01 ..................................................................................................... 458 99.02.09 ..................................................................................................... 458 99.05.56 ..................................................................................................... 458 99.09.60 Unsupported disk ....................................................................... 459 99.09.61 Unsupported disk ....................................................................... 459 99.09.62 Unknown disk ............................................................................. 459 99.09.63 Incorrect disk .............................................................................. 459 99.09.64 Disk malfunction ......................................................................... 460 99.09.65 Disk data error ............................................................................ 460 99.09.66 No disk installed ......................................................................... 460 99.09.67 Disk is not bootable please download firmware ....................... 460 99.09.68 ..................................................................................................... 461 99.XX.YY ..................................................................................................... 461 full Remove all paper from bin ............................................... 461 almost full .................................................................................. 461 low OR Supplies low ................................................................... 461 very low OR Supplies very low ................................................... 462 lifting ........................................................................................... 463 [File System] device failure To clear press OK .......................................... 463 [File System] file operation failed To clear press OK ................................ 463 [File System] file system is full To clear press OK .................................... 464 [File System] is not initialized .................................................................... 464 [File System] is write protected ................................................................. 464 Accept bad signature .................................................................................. 464 Bad optional tray connection ..................................................................... 464 Calibration reset pending ........................................................................... 465 Canceling .................................................................................................... 465 Canceling ................................................................................. 465 Checking engine ......................................................................................... 465 Checking paper path ................................................................................... 465 Chosen personality not available To continue, touch “OK” ...................... 465 Cleaning do not grab paper ........................................................................ 466 Cleaning... ................................................................................................... 466 Clearing event log ...................................................................................... 466 Clearing paper path .................................................................................... 466 ENWW xvii Close front door .......................................................................................... 466 Close lower right door ................................................................................ 467 Close middle right door .............................................................................. 467 Close right door .......................................................................................... 467 Close upper right door For help press ? ..................................................... 467 Cooling device ............................................................................................ 468 Data received To print last page, press OK ................................................ 468 Event log is empty ...................................................................................... 468 Expected drive missing .............................................................................. 469 HP Secure Hard Drive disabled ................................................................... 469 Incompatible .............................................................................. 469 Incompatible supplies ................................................................................ 469 Initializing... ................................................................................................ 470 Install .......................................................................................... 470 Install Close rear door ................................................................ 470 Install Fuser Unit ........................................................................................ 471 Install supplies ........................................................................................... 471 Install Transfer Unit ................................................................................... 471 Internal disk not functional ........................................................................ 471 Internal disk spinning up ............................................................................ 472 Load Tray : [Type], [Size] ..................................................................... 472 Load Tray : [Type], [Size] To use another tray, touch OK ................... 472 Loading program .............................................................................. 473 Manually feed output stack Then touch "OK" to print second sides ......... 473 Manually feed: [Type], [Size] To continue, touch “OK” ............................. 473 Manually feed: [Type], [Size] To use another tray, touch OK ................... 473 Moving solenoid ......................................................................................... 474 Moving solenoid and motor ....................................................................... 474 No job to cancel .......................................................................................... 474 Paused ........................................................................................................ 474 Performing Color Band Test… .................................................................... 474 Performing Paper Path Test… ................................................................... 475 Please wait… .............................................................................................. 475 Printing CMYK samples... ........................................................................... 475 Printing Color Usage Log... ......................................................................... 475 Printing Configuration... ............................................................................. 475 Printing Demo Page... ................................................................................ 475 Printing Diagnostics Page... ....................................................................... 476 Printing Engine Test... ................................................................................ 476 Printing Event Log... ................................................................................... 476 Printing File Directory... ............................................................................. 476 xviii ENWW Printing Font List... ..................................................................................... 476 Printing Fuser Test Page... ......................................................................... 476 Printing Help Page... ................................................................................... 477 Printing Menu Map... .................................................................................. 477 Printing PQ Troubleshooting... .................................................................. 477 Printing Registration Page... ...................................................................... 477 Printing RGB Samples... ............................................................................. 477 Printing stopped ......................................................................................... 477 Printing Supplies Status page... ................................................................. 478 Printing Usage Page... ................................................................................ 478 Processing duplex job... Do not grab paper until job completes .............. 478 Processing job from tray ... Do not grab paper until job completes ... 478 Processing... ........................................................................... 478 Processing... copy of .................................................................... 478 Ready .......................................................................................................... 479 Ready .................................................................................... 479 Remove all toner cartridges ...................................................................... 479 Remove at least one toner cartridge ......................................................... 479 Remove shipping lock from Tray 2 ............................................................ 479 Replace ....................................................................................... 480 Replace supplies ......................................................................................... 480 Restore Factory Settings ........................................................................... 481 Restricted from printing in color ................................................................ 481 Rotating motor ............................................................................. 481 Rotating Motor ........................................................................................... 482 Size mismatch in Tray ......................................................................... 482 Supplies in wrong positions ....................................................................... 482 Tray empty: [Type], [Size] .................................................................. 483 Tray open ............................................................................................ 483 Tray overfilled ..................................................................................... 484 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................... 484 Type mismatch Tray ........................................................................... 484 Unsupported drive installed To continue, touch “OK” .............................. 485 Unsupported supply in use OR Unsupported supply installed To continue, touch “OK” .................................................................................. 485 Unsupported tray configuration ................................................................ 485 Unsupported USB accessory detected Remove USB accessory ................ 486 USB accessory needs too much power Remove USB and turn off then on ................................................................................................................ 486 USB accessory not functional .................................................................... 486 Used supply installed To continue, touch “OK” OR Used supply in use .... 486 ENWW xix Wrong cartridge in slot ................................................................. 487 Event log messages ........................................................................................................................ 488 Print or view an event log ............................................................................................. 489 Clear an event log ......................................................................................................... 489 Clear jams .......................................................................................................................................................... 490 Common causes of jams ................................................................................................................. 490 Jam locations .................................................................................................................................. 491 Clear jams in the upper-right door ................................................................................................. 496 Clear jams in the lower-right door .................................................................................................. 498 Clear jams in Tray 1 ......................................................................................................................... 499 Clear jams from Tray 2, Tray 3, or an optional tray ....................................................................... 501 Clear jams in the output bin area .................................................................................................... 502 Jam causes and solutions ............................................................................................................... 503 Jams in the output bin .................................................................................................. 503 Jams in the fuser and transfer area ............................................................................. 503 Jams in the duplex area (duplex models only) ............................................................ 504 Jams in Tray 1, Tray 2 and internal paper path ........................................................... 505 Jams in Tray 3, 4, 5, and 6 ............................................................................................ 507 Change jam recovery ....................................................................................................................... 509 Solve paper-handling problems ....................................................................................................................... 510 Product feeds multiple sheets ........................................................................................................ 510 Product feeds incorrect page size .................................................................................................. 510 Product pulls from incorrect tray ................................................................................................... 510 Paper does not feed automatically ................................................................................................ 511 Paper does not feed from Tray 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 ................................................................................ 511 Output is curled or wrinkled ........................................................................................................... 512 Product will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly ............................................................................ 512 Use manual print modes ................................................................................................................................... 514 Solve image-quality problems .......................................................................................................................... 517 Print quality examples .................................................................................................................... 517 Clean the product .............................................................................................................................................. 523 Clean the paper path ....................................................................................................................... 523 Solve performance problems ............................................................................................................................ 524 Solve connectivity problems ............................................................................................................................. 525 Solve direct-connect problems ...................................................................................................... 525 Solve network problems ................................................................................................................. 525 Service mode functions ..................................................................................................................................... 526 Service menu ................................................................................................................................... 526 Product resets ................................................................................................................................. 527 Restore factory-set defaults ........................................................................................ 527 Preboot menu options ....................................................................................................................................... 528 xx ENWW Product updates ................................................................................................................................................ 535 Determine the installed revision of firmware ................................................................................ 535 Perform a firmware upgrade .......................................................................................................... 535 Embedded Web Server ................................................................................................. 535 USB storage device (Preboot menu) ............................................................................ 536 USB storage device (control-panel menu) ................................................................... 537 4 Parts and diagrams .................................................................................................................................... 539 Order parts by authorized service providers .................................................................................................... 540 Order parts, accessories, and supplies ........................................................................................... 540 Related documentation and software ............................................................................................ 540 Supplies part numbers .................................................................................................................... 541 Customer self repair parts .............................................................................................................. 541 Service replacement parts .............................................................................................................. 543 Accessories part numbers .............................................................................................................. 545 How to use the parts lists and diagrams .......................................................................................................... 546 Assembly locations ........................................................................................................................................... 547 External covers, panels, and doors ................................................................................................................... 548 Right door assembly .......................................................................................................................................... 550 Internal components (1 of 9) ............................................................................................................................ 552 Internal components (2 of 9) ............................................................................................................................ 554 Internal components (3 of 9) ............................................................................................................................ 556 Internal components (4 of 9) ............................................................................................................................ 558 Internal components (5 of 9) ............................................................................................................................ 560 Internal components (6 of 9) ............................................................................................................................ 562 Internal components (7 of 9) ............................................................................................................................ 564 Internal components (8 of 9) ............................................................................................................................ 566 Internal components (9 of 9) ............................................................................................................................ 568 1x250 cassette .................................................................................................................................................. 570 Paper pick-up assembly .................................................................................................................................... 572 Paper delivery assembly ................................................................................................................................... 574 Printed circuit assemblies ................................................................................................................................. 576 1x500 paper feeder ........................................................................................................................................... 578 1x500PF external components ...................................................................................................... 578 1x500PF internal components ....................................................................................................... 580 1x500PF PCA ................................................................................................................................... 582 3x500 paper feeder ........................................................................................................................................... 584 3x500PF external components ...................................................................................................... 584 3x500PF internal components ....................................................................................................... 586 3x500PF cassette ............................................................................................................................ 588 3x500PF PCAs ................................................................................................................................. 590 ENWW xxi Alphabetical parts list ....................................................................................................................................... 592 Numerical parts list ........................................................................................................................................... 604 Appendix A Service and support .................................................................................................................... 617 Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement ................................................................................................. 618 HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet toner cartridge limited warranty statement ........................... 619 Color LaserJet Fuser Kit, Transfer Kit, and Roller Kit Limited Warranty Statement ........................................ 620 Data stored on the toner cartridge ................................................................................................................... 621 End User License Agreement ............................................................................................................................ 622 Customer self-repair warranty service ............................................................................................................. 624 Customer support .............................................................................................................................................. 625 Appendix B Product specifications ................................................................................................................. 627 Physical specifications ...................................................................................................................................... 628 Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions .......................................................... 628 Environmental specifications ............................................................................................................................ 628 Appendix C Regulatory information ............................................................................................................... 629 FCC regulations .................................................................................................................................................. 630 Environmental product stewardship program ................................................................................................. 631 Protecting the environment ........................................................................................................... 631 Ozone production ............................................................................................................................ 631 Power consumption ........................................................................................................................ 631 Toner consumption ......................................................................................................................... 631 Paper use ......................................................................................................................................... 631 Plastics ............................................................................................................................................ 631 HP LaserJet print supplies .............................................................................................................. 631 Return and recycling instructions ................................................................................................... 632 United States and Puerto Rico ...................................................................................... 632 Multiple returns (more than one cartridge) ............................................... 632 Single returns ............................................................................................. 632 Shipping ...................................................................................................... 632 Non-U.S. returns ........................................................................................................... 633 Paper ............................................................................................................................................... 633 Material restrictions ........................................................................................................................ 633 Disposal of waste equipment by users ........................................................................................... 634 Electronic hardware recycling ........................................................................................................ 634 Chemical substances ....................................................................................................................... 634 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) ................................................................................................ 634 For more information ...................................................................................................................... 634 xxii ENWW Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................................. 635 Certificate of Volatility ...................................................................................................................................... 637 Safety statements ............................................................................................................................................. 639 Laser safety ..................................................................................................................................... 639 Canadian DOC regulations .............................................................................................................. 639 VCCI statement (Japan) ................................................................................................................... 639 Power cord instructions .................................................................................................................. 639 EMC statement (China) .................................................................................................................... 639 Power cord statement (Japan) ....................................................................................................... 640 EMC statement (Korea) ................................................................................................................... 640 EMI statement (Taiwan) .................................................................................................................. 640 Laser statement for Finland ........................................................................................................... 640 GS statement (Germany) ................................................................................................................ 642 Substances Table (China) ................................................................................................................ 642 Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (Turkey) ........................................................... 642 Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (Ukraine) .......................................................... 642 Eurasian Conformity (Belarus, Kazakhstan, Russia) ...................................................................... 643 Index ........................................................................................................................................................... 645 ENWW xxiii xxiv ENWW 1 ENWW Theory of operation ● Basic operation ● Formatter-control system ● Engine-control system ● Image-formation system ● Pickup, feed, and delivery system ● Paper feeder ● Optional 3X500-sheet paper deck 1 Basic operation Major product systems The product contains the following five systems: ● Engine-control system ● Laser scanner system ● Image-formation system ● Media feed system ● Optional paper feeder system Product block diagram Figure 1-1 Product block diagram LASER SCANNER SYSTEM IMAGE-FORMATION SYSTEM ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MEDIA FEED SYSTEM OPTION 2 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Sequence of operation The DC controller in the engine-control system controls the operational sequences of the product. The following table describes durations and operations for each period of a print operation from the time the product is turned on until the motor stops rotating. Normal sequence of operation Table 1-1 Sequence of operation Name Timing Purpose WAIT From the time the power switch is turned on, the door is closed, or the product exits Sleep mode, until the product is ready for a print operation. Brings the product to a printable condition: STBY (standby) INTR (initial rotation) ENWW From the end of the WAIT or LSTR period until either a print command is sent or the power switch is turned off. From the time the print command is received until the product picks up a piece of paper. ● Detects and heats the fuser ● Detects the print cartridge and any cartridge changes ● Detects the ITB, and moves the ITB and the developing unit to the home position ● Cleans residual toner from the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) and the secondary transfer roller Maintains the product in printable condition: ● Enters Sleep mode if the sleep command is received ● Performs a calibration if the calibration command is received Prepares for the print job ● Activates the high-voltage power supply ● Activates the laser scanner ● Opens the laser shutter ● Cleans the protective laser glass ● Engages the print cartridges ● Warms the fuser Basic operation 3 Table 1-1 Sequence of operation (continued) Name Timing Purpose PRINT From the end of the INTR period until the last sheet completes the fusing operation. Prints LSTR (last rotation) From the end of the PRINT period until the main motor stops rotating. ● Forms the image on the photosensitive drum ● Transfers the toner image to the paper ● Fuses the toner image to the paper Moves the last printed sheet to the output bin. ● Stops the high-voltage power supply ● Stops the laser scanner ● Closes the laser shutter ● Cleans the protective laser glass ● Disengages the print cartridges ● Stops the fuser The product enters the INTR period as the LSTR period is completed, if the formatter sends another print command. 4 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Formatter-control system The formatter is responsible for the following procedures: ● Controlling sleep mode ● Receiving and processing print data from the various product interfaces ● Monitoring control-panel functions and relaying product-status information (through the control panel and the network or bidirectional interface) ● Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the DC controller PCA ● Storing font information ● Communicating with the host computer through the network or the bidirectional interface The formatter receives a print job from the network or bidirectional interface and separates it into image information and instructions that control the printing process. The DC controller PCA synchronizes the imageformation system with the paper-input and -output systems, and then signals the formatter to send the print-image data. The formatter also provides the electrical interface and mounting locations for an additional DIMM. Sleep mode NOTE: In the General Settings menu (a submenu of the Administration menu), this item is called Energy Settings. This feature conserves power after the product has been idle for an adjustable period of time. When the product is in Sleep Mode, the control-panel backlight is turned off, but the product retains all settings, downloaded fonts, and macros. The default setting is for Sleep Mode to be enabled. The product enters Sleep Mode after 60 seconds of idle time. The product exits Sleep Mode and enters the warm-up cycle when any of the following events occur: ● A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received ● A control-panel button is pressed ● A cover is opened ● A paper tray is opened ● The engine-test switch is pressed NOTE: Product error messages override the Sleep message. The product enters Sleep Mode at the appropriate time, but the error message continues to appear. Input/output The product has three I/O interfaces: ENWW ● USB 2.0 port for connecting directly to a computer ● Internal 10/100Base-T network port ● Walk-up USB port Formatter-control system 5 CPU The formatter incorporates a 800 MHz Vermillion processor. Memory The random access memory (RAM) on the formatter printed circuit assembly (PCA) contains the page, I/O buffers, and the font storage area. It stores printing and font information received from the host system, and can also serve to temporarily store a full page of print-image data before the data is sent to the print engine. NOTE: If the product encounters a problem when managing available memory, a clearable warning message appears on the control-panel display. Firmware The firmware is contained in the internal solid state drive (SSD) or hard disk (HD). A remote firmware upgrade process is used to overwrite and upgrade the firmware on the SSD or HD. Nonvolatile memory The product uses nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) to store device and user configuration settings. The contents of NVRAM are retained when the product is turned off or disconnected. PJL overview The printer job language (PJL) is an integral part of configuration, in addition to the standard printer command language (PCL). With standard cabling, the product can use PJL to perform a variety of functions. ● Two-way communication with the host computer through a network connection or a USB connection. The product can inform the host about the control-panel settings which can be changed from the host. ● Dynamic I/O switching. The product uses this switching to be configured with a host on each I/O. The product can receive data from more than one I/O simultaneously, until the I/O buffer is full. This can occur even when the product is offline. ● Context-sensitive switching. The product can automatically recognize the personality (PS or PCL) of each job and configure itself to serve that personality. ● Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next. For example, if a print job is sent to the product in landscape mode, the subsequent print jobs print in landscape mode only if they are formatted for landscape printing. PML The printer management language (PML) allows remote configuration and status read-back through the I/O ports. Control panel The formatter sends and receives product status and command data to and from the control-panel PCA. 6 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Engine-control system The engine-control system coordinates all product functions, according to commands that the formatter sends. The engine-control system drives the laser/scanner system, the image formation system, and the pickup/feed/delivery system. The engine control system contains the following major components: ● DC controller ● Low-voltage power supply ● High-voltage power supply Figure 1-2 Engine-control system ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM LASER SCANNER SYSTEM DC controller IMAGE-FORMATION SYSTEM Formatter Low-voltage power supply MEDIA FEED SYSTEM High-voltage power supply OPTION ENWW Engine-control system 7 DC controller The DC controller controls the operational sequence of the product. Figure 1-3 DC controller diagram Motor Developing highvoltage power supply Cartridge (x4) Fan Transfer 1 highvoltage power supply ITB ass’y Solenoid Switch Transfer 2 highvoltage power supply T2 roller Photointerrupter DC controller Fuser LED Sensor AC input Low-voltage power supply Fan Accessor y Switch Formatter ICB Control panel Laser scanner ass’y Fan The DC controller controls the product's electrical components, listed in the following table. 8 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Table 1-2 Electrical components Component type Abbreviation Name Switch SW1 Power switch SW2 24V interlock switch SW3 5V interlock switch 1 SW4 5V interlock switch 2 SW5 Primary transfer disengagement switch SW6 Toner collection unit switch SW7 Tray 2 cassette media end guide position switch SW8 Tray 2 cassette media width guide position switch SL1 Tray 2 cassette pickup solenoid SL2 Tray 1 pickup solenoid SL3 Duplex reverse solenoid 1 (duplex models only) SL5 Primary transfer disengagement solenoid FM1 Power supply fan FM2 Fuser fan FM3 Formatter fan PS1 Tray 2 cassette paper-presence sensor PS2 Tray 1 paper-presence sensor PS3 Last-paper sensor PS4 Tray 2 cassette paper-stack surface sensor PS5 Top-of-page (TOP) sensor PS6 Fuser delivery sensor PS7 Loop sensor 1 PS8 Loop sensor 2 PS9 Fuser pressure-release sensor PS10 Output bin full sensor PS11 Developing disengagement sensor PS12 Black drum home-position sensor PS13 YMC drum home-position sensor PS14 Front door sensor PS15 Right door sensor Solenoid Fan Photointerrupter (sensor) ENWW Engine-control system 9 Table 1-2 Electrical components (continued) 10 Component type Abbreviation Name Motor M1 ITB Motor M2 Drum motor M3 Developing motor M4 Fuser motor M5 Pickup motor M6 Developing disengagement motor M7 Duplex reverse motor (duplex model only) M8 Duplex feed motor (duplex model only) M9 Tray 2 cassette lifter motor M10 Scanner motor Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Motors The product has ten motors for paper feed and image formation. The DC controller determines there is a motor failure if a motor does not reach a specified speed within a specified period after motor startup, or if the rotational speed is outside a specified range for a specified period.` Figure 1-4 Motors Drum motor Developer motor Fuser motor ITB motor Developer disengagement motor Duplex reverse motor (duplex models) Duplex feed motor (duplex models) Pickup motor Scanner motor ENWW Cassette lifter motor Engine-control system 11 Table 1-3 Motors Description Components driven Failure detection ITB motor (M1) ITB Yes Black photosensitive drum Black developing roller Drum motor (M2) Yellow, magenta, and cyan photosensitive drums Yes Developing motor (M3) Yellow, magenta, and cyan developing rollers Yes Fuser motor (M4) Fuser pressure and delivery rollers Yes Pressurizes and depressurizes the pressure roller Engages and disengages the primary transfer roller Pickup motor (M5) Tray 1 pickup roller No Tray 2 cassette pickup roller Feed roller 12 Developing disengagement motor (M6) Engages and disengages the developing unit No Duplex reverse motor (M7; duplex models only) Duplex reverse roller No Duplex feed motor (M8; duplex models only) Duplex feed roller No Tray 2 cassette lifter motor (M9) Lifter for the Tray 2 cassette No Scanner motor (M10) Scanner mirror No Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Fans The product uses three fans to maintain the correct internal temperature. The DC controller determines a fan failure when a fan locks for a specified period after it starts driving. Figure 1-5 Fans Power supply fan Formatter fan Fuser fan Table 1-4 Fans Description Area cooled Type Speed Power supply fan (FM1) Low-voltage power supply Intake Full/Half Intake Full Intake Controlled by the formatter Output bin Delivery unit Laser scanner unit Fuser (FM2) Duplex feed unit ITB area Formatter (FM3) ENWW Formatter area Engine-control system 13 Fuser-control circuit The fuser-control circuit monitors and controls the temperature in the fuser. The product uses on-demand fusing. The fuser-control circuit consists of the following major components: ● Fuser main heater (H1): Heats the center of the fuser sleeve ● Fuser sub heater (H2): Heats the ends of the fuser sleeve ● Thermistors; detect the fuser temperature (contact type) ● ◦ Sleeve thermistor (TH1): Detects the temperature at the center of the fuser sleeve ◦ Main thermistor (TH2): Detects the temperature at the center of the fuser heater ◦ Sub thermistor 1 (TH3): Detects the temperature at the end of the fuser heater nearest the front of the product ◦ Sub thermistor 2 (TH4): Detects the temperature at the end of the fuser heater nearest the rear of the product Thermal fuse (FU1): Prevents abnormal temperature rise in the fuser heater (non-contact type) Figure 1-6 Fuser-control circuit TH3 Front of engine TH2 Pressure roller FU1 TH1 Low-voltage power supply H1 H2 TH4 FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal Fuser heater control circuit DC controller FUSER TEMPERATURE signal Fuser heater safety circuit Fuser sleeve 14 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Fuser temperature control The fuser temperature control maintains the fuser heater at its targeted temperature. The fuser main heater and sub heater control the temperature of the fuser sleeve. The DC controller monitors the main thermistor and the sleeve thermistor. The DC controller controls the FUSER MAIN HEATER CONTROL (FSRD1) and the FUSER SUB-HEATER CONTROL (FSRD2) signals according to the detected temperature. The fuser-heater control circuit controls the fuser heater depending on the signal so that the heater remains at the targeted temperature. Figure 1-7 Fuser-heater control circuit AC input Low-voltage power supply DC controller RL102 Noise filter FU102 Fuser heater control circuit RLD1 RL103 RLD2 FSRD1 FSRD2 Zerocross circuit ZEROX Fuser FUSEROPEN Fuser presence circuit Improper fuser installation prevention circuit FUHL Fuser sleeve H2 H1 TH3 TH2 TH1 FU1 TH4 THERM4 THERM2 THERM1 Fuser heater safety circuit THERM3 ENWW Engine-control system 15 Fuser protective function The protective function detects an abnormal temperature rise of the fuser unit and interrupts power supply to the fuser heater. The following three protective components prevent an abnormal temperature rise of the fuser heater: ● DC controller ◦ ● Fuser-heater safety circuit ◦ ● 16 The DC controller interrupts power supply to the fuser heater when it detects an abnormal temperature of the fuser heater. The fuser heater safety circuit interrupts power supply to the fuser heater when the detected temperature of the main and sub thermistors is abnormal. Thermal fuse ◦ The thermal fuse is broken to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when the thermoswitch detects an abnormal temperature of the fuser heater. ◦ The current detection circuit detects the current value flowing in the fuser heater control circuit. The DC controller deactivates the FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal and releases the relay to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when it detects a specified current value or higher by the CURRENT DETECTION (FUR_CURRMS) signal. Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Fuser failure detection The DC controller determines a fuser unit failure, deactivates the FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal, releases the relay to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater, and then notifies the formatter of a failure state when it encounters the following conditions: ENWW ● Abnormal temperature rise: The sleeve thermistor does not rise at a specified temperature within a specified period after the fuser heater control starts. ● Abnormally low temperature: The thermistors are at a specified temperature or lower during a print operation or other fuser heating cycle. ● Abnormally high temperature: The thermistors are at a specified temperature or higher, regardless of the fuser control status. ● Drive circuit abnormality: The frequency in the zerocross circuit is out of a specified range when the product is turned on or is in the standby period. Engine-control system 17 Low-voltage power supply The low-voltage power supply (LVPS) converts AC input voltage to DC voltage. Figure 1-8 Low-voltage power supply Power switch SW1 Formatter Low-voltage power supply Noise filter Rectifying circuit FU102 FU101 +3.3V Remote switch control circuit +3.3V generation circuit RL101 Protection circuit RL102 RL103 Noise filter +3.3V SWON/OFF PWRON +5V +24V REMOTEON RLD1 RLD2 ZEROX Zerocross circuit Fuser heater control circuit Fuser +5V generation circuit +24V generation circuit +24V Interlock switch SW4 +5R SW2 +24R DC controller SW3 +5V Interlock switch The product uses three DC voltages: 24V, 5V, and 3.3V. The voltages are subdivided as follows: +24V Supplied constantly Stopped during Sleep mode +24R 18 Chapter 1 Theory of operation Interrupted when the front or right door is opened ENWW +5V Supplied constantly Stopped during Sleep mode ENWW +5R Interrupted when the front or right door is opened +3.3V Supplied constantly Engine-control system 19 Overcurrent/overvoltage protection The low-voltage power supply has a protective circuit against overcurrent and overvoltage to prevent failures in the power supply circuit. The low-voltage power supply automatically stops supplying the DC voltage whenever excessive current flows or voltage abnormally increases. If the dc voltage is not being supplied from the low-voltage power supply, the protective function may be running. In this case, turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. Do not turn the power switch on until the root cause is found. The LVPS has two fuses on the PCA. The LVPS 24V output is interrupted to the fuser and the high-voltage power supply if the either of the interlock switches (SW3 and SW4) is in the off position (door open). WARNING! The product power switch only interrupts dc voltage from the LVPS. The AC voltage is present in the product when the power cord is plugged into a power receptacle and the power switch is in the off position. You must unplug the product power cord before servicing the product. WARNING! If you believe the overcurrent or overvoltage protection circuits have been activated, do not plug in the product power cord or turn on the product power until the cause of the failure is found and corrected. In addition, fuses in the low-voltage power supply protect against overcurrent. If overcurrent flows into the AC line, the fuses melt and cut off the power distribution. 20 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW High-voltage power supply The DC controller controls the high-voltage power supply to generate biases. Figure 1-9 High-voltage power supply TR1 high-voltage power supply TRI-4 TRI-3 PRI-4 TRS2 PRI-3 PRI-2 DEV-4 DEV-3 PRI-1 DEV-2 DEV-1 TRI-2 TRI-1 Primary transfer bias circuit FG Developing bias circuit Secondary transfer bias circuit Primary charging bias circuit TR2 high-voltage power supply DEV high-voltage power supply DC controller The high-voltage power supply (HVPS) applies biases to the following components: ENWW ● Primary charging roller: The primary charging bias is applied to the surface of the photosensitive drum to charge it uniformly negative as a preparation for the image formation. ● Developing roller: The developing bias is used to adhere toner to an electrostatic latent image formed on the photosensitive drum. Engine-control system 21 22 ● Primary transfer roller: The primary transfer bias is used to transfer the toner from each photosensitive drum onto the ITB. ● Secondary transfer roller: The secondary transfer bias is used to transfer the toner image from the ITB onto the paper. The reversed bias is applied to transfer residual toner on the secondary transfer roller back to the ITB. The residual toner on the ITB is deposited in the toner collection unit. Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Laser scanner system The laser scanner system forms latent images on the photosensitive drums according to the VIDEO signals sent from the formatter. The main components of the laser/scanner are the laser unit and the scanner motor unit. The DC controller sends signals to the laser/scanner to control the functions of these components. Figure 1-10 Laser/scanner system Photosensitive drum Scanner motor unit Connecting board Scanner mirror BDI signal LASER CONTROL signal Laser unit (Y/M) VIDEO signal SCANNER MOTOR CONTROL signal Laser unit (C/Bk) DC controller Formatter Laser failure detection The DC controller determines an optical unit failure and notifies the formatter, if the laser/scanner encounters the following conditions: ENWW Engine-control system 23 24 ● The scanner motor does not reach a specified rotation frequency within a specified period of the scanner motor start up. ● The beam detect (BD) interval is out of a specified value during a print operation. Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Image-formation system Electrophotographic process The electrophotographic process forms an image on the paper. Following are the major components used in the process: ● Print cartridges ● Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) ● Secondary transfer roller ● Fuser ● Laser scanner The DC controller uses the laser scanner and HVPS to form the toner image on the photosensitive drum. The image is transferred to the print media and then fused onto the paper. Figure 1-11 Electrophotographic process block diagram TR1 high-voltage power supply Cartridge ITB Fuser Secondary transfer roller TR2 high-voltage power supply Laser scanner DEV high-voltage power supply DC controller ENWW Image-formation system 25 Figure 1-12 Electrophotographic process drive system M2 M4 Drum motor Fuser motor Developing roller Developing roller Developing roller Developing roller M3 26 Developing motor Chapter 1 Theory of operation M1 ITB motor ENWW Image formation process Each of the following processes functions independently and must be coordinated with the other product processes. Image formation consists of the following processes: Latent-image formation block Step 1: pre-exposure Step 2: primary charging Step 3: laser-beam exposure Developing block Step 4: developing Transfer block Step 5: primary transfer Step 6: secondary transfer Step 7: separation Fusing block Step 8: fusing ITB cleaning block Step 9: ITB cleaning Drum cleaning block Step 10: Drum cleaning Figure 1-13 Image formation process : Media path : Direction of drum rotation Delivery : Block : Step 8. Fuser Fuser ITB cleaning Transfer 7. Separation 9. ITB cleaning 6. Secondary transfer 5. Primary transfer 10. Drum cleaning Drum cleaning 4. Developing Developing 1. Pre-exposure Registration 2. Primary charging 3. Laser beam exposure Latent image formation Pickup ENWW Image-formation system 27 Latent-image formation block During the latent-image formation stage, the laser scanner forms invisible images on the photosensitive drums in the print cartridges. Pre-exposure Step 1: Light from the pre-exposure LED strikes the photosensitive drum surface. This eliminates the residual electrical charges on the drum surface. Figure 1-14 Pre-exposure LED Photosensitive drum Primary charging Step 2: DC and AC biases are applied to the primary charging roller, which transfers a uniform negative potential to the photosensitive drum. Figure 1-15 Primary charging Primary charging roller Photosensitive drum 28 Chapter 1 Theory of operation Primary charging bias ENWW Laser beam exposure Step 3: The laser beam scans the photosensitive drum to neutralize negative charges on parts of the drum surface. An electrostatic latent image is formed on the drum where negative charges were neutralized. Figure 1-16 Laser beam exposure Laser beam ENWW Image-formation system 29 Developing block Step 4: In the print cartridge, toner acquires a negative charge from the friction that occurs when the developing roller rotates against the developing blade. The developing bias is applied to the developing roller to create a difference in the electric potential of the drum. When the negatively charged toner comes in contact with the photosensitive drum, it adheres to the latent image because the drum surface has a higher potential. Figure 1-17 Developing Developing blade Developing roller Developing bias Photosensitive drum 30 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Transfer block Primary transfer Step 5: The toner on the photosensitive drum is transferred to the intermediate transfer belt (ITB). The ITB is given a positive charge by the bias of the primary transfer roller. The negatively charged toner on the drum surface is transferred onto the ITB. All four color planes are transferred onto the ITB in this step. Figure 1-18 Primary transfer Primary transfer bias Primary transfer roller ITB Photosensitive drum Secondary transfer Step 6: The toner image on the ITB is transferred to the paper. The secondary transfer bias is applied to the secondary transfer roller to charge the paper positive. As the paper passes between the secondary transfer roller and the ITB, the complete toner image on the ITB is transferred onto the paper. Figure 1-19 Secondary transfer Secondary transfer opposed roller ITB Paper Secondary transfer roller Secondary transfer bias ENWW Image-formation system 31 Separation Step 7: The elasticity of the paper and the curvature of the secondary transfer opposed roller cause the paper to separate from the ITB. The static charge eliminator reduces back side static charge of the paper and controls excess discharge after the transfer process for stable media feed and image quality. Figure 1-20 Separation Secondary transfer opposed roller ITB Paper Static charge eliminator Secondary transfer roller Fusing block Step 8: The product uses an on-demand fuser. The toner image is permanently affixed to the printing paper by heat and pressure. Figure 1-21 Fusing Fuser sleeve Fuser heater Toner Paper Pressure roller 32 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW ITB cleaning block Step 9: The cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner off the surface of the ITB. The residual toner feed screw deposits residual toner in the toner collection unit. Figure 1-22 ITB cleaning Residual toner feed screw ITB Cleaning blade Drum cleaning block Step 10: The cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner off the surface of the photosensitive drum, and toner is deposited in the waste section inside the print cartridge. Figure 1-23 Drum cleaning Cleaning blade Toner waste ENWW Photosensitive drum Image-formation system 33 Print cartridges The product has four print cartridges, one for each color: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. Each of them has the same structure. The cartridges are filled with toner and consist of the following components: ● Photosensitive drum ● Developing unit ● Primary charging roller The DC controller rotates the motors to drive the photosensitive drum, developing unit, and primary charging roller. Figure 1-24 Print cartridge block diagram DC controller Developing M6 disengagement motor PS11: Developing disengagement sensor Photosensitive drum Primary charging roller PS13: YMC drum home position sensor Memory tag M2 Drum motor Developing unit M3 Developing motor 34 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Memory tag The memory tag is a non-volatile memory chip in the cartridge that stores information about usage for the cartridge. The product reads and writes the data in the memory tag. The DC controller determines a memory tag error and notifies the formatter when it fails to either read from or write to the memory tag. Cartridge presence detection The DC controller detects the presence of the cartridges by monitoring the cartridge e-label and ground circuit. When the DC controller determines a cartridge absence, it notifies the formatter. Toner level detection The DC controller detects the remaining toner level in a cartridge by the optical detection method. The DC controller notifies the formatter of the remaining toner level. Cartridge life detection The DC controller detects the cartridge life by monitoring the total operational wear limit or remaining toner level of the cartridge. The DC controller determines a cartridge end of life and notifies the formatter when the operational wear limit of the cartridge reaches a specified amount or the cartridge runs out of toner. Developing unit engagement and disengagement control The developing unit engagement and disengagement control engages the developing unit with the photosensitive drum or disengages the developing unit from the drum depending on the print mode: fullcolor mode or black-only mode. The developing unit is engaged only when required, preventing a deterioration of the drums and maximizing their life. The developing disengagement motor rotates the developing disengagement cam. As the cam rotates, the developing unit engages with or separates from the photosensitive drum. When the product is turned on and when each print job is completed, all four of the developing units disengage from the photosensitive drums. When the print mode is in full-color mode, all of the developing units engage with the drums. When the print mode is in black-only mode, only black developing unit engages with the drum. ENWW Image-formation system 35 The DC controller determines a developing disengagement motor abnormality and notifies the formatter when it does not detect a specified signal from the developing disengagement sensor during the developing roller engagement and disengagement operation. Figure 1-25 Developing unit engagement and disengagement control Developing unit is disengaged Developing unit is engaged Photosensitive drum Developing unit PS11: Developing disengagement sensor Developing disengagement cam M6 Developing disengagement motor DC controller 36 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW ITB unit The ITB unit receives the toner image from the photosensitive drums and transfers the complete toner image to the print media. The ITB unit consists of the following components: ● ITB ● ITB drive roller ● Primary transfer rollers ● ITB cleaner The ITB motor drives the ITB drive roller which rotates the ITB. The rotation of the ITB causes the primary transfer rollers to rotate. The ITB cleaner cleans the ITB surface. Figure 1-26 ITB unit block diagram DC controller ITB ITB cleaner M1 ITB motor ITB drive roller Primary transfer roller ENWW Image-formation system 37 Primary transfer roller engagement and disengagement control Figure 1-27 Primary transfer roller engagement and disengagement control DC controller M4 Fuser motor Primary transfer disengagement solenoid SL5 ITB SW5 Primary transfer disengagement switch Primary transfer disengagement cam YMC slide plate Bk slide plate Primary transfer roller Photosensitive drum The primary transfer roller engagement and disengagement control engages the ITB with the photosensitive drum, or disengages the ITB from the drum, depending on the requirements of the print job. 38 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW ● All rollers disengaged: The ITB disengages from all four photosensitive drums. This is the state during a standby period, and also is the home position for the primary transfer rollers. ● All rollers engaged: The ITB engages with all the four photosensitive drums. This is the state for fullcolor jobs. ● Only black roller engaged: The ITB engages with only the black photosensitive drum. This is the state for the black-only print jobs. The operational sequence of the primary transfer roller engagement and disengagement control is as follows: 1. The fuser motor drives the primary transfer disengagement solenoid to rotate the primary transfer disengagement cam. 2. As the cam rotates, the YMC slide plate or the Bk slide plate moves to right or left. This causes the primary transfer roller to move up or down. 3. The ITB engages with or disengages from the photosensitive drum depending on the movement of the primary transfer rollers. The DC controller determines that an abnormal primary transfer roller disengagement error has occurred and notifies the formatter. This error happens when the DC controller does not detect a specified signal from the primary transfer disengagement switch, even though the primary transfer disengagement solenoid is driven. ITB unit presence detection The DC controller detects the ITB unit presence by monitoring the primary transfer disengagement switch. The DC controller drives the primary transfer disengagement solenoid for specified times during the initial rotation period of the following: ● The product is turned on ● The product exits Sleep mode ● The door is closed The DC controller determines an ITB unit absence and notifies the formatter when it does not detect a specified signal from the primary transfer disengagement switch. ITB cleaning mechanism The cleaning blade in the ITB cleaner scrapes the residual toner off the ITB surface. The ITB motor drives the residual toner feed screw and the screw deposits the residual toner in the toner collection unit. The DC controller detects whether the toner collection unit is full by monitoring the ITB residual toner full sensor. When the DC controller determines the toner collection unit is full, it notifies the formatter. The DC ENWW Image-formation system 39 controller also detects the presence of the toner collection unit by monitoring the toner collection unit switch. Figure 1-28 ITB cleaning mechanism DC controller ITB SW6 Toner collection unit switch Cleaning blade ITB residual toner full sensor ITB cleaner Residual toner feed screw Toner collection unit M1 ITB motor Calibration The product calibrates itself to print a high-quality image. The calibration corrects a color-misregistration and color-density variation caused by environment changes or variation inherent in the product. The product performs the following calibrations: ● Color-misregistration control ● Environment change control ● Image stabilization control Color-misregistration control The color-misregistration control corrects the misaligned color planes caused by the variation inherent in the laser scanner units or cartridges. The color-misregistration control corrects the following: 40 ● Horizontal scanning start position ● Horizontal scanning magnification ● Vertical scanning start position Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW The DC controller forms a pattern of toner on the surface of the ITB, and measures a misaligned length with the registration density sensor and the registration density belt-perimeter sensor. Accordingly, the formatter calibrates the color-misregistration. Figure 1-29 Color-misregistration control Registration density sensor ITB Registration density belt-perimeter sensor Pattern of toner The DC controller commands the formatter to perform the color-misregistration control whenever one of the following occurs: ● The product is turned on or the door is closed, after replacing any one of the cartridges ● The product is turned on or the door is closed, after replacing the ITB unit or the laser scanner unit ● A specified number of pages have been printed ● Continuous printing for a specified period of time ● Cold starting of the fuser when the product is turned on If data from the registration density or registration density belt-perimeter sensor is out of a specified range during the cartridge-presence detection or when starting the color-misregistration control, the DC controller determines an abnormal sensor and notifies the formatter. Environment change control The environment change control calibrates each high-voltage bias to obtain an appropriate image according to the environment changes. The DC controller determines the environment, where the product is installed, based on the surrounding temperature and humidity data from the environment sensor. It adjusts the highvoltage biases to accommodate environmental changes. The DC controller determines an environment sensor abnormality and notifies the formatter when it detects out of specified range data from the environment sensor. ENWW Image-formation system 41 Image stabilization control The image stabilization control reduces the fluctuations in image density caused by environmental changes or deterioration of the photosensitive drums or toner. The two kinds of image stabilization controls are image density control (DMAX) and image halftone control (DHALF). Image density control (DMAX) The image density control calibrates each high-voltage bias to stabilize the image density variation caused by the deterioration of the photosensitive drum or toner. The DC controller commands the formatter to control the image density under the following conditions: ● The detected temperature of the fuser is a specified degree or lower when the product is turned on ● The product is turned on, or the door is closed, and also whenever a specified number of pages have been printed after replacing any one of the cartridges ● The product is turned, on or the door is closed, after replacing the ITB unit or the laser scanner unit ● A specified number of pages have been printed ● After a specified period of time from the previous image density control ● The environment is changed for a specified condition after the previous image density control Image halftone control (DHALF) The image halftone control is performed by the formatter to calibrate the halftone. The DC controller measures the halftone pattern according to a command from the formatter. Accordingly, the formatter calibrates the halftone. The DC controller controls the image halftone under the following conditions: 42 ● The image density control is completed ● The formatter sends a command Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system The pickup/feed/delivery system consists of several types of feed rollers and sensors. The duplex model has a mechanism that reverses and refeeds the print media to print two sides automatically. Figure 1-30 Pickup, feed, and delivery system Duplex flapper Duplex reverse roller (for duplex model) (for duplex model) Fuser sleeve Pressure roller Duplex feed roller (duplex model only) T2 roller MP tray pickup roller MP tray separation pad Cassette pickup roller Simplex paper path Duplex paper path (duplex model) Cassette separation roller The pickup/feed/delivery system can be divided into the following three blocks: ENWW ● Pickup-and-feed block: From each input source to the fuser inlet ● Fuser-and-delivery block: From the fuser to the output bin ● Duplex block: From the duplex reverse unit to the duplex re-pickup unit (duplex models only) Pickup, feed, and delivery system 43 Figure 1-31 Pickup, feed, and delivery system blocks Fuser-and-delivery block Duplex block Pickup-and-feed block 44 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Photo sensors Figure 1-32 Photo sensors (paper path) PS10 PS6 PS7 PS8 PS5 PS3 MS PS2 PS1 PS4 Table 1-5 Photo sensors and switches (product) ENWW Item Description Item Description PS1 Tray 2 cassette paper-presence sensor PS6 Fuser delivery sensor PS2 Tray 1 (MP tray) paper-presence sensor PS7 Loop sensor 1 PS3 Last-paper sensor PS8 Loop sensor 1 PS4 Tray 2 cassette paper-stack surface sensor PS10 Output bin media-full sensor PS5 Top-of-Page (TOP) sensor Pickup, feed, and delivery system 45 Motors and solenoids Figure 1-33 Motors and solenoids (paper path) M7 M4 SL3 M8 M1 SL1 For duplex model only SL2 M5 M9 Table 1-6 Motors and solenoids (paper path) Item Description Item Description M1 ITB motor M9 Tray 2 cassette lifter motor M4 Fuser motor SL1 Tray 2 cassette pickup solenoid M5 Pickup motor SL2 Tray 1 (MP tray) pickup solenoid M7 Duplex reverse motor (duplex models only) SL3 Duplex reverse solenoid 1 (duplex models only) M8 Duplex feed motor (duplex models only) Pickup and feed block The pickup-and-feed block picks one sheet of paper from the Tray 2 cassette or the MP tray and feeds it into the fuser. Tray 2 cassette pickup The operational sequence of the Tray 2 cassette pickup is as follows: 46 1. The product is turned on or the Tray 2 cassette is inserted. 2. The lift-up operation and the lifting plate spring move up the lifting plate to the position where the paper can be picked up. 3. The DC controller rotates the pickup motor when it receives a print command from the formatter. Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW 4. The Tray 2 cassette (CST) feed roller rotates. 5. The Tray 2 cassette (CST) pickup solenoid is driven at a specified timing. 6. The Tray 2 cassette (CST) pickup roller rotates and picks up the paper. 7. The Tray 2 cassette (CST) separation roller removes any multiple-fed sheets. 8. One sheet of paper is fed into the product. NOTE: The lift-up operation pushes up the lifting plate to keep the stack surface of paper at the pickup position. Figure 1-34 Tray 2 cassette pickup operation DC controller M5 Pickup motor CST pickup solenoid SL1 CST pickup roller CST feed roller CST separation roller Lifting plate spring Lifter Tray 2 cassette multiple-feed prevention The product uses a separation roller method to prevent multiple sheets of print media from entering the paper path. The Tray 2 cassette separation roller does not have its own driving force. Therefore the Tray 2 cassette separation roller follows the rotation of the Tray 2 cassette pickup roller. During normal feed, when the product picks up one piece of paper, the Tray 2 cassette separation roller is driven by the Tray 2 cassette pickup roller through one sheet of paper. Thus the separation roller rotates in the paper feed direction. During multiple-feed, when the product picks up more than one piece of paper, the low friction force between the sheets weakens the driving force from the Tray 2 cassette pickup roller. In addition, some braking force is ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 47 always applied to the Tray 2 cassette separation roller, so the weak rotational force of the pickup roller is not enough to rotate the separation roller. Therefore, the separation roller holds back any multiple-fed sheets, and one sheet of paper is fed into the product. Figure 1-35 Tray 2 cassette multiple-feed prevention CST Pickup roller Print media CST separation roller Lifting plate The separation roller does not rotate 48 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Tray 2 cassette media-size detection and Tray 2 cassette-presence detection The DC controller detects the size of paper loaded in the Tray 2 cassette by using the Tray 2 cassette-mediaend switch and Tray 2 cassette media width switch. The DC controller also detects the presence of the cassette by using the Tray 2 cassette media end switch. The DC controller notifies the formatter if the Tray 2 cassette is absent. Table 1-7 Tray 2 cassette media-size detection and Tray 2 cassette-presence detection (product base) Paper size 1 ENWW Cassette media width sensor Cassette media end switch Top switch Center switch Bottom switch Top switch1 Center switch Bottom switch A4 On On On See footnote Off Off Letter On On Off Off Off B5 On Off Off Off Off Executive Off Off Off Off Off A5-R Off On On Off Off B5-R Off Off On Off Off Letter-R On Off On Off Off A4-R On Off On Off On A3 On On On On On 11 X 17 On On Off On On B4 On Off Off On On Legal On Off On On On The top Tray 2 cassette-media-end switch detects the presence of the Tray 2 cassette. It turns off when the Tray 2 cassette is present and turns on when the Tray 2 cassette is absent. Pickup, feed, and delivery system 49 Tray 2 cassette lift-up operation The cassette lift-up operation keeps the surface of the paper stack surface at the correct pickup position whenever the following conditions occur: ● Product power is turned on ● Tray 2 cassette is installed The list below describes the sequence of the Tray 2 cassette lift-up operation. 50 ● The Tray 2 cassette lifter motor rotates to move the lifter rack toward the Tray 2 cassette-media-stack surface sensor. ● As the lifter rack moves, the lifter moves up. ● The Tray 2 cassette lifter motor stops when the Tray 2 cassette-media-stack surface sensor detects the lifter rack. Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW The DC controller determines a Tray 2 cassette lifter motor failure and notifies the formatter if the Tray 2 cassette-media-stack surface sensor does not detect the lifter rack within a specified period after the Tray 2 cassette lifter motor starts rotating. Figure 1-36 Tary 2 cassette lift-up operation PS4: Cassette media stack surface sensor Cassette 3 1 Lifter drive ass’y 2 Lifting plate Lifter Lifter rack M9 Cassette lifter motor DC controller ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 51 Cassette media-presence detection The Tray 2 cassette-media-out sensor detects the presence of paper in the Tray 2 cassette. The DC controller notifies the formatter when the Tray 2 cassette-media-out sensor detects the media is absent. Figure 1-37 Tray 2 cassette media-presence detection DC controller PS1 Cassette media out sensor Cassette media out sensor flag Tray 1 (MP tray) paper pickup The operational sequence of the MP tray pickup is as follows: 52 1. The DC controller rotates the pickup motor when it receives a print command from the formatter. 2. As the MP tray pickup solenoid is driven, the MP tray pickup roller rotates and the lifting plate moves up. 3. The MP tray pickup roller picks up the paper. 4. The MP tray separation pad removes any multiple-fed sheets and one sheet of paper is fed into the product. Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW The MP tray media presence sensor detects the presence of print media on the MP tray. Figure 1-38 Tray 1 (MP tray) paper pickup DC controller Pickup motor M5 PS2: MP tray media presence sensor MP tray pickup solenoid SL2 MP tray pickup roller Lifting plate MP tray separation pad Tray 1 (MP tray) last-paper detection The product detects whether the print media on the MP tray is the last sheet during continuous printing to prevent toner contamination on the photosensitive drums and the ITB. The product attempts to form the next image before the DC controller detects a media absence because the paper path between the MP tray media-presence sensor and the registration roller is short. To prevent the photosensitive drums and the ITB from being contaminated with toner, the last-paper sensor detects the ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 53 last-paper. The MP tray last-paper detection roller rotates when the last-paper is picked up. The DC controller notifies the formatter of a media absence when it detects the last-paper by the last-paper sensor. Figure 1-39 Tray 1 (MP tray) last-paper detection DC controller Feed direction er ap p st- La A PS3: Last-paper sensor MP tray last-paper detection roller Cross sectional view from A direction Paper feed After the paper pickup operation, the paper picked up from either the Tray 2 cassette or MP tray is then fed to the fixing-and-delivery block. 54 1. The registration shutter corrects the skew-feeding of the paper that is picked up from the Tray 2 cassette or MP tray. 2. When the TOP sensor detects the leading edge of paper, the DC controller controls the rotational speed of the pickup motor to align with the leading edge of toner image on the ITB. 3. The toner image on the ITB is transferred onto the paper, and the paper is fed to the fusing-anddelivery block. Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW The DC controller notifies the formatter of a paper size mismatch error when the paper length detected by the TOP sensor does not match the paper size specified by the formatter. Figure 1-40 Paper feed DC controller ITB motor M1 M5 Pickup motor PS5 TOP sensor Registration shutter Registration roller Skew-feed prevention The printer corrects the skew feed without decreasing the throughput. ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 55 1. The leading edge of paper strikes the registration shutter and aligns. 2. As the feed rollers keep pushing the paper, the paper gets warped against the registration shutter. 3. The stiffness of paper pushes up the registration shutter and the realigned paper passes through straightened. Figure 1-41 Skew-feed prevention Registration shutter Registration shutter Paper Pa pe 56 r Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Media detection The product automatically selects an optimal print mode for a print-media by monitoring the media sensors on the paper path. Media detection sensor types ● Reflected light type (detects the glossiness of paper) ● Transmitted light type (detects the thickness of paper) The DC controller detects the type of print-media by the reflected light and the transmitted light, and switches the print modes accordingly. The DC controller identifies the following paper type: ● Plain paper ● Light paper ● Heavy paper ● Glossy paper ● Glossy film ● Overhead transparency (OHT) The DC controller determines a media mismatch error and notifies the formatter under the following conditions: ● ● Simplex printing ◦ The specified print mode is OHT, but the media sensor detects media other than an overhead transparency. ◦ The specified print mode is something other than OHT, but the media sensor detects an overhead transparency. Duplex printing ◦ The specified print mode is for duplex-printable-print mode, but the media sensor detects an overhead transparency. For more information about duplex-printable mode, see Duplex block (duplex models only) on page 62. The DC controller flashes the media sensor during the initial rotation period under the following conditions: ● Product power is turned on ● The door is closed The DC controller determines a media sensor abnormality and notifies the formatter when the light intensity is out of a specified range. ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 57 Feed-speed control The product adjusts the feed speed to obtain the best print quality depending on the type of print media. The product prints at the speed corresponding to the print mode specified by the formatter. Auto Sense mode Print mode Print speed Media sensor detection Normal mode Normal 1/1 Yes Light mode Light media 1 1/1 Yes Heavy Mode Heavy media 1 2/3 Yes Cardstock Mode Heavy media 3 1/3 No Transparency Mode OHT 1/3 Yes Transparency2 Mode OHT + higher fuser temp 1/3 Yes Envelope Mode Envelope 2/3 No Label Mode Label 1/3 No Tough Mode Glossy film 1/3 Yes Extra Heavy Mode Heavy media 2 1/3 Yes Heavy Glossy Mode Glossy media 1 2/3 Yes X-hvyglossymode Glossy media 2 1/3 Yes Rough Mode Rough 2/3 No Card Glossy Mode Glossy media 3 1/3 Yes 4mm trns Mode OHT + lower fuser temp 1/3 Yes Light Rough Mode Light media 1 + fuser temp adjustments 1/1 Yes Fusing and delivery block The fusing-and-delivery block fuses the toner image onto the print media and delivers the printed page to the output bin. Loop control The product controls the loop (slackness) of print media to prevent the defects of print quality and media feed. ● If the fuser sleeve rotates slower than the ITB, the paper loop increases and an image defect or paper crease occurs. ● If the fuser sleeve rotates faster than the ITB, the paper loop decreases and an image is stretched because the toner image is not transferred to the paper correctly Two loop sensors located between the fuser sleeve and the ITB detect the paper loop. Accordingly the DC controller controls the rotational speed of the fuser motor to keep the loop amount properly. 58 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW ● Loop sensor 1: Detects the paper loop for heavy media ● Loop sensor 2: Detects the paper loop for plain media other than heavy media Figure 1-42 Loop control DC controller Sensor flag for heavy paper M5 Fuser motor Sensor flag for other than heavy paper Fuser sleeve PS8 PS7 Loop sensor2 Loop sensor1 Pressure roller Large-loop (heavy media) Small-loop Large-loop (other than heavy media) Pressure roller Fuser sleeve ITB Loop sensor1 Loop sensor2 OFF OFF Speed down A ON OFF Heavy media: Speed up B ON ON Speed of fuser motor Illus. Other media: Speed down Speed up C Pressure roller pressurization and depressurization control The product releases the pressure roller from the fuser sleeve, except during printing, to prevent deforming the fuser sleeve and the pressure roller and to facilitate the jam-clearing procedure. ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 59 1. The DC controller reverses the fuser motor to rotate the fuser pressure release cam. 2. The pressure roller is pressurized or depressurized depending on the position of the cam. The DC controller determines a fuser pressure-release mechanism abnormality and notifies the formatter when it does not sense the fuser pressure-release sensor for a specified period from when it reverses the fuser motor. Figure 1-43 Pressure roller pressurization and depressurization control DC controller M4 Fuser motor PS9: Fuser pressure release sensor Fuser pressure release cam Pressure roller Fuser sleeve 60 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Output bin full detection The output bin media-full sensor detects whether the output bin is full of printed pages. The DC controller determines the output bin is full and notifies the formatter when it senses the output bin media-full sensor is on for a specified period during standby or printing. Figure 1-44 Output bin full detection DC controller Output bin media full sensor flag Output bin media full sensor PS10 ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 61 Duplex block (duplex models only) The duplex block reverses and feeds the paper. Figure 1-45 Duplex block Duplex block Only for the duplex model Simplex paper path Duplex paper path (duplex model) Duplex reverse and duplex feed control The duplex reverse control reverses the paper after the first side is printed. The duplex feed control feeds the paper to the duplex block to print the second side of the page. The operational sequence of the duplex reverse and duplex feed control is as follows: 62 1. The DC controller rotates the duplex reverse motor and drives the duplex reverse solenoid at a specified timing after the first side of page is printed. 2. The duplex flapper moves and the paper is fed by the duplex reverse roller. 3. The duplex reverse motor is reversed. 4. The duplex reverse roller is reversed accordingly the paper is switched back. Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW 5. The duplex feed motor rotates. 6. The duplex feed roller feeds the paper. Figure 1-46 Duplex operation DC controller M7 Duplex reverse motor Duplex reverse roller SL3 Duplex reverse solenoid M8 Duplex feed motor Duplex feed roller Duplex ass’y Duplex flapper Only for the duplex model Simplex paper path Duplex paper path (duplex model) Duplex operation The product prints two sides of paper with the following operation depending on the paper size. ● One-sheet operation: Feeds one sheet of two-sided page in a duplex print operation ● Two-sheet operation: Feeds two sheets of two-sided page in a duplex print operation The duplex print operation is specified by the formatter. The duplex print is performed only with the duplex printable paper size and specified print mode. See Table 1-8 Paper sizes, duplex operation on page 64 and Table 1-9 Print modes, duplex operation on page 64. ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 63 Table 1-8 Paper sizes, duplex operation Paper size Duplexing media feed mode A4-R One-sheet operation A3 Letter-R B4 B5-R Ledger Legal A4 One-sheet operation B5 Two-sheet operation Letter A5-R Executive Table 1-9 Print modes, duplex operation Print mode Duplex print1 Print mode Duplex print1 AUTO Yes X-hvyglossy Yes Normal Yes Card glossy No Light Yes Rough Yes Light rough Yes Transparency No Heavy Yes 4mm transparency No Extra heavy No Tough Yes Cardstock No Label No heavy glossy Yes Envelop No 1 This table shows whether the automatic duplex operation is available for each print mode, but it does not mean that the print-quality of the automatic duplex print operation will be acceptable. Jam detection The product uses the following sensors to detect the presence of print-media and to check whether the printmedia is being fed correctly or has jammed: 64 ● TOP sensor (PS5) ● Fuser delivery sensor (PS6) ● Loop sensor 1 (PS7) Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW ● Loop sensor 2 (PS8) ● Output bin media full sensor (PS10) Figure 1-47 Sensors for jam detection PS10 PS6 PS7 PS8 PS5 Simplex media path Duplex media path (duplex model) The product detects the following jams: Pickup delay jam Tray 1 (MP tray): The TOP sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period, including a retry, after the MP tray pickup solenoid is turned on. Tray 2 cassette: The TOP sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period, including a retry, after the Tray 2 cassette pickup solenoid is turned on. Paper feeder: The TOP sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period after the paper-feeder (PF) feed sensor detects the leading edge. Pickup stationary jam The TOP sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specified period after the leading edge of paper reaches the secondary transfer roller unit. Fuser delivery delay jam The fuser delivery sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period after the leading edge of paper reaches the secondary transfer roller unit. Fuser delivery stationary jam The fuser delivery sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specified period after the TOP sensor detects the trailing edge. The output bin media full sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period after the fuser delivery sensor detects the leading edge. Wrapping jam ENWW The fuser delivery sensor detects a paper absence yet it does not detect the trailing edge of paper after it detects the leading edge. Pickup, feed, and delivery system 65 Residual paper jam One of the following sensors detects a presence of paper when the printer is turned on or when the door is closed. ● TOP sensor ● Fuser delivery sensor ● Loop sensor 1 ● Loop sensor 2 NOTE: The product automatically clears all paper from the paper path if the TOP sensor detects residual paper when the product is turned on or a door is closed. 66 Door open jam The door open is detected during a paper feed operation. Duplex re-pickup jam (duplex model only) The TOP sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period after the paper is reversed during a duplex print operation. Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Paper feeder This product supports a 500-sheet tray (Tray 3). The operational sequence of the paper feeder is controlled by the paper feeder controller PCA. Figure 1-48 Paper-feeder paper path PF pickup roller PF separation roller PF feed roller Figure 1-49 Paper-feeder block diagram Paper feeder Motor +3.3V +24V DC controller Solenoid Paper feeder controller Photointerrupter Switch ENWW Paper feeder 67 Paper-feeder motors The paper feeder has two motors for paper feed and cassette lift-up operation. Figure 1-50 Paper-feeder motors PF lifter motor (M2) PF pickup motor (M1) Table 1-10 Paper-feeder motors Motor Driving part Failure detection PF pickup motor (M1) PF pickup roller No PF separation roller PF feed roller PF lifter motor (M2) 68 Chapter 1 Theory of operation Lifter for the PF cassette No ENWW Paper-feeder paper pickup and feed The pickup-and-feed operation picks up one sheet of print media in the paper-feeder cassette and feeds it to the product. Figure 1-51 Paper-feeder electrical components SR1 SW3 SW2 SR2 SR3 SW1 SL1 M2 M1 Table 1-11 Paper-feeder electrical components Component type Abbreviation Description Motor M1 PF pickup motor M2 PF lifter motor Solenoid SL01 PF pickup solenoid Photointerruptor (sensor) SR1 PF paper-feed sensor SR2 PF paper-stack surface sensor SR3 PF cassette paper-presence sensor SW1 PF door-open switch SW2 PF cassette paper end-plate position switch SW3 PF cassette paper-width switch Switch Cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection The paper feeder detects the size of the paper loaded in the paper feeder cassette by monitoring the paper feeder cassette media end switch and the paper feeder cassette media width switch. It also detects the presence of cassette by monitoring the switches. The paper feeder controller notifies the formatter through the DC controller when it determines a cassette is absent. Table 1-12 Cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection (Tray 3) Paper size Executive ENWW Paper feeder Paper feeder Cassette media-width sensor Cassette media-end switch Top switch Center switch Bottom switch Top switch Center switch Bottom switch Off On On On On On Paper feeder 69 Table 1-12 Cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection (Tray 3) (continued) Letter Off Off On On On On A5 On On Off On On On B5 Off On Off On On On A4 Off Off Off On On On Ledger Off Off On Off Off On Legal On On Off Off Off On B4 Off On Off Off Off On A3 Off Off Off Off Off On A4-R NOTE: The product cannot detect the paper size of A4-R and Letter-R. If A4-R or Letter-R sized paper is loaded to the cassette, A5 size is notified to the formatter. Letter-R Universal On On Off Off On On Cassette absent Off Off Off Off Off Off Paper-feeder cassette lift operation The cassette lift-up operation keeps the surface of the paper stack at the pickup position whenever the following occurs: ● Product power is turned on ● Cassette is installed ● Stack surface in the cassette lowers The operational sequence of the cassette lift-up is as follows: 70 1. The PF lifter motor rotates to raise the lifter. 2. When the PF paper-stack surface sensor detects the surface of the paper stack, the PF lifter motor stops. 3. The lifter motor rotates again when the PF paper-stack surface detects that the paper surface is lowered during a print operation. Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW The paper feeder controller PCA determines a PF lifter motor failure and notifies the formatter through the DC controller when the PF paper-stack surface sensor does not detect the stack surface within a specified period after the PF lifter motor starts rotating. Figure 1-52 Paper-feeder cassette lift operation SR3 PF cassette media presence sensor SR2 PF media stack surface sensor Lifting plate Lifter PF cassette media presence sensor flag PF lifter motor M2 PF media stack surface flag Paper-feeder jam detection The paper feeder uses the PF paper-feed sensor (SR1) to detect the presence of print-media and to check whether print-media is being fed correctly or has jammed. Figure 1-53 Paper-feeder jam detection SR1 Paper feeder 1 The paper feeder detects the following jams: ENWW PF pickup delay jam The PF paper-feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period, including a retry, after the PF pickup solenoid is turned on. PF residual paper jam The PF paper-feed sensor detects a presence of paper when the printer is turned on, when the door is closed or when the automatic delivery is performed. PF door open jam A door open is detected during paper-feed operation. Paper feeder 71 Optional 3X500-sheet paper deck The 3x500-sheet paper deck is installed at bottom of the product. It picks up the paper and feeds it to the printer. The paper deck controller controls the operational sequence of the paper deck. Figure 1-54 3X500-sheet paper deck Paper feeder Paper deck cassette 1 Paper deck cassette 2 Paper deck cassette 3 Paper deck cassette pickup roller Paper deck cassette separation roller Paper deck cassette feed roller The signal flow of the paper deck controller is shown below. 72 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 1-55 3X500-sheet paper deck block diagram Paper deck cassette1 Motor +3.3V +24V Solenoid Paper deck controller 1 DC controller Photointerrupter Switch Paper deck cassette 2 Motor Paper deck controller 2 Solenoid Photointerrupter Paper deck cassette 3 Motor Paper deck controller 3 Solenoid Photointerrupter Table 1-13 3X500-sheet paper deck Component Motor Solenoid ENWW Description M1 Paper deck cassette 1 pickup motor M2 Paper deck cassette 1 lifter motor M81 Paper deck cassette 2 pickup motor M82 Paper deck cassette 2 lifter motor M91 Paper deck cassette 3 pickup motor M92 Paper deck cassette 3 lifter motor SL1 Paper deck cassette 1 pickup solenoid SL82 Paper deck cassette 2 pickup solenoid SL92 Paper deck cassette 3 pickup solenoid Optional 3X500-sheet paper deck 73 Table 1-13 3X500-sheet paper deck (continued) Component Photointerrupter Switch Description SR1 Paper deck cassette 1 media feed sensor SR2 Paper deck cassette 1 stack surface sensor SR3 Paper deck cassette 1 cassette media out sensor SR81 Paper deck cassette 2 media feed sensor SR82 Paper deck cassette 2 stack surface sensor SR83 Paper deck cassette 2 cassette media out sensor SR91 Paper deck cassette 3 media feed sensor SR92 Paper deck cassette 3 stack surface sensor SR93 Paper deck cassette 3 cassette media out sensor SW1 Paper deck door-open-detection switch SW2 Paper deck cassette 1 cassette media end switch SW3 Paper deck cassette 1 cassette media width switch SW82 Paper deck cassette 2 cassette media end switch SW83 Paper deck cassette 2 cassette media width switch SW92 Paper deck cassette 3 cassette media end switch SW93 Paper deck cassette 3 cassette media width switch Motor control Each of the paper deck cassettes uses two motors for paper-feed and cassette lift-up operation. Figure 1-56 Paper deck motors Paper deck cassette lifter motor Paper deck cassette pickup motor 74 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Table 1-14 Paper deck motors Component Component driven Failure detection Paper deck cassette 1 pickup motor M1 Paper deck cassette 1 pickup roller, paper deck cassette 1 separation roller, and paper deck cassette 1 feed roller No Paper deck cassette 1 lifter motor M2 Lifter for the paper deck cassette 1 No Paper deck cassette 2 pickup motor M81 Paper deck cassette 2 pickup roller, paper deck cassette 2 separation roller, and paper deck cassette 2 feed roller No Paper deck cassette 2 lifter motor M82 Lifter for the paper deck cassette 2 No Paper deck cassette 3 pickup motor M91 Paper deck cassette 3 pickup roller, paper deck cassette 3 separation roller, and paper deck cassette 3 feed roller No Paper deck cassette 3 lifter motor M92 Lifter for the paper deck cassette 3 No Pickup-and-feed operation The pickup-and-feed operation picks up one sheet of paper in the paper deck cassette and feeds it to the product. The paper deck has three cassettes but each cassette performs the same operation. Paper deck cassette 3 is used to describe the pickup-and-feed operation in this section. Figure 1-57 Pickup-and-feed operation Paper deck cassette1 Paper deck cassette 2 SW1 SR1 Paper deck cassette 3 SW92 SW93 SR93 SR92 SL91 M92 ENWW M91 Optional 3X500-sheet paper deck 75 Table 1-15 Pickup-and-feed operation Component Signal Paper deck cassette 1 pickup motor M1 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 1 PICKUP MOTOR CONTROL signal Paper deck cassette 1 lifter motor M2 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 1 LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL signal Paper deck cassette 1 pickup solenoid SL01 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 1 SOLENOID signal Paper deck cassette 1 media feed sensor SR1 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 1 MEDIA FEED signal Paper deck cassette 1 media stack surface sensor SR2 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 1 MEDIA STACK SURFACE signal Paper deck cassette 1 media out sensor SR3 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 1 MEDIA OUT signal Paper deck door-open-detection switch SW1 PAPER DECK DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal Paper deck cassette 1 media end switch SW2 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 1 MEDIA END signal Paper deck cassette 1 media width switch SW3 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 1 MEDIA WIDTH signal Paper deck cassette 2 pickup motor M81 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 2 PICKUP MOTOR CONTROL signal Paper deck cassette 2 lifter motor M82 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 2 LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL signal Paper deck cassette 2 pickup solenoid SL82 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 2 SOLENOID signal Paper deck cassette 2 media feed sensor SR81 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 2 MEDIA FEED signal Paper deck cassette 2 media stack surface sensor SR82 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 2 MEDIA STACK SURFACE signal Paper deck cassette 2 media out sensor SR83 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 2 MEDIA OUT signal Paper deck cassette 2 media end switch SW82 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 2 MEDIA END signal Paper deck cassette 2 media width switch SW83 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 2 MEDIA WIDTH signal Paper deck cassette 3 pickup motor M91 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 3 PICKUP MOTOR CONTROL signal Paper deck cassette 3 lifter motor M92 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 3 LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL signal Paper deck cassette 3 pickup solenoid SL91 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 3 SOLENOID signal Paper deck cassette 3 media feed sensor SR91 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 3 MEDIA FEED signal Paper deck cassette 3 media stack surface sensor SR92 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 3 MEDIA STACK SURFACE signal Paper deck cassette 3 media out sensor SR93 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 3 MEDIA 0UT signal Paper deck cassette 3 media end switch SW92 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 3 MEDIA END signal Paper deck cassette 3 media width switch SW93 PAPER DECK CASSETTE 3 MEDIA WIDTH signal Cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection The paper deck detects the size of the paper loaded in the paper deck cassette by monitoring the paper deck cassette media end switch and the paper deck cassette media width switch. It also detects the presence of cassette by monitoring the switches. The paper deck controller notifies the formatter through the DC controller when it determines a cassette is absent. 76 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Table 1-16 Cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection (3X500-sheet paper deck) Paper size 3X500-sheet paper deck 3X500-sheet paper deck Cassette media width sensor Cassette media end switch Top switch Center switch Bottom switch Top switch Center switch Bottom switch Executive Off On On On On On Letter Off Off On On On On A5 On On Off On On On B5 Off On Off On On On A4 Off Off Off On On On Ledger Off Off On Off Off On Legal On On Off Off Off On B4 Off On Off Off Off On A3 Off Off Off Off Off On A4-R NOTE: The product cannot detect the paper size of A4-R and Letter-R. If A4-R or Letter-R sized paper is loaded to the cassette, A5 size is notified to the formatter. Letter-R Universal On On Off Off On On Cassette absent Off Off Off Off Off Off Cassette lift-up operation The cassette lift-up operation keeps the surface of the paper stack at the pickup position whenever the following occurs: ENWW ● Product power is turned on ● Cassette is installed ● Stack surface in the cassette lowers Optional 3X500-sheet paper deck 77 The paper deck cassette media-out sensor detects the presence of paper in the paper deck cassette. Paper deck cassette 3 is used to describe the Cassette lift-up operation in this section. Figure 1-58 Cassette lift-up operation Paper deck cassette 1 Paper deck cassette 2 Paper deck cassette 3 media out sensor SR93 Paper deck cassette 3 media stack surface sensor SR92 Paper deck cassette 3 Lifting plate Lifter Paper deck cassette 3 lif ter motor M92 Paperdeck cassette 3 media out sensor flag Paper deck cassette 3 media stack surface sensor flag Jam detection The paper deck uses the following sensors to detect the presence of paper and to check whether paper is being fed correctly or has jammed. 78 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW ● Paper deck cassette 1 media feed sensor (SR1) ● Paper deck cassette 2 media feed sensor (SR81) ● Paper deck cassette 3 media feed sensor (SR91) Figure 1-59 Jam detection SR1 SR81 SR91 The paper deck detects the following jams. ● Paper deck no pick jam 1 The paper deck cassette 1 media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period after the paper deck cassette 2 media feed sensor detects the leading edge. The paper deck cassette 2 media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period after the paper deck cassette 3 media feed sensor detects the leading edge. ● Paper deck no pick jam 2 The paper deck cassette 1 media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period, including a retry, after the paper deck cassette 1 pickup solenoid has turned on. The paper deck cassette 2 media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period, including a retry, after the paper deck cassette 2 pickup solenoid has turned on. The paper deck cassette 3 media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period, including a retry, after the paper deck cassette 3 pickup solenoid has turned on. ● Paper deck residual paper jam Any one of the following sensors detects a presence of paper after the automatic delivery is performed when the printer is turned on or when the door is closed. ● ◦ Paper deck cassette 1 media feed sensor ◦ Paper deck cassette 2 media feed sensor ◦ Paper deck cassette 3 media feed sensor Paper deck door open jam A paper deck door open is detected during a paper-feed operation. ● ENWW Automatic Delivery Optional 3X500-sheet paper deck 79 The paper deck automatically clears the paper if any one of the following sensors detects the residual paper during the initial sequence after the printer is turned on or after the door is closed. 80 ◦ Paper deck cassette 1 media feed sensor ◦ Paper deck cassette 2 media feed sensor ◦ Paper deck cassette 3 media feed sensor Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW 2 ENWW Removal and replacement ● Removal and replacement strategy ● Removal and replacement procedures 81 Removal and replacement strategy Cautions during removal and replacement This chapter describes the removal and replacement of field-replaceable units (FRUs) only. Replacing FRUs is generally the reverse of removal. Notes are included to provide directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures. HP does not support repairing individual subassemblies or troubleshooting to the PCA component level. Never operate or service the product with the protective cover removed from the laser scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes. The sheet-metal parts can have sharp edges. Be careful when handling sheet-metal parts. CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder when removing product parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part. Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the product. CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the flat flexible cables (FFCs) during removal or installation. NOTE: To install a self-tapping screw, first turn it counterclockwise to align it with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn it clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. If a self-tapping screw-hole becomes stripped, repair the screw-hole or replace the affected assembly. TIP: For clarity, some figures in this chapter show assemblies removed that are not required to be removed to service the product (for example, the scanner and document feeder assemblies). The procedures in this manual are correct for your product. 82 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Required tools ● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152-mm (6-in) shaft length NOTE: For the best fit, use a JIS #2 Phillips screwdriver for the stapler/stacker. ● Small, flat-blade screwdriver ● Needle-nose pliers ● ESD strap (if one is available) ● Penlight CAUTION: Always use a Phillips screwdriver (callout 1). Do not use a Pozidriv screwdriver (callout 2) or any motorized screwdriver. These can damage screws or screw threads. Figure 2-1 Screwdrivers Types of screws WARNING! Make sure that components are replaced with the correct screw type. Using the incorrect screw (for example, substituting a long screw for the correct shorter screw) can cause damage to the product or interfere with product operation. Do not intermix screws that are removed from one component with the screws that are removed from another component. For a complete list of screw types and part numbers, see the Parts chapter. Service approach The HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M750 Printer Series uses a field repair strategy. Defective parts are diagnosed and replaced at the Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) assembly level. Repair normally begins by using the product internal diagnostics and the following two-step process: 1. Isolate the problem to the major system (for example, the network or server, or the product). 2. Troubleshoot the problem by using the procedures in the troubleshooting chapter. After you locate a faulty part, the product can usually be repaired at the assembly level by replacing FRUs. Some mechanical assemblies might need to be repaired at the subassembly level. Hewlett-Packard Company does not support replacement of components on the printed circuit assembles. The user replaces toner cartridges as they are depleted. Additional instructions about other user-replaceable parts are provided in this section. ENWW Removal and replacement strategy 83 The product tracks the amount of use on the customer-replaceable supplies by keeping a page count. The product prompts the user to replace certain items when a supply is depleted or a specific number of pages has been printed. Swapping toner cartridges between products might cause a misrepresentation of supply life values and is not recommended. Before performing service WARNING! Turn the product off, wait 5 seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the product. If this warning is not followed, severe injury and damage to the product can result. The power must be on for certain functional checks during troubleshooting. However, the power supply should be disconnected during parts removal. 1. Remove all paper. 2. Place the product on an ESD mat (if available). If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part. 3. Remove the toner cartridges. 4. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 5. Remove the trays. After performing service 1. Reinstall the toner cartridges. 2. Reinstall the trays. 3. Return all paper to the trays. 4. Plug in the power cable and turn on the product. 5. Perform print-quality tests by printing from a host computer, the scanner glass, and the document feeder. Parts removal order If multiple components must be removed to gain access to an assembly, the first step of the removal procedure lists all of the components that must be removed to gain access to that assembly. Use these lists to determine which parts must be removed before removing other parts. 84 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Removal and replacement procedures NOTE: The following assemblies are Customer Self Repair (CSR) components. Go to Covers on page 106 or Main assemblies on page 123 for information about removing service assemblies. Print cartridges When a print cartridge approaches the end of its estimated useful life, the control panel displays a message recommending that you order a replacement. The product can continue to print using the current print cartridge until the control panel displays a message instructing you to replace the cartridge, unless you have selected the option to override the message by using the Supply Settings menu. NOTE: Cartridge life remaining is used to determine if a supply is near or at estimated end of life. Cartridge life remaining is approximate only, and varies depending on types of documents printed and other factors. The product uses four colors and has a different print cartridge for each color: black (K), magenta (M), cyan (C), and yellow (Y). You can replace a print cartridge when the print quality is no longer acceptable. The control-panel message also indicates the color of the cartridge that has reached the end of its estimated useful life. Replacement instructions are provided on the label on the print cartridge. CAUTION: If toner gets on clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. NOTE: Information about recycling used print cartridges is contained in the print-cartridge box. Replace print cartridges ENWW 1. Open the front door. Make sure that the door is completely open. 2. Grasp the handle of the used print cartridge and pull out to remove. Removal and replacement procedures 85 3. Remove the new print cartridge from its protective bag. NOTE: 4. 86 Be careful not to damage the memory tag on the print cartridge. Grasp both sides of the print cartridge and distribute the toner by gently rocking the print cartridge. Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 5. Remove the orange protective cover from the print cartridge. Place the protective cover on the used print cartridge to protect it during shipping. CAUTION: Avoid prolonged exposure to light. Do not touch the green roller. Doing so can damage the cartridge. NOTE: Store the used print cartridge in the protective bag removed from the replacement cartridge. Information about recycling used print cartridges is contained in the print-cartridge box. ENWW 6. Align the print cartridge with its slot and insert the print cartridge until it clicks into place. 7. Close the front door. Removal and replacement procedures 87 Toner-collection unit NOTE: The toner-collection unit (TCU) is designed for a single use. Do not try to empty the toner-collection unit and reuse it. To recycle a discarded toner-collection unit, follow the instructions that come with a replacement toner-collection unit. 1. Open the TCU access door (callout 1) on the product back side. 2. Grasp the top of the TCU (callout 2), and then remove it from the product. Figure 2-2 Remove the toner-collection unit (1 of 3) 2 1 3. Remove the plug from the discarded TCU. Figure 2-3 Remove the toner-collection unit (2 of 3) 88 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Install the plug onto the discarded TCU before putting it into the box and mailing it for recycling. Figure 2-4 Remove the toner-collection unit (3 of 3) ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 89 Fuser CAUTION: The fuser might be hot. Allow enough time after turning off the product power for the fuser to cool. 1. Open the right-door assembly. 2. Grasp the handles and squeeze the blue release levers (callout 1). Figure 2-5 Remove the fuser 1 2 3. Pull the fuser (callout 2) straight out of the product to remove it. Reset the New Fuser Kit setting at the control panel NOTE: Use this procedure to reset the internal page count if a replacement fuser is installed. 1. At the control panel, press the Home button . 2. Open the following menus: 3. 90 ● Administration ● Manage Supplies ● Reset Supplies ● New Fuser Kit Use the Down arrow button Chapter 2 Removal and replacement to highlight the Yes item, and then press OK to select it. ENWW Pickup roller (Tray 1) CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy roller surface unless you are replacing the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper pickup problems. 1. Open Tray 1 (callout 1), and then remove the pickup roller cover (callout 2). Figure 2-6 Remove the pickup roller (Tray 1) (1 of 2) 1 2. 2 Spread out the pickup roller retainers (callout 1) until both sides unlatch, and then remove the pickup roller (callout 2). Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the roller, make sure that the roller snaps into place Figure 2-7 Remove the pickup roller (Tray 1) (2 of 2) 1 1 2 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 91 Separation pad (Tray 1) CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy roller surface unless you are replacing the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper pickup problems. 1. Open Tray 1 (callout 1), and then remove the pickup roller cover (callout 2). Figure 2-8 Remove the separation pad (Tray 1) (1 of 4) 1 2. 2 Take out the tool (callout 2) supplied with a new separation pad (callout 1). Figure 2-9 Remove the separation pad (Tray 1) (2 of 4) 2 1 92 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Insert the tool under the separation pad. Figure 2-10 Remove the separation pad (Tray 1) (3 of 4) 4. Rotate the top of the tool away from the product to release the separation pad, and then remove the tool and the separation pad together. Figure 2-11 Remove the separation pad (Tray 1) (4 of 4) Reinstallation tip You do not need to use the tool to install the new separation pad. Press the new pad with your hand until it snaps into place and engages with the engine. ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 93 Separation roller assembly (Tray 2) CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy roller surface unless you are replacing the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper pickup problems. 1. Remove Tray 2 from the product. 2. Open the right-door assembly. 3. On the separation roller assembly, slide the lever (callout 1) toward the unlocked icon into the unlocked position. until it clicks Figure 2-12 Remove the separation roller assembly (Tray 2) (1 of 2) 1 4. Pull the separation roller assembly up and remove it from the product. Reinstallation tip locked position. When you install the separation roller assembly, make sure that it snaps into the Figure 2-13 Remove the separation roller assembly (Tray 2) (2 of 2) 94 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Pickup roller (Tray 2) CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy roller surface unless you are replacing the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper pickup problems. 1. Open Tray 2. 2. Open the right-door assembly. 3. Remove the separation roller assembly (see Separation roller assembly (Tray 2) on page 94) 4. Lift one of the two levers (callout 1) on either side of the pickup roller, and then push the right side of the roller in the direction of the arrow. Figure 2-14 Remove the pickup roller (Tray 2) 1 5. Remove the pickup roller. Reinstallation tip Insert the left side of the roller into the product first. Make sure that the replacement roller snaps into place. ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 95 Pickup roller, separation roller, and feed roller (1 x 500-sheet and 3 x 500-sheet paper feeders) CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy roller surface unless you are replacing the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper pickup problems. TIP: You do not have to separate the product from the feeder to remove these rollers. 1. Remove the Tray 3 or Tray 4/5/6 cassette from the product, and then locate the rollers on the righthand side of the tray cavity. Figure 2-15 Remove the 1 x 500 or 3 x 500 rollers (1 of 2) 2. Release three tabs, and then pull the rollers in the direction of the arrow. Figure 2-16 Remove the 1 x 500 or 3 x 500 rollers (2 of 2) Reinstallation tip 96 When you reinstall the rollers, make sure that the rollers snap into place. Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Secondary transfer roller CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy roller surface unless you are replacing the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause image quality problems. NOTE: If the secondary transfer roller is replaced, HP recommends that the ITB be replaced also. If both components are replaced at the same time, you must use the control-panel menus to reset the Transfer Kit menu item. See Reset the New Transfer Kit setting at the control panel on page 99. 1. Open the right-door assembly. 2. Grasp one of the blue round features (callout 1) on either end of the transfer roller, and then lift the transfer roller (callout 2) off of the product. Figure 2-17 Remove the transfer roller 1 2 TIP: Place the new roller assembly in place with the roller gear (callout 1) on the right side, and then press down to ensure that the roller shaft snaps securely in the roller clasps. 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 97 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) CAUTION: Do not touch the black-plastic belt. Skin oils and fingerprints on the belt can cause print-quality problems. Always place the ITB on a flat surface in a safe and protected location. NOTE: If the ITB assembly is replaced, HP recommends that the secondary transfer roller be replaced also. If both components are replaced at the same time, you must use the control-panel menus to reset the Transfer Kit menu item. See Reset the New Transfer Kit setting at the control panel on page 99. 1. Open the right-door assembly. 2. Use both hands to grasp the blue levers (callout 1), apply slight downward pressure, and pull the ITB toward you at a downward angle. Figure 2-18 Remove the intermediate transfer belt (1 of 3) 1 3. Pull the ITB out of the product until two large handles expand along the right and left side of the ITB. Figure 2-19 Remove the intermediate transfer belt (2 of 3) 98 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Grasp the large handles on the ITB, pull it straight out of the product until it stops, and then pull up to remove it from the product. CAUTION: The ITB is a sensitive component. Be careful when handling the ITB so that it is not damaged. Always place the ITB in a safe and protected location. Figure 2-20 Remove the intermediate transfer belt (3 of 3) Reinstallation tip If you are installing a replacement ITB, make sure that you remove all of the packing tape and the protective cover sheet. Reset the New Transfer Kit setting at the control panel NOTE: Use this procedure to reset the internal page count if a replacement ITB and secondary transfer roller are installed. 1. At the control panel, press the Home button . 2. Open the following menus: 3. ENWW ● Administration ● Manage Supplies ● Reset Supplies ● New Transfer Kit Use the Down arrow button to highlight the Yes item, and then press OK to select it. Removal and replacement procedures 99 Formatter PCA CAUTION: ESD sensitive component. Do not replace the laser scanner and the formatter PCA at the same time. The settings for the laser scanner are stored in the formatter RAM. When you install a new laser scanner, it reads the settings from the formatter. Do not replace the DC controller PCA and the formatter PCA at the same time. The settings for the DC Controller PCA are stored in the formatter RAM. When you install a new DC Controller PCA, it reads the settings from the formatter. CAUTION: The formatter PCA for the CP5525 will not work and might cause damage if installed in the M750. Make sure you are installing the correct formatter PCA. NOTE: If possible, print a configuration page before replacing the formatter. You might need to transfer the serial number and the page count information to the new formatter. 1. Disconnect communication cables (if installed). CAUTION: Make sure that the product power is off and that the power cord is unplugged. Figure 2-21 Remove the formatter (1 of 3) 100 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Loosen two thumb screws. Figure 2-22 Remove the formatter (2 of 3) 3. Firmly pull the formatter from the product. Place the formatter on a clean, flat, grounded surface. Figure 2-23 Remove the formatter (3 of 3) Reinstallation tip If the formatter PCA was replaced, print a configuration page and make sure that the serial number and page count information were transferred to the formatter PCA. If they were not, use the Service menu to reset these values. ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 101 Hard Drive Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 100. Identify the hard drive type ■ Encrypted hard-disk drive (callout 1) 1 ■ Solid-state module (callout 1) 1 Remove the encrypted HDD NOTE: If you are installing a replacement hard drive or module, you must reinstall the product firmware. See Product updates on page 535. 102 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then release one connector (callout 2). Figure 2-24 Remove the encrypted HDD (1 of 2) 1 2 2. Remove the encrypted HDD. Figure 2-25 Remove the encrypted HDD (2 of 2) ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 103 Remove the solid-state module NOTE: If you are installing a replacement hard drive or module, you must reinstall the product firmware. See Product updates on page 535. 1. Release the hard drive lock. Figure 2-26 Remove the solid-state module (1 of 3) 2. Remove the lock from the PCA. Figure 2-27 Remove the solid-state module (2 of 3) 104 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Disconnect the solid-state module from the formatter PCA, and then remove it. Figure 2-28 Remove the solid-state module (3 of 3) ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 105 Covers Identification and location Figure 2-29 External panels, covers, and doors 1 2 5 4 6 3 9 8 7 Table 2-1 External panels, covers, and doors Item Description Item Description 1 Rear-right cover (see Right-rear cover on page 114) 6 Top cover (see Top cover on page 115) 2 Right-door assembly (see Right-door assembly on page 120) 7 Left cover (see Left cover on page 110) 106 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Table 2-1 External panels, covers, and doors (continued) ENWW Item Description Item Description 3 Right-front cover and control-panel assembly (see Right-front cover and control-panel assembly on page 108) 8 Rear cover (see Rear cover on page 111) 4 Front-door assembly (see Front-door assembly on page 117) 9 Toner collection unit access door (see Toner collection unit access door on page 112) 5 Tray 2 cassette Removal and replacement procedures 107 Right-front cover and control-panel assembly 1. Open the front door and the right door. 2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then release two tabs (callout 2). Figure 2-30 Remove the right-front cover and control-panel assembly (1 of 3) 1 3. 2 Release 3 tabs (callout 1) on the right side of the assembly. Figure 2-31 Remove the right-front cover and control-panel assembly (2 of 3) 1 108 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Support the assembly, release one cable retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 2). Remove the assembly. Figure 2-32 Remove the right-front cover and control-panel assembly (3 of 3) 2 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 109 Left cover 1. Remove Tray 2 from the product. 2. Open the front door. 3. Remove three screws (callout 1). Starting from the left side of the cover, release six tabs (callout 2), and then remove the cover from the product. Figure 2-33 Remove the left cover 2 2 1 TIP: Opening the toner-collection door might make it easier to release the tabs on the left side of the cover. Reinstallation tip If the front door will not close after the left cover has been reinstalled, verify that the two tabs on the right side of the cover have been aligned correctly with the product chassis. 110 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Rear cover Remove the rear cover ▲ Remove five screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2) from the product. Figure 2-34 Remove the rear cover 1 2 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 111 Toner collection unit access door 1. Open the toner collection unit access door (callout 1), remove the toner collection unit, and then release the link arm (callout 2) on the left side of the door. Figure 2-35 Remove the toner collection unit access door (1 of 3) 1 2 2. Partially close the door so that the right link arm (callout 1) can clear the stop (callout 2) on the door, and then disengage the link arm from the door. CAUTION: Do not disconnect the right-hand link arm when the door is completely open. Doing so can disconnect the link arm spring. Figure 2-36 Remove the toner collection unit access door (2 of 3) 2 1 112 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Rotate the access door down 90 degrees (callout 1), and then pull on the right side of the door (callout 2) to remove the access door. Figure 2-37 Remove the toner collection unit access door (3 of 3) 1 2 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 113 Right-rear cover 1. Remove the rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. 2. Open the right-door assembly. 3. Remove two screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the cover. CAUTION: The ground spring on the back of the cover can easily be dislodged. Be careful not to lose it. See Reinstall the right-rear cover on page 114. Figure 2-38 Remove the right-rear cover 1 2 Reinstall the right-rear cover ▲ Make sure that the ground spring (callout 1) is correctly installed before you reinstall the right-rear cover. Figure 2-39 Right-rear cover ground spring 1 114 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Top cover Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Right-front cover and control-panel assembly. See Right-front cover and control-panel assembly on page 108. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 110. ● Remove the rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. Remove the top cover 1. Open the right-door assembly, and then remove four screws (callout 1). Figure 2-40 Remove the top cover (1 of 2) 1 1 2. ENWW Open the toner-collection door. Removal and replacement procedures 115 3. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2). Figure 2-41 Remove the top cover (2 of 2) 2 1 116 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Front-door assembly 1. Remove the control panel. See Right-front cover and control-panel assembly on page 108. 2. Open the front door. 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) and the inner cover rail mount (callout 2). CAUTION: As shown in Figure 2-43 Remove the front-door assembly (2 of 4) on page 117, when removing the inner cover rail mount (callout 3), hold down the inner cover (callout 4) with one hand to prevent it from springing back at the product. Figure 2-42 Remove the front-door assembly (1 of 4) 1 2 Figure 2-43 Remove the front-door assembly (2 of 4) 4 3 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 117 4. Close the inner cover, and then release two tabs on each stopper (callout 1) with a small flat-blade screwdriver (callout 2). Figure 2-44 Remove the front-door assembly (3 of 4) 1 NOTE: Each tab is at the end of the stopper that is closest to the product. 2 1 118 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 5. Position the door as shown below (callout 1), and then slide the front-door assembly in the direction that the arrow indicates to remove it from the product. Figure 2-45 Remove the front-door assembly (4 of 4) 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 119 Right-door assembly Remove the following components: ● Rear cover (see Rear cover on page 111) ● Right rear cover (see Right-rear cover on page 114) 1. Open the right-door assembly 2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release the link arm (callout 2), and then disconnect two connectors (J152 and J112) on the DC controller (callout 3). NOTE: The link arm is spring loaded and retracts into the product. Figure 2-46 Remove the right-door assembly (1 of 6) 3 2 1 3. Carefully release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the cable cover (callout 2). Figure 2-47 Remove the right-door assembly (2 of 6) 2 1 120 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the guide (callout 2). TIP: Release the wire harnesses from the guide as you remove it. Figure 2-48 Remove the right-door assembly (3 of 6) 1 2 5. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1). Figure 2-49 Remove the right-door assembly (4 of 6) 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 121 6. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the link arm (callout 2). Figure 2-50 Remove the right-door assembly (5 of 6) 2 1 7. Remove two screws (callout 1), remove the hinge (callout 2), and then slide the right-door assembly (callout 3) to the left to remove it. Figure 2-51 Remove the right-door assembly (6 of 6) 1 2 3 122 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Main assemblies TIP: For clarity, some photos in this chapter show components removed that would not be removed to service the product. If necessary, remove the components listed at the beginning of a procedure before proceeding to service the product. Formatter case Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 100. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 110. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. Remove the formatter case 1. Remove two screws (callout 1). Figure 2-52 Remove the formatter case assembly (1 of 2) 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 123 2. Remove nine screws (callout 1), and then slide the formatter case unit (callout 2) away from the DC controller to remove it. Figure 2-53 Remove the formatter case assembly (2 of 2) 1 124 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Laser/scanner assembly CAUTION: Do not replace the laser scanner and the formatter PCA at the same time. The settings for the laser scanner are stored in the formatter RAM. When you install a new laser scanner, it reads the settings from the formatter. Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Tray 2 ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 110. Remove the laser/scanner assembly 1. Open the front door. 2. On the left side of the product, pinch and remove the fan duct (callout 1), and then disconnect the two flat cables (callout 2). Figure 2-54 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (1 of 4) 2 ENWW 1 Removal and replacement procedures 125 3. Release one tab (callout 1), remove the stopper (callout 2), and then disconnect one connector (callout 3). Figure 2-55 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (2 of 4) 1 2 3 4. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the cable guide (callout 2) in the direction that the arrow indicates. 5. Remove the cable guide (callout 2) and the flat cables (callout 3) together, and then remove one spring (callout 4). Figure 2-56 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (3 of 4) 1 2 4 126 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 3 ENWW 6. While holding up the handle (callout 1), pull the laser/scanner (callout 2) up slightly and then out of the product. CAUTION: Do not touch the protective glass strip on top of the assembly. Figure 2-57 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (4 of 4) 1 Reinstallation tip the assembly. 2 Align the assembly with the guides on the left side of the opening when reinstalling Align the pin on the bottom of the assembly with the hole in the product when reinstalling the assembly. After pushing the assembly into the product, you might have to pull the assembly slightly forward to seat the pin in the hole. NOTE: Perform two full calibrations from the control panel after replacing the laser/scanner. ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 127 Paper pickup assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Tray 2 cassette. ● Tray 2 separation roller assembly. See Separation roller assembly (Tray 2) on page 94. ● ITB. See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 98. Remove the paper pickup assembly 1. Open the right door, pull out one tab (callout 1), pull the bottom of the cable cover out, and then pull up to remove the cable cover (callout 2). Figure 2-58 Remove the paper pickup assembly (1 of 3) 2 1 128 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1). NOTE: The connectors might be hidden behind the assembly. Figure 2-59 Remove the paper pickup assembly (2 of 3) 1 3. Pull out one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide (callout 2) to the right to remove it. Figure 2-60 Remove the paper pickup assembly (3 of 3) 2 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 129 4. Remove two screws (callout 1), move the registration sensor flag (callout 2) to the up position, and then pull the paper pickup assembly (callout 3) toward you to remove it. Figure 2-61 Remove the paper pickup assembly (4 of 4) 2 3 1 130 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Reinstall the paper pickup assembly Use the steps below to reinstall the paper pickup assembly. If you are installing a replacement assembly, also see Installing a replacement paper pickup assembly on page 133 after completing these steps. 1. When reassembling the paper pickup assembly (callout 1), the sensor flag (callout 2) is in the way. Be sure to hold up the sensor flag when reassembling. Figure 2-62 Reinstall the paper pickup assembly 2 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 131 2. Make sure that the sensor flag is correctly installed, and that the flag moves properly after reassembling the paper pickup assembly. Figure 2-63 Paper pickup assembly sensor flag correctly installed Figure 2-64 Paper pickup assembly sensor flag incorrectly installed 132 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Installing a replacement paper pickup assembly ▲ Use the Service menu to reset the New Registration Roller menu item and enter the Media Sensor Value from the replacement paper pickup assembly. Reset the New Registration Roller menu item a. Press the Home button . b. Open the following menus: ● Device Maintenance ● Service ● Service Access Code c. Use the arrow buttons to enter the access code, and then press the OK button. d. Press the Down arrow button OK button. to highlight the New Registration Roller menu, and then press the e. Press the Down arrow button to highlight the Yes item, and then press the OK button. Reset the Media Sensor Value a. Press the Home button . b. Open the following menus: c. ENWW ● Device Maintenance ● Service ● Service Access Code Use the arrow buttons to enter the access code, and then press the OK button. Removal and replacement procedures 133 d. Press the Down arrow button button. to highlight the Media Sensor Value menu, and then press the OK Figure 2-65 Media sensor value label e. Use the arrow buttons to enter the media sensor value found on the replacement assembly. f. Press the OK button to save to save the value. 134 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Registration sensor assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Tray 2 cassette. ● Cassette separation roller assembly. See Separation roller assembly (Tray 2) on page 94. ● Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 98. ● Cassette pickup drive assembly. See Paper pickup assembly on page 128. Remove the registration sensor assembly 1. Push the tab (callout 1) down, and then pull the top of the cover to remove the cover (callout 2). You might need a small flat-blade screwdriver to press down the tab. Figure 2-66 Remove the registration sensor assembly (1 of 4) 1 2 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 135 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then detach the bottom part of the spring (callout 2) at the right end. If necessary, use a pick or needle-nose pliers to detach the spring. Figure 2-67 Remove the registration sensor assembly (2 of 4) 1 3. 2 Detach the bottom of one spring (callout 1) at the left end. Figure 2-68 Remove the registration sensor assembly (3 of 4) 1 136 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Release one of the registration sensor unit pivot hinges from the shafts (callout 1), pull out that end of the assembly (callout 2), and then repeat the procedure on the other pivot hinge. Figure 2-69 Remove the registration sensor assembly (4 of 4) 2 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 137 Lifter-drive assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Tray 2 cassette. ● Fuser. See Fuser on page 90. ● ITB. See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 98. ● 1 x 500-paper feeder. See 1 x 500-sheet paper feeder assembly on page 211. ● 3 x 500-paper feeder (optional accessory). See 3 x 500-sheet paper feeder (optional accessory) on page 225. Remove the lifter-drive assembly 1. Verify that the right door is closed, and then turn the product so that the front side faces up. Figure 2-70 Remove the lifter-drive assembly (1 of 3) 138 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Release the tab (callout 1), and then pull up to remove the cover (callout 2). Figure 2-71 Remove the lifter-drive assembly (2 of 3) 2 ENWW 1 Removal and replacement procedures 139 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), and then remove the lifter drive unit (callout 3). Figure 2-72 Remove the lifter-drive assembly (3 of 3) 1 3 2 Reinstallation tip Make sure that the tabs align correctly when reinstalling the lifter-drive assembly. 140 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW ITB front guide assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● ITB. See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 98. ● Right-front cover and control-panel assembly. See Right-front cover and control-panel assembly on page 108. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 110. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 115. 1. Open the front door (callout 1) halfway, and then push up the upper part of the link arm (callout 2) to detach it from the product chassis. Figure 2-73 Remove the ITB front guide assembly (1 of 4) 2 ENWW 1 Removal and replacement procedures 141 2. Remove three screws (callout 1), release four tabs (callout 2), and then remove the cartridge upper guide unit (callout 3). Figure 2-74 Remove the ITB front guide assembly (2 of 4) 3 1 2 3. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cables (callout 3) from the cable clamp (callout 2). Figure 2-75 Remove the ITB front guide assembly (3 of 4) 3 142 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 2 1 ENWW 4. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the ITB front guide assembly (callout 2) in the direction that the arrow indicates to remove it. Figure 2-76 Remove the ITB front guide assembly (4 of 4) 1 ENWW 2 Removal and replacement procedures 143 ITB rear guide assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● ITB. See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 98. ● Right-front cover and control-panel assembly. See Right-front cover and control-panel assembly on page 108. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 110. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 115. ▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the ITB rear guide unit (callout 3) in the direction that the arrow indicates to remove it. Figure 2-77 Remove the ITB rear guide assembly 3 144 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 1 2 ENWW Residual toner full sensor Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Toner-collection unit. See Toner-collection unit on page 88. ● Right-front cover and control-panel assembly. See Right-front cover and control-panel assembly on page 108. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 110. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Toner collection unit access door. See Toner collection unit access door on page 112. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 115. Remove the residual toner full sensor 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2). Figure 2-78 Remove the residual toner full sensor (1 of 4) 1 ENWW 2 Removal and replacement procedures 145 2. Remove two M4-screws (callout 1) and one M3-screw (callout 2). Then remove the toner cover (callout 3). Figure 2-79 Remove the residual toner full sensor (2 of 4) 1 146 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 3 2 ENWW 3. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the residual toner full sensor assembly (callout 3). CAUTION: During the removal process, make sure that the white gear (callout 4) does not fall out of the assembly. The white gear might stay on the product, and not come off with the assembly. Figure 2-80 Remove the residual toner full sensor (3 of 4) 2 1 3 Figure 2-81 Remove the residual toner full sensor (4 of 4) 4 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 147 Reinstall the residual toner full sensor 1. If the white gear (callout 1) was removed with the residual toner full sensor assembly, carefully remove it from the assembly. Figure 2-82 Reinstall the residual toner full sensor (1 of 3) 1 2. Alight the flat portion of the gear with the corresponding flat portion of the drive shaft. Figure 2-83 Reinstall the residual toner full sensor (2 of 3) 148 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Install the gear on the shaft before you install the residual toner full sensor assembly. Figure 2-84 Reinstall the residual toner full sensor (3 of 3) ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 149 Main drive assembly NOTE: The replacement of the main drive assembly will take an experienced service technician approximately four hours. It is also likely that the device will have additional issues caused by this service procedure. Carefully evaluate the possibility of doing a whole unit replacement instead of this repair. Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Toner-collection unit. See Toner-collection unit on page 88. ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 100. ● Formatter case. See Formatter case on page 123. ● Right-front cover and control-panel assembly. See Right-front cover and control-panel assembly on page 108. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 110. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Toner collection unit access door. See Toner collection unit access door on page 112. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 115. ● Residual-toner full sensor. See Residual toner full sensor on page 145. Remove the main drive assembly 1. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1) and one FFC (callout 2). Figure 2-85 Remove the main drive assembly (1 of 17) 2 150 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 1 ENWW 2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the sheet-metal plate (callout 2). Figure 2-86 Remove the main drive assembly (2 of 17) 1 2 3. Disconnect twenty-two connectors and six FFCs on the DC controller PCA (callout 1). TIP: Three connectors (callout 2) should be empty when the DC controller is reinstalled. Figure 2-87 Remove the main drive assembly (3 of 17) 1 2 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 151 4. Disconnect three intermediate connectors (callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses (callout 3) from the guides (callout 2). Figure 2-88 Remove the main drive assembly (4 of 17) 3 2 1 5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the guide (callout 2). TIP: Release the wire harnesses from the guide as you remove it. Figure 2-89 Remove the main drive assembly (5 of 17) 1 2 152 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 6. Remove five screws (callout 1), and then remove the DC controller and the two sheet-metal support plates. CAUTION: Carefully unthread the FFCs from the plate to avoid damaging them when you remove the DC controller and the two sheet-metal support plates. Figure 2-90 Remove the main drive assembly (6 of 17) 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 153 7. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), release one wire retainer (callout 3), and then remove the driver PCA (callout 4). Figure 2-91 Remove the main drive assembly (7 of 17) 2 3 4 1 8. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the second transfer high-voltage power supply (callout 2) and the PCA holder (callout 3) assembly. Figure 2-92 Remove the main drive assembly (8 of 17) 2 1 154 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 3 ENWW 9. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2). Figure 2-93 Remove the main drive assembly (9 of 17) 2 1 10. Remove one screw (callout 1), release four tabs (callout 2), and then remove the developing highvoltage power supply (callout 3). Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the power supply PCA, look through the holes on the PCA (callout 4) and make sure that the contact springs are correctly positioned against the back side of the PCA. Figure 2-94 Remove the main drive assembly (10 of 17) 2 4 1 3 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 155 11. Remove one screw (callout 1), release four tabs (callout 2), and then separate the first transfer highvoltage power supply (callout 3) from the product. CAUTION: The PCA is still connected to the product. Disconnect one connector (callout 4) on the back side of the PCA to remove it. Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the power supply PCA, look through the holes on the PCA (callout 5) and make sure that the contact springs are correctly positioned against the back side of the PCA. Figure 2-95 Remove the main drive assembly (11 of 17) 2 5 4 1 3 12. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the sheet-metal support brackets (callout 2). Figure 2-96 Remove the main drive assembly (12 of 17) 2 1 156 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 13. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), slide the cable guide (callout 3) to the left to release the it, and then move the guide to the side, out of the way. TIP: It might be easier to disconnect the connector if you release it from the holder. Figure 2-97 Remove the main drive assembly (13 of 17) 1 2 3 14. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the sensor holder (callout 2). Figure 2-98 Remove the main drive assembly (14 of 17) 1 ENWW 2 Removal and replacement procedures 157 15. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the sensor assembly. Figure 2-99 Remove the main drive assembly (15 of 17) 1 16. Disconnect six connectors (callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses from the guides (callout 2). Figure 2-100 Remove the main drive assembly (16 of 17) 1 2 158 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 17. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the main drive assembly (callout 2). NOTE: Make sure that the right door is closed. Figure 2-101 Remove the main drive assembly (17 of 17) 1 2 Install the main drive assembly NOTE: Installing a replacement assembly: follow the instructions in this section. Reinstalling the original assembly: some of these instructions in this section do not apply (for example, removing the shipping spacers). Do not rotate the gears when handling the assembly. If the gears are rotated —and become out of phase—it will be difficult to install the assembly on the product. 1. Do not remove the orange spacers and spacer shipping tape (callout 1) installed on the replacement main drive assembly. Remove the remaining shipping tape (callout 2). CAUTION: A gear (callout 3) on the back of the assembly is not captive when the shipping tape is removed. Do not lose the gear when handling the assembly with the shipping tape removed. When removing tape, make sure that the entire strip is removed. Check the back of the assembly to verify that the entire strip of tape is removed. ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 159 Figure 2-102 Install the main drive assembly (1 of 8) 2 3 1 2. With the right door closed, position the drive assembly near the product, and then rotate it up and onto the chassis. NOTE: Make sure that the right-door link arm shaft (callout 1) aligns with and is positioned in the hole (callout 2) on the arm on the drive assembly, and that the pins on the assembly (callout 3) are positioned in the holes in the link arms on the chassis (callout 4). Figure 2-103 Install the main drive assembly (2 of 8) 4 1 2 3 160 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Install one screw (callout 1). NOTE: Do not fully tighten this screw. Figure 2-104 Install the main drive assembly (3 of 8) 1 4. From the top of the product, look at each shutter arm. Make sure that they are in the closed position (callout 1). If they are in the open position (callout 2), carefully push on the shutters to close them. Figure 2-105 Install the main drive assembly (4 of 8) 1 2 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 161 5. Make sure that the six sheet-metal screw tabs (callout 1) on the drive assembly are flat against the product chassis. NOTE: If the tabs are not flat against the chassis, the developer-disengagement drive gears and cams —on the back side of the drive assembly—are not properly aligned with, and seated in, the corresponding holes on the product. Remove the drive assembly, realign it, and then reinstall it. See Figure 2-103 Install the main drive assembly (2 of 8) on page 160. Figure 2-106 Install the main drive assembly (5 of 8) 1 6. With the drive assembly correctly installed, verify the following: ● Open and close the front door. The OPC drum drive gears (callout 1; two shown, four total) must move in and out when viewed from inside the product. ● Open and close the right door. The ITB drive gear (callout 2) must move in and out when viewed from inside the product. Figure 2-107 Install the main drive assembly (6 of 8) 2 1 162 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 7. Install the remaining five mounting screws, tighten all six screws (callout 1), and then remove the orange spacers and spacer shipping tape. Figure 2-108 Install the main drive assembly (7 of 8) 1 8. Reinstall the two small sheet-metal brackets. NOTE: The tab on the sheet-metal brackets must be inserted in the hole in the drive assembly chassis as shown below. Figure 2-109 Install the main drive assembly (8 of 8) ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 163 Fuser drive assembly NOTE: The replacement of the fuser drive assembly will take an experienced service technician approximately four hours. It is also likely that the device will have additional issues caused by this service procedure. Carefully evaluate the possibility of doing a whole unit replacement instead of this repair. Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Toner-collection unit. See Toner-collection unit on page 88. ● Fuser. See Fuser on page 90. ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 100. ● Formatter case. See Formatter case on page 123 ● Right-front cover and control-panel assembly. See Right-front cover and control-panel assembly on page 108. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 110. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Toner collection unit access door. See Toner collection unit access door on page 112. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 115. ● Residual-toner full sensor. See Residual toner full sensor on page 145. ● Main drive assembly. See Main drive assembly on page 150. Remove the fuser drive assembly 1. Remove one screw (callout 1) and the cover (callout 2). Figure 2-110 Remove the fuser drive assembly (1 of 3) 2 1 164 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1). Figure 2-111 Remove the fuser drive assembly (2 of 3) 1 3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the fuser drive assembly. Figure 2-112 Remove the fuser drive assembly (3 of 3) 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 165 Install a replacement fuser drive assembly Use the following procedure to install a replacement fuser drive assembly or reinstall the original fuser drive assembly. 1. Replacement fuser drive assembly: Before beginning, take note of the spacer (callout 1) on the replacement fuser drive assembly. Original fuser drive assembly: Proceed to the next step. NOTE: The fuser drive motor is shown removed in the following figure. However, you do not need to remove the fuser motor to install the fuser drive assembly. Figure 2-113 Install a replacement fuser drive assembly (1 of 3) 1 166 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Replacement fuser drive assembly: Fasten the replacement fuser gear assembly to the product with four screws. Install the screws in the order shown below (callouts 1 to 4). Original fuser drive assembly: Install, but do not fully tighten four screws (callouts 1 to 4). Carefully push the drive assembly to the left (toward the right-door side of the product) until it slightly shifts forward. Apply steady pressure to hold the assembly in place, and then tighten the screws. Figure 2-114 Install a replacement fuser drive assembly (2 of 3) 3 2 4 1 3. Replacement fuser drive assembly: Release two tabs in the order shown below (callouts 1 and 2). and then remove the spacer (callout 3). Original fuser drive assembly: Installation complete—this step is not required. Figure 2-115 Install a replacement fuser drive assembly (3 of 3) 2 1 3 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 167 Fuser gear assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Toner-collection unit. See Toner-collection unit on page 88. ● Fuser. See Fuser on page 90. ● Right-front cover and control-panel assembly. See Right-front cover and control-panel assembly on page 108. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 110. ● Toner collection unit access door. See Toner collection unit access door on page 112. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 115. ● Residual toner full sensor. See Residual toner full sensor on page 145. Remove the fuser gear assembly 1. Remove one screw (callout 1) and the cover (callout 2). Figure 2-116 Remove the fuser gear assembly (1 of 9) 1 168 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 2 ENWW 2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release four tabs (callout 2), and then separate the first transfer highvoltage power supply (callout 3) from the product. CAUTION: The PCA is still connected to the product. Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the power supply PCA, look through the holes on the PCA (callout 5) and make sure that the contact springs are correctly positioned against the back side of the PCA. Figure 2-117 Remove the fuser gear assembly (2 of 9) 2 5 4 3. 1 3 Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and then remove the first transfer high-voltage power supply (callout 2). Figure 2-118 Remove the fuser gear assembly (3 of 9) 1 2 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 169 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the fuser motor (callout 3). Figure 2-119 Remove the fuser gear assembly (4 of 9) 2 1 3 5. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses from the guide (callout 2). Figure 2-120 Remove the fuser gear assembly (5 of 9) 1 170 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 2 ENWW 6. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the wire harness from the guide (callout 2). TIP: It might be easier to disconnect the connector, if you release it from the black-plastic holder. Figure 2-121 Remove the fuser gear assembly (6 of 9) 1 2 1 7. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then release the wire harness from the retainer and guide (callout 2). Figure 2-122 Remove the fuser gear assembly (7 of 9) 1 2 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 171 8. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the wire harness from the guide (callout 2). Figure 2-123 Remove the fuser gear assembly (8 of 9) 1 2 172 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 9. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the fuser gear assembly (callout 2). CAUTION: Do not remove the gear or solenoid located behind the fuser gear assembly. The gear and solenoid are installed in specific alignment with the other components behind the assembly. If the gear or solenoid are removed, the product will not properly function. Figure 2-124 Remove the fuser gear assembly (9 of 9) 1 2 Install a replacement fuser gear assembly Use the following procedure to install a replacement fuser drive assembly or reinstall the original fuser gear assembly. 1. Replacement fuser gear assembly: Before beginning, take note of the spacer (callout 1) on the replacement fuser drive assembly. Original fuser gear assembly: Proceed to the next step. NOTE: The fuser drive motor is shown removed in the following figure. However, you do not need to remove the fuser motor to install the fuser gear assembly. ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 173 Figure 2-125 Install a replacement fuser gear assembly (1 of 3) 1 2. Replacement fuser drive assembly: Fasten the replacement fuser gear assembly to the product with four screws. Install the screws in the order shown below (callouts 1 to 4). Original fuser drive assembly: Install, but do not fully tighten four screws (callouts 1 to 4). Carefully push the drive assembly to the left (toward the right-door side of the product) until it slightly shifts forward. Apply steady pressure to hold the assembly in place, and then tighten the screws. Figure 2-126 Install a replacement fuser gear assembly (2 of 3) 3 2 4 1 174 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Replacement fuser drive assembly: Release two tabs in the order shown below (callouts 1 and 2). and then remove the spacer (callout 3). Original fuser drive assembly: Installation complete—this step is not required. Figure 2-127 Install a replacement fuser gear assembly (3 of 3) 2 1 3 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 175 Paper delivery assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Fuser. See Fuser on page 90. ● Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 98. ● Right-front cover and control-panel assembly. See Right-front cover and control-panel assembly on page 108. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 110. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 115. Remove the delivery assembly 1. Remove two screws (callout 1), remove the cover (callout 2), and then remove two screws (callout 3). Figure 2-128 Remove the paper delivery assembly (1 of 2) 2 1 176 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 3 ENWW 2. Pull the left side of the unit away from the engine, and then slide the delivery unit (callout 1) in the direction that the arrow indicates to remove it. Figure 2-129 Remove the paper delivery assembly (2 of 2) 1 Reinstall the paper delivery assembly 1. Make sure that the delivery assembly (callout 1) two mounting holes (callout 2) align with the shafts (callout 3) on the product. Figure 2-130 Reinstall the paper delivery assembly (1 of 3) 1 ENWW 2 3 Removal and replacement procedures 177 2. During reassembly, the white gear (callout 1) can become dislodged. Make sure that it is correctly installed on the assembly. Figure 2-131 Reinstall the paper delivery assembly (2 of 3) 1 3. After reinstalling the delivery assembly, verify that the sensor flag (callout 1) moves smoothly. Figure 2-132 Reinstall the paper delivery assembly (3 of 3) 1 178 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Duplex drive assembly (duplex models) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Fuser. See Fuser on page 90. ● Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 98. ● Right-front cover and control-panel assembly. See Right-front cover and control-panel assembly on page 108. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 110. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 115. ● Delivery assembly. See Paper delivery assembly on page 176. Remove the duplex-drive assembly 1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1). Figure 2-133 Remove the duplex-drive assembly (1 of 3) 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 179 2. Remove three screws (callout 1). Figure 2-134 Remove the duplex-drive assembly (2 of 3) 1 3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the assembly (callout 2). Figure 2-135 Remove the duplex-drive assembly (3 of 3) 2 180 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 1 ENWW Delivery drive assembly (simplex models) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Fuser. See Fuser on page 90. ● Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 98. ● Right-front cover and control-panel assembly. See Right-front cover and control-panel assembly on page 108. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 110. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 115. ● Delivery assembly. See Paper delivery assembly on page 176. Remove the delivery drive assembly ▲ Remove three screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the delivery drive assembly (callout 3). Figure 2-136 Remove the delivery drive assembly 3 2 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 181 Residual-toner-feed assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 98. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 110. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Toner collection unit access door. See Toner collection unit access door on page 112. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 115. ● Toner cover. See the first step of Residual toner full sensor on page 145. Remove the residual-toner-feed assembly 1. Release one tab (callout 1) by pulling the tab up. If necessary, use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to pull the tab up. Remove the shutter (callout 2), and then pull the spring (callout 3) off the assembly. NOTE: There might be a piece of transparent tape over the tab (callout 1). Remove the tape to release the tab. Figure 2-137 Remove the residual-toner-feed assembly (1 of 2) 3 1 2 182 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the residual-toner-feed assembly (callout 2). NOTE: When removing the residual-toner-feed assembly (callout 2), make sure that the assembly does not separate from the toner auger. This can spill toner in the product. To reduce the risk of such an incident, pull the assembly in the direction indicated by the arrow. Figure 2-138 Remove the residual-toner-feed assembly (2 of 2) 2 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 183 ITB motor (M1) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Toner-collection unit. See Toner-collection unit on page 88. ● Toner collection unit access door. See Toner collection unit access door on page 112. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. Remove the ITB motor 1. Disconnect all of the cables and FFCs from the DC controller (release the cables from the guides), remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the DC controller and the DC controller support. Figure 2-139 Remove the ITB motor (1 of 2) 1 184 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor (callout 3). Figure 2-140 Remove the ITB motor (2 of 2) 2 3 ENWW 1 Removal and replacement procedures 185 Drum motor (M2) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Toner collection unit. See Toner-collection unit on page 88. ● Right-front cover and control-panel assembly. See Right-front cover and control-panel assembly on page 108. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 110. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Toner collection unit access door. See Toner collection unit access door on page 112. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 115. ● Toner cover. See the first and second steps of Residual toner full sensor on page 145. Remove the drum motor Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor (callout 3). Figure 2-141 Remove the drum motor 3 2 1 186 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Developing motor (M3) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Toner collection unit. See Toner-collection unit on page 88. ● Right-front cover and control-panel assembly. See Right-front cover and control-panel assembly on page 108. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 110. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Toner collection unit access door. See Toner collection unit access door on page 112. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 115. ● Toner cover. See the first and second steps of Residual toner full sensor on page 145. Remove the developing motor Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor (callout 3). Figure 2-142 Remove the developing motor 3 2 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 187 Fuser motor (M4) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Toner collection unit. See Toner-collection unit on page 88. ● Right-front cover and control-panel assembly. See Right-front cover and control-panel assembly on page 108. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 110. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Toner collection unit access door. See Toner collection unit access door on page 112. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 115. ● Residual toner full sensor. See Residual toner full sensor on page 145. Remove the fuser motor Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor (callout 3). Figure 2-143 Remove the fuser motor 2 3 1 188 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Developing-disengagement motor (M6) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. ● Driver PCA. See Driver PCA on page 207. Remove the developing-disengagement motor Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor (callout 3). Figure 2-144 Remove the developing-disengagement motor 1 3 2 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 189 Power-supply fan (FM1) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Right-front cover and control-panel assembly. See Right-front cover and control-panel assembly on page 108. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 110. ● Front-door assembly (steps 1 and 2 only). See Front-door assembly on page 117. Remove the power-supply fan 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cables (callout 3) from the guide (callout 2). Figure 2-145 Remove the power-supply fan (1 of 3) 2 3 1 2. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the fan (callout 2) and the fan holder (callout 3) together. Figure 2-146 Remove the power-supply fan (2 of 3) 3 2 1 190 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Pull on the sides of the fan holder to remove the fan from the holder. Figure 2-147 Remove the power-supply fan (3 of 3) Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the fan, verify that the fan cables (callout 1) are positioned as shown and that the label (callout 2) on the fan is facing toward the inside of the product. 2 ENWW 1 Removal and replacement procedures 191 Fuser fan (FM2) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Right-front cover and control-panel assembly. See Right-front cover and control-panel assembly on page 108. Remove the fuser fan 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the guide (callout 3) down to remove it. Figure 2-148 Remove the fuser fan (1 of 4) 3 1 2 2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), and then release the cables (callout 3) from the cable guides (callout 2). Figure 2-149 Remove the fuser fan (2 of 4) 1 3 2 3 192 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Release four tabs (callout 1), and then remove the fan (callout 2) and the fan holder (callout 3) together. Figure 2-150 Remove the fuser fan (3 of 4) 1 1 2 4. 3 Turn the fan holder over, and then pull the fan out of the holder. Figure 2-151 Remove the fuser fan (4 of 4) Reinstallation tip ENWW Note the wiring path and label orientation for reinstallation. Removal and replacement procedures 193 Formatter fan (FM3) and ICB PCA Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 110. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 100. ● Formatter case. See Formatter case on page 123. Remove the formatter fan and ICB PCA 1. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1) and one FFC (callout 2). Figure 2-152 Remove the formatter fan (1 of 5) 2 194 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 1 ENWW 2. Remove one screw (callout 1) and then remove the sheet-metal plate (callout 2). Figure 2-153 Remove the formatter fan (2 of 5) 1 2 3. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the inter connect board (IBC) PCA (callout 3) from the assembly. Figure 2-154 Remove the formatter fan (3 of 5) 1 3 2 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 195 4. Release one tab (callout 1) and slide the formatter fan away form the sheet-metal plate to remove it. Figure 2-155 Remove the formatter fan (4 of 5) 1 5. Release three tabs (callout 1) and remove the fan (callout 2) from the holder (callout 3). Figure 2-156 Remove the formatter fan (5 of 5) 2 1 196 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 3 ENWW DC controller PCA CAUTION: Do not replace the DC controller PCA and the formatter PCA at the same time. The settings for the DC Controller PCA are stored in the formatter RAM. When you install a new DC Controller PCA, it reads the settings from the formatter. Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. Remove the DC controller PCA CAUTION: 1. ESD-sensitive part. Disconnect 22 connectors and six flat cables on the DC controller PCA (callout 1). Reinstallation tip Two connectors (callout 2) should be empty when the DC controller is reinstalled. It is typically easier to connect the flat cables last–after all other cables have been connected. Figure 2-157 Remove the DC controller PCA (1 of 3) 1 2 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 197 2. Disconnect three intermediate connectors (callout 1), and then release the cables (callout 3) from the cable guides (callout 2) on the top and right sides of the DC controller PCA. Figure 2-158 Remove the DC controller PCA (2 of 3) 3 2 1 3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the DC controller PCA (callout 2). Figure 2-159 Remove the DC controller PCA (3 of 3) 1 2 198 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Low-voltage power supply Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Tray 2 cassette. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 110. Remove the low-voltage power supply WARNING! When removing the low-voltage power supply unit (callout 1), do not touch the electric element (callout 2) as shown. Be sure to hold the bottom side of the low-voltage power supply unit. 2 1 CAUTION: ESD-sensitive part. Unplug the power cord from the product before proceeding. 1. Open the front door, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2) that have a triangular icon next to them. Figure 2-160 Remove the low-voltage power supply (1 of 3) 1 2 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 199 2. Slightly lift up on the low-voltage power supply (callout 1), slide it slightly forward, disconnect eight connectors (callout 2), and then release the cables from the front cable clamp. WARNING! Do not use the power supply electric element (callout 3) as a handle to pull out the power supply. TIP: One of the connectors (callout 2) is located far back inside the product. Figure 2-161 Remove the low-voltage power supply (2 of 3) 2 3 1 3. Release the cables (callout 2) from the rear cable clamp (callout 1), disconnect one rear connector (callout 3), and then remove the low-voltage power supply unit (callout 4). Figure 2-162 Remove the low-voltage power supply (3 of 3) 3 2 1 4 200 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Reinstallation tip When reinstallling the low-voltage power supply unit (callout 1), be careful not to catch the AC cables (callout 2) in the low-voltage power supply unit. 1 2 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 201 Imaging (developing) high-voltage power supply Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. ● Formatter case. See Formatter case on page 123. Remove the imaging (developing) high-voltage power supply CAUTION: ESD-sensitive part. Remove one screw (callout 1), release four tabs (callout 2), remove the cable routing plate (callout 3), and then remove the imaging (developing) high-voltage power supply PCA. Reinstallation tip Reinsert the power supply by angling the smaller left end behind the DC controller and driver PCA. Ensure that the power supply sits behind the black tab (callout 4). Carefully press the power supply to engage all four tabs. When you reinstall the power supply PCA, look through the holes on the PCA (callout 5) and make sure that the contact springs are correctly positioned against the back side of the PCA. Figure 2-163 Remove the imaging (developing) high-voltage power supply 2 1 5 4 3 202 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW First transfer high-voltage power supply Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Toner collection unit. See Toner-collection unit on page 88. ● Right-front cover and control-panel assembly. See Right-front cover and control-panel assembly on page 108. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 110. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Toner collection unit access door. See Toner collection unit access door on page 112. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 115. ● Toner cover. See the first and second steps of Residual toner full sensor on page 145. Remove the first transfer high-voltage power supply CAUTION: 1. ESD-sensitive part. Remove one screw (callout 1), release three tabs (callout 2), and then slide the power supply off the alignment post (callout 3). Figure 2-164 Remove the first transfer high-voltage power supply (1 of 2) 2 3 ENWW 1 Removal and replacement procedures 203 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 2), and then remove the first transfer high-voltage power supply PCA (callout 1). Figure 2-165 Remove the first transfer high-voltage power supply (2 of 2) 2 1 Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the power supply PCA, look through the holes on the PCA (callout 1) and make sure that the contact springs are correctly positioned against the back side of the PCA. Figure 2-166 Reinstall the first transfer high-voltage power supply 1 204 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Second transfer high-voltage power supply Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. Remove the second transfer high-voltage power supply CAUTION: 1. ESD-sensitive part. Disconnect all of the cables and FFCs from the DC controller (release the cables from the guides), remove five screws (callout 1), and then remove the DC controller and the DC controller support. Figure 2-167 Remove the second transfer high-voltage power supply (1 of 2) 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 205 2. Release four tabs (callout 1), and then unroute the cable (callout 2) as you remove the second transfer high-voltage power supply (callout 3). Figure 2-168 Remove the second transfer high-voltage power supply (2 of 2) 3 1 206 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 2 ENWW Driver PCA Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 111. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 114. Remove the driver PCA CAUTION: 1. ESD-sensitive part. Disconnect all of the cables and FFCs from the DC controller (release the cables from the guides), remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the DC controller and the DC controller support. Figure 2-169 Remove the driver PCA (1 of 2) 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 207 2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then unroute the cable (callout 3) as you remove the driver PCA (callout 4). Figure 2-170 Remove the driver PCA (2 of 2) 2 3 1 4 208 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Power switch PCA Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Right-front cover and control-panel assembly. See Right-front cover and control-panel assembly on page 108. Remove the power switch PCA CAUTION: ESD-sensitive part. 1. Open the front door and the right door. 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the PCA (callout 3). Figure 2-171 Remove the power switch PCA 1 3 2 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 209 Environmental sensor Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Right-front cover and control-panel assembly. See Right-front cover and control-panel assembly on page 108. Remove the environmental sensor 1. Open the front door and the right door. 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the environmental sensor (callout 3). Figure 2-172 Remove the environmental sensor 3 1 210 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 2 ENWW 1 x 500-sheet paper feeder assembly 1 x 500 rear cover Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear cover (callout 2). Figure 2-173 Remove the 1 x 500 rear cover 1 2 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 211 1 x 500 left cover 1. Take the cassette out of the feeder, release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the lever (callout 2). Figure 2-174 Remove the 1 x 500 left cover (1 of 2) 1 2 2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release four tabs from the inside (see the tip that follows this step), and then remove the left cover (callout 2). Figure 2-175 Remove the 1 x 500 left cover (2 of 2) 2 212 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 1 ENWW TIP: The following figures show the tabs inside the cover. ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 213 1 x 500 right-front cover 1. Take the cassette out of the feeder, and then open the right door. 2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the right-front cover (callout 2). Figure 2-176 Remove the 1 x 500 right-front cover 1 2 214 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 1 x 500 front-upper cover 1. Remove the cassette from the feeder, and then remove the right-front cover (see 1 x 500 right-front cover on page 214). 2. Remove two screws (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the front upper cover unit (callout 3). Figure 2-177 Remove the 1 x 500 front-upper cover 3 1 2 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 215 1 x 500 right door 1. Lift the product off the feeder, and then open the tray right door. 2. Release the link arm (callout 1). Figure 2-178 Remove the 1 x 500 right door (1 of 3) 1 3. Release the stopper (callout 1), and then release the shaft (callout 2). Figure 2-179 Remove the 1 x 500 right door (2 of 3) 2 1 216 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Slide the right door (callout 1) and the arm (callout 2) in the direction that the arrow indicates to remove them together, and then remove the arm from the right door unit. Figure 2-180 Remove the 1 x 500 right door (3 of 3) 2 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 217 1 x 500 right-lower cover 1. Remove the cassette from the feeder, and then remove the right door (see 1 x 500 right door on page 216). 2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the cover (callout 2) to the right to clear an alignment pin at the left side of the cover. Figure 2-181 Remove the 1 x 500 right-lower cover 2 1 218 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 1 x 500 pickup assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Rear cover. See 1 x 500 rear cover on page 211. ● Right-front cover. See 1 x 500 right-front cover on page 214. ● Right door. See 1 x 500 right door on page 216. ● Right-lower cover. See 1 x 500 right-lower cover on page 218. 1. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2). Figure 2-182 Remove the 1 x 500 pickup assembly (1 of 4) 1 2 2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the stopper of the right-door link (callout 2). Figure 2-183 Remove the 1 x 500 pickup assembly (2 of 4) 2 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 219 3. Remove one screw (callout 1). Figure 2-184 Remove the 1 x 500 pickup assembly (3 of 4) 1 4. Lift the 1 x 500 pickup assembly (callout 1) slightly to clear a tab (callout 2), and then slide it in the direction that the arrow indicates to remove it. Figure 2-185 Remove the 1 x 500 pickup assembly (4 of 4) 2 1 220 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Reinstallation tip When reassembling the 1 x 500 pickup assembly, be sure to fit the shaft (callout 1) on the assembly to the hole (callout 2) in the feeder. 2 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 221 1 x 500 lifter-drive assembly 1. Remove the cassette from the feeder, and then remove the rear cover (see 1 x 500 rear cover on page 211). 2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1). Figure 2-186 Remove the 1 x 500 lifter-drive assembly (1 of 2) 1 3. From the front, inside the tray cavity, remove three screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the 1 x 500 lifter-drive assembly (callout 3). Figure 2-187 Remove the 1 x 500 lifter-drive assembly (2 of 2) 2 3 1 222 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 1 x 500 pickup motor 1. Remove the cassette from the feeder, and then remove the rear cover (see 1 x 500 rear cover on page 211). 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the 1 x 500 pickup motor (callout 3). Figure 2-188 Remove the 1 x 500 pickup motor 3 2 ENWW 1 Removal and replacement procedures 223 1 x 500 driver PCA 1. Remove the cassette from the feeder, and then remove the rear cover (see 1 x 500 rear cover on page 211). 2. Disconnect seven connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), release two tabs (callout 3), and then remove the 1 x 500 driver PCA. NOTE: One connector (callout 4) on the 1 x 500 driver PCA remains empty. Figure 2-189 Remove the 1 x 500 driver PCA 3 4 1 2 224 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 3 x 500-sheet paper feeder (optional accessory) 3 x 500 rear cover Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the 3 x 500 rear cover (callout 2). Figure 2-190 Remove the 3 x 500 rear cover 1 2 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 225 3 x 500 right and left cassette rails 1. Remove a cassette. 2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the 3 x 500 right (callout 2) and left (callout 3) cassette rails. Repeat this procedure for the remaining cassette rails. Figure 2-191 Remove the 3 x 500 right and left cassette rails 3 2 1 226 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 3 x 500 paper deck controller PCAs 1. Remove the 3 x 500 rear cover (see 3 x 500 rear cover on page 225). 2. Disconnect all of the connectors for the desired PCA. 3. ● The top PCA has seven connectors. ● The middle PCA has six connectors. ● The bottom PCA has five connectors. Remove two screws (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the PCA. Repeat this procedure for the remaining PCAs. NOTE: Some connectors (callout 3) on the PCAs are not used. Figure 2-192 Remove the 3 x 500 paper deck controller PCA 2 1 3 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 227 3 x 500 paper deck lifter-drive assembly This procedure describes removing the paper deck cassette 1 lifter-drive assembly. Use this procedure for any of the paper deck lifter assemblies. 1. Remove the 3 x 500 rear cover. See 3 x 500 rear cover on page 225. 2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1). Figure 2-193 Remove the 3 x 500 paper deck lifter-drive assembly (1 of 2) 1 3. Remove all of the cassettes, remove three screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the cassette lifter assembly (callout 3). Figure 2-194 Remove the 3 x 500 paper deck lifter-drive assembly (2 of 2) 2 3 1 228 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 3 x 500 paper deck pickup motor This procedure describes removing the paper deck cassette 1 pickup motor. Use this procedure for any of the paper deck pickup motors. 1. Remove the 3 x 500 rear cover. See 3 x 500 rear cover on page 225. 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the cassette pickup motor (callout 3). Figure 2-195 Remove the 3 x 500 paper deck pickup motor 3 2 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 229 3 x 500 front-lower cover 1. Remove the lowest cassette. 2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the 3 x 500 front-lower cover (callout 2) toward the left side of the feeder to remove it. Figure 2-196 Remove the 3 x 500 front-lower cover 1 2 230 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 3 x 500 left cover 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the locking lever (callout 2). Figure 2-197 Remove the 3 x 500 left cover (1 of 2) 1 2 2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the left cover (callout 2). Figure 2-198 Remove the 3 x 500 left cover (2 of 2) 1 2 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 231 3 x 500 right-corner cover Open the right door, remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the 3 x 500 right-corner cover (callout 2). Figure 2-199 Remove the 3 x 500 right-corner cover 2 232 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 1 ENWW 3 x 500 front-upper cover 1. Remove the right-corner cover (see 3 x 500 right-corner cover on page 232). 2. Remove the upper cassette. 3. Remove two screws (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the front-upper cover (callout 3). Figure 2-200 Remove the 3 x 500 front-upper cover 3 1 2 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 233 3 x 500 right-door assembly 1. Open the right door, and then release one upper-link arm (callout 1). Figure 2-201 Remove the 3 x 500 right-door assembly (1 of 3) 1 2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the stopper (callout 2). Figure 2-202 Remove the 3 x 500 right-door assembly (2 of 3) 2 234 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 1 ENWW 3. Lift up on the door to release it, slide the lower-link arm (callout 1) along the slot in the chassis to the release point (callout 2), and then remove the 3 x 500 right door. CAUTION: The door remains attached to the feeder until the link arm is released. Do not damage the link arm when the door is removed. Figure 2-203 Remove the 3 x 500 right-door assembly (3 of 3) 1 2 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 235 3 x 500 right-lower cover 1 1. Remove the lowest cassette, and then remove the 3 x 500 right door assembly (see 3 x 500 right-door assembly on page 234). 2. Remove three screws (callout 1), loosen the top portion of the cover, and then remove the 3 x 500 rightlower cover 1. Figure 2-204 Remove the 3 x 500 right-lower cover 1 1 236 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 3 x 500 right-lower cover 2 1. Remove the 3 x 500 rear cover (see 3 x 500 rear cover on page 225). 2. Release one tab (not shown), and then slide the 3 x 500 right-lower cover 2 (callout 1) toward the back of the feeder to remove it. NOTE: The figure in this step does not show the rear cover removed. Remove the rear cover to access the tab. Figure 2-205 Remove the 3 x 500 right-lower cover 2 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 237 3 x 500 left-lower cover 1. Remove the lowest cassette, and then remove the 3 x 500 right door assembly (see 3 x 500 left cover on page 231). 2. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the 3 x 500 left-lower cover. Figure 2-206 Remove the 3 x 500 left-lower cover 1 238 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 3 x 500 rear-lower cover Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Lowest cassette. ● Rear cover. See 3 x 500 rear cover on page 225. ● Right door assembly. See 3 x 500 right-door assembly on page 234. ● Right-lower cover. See 3 x 500 right-lower cover 1 on page 236. ● Left cover. See 3 x 500 left cover on page 231. ● Left-lower cover. See 3 x 500 left-lower cover on page 238. Remove the 3 x 500 rear-lower cover Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the 3 x 500 rear-lower cover. Figure 2-207 Remove the 3 x 500 rear-lower cover 1 ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 239 3 x 500 paper deck pickup assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● 3 x 500 rear cover. See 3 x 500 rear cover on page 225. ● Right-corner cover. See 3 x 500 right-corner cover on page 232 ● Right door assembly. See 3 x 500 right-door assembly on page 234. ● Right-lower cover. See 3 x 500 rear-lower cover on page 239. NOTE: Remove this cover onlyif you are removing the paper-feeder cassette 3 pickup assembly. Remove the 3 x 500 paper deck pickup assembly This procedure describes removing the paper deck cassette 1 assembly. Use this procedure for any of the paper deck pickup assemblies. 1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2). Figure 2-208 Remove the 3 x 500 paper deck pickup assembly (1 of 3) 1 2 240 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Remove the cassette, remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the right-door link stopper (callout 2). Figure 2-209 Remove the 3 x 500 paper deck pickup assembly (2 of 3) 1 2 3. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the paper deck pickup assembly (callout 2). Figure 2-210 Remove the 3 x 500 paper deck pickup assembly (3 of 3) 1 ENWW 2 Removal and replacement procedures 241 242 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 3 Solve problems To use the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the HP LaserJet printing process. Explanations of each mechanical assembly, the printer systems, and the basic theory of operation are contained in the English-language service manual. Do not perform any of these troubleshooting processes unless you understand the function of each product component. ENWW ● Solve problems checklist ● Menu map ● Troubleshooting process ● Tools for troubleshooting ● Clear jams ● Solve paper-handling problems ● Use manual print modes ● Solve image-quality problems ● Clean the product ● Solve performance problems ● Solve connectivity problems ● Service mode functions ● Preboot menu options ● Product updates 243 Solve problems checklist If the product is not responding correctly, complete the steps in the following checklist, in order. If the product does not pass a step, follow the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions. If a step resolves the problem, you can stop without performing the other steps on the checklist. 1. The control-panel display and LEDs may be off if the product is in Sleep Mode. If the device does not respond to a key press, then it is either not in Sleep Mode or will now come out of Sleep Mode. If no LEDs are illuminated or the control-panel display does not come on, use the Power-on checks section in the product service manual to troubleshoot the problem. 2. Check the cables. 3. a. Check the cable connection between the product and the computer or network port. Make sure that the connection is secure. b. Make sure that the cable itself is not faulty by using a different cable, if possible. c. Check the network connection. Ensure that the print media that you are using meets specifications. ● Ensure your maintenance items don’t need to be replaced. Print a Supplies Status Page to verify they are not at end of life. Estimate life for maintenance items ◦ ◦ Fuser Kit—estimated life: 150,000 images ● 110V kit number: CE977A ● 220V kit number: CE978A ITB/ETB Transfer Kit (include ITB, T2 roller, feed and suppression rollers for all trays)— estimated life: 150,000 images ● ◦ Toner Collection Unit—estimated life: 150,000 images ● 4. 5. 6. Kit number: CE516A Kit number: CE980A Print a configuration page. If the product is connected to a network, an HP Jetdirect page also prints. a. If the pages do not print, check that at least one tray contains print media. b. If the page jams in the product, see the jams section. If the configuration page prints, check the following items. a. If the page prints correctly, the product hardware is working. The problem is with the computer you are using, with the printer driver, or with the program. b. If the page does not print correctly, the problem is with the product hardware. Does the image quality meet the user's requirements? If yes, see step 7. If no, check the following items: 244 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 7. ● Print the print-quality (PQ) troubleshooting pages. ● Solve the print-quality problems, and then see step 7. At the computer, check to see if the print queue is stopped, paused, or set to print offline. Windows: Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes. Double-click the HP Color LaserJet M750n, HP Color LaserJet M750dn, or HP Color LaserJet M750xh item depending on the product model installed. -orMac OS X: Open Printer Setup Utility, and then double-click the line for the HP Color LaserJet M750n, HP Color LaserJet M750dn, or HP Color LaserJet M750xh item depending on the product model installed. ENWW 8. Verify that you have installed the HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M750 Printer Series printer driver. Check the program to make sure that you are using the HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M750 Printer Series printer driver. 9. Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution works, the problem is with the program that you are using. If this solution does not work (the document does not print) complete these steps: a. Try printing the job from another computer that has the product software installed. b. If you connected the product to the network, connect the product directly to a computer with a USB cable. Redirect the product to the correct port, or reinstall the software, and select the new connection type that you are using. Solve problems checklist 245 Menu map Print the menu maps 1. At the control panel, press the Home button . 2. Open the following menus: ● Administration ● Reports ● Configuration/Status Pages 3. Use the Down arrow button button to select it. 4. Use the Up arrow button 5. Press the Home button to highlight the Administration Menu Map item, and then press the OK to highlight the Print item, and then press the OK button. or Back button to exit the menus. Current settings pages Printing the current settings pages provides a map of the user configurable settings that might be helpful in the troubleshooting process. Print the current settings pages 1. At the control panel, press the Home button . 2. Open the following menus: ● Administration ● Reports ● Configuration/Status Pages 3. Use the Down arrow button to select it. 4. Use the Up arrow button 5. Press the Home button 246 Chapter 3 Solve problems to highlight the Current Settings Page item, and then press the OK button to highlight the Print item, and then press the OK button or Back button to exit the menus. ENWW Control panel menus To use all of the capabilities of this product, a firmware upgrade might be required. HP recommends that you periodically go to www.hp.com/support/colorljM750 to see if a new version of firmware is available. NOTE: Print a configuration page to determine the version of firmware currently installed in this product. Navigate the control-panel menus ● Press the Home button ● Use the up arrow button ● Press the OK button to select the menu item. to access the menus. and down arrow button to highlight a desired menu item. Sign In menu Table 3-1 Sign In menu First level Second level User Access Code Access Code Administrator Access Code Access Code Service Access Code Access Code Values Retrieve Job From USB menu Use the Retrieve Job From USB menu to view listings of jobs stored on an external USB memory device. Table 3-2 Retrieve Job From USB menu First level Second level Values Retrieve Job From USB OK Cancel Select a File or Folder Select from the provided list. Retrieve Job From Device Memory menu Use the Retrieve Job From Device Memory menu to view listings of jobs stored on the internal product memory. Table 3-3 Retrieve Job From Device Memory menu First level Second level Third level Values Retrieve Job From Device Memory All Jobs (No PIN) Print Range: 1 – 9999 NOTE: Individual job names also appear. ENWW Default = 1 Delete Select from the provided list. Menu map 247 Supplies menu In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-4 Supplies menu First level Second level Manage Supplies Print Supplies Status Supply Settings Third level Fourth level Black Cartridge Very Low Settings Values Stop Prompt to continue* Continue Color Cartridges Low Threshold Settings 1-100% Very Low Settings Stop Prompt to continue* Continue Low Threshold Settings Cyan 1-100% Magenta Yellow Transfer Kit Very Low Settings Stop Prompt to continue* Continue Fuser Kit Very Low Settings Stop Prompt to continue* Continue Restrict Color Mix Low Threshold Settings 1-100% Low Threshold Settings 1-100% Enable color Disable color Color if allowed Color/Black Mix Auto* Mostly Color Pages Mostly Black Pages Supply Messages Low Message On* Off 248 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-4 Supplies menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Level Gauge Fourth level Values On* Off Reset Supplies New Fuser New Transfer Kit ENWW Menu map 249 Trays menu In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-5 Trays menu First level Second level Values Manage Trays Use Requested Tray Exclusively* First Manually Feed Prompt Always* Unless loaded Size/Type Prompt Display* Do not display Use Another Tray Enabled* Disabled Alternative Letterhead Mode Disabled* Enabled Duplex Blank Pages Auto* Yes Override A4/Letter Yes* No Tray 1 Size Select from a provided list. Tray 1 Type Select from a provided list. Tray 2 Size Select from a provided list. Tray 2 Type Select from a provided list. Tray 3 Size Select from a provided list. Tray 3 Type Select from a provided list. Tray 4 Size Select from a provided list. Tray 4 Type Select from a provided list. Tray 5 Size Select from a provided list. Tray 5 Type Select from a provided list. Tray 6 Size Select from a provided list. Tray 6 Type Select from a provided list. 250 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Administration menu Reports menu Table 3-6 Reports menu First level Second level Configuration/Status Pages Print Third level Values Administration Menu Map Current setting page Configuration Page Supplies Status Page Usage Page File Directory Page Web Services Status Page Color Usage Job Log Other Pages Print Demonstration Page RGB Samples CMYK Samples PCL Font List PS Font List General Settings menu In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-7 General Settings menu First level Second level Third level Date/Time Settings Date/Time Format Date Format Fourth level Values DD/MMM/YYYY MMM/DD/YYYY* YYYY/MMM/DD Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM)* 24 hours Date/Time Date Time Time Zone Adjust for Daylight Savings On Off* ENWW Menu map 251 Table 3-7 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Energy Settings Sleep Timer Settings Sleep/Auto Timer Fourth level Values Enable Disable NOTE: For units sold in Europe (Blue Angel), there will be no option to disable sleep. Sleep/Auto Off After 60* 0 - 120 minutes NOTE: Setting this value to “0” will cause the product to attempt to enter sleep as soon as possible. Optimum Speed/Energy Usage Faster first page* Save energy Save more energy Save most energy Print Quality Adjust Color Highlights Cyan -5 to 5 Magenta Default = 0 Yellow Black Midtones Cyan -5 to 5 Magenta Default = 0 Yellow Black Shadows Cyan -5 to 5 Magenta Default = 0 Yellow Black Restore Color Values Image Registration Adjust Tray Print Test Page X1 Shift -5.00 mm to 5.00 mm Y1 Shift Default = 0 X2 Shift Y2 Shift 252 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-7 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Auto Sense Mode Tray 1 Sensing Fourth level Values Full sensing Expanded sensing* Transparency Only Tray X Sensing Expanded sensing* Transparency Only Adjust Paper Types Select from a list of paper types that the product supports. The available options are the same for each paper type. Print Mode Select from a list of print modes. Default = Auto Sense Mode Resistance Mode Normal* Up Down Humidity Mode Normal* High Fuser Temp Mode Normal* Up Down Paper Curl Mode Normal* Reduced Optimize Normal Paper Standard* Smooth Light Media Normal* Alternate Heavy Paper Standard* Smooth Envelop Control Normal* Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Environment Normal* Low Temp Line Voltage Normal* Low Voltage Tray 1 Normal* Alternate ENWW Menu map 253 Table 3-7 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Cleaning Control Fourth level Values Normal* Alternate Background Normal* Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 Media Temp Normal* Alternate Uniformity Control Normal* Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 Pre-Rotation Mode Normal* Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 Registration Normal* Alternate Transfer Control Normal* Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 Moisture Control Normal* Alternate Restore Optimize Edge Control Off Light Normal* Maximum Jam Recovery Auto* Off On 254 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-7 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Auto Recovery Values Enable Disable* General Stored Job Settings Sort Stored Jobs By Job Name Default Folder Name Date Untitled Temporary Stored Jobs Retain Temporary Jobs After Reboot Do not retain Personal jobs only All temporary jobs Quick Copy Job Held Timeout Off* 1 Hour 4 Hours 1 Day 1 Week Enable Retrieve from USB Enabled Disabled* Enable AutoSend Disabled* Enabled Hold Off Print Job Enabled* Disabled Restore Factory Settings Cancel Restore General Print Settings menu In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-8 Print Settings menu First level Manual Feed Second level Values Enabled Disabled* Courier Font Regular* Dark Wide A4 Enabled Disabled* ENWW Menu map 255 Table 3-8 Print Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Suppress Blank Pages Values No* Yes Print PS Errors Enabled Disabled* Print PDF Errors Enabled Disabled* Personality Auto* PCL POSTSCRIPT PDF PCL Form Length Range: 5 – 128 Default = 60 Orientation Portrait* Landscape Font Source Internal* Soft USB Font Number Range: 0 – 999 Default = 0 Font Pitch Range: 0.44 – 99.99 Default = 10 Font Point Size Range: 4.00 – 999.75 Default = 12.00 Symbol Set Select from a list of symbol sets. Append CR to LF No* Yes Media Source Mapping Standard* Classic Default Print Options menu In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. 256 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-9 Default Print Options menu First level Second level Values Number of Copies Default = 1 Default Paper Size Select from a list of sizes that the product supports. Default Custom Paper Size Inches X Dimension Range: 2.99 – 12.28 Default = 12.28 Y Dimension Range: 5.00 – 18.50 Default = 18.5 MM X Dimension Range: 76 – 312 Default = 312 Y Dimension Range: 127 – 470 Default = 470 Sides 1-sided* 2-sided Two-Sided Format Book-style* Flip-style Enable Edge to Edge Overrides Enabled Disabled* ENWW Menu map 257 Display Settings menu In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-10 Display Settings menu First level Display Brightness Second level Values Range: -10 to 10 Default = 0 Language Select from a list of languages that the product supports. Show IP address Display* Hide Inactivity Timeout Range: 10 – 300 seconds Default = 60 Clearable Warnings On Job* Continuable Events Auto-continue (10 seconds)* Touch OK to continue 258 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Manage Supplies menu In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-11 Manage Supplies menu First level Second level Third level Black Cartridge Very Low Settings Fourth level Values Print Supply Status Supply Settings Stop Prompt to continue* Continue Color Cartridges Low Threshold Settings 1-100% Very Low Settings Stop Prompt to continue* Continue Low Threshold Settings Cyan 1-100% Magenta Yellow Transfer Kit Very Low Settings Stop Prompt to continue* Continue Fuser Kit Very Low Settings Stop Prompt to continue* Continue Restrict Color Use Low Threshold Settings 1-100% Low Threshold Settings 1-100% Auto* Mostly color pages Mostly black pages Color/Black Mix Auto* Mostly Color Pages Mostly Black Pages Store Usage Data On supplies Not on supplies Supply Messages Low Message On* Off ENWW Menu map 259 Table 3-11 Manage Supplies menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Level Gauge Values On* Off Reset Supplies New Fuser Kit No Yes New Transfer Kit No Yes Manage Trays menu In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-12 Manage Trays menu First level Values Use Requested Tray Exclusively* First Manually Feed Prompt Always* Unless loaded Size/Type Prompt Display* Do not display Use Another Tray Enabled* Disabled Alternative Letterhead Mode Disabled* Enabled Duplex Blank Pages Auto* Yes Image Rotation Standard Alternate Override A4/Letter Yes* No 260 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Network Settings menu In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-13 Network Settings menu First level Values I/O Timeout Range: 5 – 300 sec Default = 15 Embedded Jetdirect Menu See the table that follows for details. These menus have the same structure. If an additional HP Jetdirect network card is installed in the EIO slot, then both menus are available. Table 3-14 Embedded Jetdirect Menu First level Second level Information Print Sec Report Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Yes No* TCP/IP Enable On* Off Host Name Use the arrow buttons to edit the host name. NPIXXXXXX* IPV4 Settings Config Method Bootp* DHCP Auto IP Manual Default IP Auto IP* Legacy DHCP Release Yes No* DHCP Renew Yes No* Primary DNS Range: 0 – 255 Default = xxx.xxx.xx.xx Secondary DNS Range: 0 – 255 Default = 0.0.0.0 IPV6 Settings Enable On* Off ENWW Menu map 261 Table 3-14 Embedded Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Address Manual Settings Enable On Off* Address DHCPV6 Policy Select from a provided list. Router Specified Router Unavailable* Always Security Primary DNS Select from a provided list. Secondary DNS Select from a provided list. Proxy Server Select from a provided list. Proxy Port Default = 00080 Idle Timeout Default = 0270 Secure Web HTTPS Required* HTTPS Optional IPSEC Keep Disable* 802.1X Reset Keep* Announcement Agent Reset Security Yes No* Diagnostics Embedded Tests LAN HW Test Yes No* HTTP Test Yes No* SNMP Test Yes No* Data Path Test Yes No* Select All Tests Yes No* 262 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-14 Embedded Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Execution Time [H] Fourth level Fifth level Values Range: 1 – 60 hours Default = 1 Execute Yes No* Ping Test Dest Type IPv4 IPv6 Dest IPv4 Range: 0 – 255 Default = 127.0.0.1 Dest IPv6 Select from a provided list. Default = : : 1 Packet Size Default = 64 Timeout Default = 001 Count Default = 004 Print Results Yes No* Execute Yes No* Ping Results Packets Sent Default = 00000 Packets Received Default = 00000 Percent Lost Default = 000 RTT Min Default = 0000 RTT Max Default = 0000 RTT Average Default = 0000 Ping In Progress Yes No* ENWW Menu map 263 Table 3-14 Embedded Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Refresh Yes No* Link Speed Auto* 10T Half 10T Full 100TX Half 100TX Full 100TX Auto 1000TX Full Troubleshooting menu In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-15 Troubleshooting menu First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Exit Troubleshooting NOTE: This item only displays if you are backing out of the Troubleshooting menu. Print Event Log View Event Log Print Paper Path Page Print Quality Pages Print PQ Troubleshooting Pages Diagnostics Page Color Band Test Print Test Page Copies Range: 1 – 30 Default = 1 Diagnostic Tests Disable Cartridge Check Paper Path Sensors Paper Path Test Start Test Print Test Page Print Source Select from a list of the available trays. Test Duplex Path Off* On 264 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-15 Troubleshooting menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Number of Copies Range: 1 – 500 Default = 1 Manual Sensor Test Select from a list of the product sensors. Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test Select from a list of the product sensors. Component Test Select from a list of available components. Repeat Off* On Print/Stop Test Retrieve Diagnostic Data Export to USB Diagnostic Files Device Data File Debug Information File* Include Crash Dumps Off On* Cleanup Debug Info Off On* General Debug Data Device Maintenance menu Backup/Restore menu CAUTION: Data backup and restoration is the responsibility of the customer/administrator of the product. Service personnel should not back up or restore customer data under any circumstances. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-16 Backup/Restore menu First level Second level Third level Values Backup Data Scheduled Backups Enable Scheduling Disabled* Enabled Backup Time Default = current time Days Between Backups Default = 1 Backup Now ENWW Menu map 265 Table 3-16 Backup/Restore menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Values Export Last Backup Restore Data Insert a USB drive that contains the backup file. Calibration/Cleaning menu In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-17 Calibration/Cleaning menu First level Second level Values Print Cleaning Page Clean Laser Glass Quick Calibration Full Calibration Restore Calibration Cancel Restore Delay Calibration at Wake/Power On Yes* No USB Firmware Upgrade menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the USB Firmware Upgrade menu. Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the on-screen instructions. 266 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Service menu The personal identification number (PIN; Service Access Code) used to access the Service menu is 11075013. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. First level Second level Third level Values Total Engine Cycles 0* Mono Cycle Counts Range: 0 – 9999999 Color Cycle Count 0* User Access Code Administrator Access Code Service Access Code Print Event Log View Event Log Clear Event Log Cycle Counts Range: 0 – 9999999 Refurbish Cycle Count 0* Range: 0 – 9999999 Serial Number Service ID 20182* Cold Reset Paper Letter* A4 New Registration Roller Yes No* Low Alerts Enable Disabled Rest Low Alerts Settings Reset to level 1 Reset to level 2 Reset to level 3 Set to non-HP managed mode Media Sensor Value 0* Range: 0 – 4095 Manual Laser Glass Cleaning Test Support Continuous Print from USB Automatic Calibrations Disabled Enabled* ENWW Menu map 267 Troubleshooting process When the product malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the product control panel alerts you to the situation. This chapter contains information to help diagnose and solve problems. ● Use the pretroubleshooting checklist to evaluate the source of the problem and to reduce the number of steps that are required to fix the problem. ● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the malfunction. Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues: ● Are supply items within their rated life? ● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors? NOTE: The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good condition. Determine the problem source When the product malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the product control panel alerts you to the situation. This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible causes of the problem. A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem. The remainder of this chapter provides steps for correcting problems. Pre-troubleshooting checklist The following table includes basic questions to ask the customer to quickly help define the problem. General topic Questions Environment ● Is the product installed on a solid, level surface (+/- 1°)? ● Is the power-supply voltage within ± 10 volts of the specified power source? ● Is the power-supply plug inserted in the product and the outlet (not a power strip)? ● Is the operating environment within the specified parameters? ● Is the product exposed to ammonia gas, such as that produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials? NOTE: Diazo copiers produce ammonia gas as part of the coping processes. Ammonia gas (from cleaning supplies or a diazo copier) can have an adverse affect on some product components (for example, the print-cartridge OPC). Media 268 Chapter 3 Solve problems ● Is the product exposed to direct sunlight? ● Does the customer use only supported media? ● Is the media in good condition (no curls, folds, or distortion)? ● Is the media stored correctly and within environmental limits? ENWW General topic Questions Input trays ● Is the amount of media in the tray within specifications? ● Is the media correctly placed in the tray? ● Are the paper guides aligned with the stack? ● Is the cassette correctly installed in the product? ● Is each print cartridge installed correctly? ● Are original HP print cartridges installed? ● Are the cartridges damaged? ● Are the ITB and fuser correctly installed? ● Is the ITB or fuser damaged? Doors ● Are the right and front doors closed? Condensation ● Does condensation occur following a temperature change (particularly in winter following cold storage)? If so, wipe affected parts dry or leave the product on for 10 to 20 minutes. ● Was a print cartridge opened soon after being moved from a cold to a warm room? If so, allow the print cartridge to sit at room temperature for 1 to 2 hours. ● Check for and remove any non-HP components (for example, print cartridges or memory modules) from the product. ● Check to see whether the hardware or software configuration has changed or the problem is not associated with any specific software. ● Remove the product from the network and ensure that the failure is associated with the product before beginning troubleshooting. ● For any print-quality issues, calibrate the product. See Calibrate the product. Print cartridges ITB and fuser Miscellaneous Troubleshooting flowchart This flowchart highlights the general processes that you can follow to quickly isolate and solve product hardware problems. Each row depicts a major troubleshooting step. A “yes” answer to a question allows you to proceed to the next major step. A “no” answer indicates that more testing is needed. Go to the appropriate section in this chapter, and follow the instructions there. After completing the instructions, go to the next major step in this troubleshooting flowchart. Table 3-18 Troubleshooting flowchart 1 Power on Is the product on and does a readable message display? Yes 2 Control panel messages ENWW No Does the message Ready display on the control panel? Yes No Follow the power-on troubleshooting checks. See Power subsystem. After the control panel display is functional, see step 2. If an error message displays, see Interpret control-panel messages and event log entries. After the errors have been corrected, go to step 3. Troubleshooting process 269 Table 3-18 Troubleshooting flowchart (continued) 3 Event log Open the Troubleshooting menu and print an event log to see the history of errors with this product. If the event log does not print, see Print or view an event log. Does the event log print? If error messages display on the control panel when you try to print an event log, see Print or view an event log. Yes 4 Information pages No Open the Reports menu and print the configuration pages to verify that all the accessories are installed. Are all the accessories installed? Yes 5 Image quality 6 Interface After successfully printing and evaluating the event log, see step 4. If accessories that are installed are not listed on the configuration page, remove the accessory and reinstall it. After evaluating the configuration pages, see step 5. No Does the print quality meet the customer's requirements? Yes If paper jams inside the product, see Clear jams. No Compare the images with the sample defects in the image defect tables. See Print quality examples. After the print quality is acceptable, see step 6. Can the customer print successfully from the host computer? Verify that all I/O cables are connected correctly and that a valid IP address is listed on the Jetdirect configuration page. Yes. This is the end of the troubleshooting process. If error messages display on the control panel, see Print or view an event log. 270 Chapter 3 Solve problems No When the customer can print from the host computer, this is the end of the troubleshooting process. ENWW Power subsystem Power-on checks The basic product functions should start up when the product is plugged into an electrical outlet and the power switch is pushed to the on position. If the product does not start, use the information in this section to isolate and solve the problem. Power-on troubleshooting overview Turn on the product power. If the control panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or asterisks remain on the control panel display, perform power-on checks to find the cause of the problem. During normal operation, the power supply, fuser, and formatter cooling fans begin to spin after the product power is turned on. Place your hand over the holes in the left-side cover, near the formatter. If the fan is operating, you will feel air passing out of the product. You can also lean close to the product and hear the fan operating. You can also place your hand over the hole in the right-front lower corner. If the fan is operating, you should feel air being drawn into the product. When these fans are operational, the DC side of the power supply is functioning correctly. After the fans are operating, the motor turn on and off (unless the right or front cover is open, a jam condition is sensed, or the paper-path sensors are damaged). You might be able to visually and audibly determine if the motors turn on and off. If the fans and motors are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine, formatter, and control panel problems. Perform an engine test (see Engine test button). If the formatter is damaged, it might interfere with the engine test. If the engine-test page does not print, try removing the formatter and then performing the engine test again. If the engine test is then successful, the problem is almost certainly with the formatter, the control panel, or the cable that connects them. If the control panel is blank when you turn on the product, check the following items. 1. Make sure that the product is plugged directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip) that delivers the correct voltage. 2. Make sure that the power switch is in the on position. 3. Make sure that the fans run briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational. 4. Make sure that the control panel display wire harness is connected. 5. Make sure that the formatter is seated and operating correctly. Turn off the product and remove the formatter. Reinstall the formatter, and then verify that the heartbeat LED is flashing. NOTE: If the control panel display is blank, but the cooling fans run after the product power is turned on, try printing an engine-test page to determine whether the problem is with the control-panel display, formatter, or other product components. See Engine test button. Power-on timing (approximate) Power-on timing from boot sequence to the Ready state might change as the firmware is upgraded. ENWW ● 00.00 seconds; power-button LED illuminates and fans rotate at high speed ● 00.06 seconds; engine noises begin ● 00:10 seconds; HP logo appears on the control-panel display, boot sequence count appears on the control-panel display Troubleshooting process 271 Boot sequence ◦ 1/8 = 10 seconds ◦ 2/8 = 15 seconds NOTE: Depending on how the product was shut down, the product might stay at this point for several minutes while the Disk Check process completes. ◦ 7/8 = 25 seconds ◦ 8/8 = 35 seconds ● 36 seconds; hardware Initialization begins ● 45 seconds; initialization n count begins ● 01:30 seconds; fuser fan noise stops and engine noises stop ● 01:50 seconds; product enters the Ready state 272 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Tools for troubleshooting Component diagnostics LED diagnostics LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot product problems. Understand lights on the formatter Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the product is functioning correctly. 3 1 2 1 Formatter connectivity LED (lit when formatter is correctly seated) 2 HP Jetdirect LEDs 3 Heartbeat LED HP Jetdirect LEDs The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has failed. For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, you can try to manually configure the link settings on the embedded print server by using the product control-panel menus. ENWW 1. Press the Home button . 2. Press the Down arrow to highlight the Administration menu, and then press the OK button. 3. Press the Down arrow to highlight the Network Settings menu, and then press the OK button. 4. Press the Down arrow button. to highlight the Embedded Jetdirect Menu option, and then press the OK Tools for troubleshooting 273 5. Press the Down arrow to highlight the Link Speed menu, and then press the OK button. 6. Select the appropriate link speed, and then press the OK button. Heartbeat LED The heartbeat LED provides information about product operation. If a product error occurs, the formatter displays a message on the control-panel display. However, error situations can occur causing the formatterto-control panel communication to be interrupted. NOTE: HP recommends fully troubleshooting the formatter and control panel before replacing either assembly. Use the heartbeat LED to troubleshoot formatter and control panel errors to avoid unnecessarily replacing these assemblies. Formatter-to-control panel communication interruptions ● The firmware does not fully initialize and configure the control panel interface. ● The control panel is not functioning (either a failed assembly or power problem). ● Interface cabling between the formatter and control panel is damaged or disconnected. TIP: If the heartbeat LED is illuminated—by an error condition or normal operation—the formatter is fully seated and the power is on. The pins for the LED circuit in the formatter connector are recessed so that this LED will not illuminate unless the formatter is fully seated. The heartbeat LED operates according to the product state. When the product is initializing, see Heartbeat LED, product initialization. When the product is in Ready mode, see Heartbeat LED, product operational. Heartbeat LED, product initialization The following table describes the heartbeat LED operation while the product is executing the firmware boot process. NOTE: When the initialization process completes, the heartbeat LED should be illuminated solid green. If after initialization, the heartbeat LED is not solid green, see Heartbeat LED, product operational. Table 3-19 Heartbeat LED, product initialization Product initializing state Heartbeat LED, normal state Heartbeat LED, error state No power (power cable disconnected or power switch off) Off Not applicable Power on (immediately after the power switch pressed) Red, solid Red, solid ● ● Duration should be 1 second or less Firmware error; problem finding hardware and booting the serial peripheral interface flash memory ◦ Boot process halted Replace the formatter. Serial peripheral interface (SPI) flash memory boot 274 Chapter 3 Solve problems Green, solid Red, solid ● Firmware error; problem corrupt or missing SPI flash memory ENWW Table 3-19 Heartbeat LED, product initialization (continued) Product initializing state Heartbeat LED, normal state Heartbeat LED, error state ◦ Boot process halted Replace the formatter. HW checks on board DRAM Green, solid Red, solid ● Power on self check failure ◦ Boot process halted Replace the formatter. Control panel connection initializes Green, solid Yellow, fast flash NOTE: Control panel communication successful. If an error occurs, a message will appear on the control-panel display. ● Formatter to control panel connection failed ◦ Boot process continues Check the cables between the formatter and control panel for damage. Make sure that the cables are fully seated. Preboot menu available (including diagnostics) Green, solid Red, solid ● Diagnostic failure ◦ Follow diagnostic instructions Turn the power off, and then on again to restart the initialization process. Accessing disk for firmware image Green, solid Yellow, fast flash NOTE: If applicable, disk error messages appear on the control-panel display. ● Firmware boot Green, solid Yellow, fast flash NOTE: If applicable, error messages appear on the control-panel display. ● Green, heartbeat blink Yellow, fast flash NOTE: If applicable, error messages appear on the control-panel display. ● Not applicable LED off Product operational 49.XX.YY error or initialization freezes Control panel not connected Control panel not connected Control panel not connected NOTE: An error message (for example, 49.XX.YY) might appear on the control-panel display. Eventually a formatter connection missing message will appear. Turn the power off, and then on again to restart the initialization process. If the error persists, perform a firmware upgrade. ENWW Control panel connection interrupted after the product is operational Not applicable Sleep Mode Green, slow blink Yellow, fast flash ● Control panel not connected Not applicable Tools for troubleshooting 275 Table 3-19 Heartbeat LED, product initialization (continued) Product initializing state Heartbeat LED, normal state Heartbeat LED, error state Approaching Sleep Mode Green, slow blink Not applicable Wake up from Sleep Mode Follows initialization progression Follows initialization progression Approaching wake up from Sleep Mode Follows initialization progression Follows initialization progression Heartbeat LED, product operational The following table describes the heartbeat operation when the product completes the firmware boot process and is in the Ready state. Table 3-20 Heartbeat LED, product operational LED color Description Green ● Yellow Red Off ● ● Normal operation ◦ Formatter is operating normally ◦ Firmware is operating normally ◦ Control panel is connected Formatter cannot connect to the control panel ◦ Check control panel connections ◦ Verify control panel functionality Formatter error or failure ◦ Serial peripheral interface (SPI) flash memory boot error ◦ Power on self test (formatter) failed ◦ Diagnostic (formatter) failed TIP: The connectivity LED is off if the power cable is disconnected, the product power switch is in the off position, or the product is in Sleep Mode. ● Firmware or system freeze ◦ Check control panel for an error message ◦ Control panel failure NOTE: This condition is not usually caused by a formatter failure. Turn the power off, and then on again. If the error persists, perform a firmware upgrade. Engine diagnostics This section provides an overview of the engine diagnostics that are available in the HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M750 Printer Series product. The product contains extensive internal diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality, paper path, noise, component, and timing issues. 276 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Defeating interlocks Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For component or noise isolation, you can run the diagnostic test when the front and right doors are open. To operate the product with the doors open, the door switch levers must be depressed to simulate a closed-door position. WARNING! Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury. Only trained service personnel should open the doors and run the diagnostics with the covers removed. Never touch any of the power supplies when the printer is plugged in or turned on. Defeat the right-door opening/closing sensor (PS15) 1. Open the right and front doors. 2. Insert a thin piece of paper into the right-door sensor slot (callout 1). CAUTION: Using too thick of a piece of paper to activate this sensor might dislodge the photointerrupter body from its mounting bracket. Make sure you use a thin piece of paper to activate the sensor. Figure 3-1 Defeating door interlocks (1 of 2) 1 ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 277 3. Insert a folded piece of paper into the front door switch (callout 1). Wait until the product enters the Ready state. NOTE: The paper must be thick enough to depress and hold in place the sensor actuator arm. Figure 3-2 Defeating door interlocks (2 of 2) 1 Disable cartridge check Use this diagnostic test to print internal pages or send an external job to the product when one or more print cartridges are removed or exchanged. Consumable supply errors are ignored while the product is in this mode. When the product is in this mode, you can navigate the troubleshooting menus and print internal pages (the print quality pages will be the most useful). This test can be used isolate problems, such as noise, and to isolate print-quality problems that are related to individual print cartridges. NOTE: Cartridges are not keyed and can be interchanged. An error will display on the control panel if a print cartridge is installed in the wrong position. The Supplies Status menu will explain which print cartridge is misplaced. NOTE: Do not remove or exchange print cartridges and image drums until after you start the disable cartridge check diagnostic. 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: 3. button. ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests Press the Down arrow to highlight DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK, and then press the OK button . To exit this diagnostic test, press the Stop button 278 Chapter 3 Solve problems and then select EXIT TROUBLESHOOTING. ENWW Engine test button 1. Turn the product on. 2. Use a fine-point tool, (for example a precision-slotted screwdriver with a 1 mm (0.04 in) blade width) to press the engine test button. NOTE: Access the engine test button through a hole in the rear cover. 3. An engine test page (lines in each of the print cartridge colors) prints. Figure 3-3 Engine test button location Paper-path test This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages that you can use to isolate the cause of jams. To isolate a problem, specify which input tray to use, specify whether to use the duplex path, and specify the number of copies to print. Multiple copies can be printed to help isolate intermittent problems. The following options become available after you start the diagnostic feature: ● Print Test Page. Run the paper-path test from the default settings: Tray 2, no duplex, and one copy. To specify other settings, scroll down the menu and select the setting, and then scroll back up and select Print Test Page to start the test. ● Source Tray. Select Tray 1, Tray 2, or the optional tray. ● Test Duplex Path. Enable or disable two-sided printing. NOTE: Duplex models only. ENWW ● Number of Copies. Set the numbers of copies to be printed; the choices are 1,10, 50, 100, or 500. 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: button. Tools for troubleshooting 279 ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests to highlight PAPER PATH TEST, and then press the OK button. 3. Press the Down arrow 4. Select the paper-path test options for the test you want to run. Manual sensor test Use this diagnostic test to manually test the product sensors and switches. Each sensor is represented by a letter and number on the control panel display. 1. Press the Home button . 2. Open the following menus: 3. ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests Press the Down arrow to highlight the Manual Sensor Test item, and then press the OK button. To exit this diagnostic, press the Stop button , and then select EXIT TROUBLESHOOTING. Menus cannot be opened during this test, so the OK button serves the same function as the Stop button . Table 3-21 Manual sensor diagnostic tests Sensor or switch name Sensor or switch number Front door opening/closing switch PS14 Right door opening/closing sensor PS15 A TOP (top of page) sensor PS5 Fuser loop 1 sensor PS7 Fuser loop 2 sensor PS8 Fuser pressure-release sensor PS9 Fuser output sensor PS6 Developer alienation sensor PS11 ITB alienation sensor SW5 280 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Front-door opening/closing switch (PS14) NOTE: This switch is also activated by the right door. See Right-door opening/closing sensor (PS15) on page 282. During this test, the right door must remain closed. 1. Open the front-door assembly to disengage the front-door opening/closing switch. 2. Close the front-door assembly, and then check the control panel on the product for sensor response. TIP: You can leave the front door open and use a folded piece of paper to activate the switch. Figure 3-4 Test the front-door opening/closing switch ENWW 3. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 4. If there is no response, replace the front-door opening/closing microswitch or the cable. Tools for troubleshooting 281 Right-door opening/closing sensor (PS15) NOTE: The front-door opening/closing switch (PS14) is also activated by the right door. During this test, the front door must remain closed. 1. Open the right-door assembly to disengage the right-door opening/closing photo-interrupter sensor. 2. Insert a piece of paper (callout 1) to override the front-door opening/closing switch (PS14). NOTE: The paper must be thick enough to depress and hold in place the sensor actuator arm. Figure 3-5 Test the right-door opening/closing switch (1 of 2) 1 282 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 3. Insert a thin piece of paper (callout 1) to activate the right-door opening/closing sensor (PS15). CAUTION: Using too thick of a piece of paper to activate this sensor might dislodge the photointerrupter body from its mounting bracket. Make sure you use a thin piece of paper to activate the sensor. Figure 3-6 Test the right-door opening/closing switch (2 of 2) 1 4. ENWW If there is no response, replace the right-door sensor. Tools for troubleshooting 283 TOP (top-of-page) sensor (PS5) 1. Open the right door, and then locate the sensor flag (callout 1). Figure 3-7 Test the TOP sensor (1 of 2) 1 2. Activate the TOP sensor. Figure 3-8 Test the TOP sensor (2 of 2) 3. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 4. If there is no response, replace the registration assembly. 284 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Fuser loop sensors 1 and 2 (PS7 and PS8) 1. Open the right door. 2. Slowly insert a piece of paper at the entrance of the fuser to activate the fuser loop sensors 1 and 2 underneath the fuser. Figure 3-9 Test the fuser loop sensors ENWW 3. Check the control-panel display for a sensor response. 4. If there is no response, replace fuser. Tools for troubleshooting 285 Fuser pressure-release sensor (PS9) 1. Open the right-door assembly. 2. Remove the fuser. 3. Insert a piece of paper as shown to activate the fuser pressure-release sensor. Figure 3-10 Test the fuser pressure-release sensor 4. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 5. If there is no response, replace the fuser drive assembly. 286 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Fuser output sensor (PS6) 1. Open the right-door assembly. 2. Open the fuser jam-access flap. Figure 3-11 Test the fuser output sensor (1 of 2) 3. Locate the fuser output sensor flag (callout 1), and then activate the sensor flag. Figure 3-12 Test the fuser output sensor (2 of 2) 1 ENWW 4. Check the control-panel display for a sensor response. 5. If there is no response, replace the fuser. Tools for troubleshooting 287 Developer alienation sensor (PS11) This sensor is located inside the main-drive assembly and cannot be accessed for direct manual testing. Use the paper path sensor test to test this sensor. 1. Press the Home button . 2. Open the following menus: ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests to highlight the Paper Path Sensors item, and then press the OK button. 3. Press the Down arrow 4. Press the Down arrow to highlight Start, and then check the control-panel display for sensor response (watch the developer alienation sensor (PS11) in the list). 5. If there is no response, replace the main drive assembly. 288 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW ITB alienation switch (SW5) 1. Remove the toner cartridges and the ITB. Activate the senor by moving the flag located on the rear ITB guide rail. Figure 3-13 Test the ITB alienation switch ENWW 2. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 3. If there is no response, replace the main drive assembly. Tools for troubleshooting 289 Tray/Bin manual sensor test Use this test to test the tray and bin sensors and switches manually. The following illustrations and table show the locations of these sensors. 1. Press the Home button . 2. Open the following menus: 3. ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests Press the Down arrow button. to highlight the Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test item, and then press the OK Table 3-22 Tray/Bin manual sensor test Sensor or switch name Sensor or switch number Tray 1 paper sensor PS2 Tray 2 paper sensor PS1 Tray 2 paper surface sensor PS4 Tray 2 paper size switches SW7 and SW 8 Tray 3 paper sensor SR3 Tray 3 paper surface sensor SR2 Tray 3 paper size switches SW2 and SW3 Tray 3 feed sensor SR1 Tray 3 door opening/closing sensor SW1 Tray 4 paper sensor SR3 Tray 4 paper surface sensor SR2 Tray 4 paper size switches SW2 and SW3 Tray 4 feed sensor SR1 Tray 4 opening/closing sensor1 SW1 Tray 5 paper sensor SR83 Tray 5 paper surface sensor SR82 Tray 5 paper size switches SW82 and SW83 Tray 5 feed sensor SR81 Tray 5 opening/closing sensor1 SW1 Tray 6 paper sensor SR93 Tray 6 paper surface sensor SR92 Tray 6 paper size switches SW92 and SW93 Tray 6 feed sensor SR91 290 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-22 Tray/Bin manual sensor test (continued) 1 ENWW Sensor or switch name Sensor or switch number Tray 6 opening/closing sensor1 SW1 Output bin full sensor PS10 Tray 4, Tray 5, and Tray 6 use the same opening/closing sensor (SW1) on the right door of the accessory. Tools for troubleshooting 291 Tray 1 paper sensor (PS2) 1. Open Tray 1. 2. Locate the Tray 1 paper-present sensor flag (callout 1), and then toggle the sensor flag to activate the sensor. Figure 3-14 Test the Tray 1 paper present sensor 1 3. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 4. If there is no response, replace the paper pickup assembly. 292 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Tray 2 paper present sensor (PS1) 1. Remove the tray. 2. In the tray cavity, release the spring loaded tray-present lever to lower the flag (callout 1), and then toggle the flag to activate the sensor. Figure 3-15 Test the tray 2 paper sensor 1 ENWW 3. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 4. If there is no response, replace the last paper detect sensor. Tools for troubleshooting 293 Tray 2 paper surface sensor (PS4) 1. Remove the tray. 2. In the tray cavity, insert a slip of paper in the photo sensor receptor and transmitter (callout 1). Figure 3-16 Tray 2 paper surface sensor 1 3. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 4. If there is no response, replace the lifter drive assembly. 294 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Tray 2 paper size switches (SW7 and SW8) NOTE: These switches also detect cassette presence. If these switches fail, the message Tray open could appear on the control-panel display. 1. Remove the tray. From inside the tray cavity, push any of the switch buttons (callout 1). TIP: You can test these sensors by opening, and then closing the tray. Figure 3-17 Test the Tray 2 paper size switches ENWW 2. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 3. If there is no response, replace the lifter assembly. Tools for troubleshooting 295 Tray 3 paper sensor (SR3) 1. Remove the tray. 2. In the tray cavity, release the spring loaded tray-present lever to lower the flag (callout 1), and then toggle the flag to activate the sensor. Figure 3-18 Test Tray 3 paper sensor 1 3. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 4. If there is no response, replace the paper pickup assembly. 296 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Tray 3 paper surface sensor (SR2) 1. Remove the tray. 2. In the tray cavity, release the spring loaded tray-present lever to lower the flag (callout 1), and then toggle the flag to activate the sensor. Figure 3-19 Test Tray 3 paper sensor 1 3. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 4. If there is no response, replace the paper pickup assembly. Tray 3 paper size sensors (SW2 and SW3) NOTE: These switches also detect cassette presence. If these switches fail, the message Tray open could appear on the control-panel display. 1. Remove the tray. From inside the tray cavity, push any of the switch buttons (callout 1). TIP: You can test these sensors by opening, and then closing the tray. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 297 Figure 3-20 Test Tray 3 paper size sensors 1 2. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 3. If no response, replace the lifter drive assembly. 298 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Tray 3 feed sensor (SR1) 1. Open the paper-feeder door. 2. Insert a piece of paper as shown to activate the feed sensor. TIP: Use stiff paper when performing this test (for example a business card or index card). Figure 3-21 Test the Tray 3 feed sensor ENWW 3. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 4. If no response, replace the paper pickup assembly. Tools for troubleshooting 299 Tray 3 door opening/closing sensor (SW1) 1. Open and then close the paper-feeder door to activate the sensor. The tab on the door (callout 1) activates the senor (callout 2). Figure 3-22 Test the Tray 3 door opening/closing sensor 2 1 2. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 3. If no response, replace the button switch. 300 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Tray 4 paper sensor (SR3) See Tray 3 paper sensor (SR3) on page 296. Tray 4 paper surface sensor (SR2) See Tray 3 paper surface sensor (SR2) on page 297. Tray 4 paper size sensors (SW2 and SW3) See Tray 3 paper size sensors (SW2 and SW3) on page 297. Tray 4 feed sensor (SR1) See Tray 3 feed sensor (SR1) on page 299. Tray 4 door opening/closing door sensor (SW1) NOTE: Tray 4, Tray 5, and Tray 6 use the same opening/closing door sensor (SW1). 1. Open and then close the paper-feeder door to activate the sensor (the tab on the door (callout 1) activates the senor (callout 2). Figure 3-23 Test the Tray 4 door opening/closing sensor 2 1 ENWW 2. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 3. If no response, replace the button switch. Tools for troubleshooting 301 Tray 5 paper sensor (SR83) See Tray 3 paper sensor (SR3) on page 296. Tray 5 paper surface sensor (SR82) See Tray 3 paper surface sensor (SR2) on page 297. Tray 5 paper size sensors (SW82 and SW83) See Tray 3 paper size sensors (SW2 and SW3) on page 297. Tray 5 feed sensor (SR81) See Tray 3 feed sensor (SR1) on page 299. Tray 5 door opening/closing sensor (SW1) See Tray 4 door opening/closing door sensor (SW1) on page 301. Tray 6 paper sensor (SR93) See Tray 2 paper present sensor (PS1) on page 293. Tray 6 paper surface sensor (SR92) See Tray 3 paper surface sensor (SR2) on page 297. Tray 6 paper size sensors (SW92 and SW93) See Tray 3 paper size sensors (SW2 and SW3) on page 297. Tray 6 feed sensor (SR91) See Tray 3 feed sensor (SR1) on page 299. Tray 6 door opening/closing sensor (SW1) See Tray 4 door opening/closing door sensor (SW1) on page 301. 302 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Output-bin-full sensor (PS10) 1. Locate the output-bin-full sensor flag (callout 1), and then activate the sensor flag. Figure 3-24 Test the output-bin-full sensor 1 2. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 3. If there is no response, examine the flag at the left end of the output bin full sensor flag. If the flag is broken, replace the paper delivery assembly. If the flag is not broken, replace the fuser gear assembly. Paper-path sensors test This test displays the status of each paper-path sensor and allows viewing of sensor status while printing internal pages. button. 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests to highlight the Paper Path Sensors option, and then press the OK button. 3. Press the Down arrow 4. Select Start Test. Press the down arrow to see the test results. NOTE: Exiting the Paper-path sensor test menu and then reentering it will clear the test values from the previous test. Viewing the sensor status before you activate the test should show that the sensors PS9, PS11 and SW5 have already been activated. After running the Paper-path sensor test, sensor PS9 does not show any activation status. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 303 Table 3-23 Paper-path sensors diagnostic tests Sensor name Sensor number TOP (top of page) sensor PS5 Fuser loop sensor PS7 Fuser loop sensor PS8 Fuser delivery sensor PS6 Output bin full sensor PS10 Developer alienation PS11 Fuser pressure-release sensor PS9 Primary transfer-roller-disengagement sensor SW5 Print/stop test Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image-formation defects and jams within the engine. During this test you can stop the paper anywhere along the product paper path. The test can be programmed to stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position. The test can also be programmed to stop from 0 to 60,000 ms. If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the job-print time, you can recover the product in one of two ways. ● After the print job is completed press the Stop button the timer times out. ● After the timer times out, press the Stop button return it to a normal state. to return to the Diagnostic Tests menu before . Activate the door switch to restart the engine and When the timer trips, the control panel display shows the message Printing stopped To continue, touch “OK”. Pressing the Home button will print the previously selected job. If you do not want the previous job to print, press the Stop button first, and then press the Home button . NOTE: Do not try to perform a print/stop test while the product is calibrating, because you will be required to power-cycle the product. If a jam message displays on the control panel during testing, activate the door switch. Component tests Component test (special-mode test) This test activates individual parts independently to isolate problems. Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly. If you select the Repeat option (at the end of the menu), the test cycles the component on and off. This process continues for two minutes, and then the test terminates. NOTE: The front or side door interlocks must be defeated to run the component tests. Some tests may require that the ITB and print cartridges be removed. The control panel display prompts you to remove some or all cartridges during certain tests. 1. Press the Home button . 2. Open the following menus: 304 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests to highlight the Component Test item, and then press the OK button. 3. Press the Down arrow 4. Select the component test options for the test you want to run. Table 3-24 Component tests (1 of 2) Component test Component tested Comments Transfer Motors M1 (ITB motor) Drives the ITB motor and drum motor together at a specified speed for 5 seconds. M2 (drum motor) Belt Only M1 (ITB motor) Drives ITB drive motor at a specified speed for 5 seconds. Developer Motors M1 (ITB motor) Drives the ITB motor at a specified speed for 5 seconds. M3 (developer motor) Cartridge Motors M1 (ITB motor) M2 (drum motor) ENWW Drives the developer motor at a specified speed for 5 seconds (drives 3 times). Drives the ITB motor at a specified speed for 5 seconds. Drives the drum motor at a specified speed for 5 seconds (drives 3 times). Fuser Motor M4 Drives the fuser motor at a specified speed for 5 seconds. Alienation Motor (cartridge) M6 (developer alienation motor) Drives the developer disengagement motor and engages or disengages the developer (drives the motor four times). If the home position of the developer is not commanded within 5 seconds, the product brings the developer to its home position. Tools for troubleshooting 305 Table 3-24 Component tests (1 of 2) (continued) Component test Component tested Comments ITB Contact/Alienation Motor M4 (fuser motor) Drives the fuser motor M4 (drives the motor four times) and the T1 roller disengagement solenoid SL5, and brings the T1 roller to either one of the following states: SL5 (disengagement solenoid) ● 4 rollers are disengaged (home position) ● Only K T1 roller is engaged or 4 rollers are engaged If home position of the T1 roller is not commanded within 10 seconds, the printer moves the T1 roller to its home position. Additionally, the printer keeps the state of 4 rollers engagement so that the service technician can access and manually clean the dust-proof glass (open the front door and remove the cartridge). Fuser Contact/Alienation Drive M4 (fuser motor) Reverses the fuser motor to rotate the fuser pressure release cam and pressurize or depressurize the pressure roller. If home position of the pressure roller is not commanded within 5 seconds, the printer brings the pressure roller to its home position. Tray Pickup Motor M5 (pickup motor) Drives the pickup motor M5, the 500 sheet paper feeder pickup motor M1, and each of the 3x500 paper deck cassette pickup motors, cassette 1 M1, cassette 2 M81, and cassette 3 M91 individually at a specified speed for 5 seconds. M1 (Tray 3 pickup motor) M1 (Tray 4 pickup motor) M81 (Tray 5 pickup motor) M91 (Tray 6 pickup motor) DuplexerPickup Motor M8 (duplex pickup motor) Drives the duplex feed motor at a specified speed for 5 seconds. Switchback Motor M7 (duplex reverse motor) Drives the duplex reverse motor at a specified speed for 5 seconds. 306 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-24 Component tests (1 of 2) (continued) Component test Component tested Comments Tray Pickup Solenoid SL2 (Tray 1 pickup solenoid) Drives the Tray 1 pickup solenoid SL2, the Tray 2 cassette pickup solenoid SL1, the 500 sheet feeder pickup solenoid SL1, and each of the 3x500 paper deck cassette solenoids, cassette 1 SL1, cassette 2 SL82, and cassette 3 SL92, individually for 5 seconds. SL1 (Tray 2 pickup solenoid) SL1 (Tray 3 pickup solenoid) SL1 (Tray 4 pickup solenoid) SL82 (Tray 5 pickup solenoid) SL92 (Tray 6 pickup solenoid) Switchback Flapper Solenoid SL3 (duplex reverse solenoid) Drives the duplex reverse solenoid for 10 seconds. Laser Scanner Motor M10 (laser/scanner motor) Drives the laser/scanner motor at a specified speed for 10 seconds. Additional component tests The following tests are not supported in the firmware. These component tests are accomplished by manipulating or observing the product during operation or when the power is turned on. Table 3-25 Component tests (2 of 2) Component test Component tested Comments Paper Deck Cassette Lifter Motor M9 (Tray 2 lifter drive assembly) Open and then close a paper tray. Listen at the back side of the product for the sound of the lift motor for that tray. M2 (Tray 3 lifter drive assembly) M2 (Tray 4 lifter drive assembly) M82 (Tray 5 lifter drive assembly) M92 (Tray 6 lifter drive assembly) Power Supply Fan FM1 If the lift motor does not make a sound and the paper surface sensor for that tray passes a sensor test (see Tray/Bin manual sensor test), replace the lifter drive assembly. Turn the product power off, and then on. Listen at the left-front-lower corner area of the print engine for fan noise while the product initializes. Full/half speed intake fan Cools the following areas: ENWW ● low-voltage power supply area ● face-down bin ● delivery bin ● laser scanner area Tools for troubleshooting 307 Table 3-25 Component tests (2 of 2) (continued) Component test Component tested Comments Fuser Fan FM2 Turn the product power off, and then on. Listen at the front-right-lower corner of the print engine for fan noise while the product initializes. Full speed intake fan Cools the following areas: Formatter Fan FM3 ● duplex feed ● ITB Turn the product power off, and then on. Listen at the back-lower center area of the rear cover for fan noise while the product initializes. Speed controlled intake fan Cools the following areas: ● DC controller ● ICB ● formatter NOTE: The formatter controls the speed of this fan depending on product operations. 308 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Diagrams Block diagrams Figure 3-25 Product cross section 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 22 21 19 18 17 16 Item Description Item Description 1 ITB 12 MP tray pickup roller 2 Primary transfer roller 13 MP tray separation pad 3 Delivery roller 14 Cassette pickup roller 4 Duplex reverse roller (duplex models only) 15 Cassette separation roller 5 Duplex flapper (duplex models only 16 Feed roller 6 Pressure roller 17 Media sensor 7 Duplex feed roller (duplex models only) 18 Registration roller 8 IFuser 19 Registration density sensor 9 Fuser sleeve 20 Cassette 10 Secondary transfer roller 21 Photosensitive drum ITB drive roller ENWW 20 Laser/scanner assembly Tools for troubleshooting 309 Figure 3-26 Optional paper feeder (Tray 3) cross section 1 4 1 Pickup roller 2 Feed roller 3 Separation roller 4 Cassette 310 Chapter 3 Solve problems 2 3 ENWW Plug/jack locations 1 3 2 ENWW 1 Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port 2 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port 3 USB port for a third-party device Tools for troubleshooting 311 Location of connectors DC controller connections Figure 3-27 DC controller connections J93 J131 J181 J81 J101 J172 J171 J102 J91 J33 SW301 J21 J92 J151 J161 J51 J112 J121 J63 J122 J25 J152 J73 J111 J192 J72 J26 J71 J62 J61 Table 3-26 DC controller connections Item Description Item Description Item Description J21 DC controller power J73 Secondary transfer J122 Top of page sensor J25 Low-voltage power supply J81 ITB motor J131 Fuser Fuser motor Drum motor Developing motor 312 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-26 DC controller connections (continued) Item Description Item Description Item Description J33 Environment sensor J91 Duplex reverse solenoid J151 Cassette paper size Cassette pickup solenoid Cassette paper presence Pickup motor Cassette lifter motor Developing disengagement motor J51 Formatter J92 Duplex feed motor J152 Duplex reverse motor MP tray paper presence MP tray pickup solenoid J61 Laser scanner J93 Driver PCA J161 Cartridge toner level sensors J62 Laser scanner J101 Cartridge memory tag (yellow, magenta, cyan) J171 Cartridge pre-exposure LEDs J63 Laser scanner motor J102 Cartridge memory tag (black) J172 Cartridge pre-exposure LEDs J71 Developing high-voltage PCA J111 Registration and density sensor J181 Cartridge drum homeposition sensors Right door switch Primary transfer disengagement solenoid Fuser pressure release Output bin full sensor Toner collection unit full sensor ITB waste toner full sensor J72 ENWW Cartridge primary transfer J121 Front door switch J192 Paper feeder Fuser fan Tools for troubleshooting 313 Product connections Figure 3-28 Product connections (1 of 6) J832 J831 1 2 J105 J110 J302 J106 3 J203 4 J304 J305 J303 J1001 J502 J301 Item Description 1 Laser scanner unit 2 Low-voltage power supply 3 Power switch PCA 4 Environment sensor 314 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Figure 3-29 Product connections (2 of 6) 1 2 J515 3 J516 J514 J517 J518 4 5 J523 6 7 J553 8 J522 J739 J742 ENWW Item Description 1 Developing motor 2 Drum motor 3 Fuser motor 4 ITB motor 5 Pickup motor 6 Developing disengagement motor 7 Drive unit 8 Lifter drive unit Tools for troubleshooting 315 Figure 3-30 Product connections (3 of 6) 2 1 3 4 J1001 5 6 J557 J558 J559 J560 Item Description 1 High-voltage power supply imaging (developing) PCA 2 High-voltage power supply 1st transfer PCA 3 Driver PCA 4 DC controller PCA 5 High-voltage power supply 2nd transfer PCA 6 Toner remaining detect PCA 316 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Figure 3-31 Product connections (4 of 6) J554 1 J535 J538 2 ENWW Item Description 1 Registration sensor assembly 2 Paper pickup drive unit Tools for troubleshooting 317 Figure 3-32 Product connections (5 of 6) 1 J704 J552 5 J522 J109 6 J525 J106 J51 J708 J142 J524 4 2 3 Item Description 1 Fuser 2 24V interlock switch 3 Fuser fan 4 Power supply fan 5 ICB PCA 6 Formatter fan 318 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Figure 3-33 Product connections (6 of 6) 1 J736 J152 J706 2 3 J705 ENWW Item Description 1 Right door assembly 2 ITB rear guide 3 ITB front guide Tools for troubleshooting 319 Figure 3-34 Paper feeder connections 1 J2006 J707 J706 J704 2 J733 Paper feeder controller PCA J734 J705 3 J701 J702 J703 J752 J703 J751 Item Description 1 Paper feeder lifter-drive assembly 2 Paper feeder PCA 3 Paper feeder paper-pickup assembly 320 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Locations of major components Figure 3-35 External component locations 1 2 5 4 6 3 9 8 7 ENWW Item Description Item Description 1 Right-rear cover 6 Top cover 2 Right-door assembly 7 Left cover 3 Right-front cover 8 Rear cover 4 Front-door assembly 9 Toner collection unit access-door 5 Cassette (Tray 2) Tools for troubleshooting 321 Figure 3-36 Major component locations (1 of 3) 2 1 3 4 5 Item Description 1 Laser scanner unit 2 Toner collection unit 3 Fuser 322 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW ENWW Item Description 4 Main drive unit 5 Lifter drive unit Tools for troubleshooting 323 Figure 3-37 Major component locations (2 of 3) 2 1 3 4 5 6 9 7 8 Item Description Item Description 1 ITB front guide unit 6 Duplex drive unit (duplex models only) 2 ITB rear guide unit 7 Delivery drive unit (simplex models only) 3 Delivery unit 8 Cassette (Tray 2) 324 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Item Description Item Description 4 Toner collection unit full sensor 9 ITB unit 5 Cassette pickup drive unit Figure 3-38 Major component locations (3 of 3) 1 2 3 ENWW Item Description 1 Waste toner carrier unit 2 Formatter 3 Fuser drive unit Tools for troubleshooting 325 Figure 3-39 Motors, fans, and rollers component locations 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 8 12 9 10 11 Item Description Item Description 1 Secondary transfer roller unit 7 Drum motor 2 MP tray (Tray 1) pickup roller 8 Fuser motor 3 MP tray (Tray 1) separation pad 9 ITB motor 4 Cassette (Tray 2) separation roller unit 10 Developing disengagement motor 326 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Item Description Item Description 5 Cassette (Tray 2) pickup roller unit 11 Fuser fan 6 Developing motor 12 Power supply fan Figure 3-40 PCA component locations 2 1 3 4 5 6 8 7 ENWW Item Description Item Description 1 Low-voltage power-supply PCA 5 High-voltage power supply 2nd transfer PCA 2 High-voltage power supply 1st transfer PCA 6 High-voltage power supply imaging (development) PCA 3 Driver PCA 7 Environment sensor PCA 4 DC controller PCA 8 Power switch PCA Tools for troubleshooting 327 328 Chapter 3 Solve problems 23 K developing bias 22 C developing bias 21 M developing bias 20 Y developing bias 19 K primary charging bias 18 Y/M/C primary charging bias 17 Fuser heater 16 Developer disengagement motor 15 Developer motor 14 Drum motor 13 Fuser motor 12 ITB motor 11 Pickup motor 10 Scanner motor 9 K video signal 8 C video signal 7 M video signal 6 Y video signal 5 Top of paper signal 4 Fuser output sensor 3 Top of paper sensor 2 Cassette pickup solenoid 1 Print command Power ON Two consecutive prints on letter paper WAIT STBY INTR PRINT LSTR STBY General timing charts Figure 3-41 General timing chart (1 of 2) ENWW ENWW 30 Fuser fan 29 Power fan 28 T2 bias 27 K T1 bias 26 C T1 bias 25 M T1 bias 24 Y T1 bias Power ON WAIT STBY INTR PRINT LSTR STBY Figure 3-42 General timing chart (2 of 2) Tools for troubleshooting 329 330 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Formatter fan FM3 2 1 2 1 J102 1 2 2 1 J719DH J719D 7 J719L 4ST MEM4 8 2 6 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 4 5 J718H J718D J718L 1 8 2 7 3 6 ICB 5 4 3ST MEM3 J303ICB 1 1 2 GND F P_ 3 . 3 V F PO F PI F PCL K / F PCS GND F P_ 5 V 1 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 J716H J716D J716L 1 2 3 1ST J548 4 3 1 2 1 8 1 J558H J558D 3 1 7 2 2 2 J62 19 J732 6 5 4 3 1 3 1 2 2 2 2 4ST J551 J559H J559D J559L 3 1 3 J560H J560D J560L 1 1 3 3 K Toner level sensor 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 3 4 5 1 11 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 21 12 13 6 5 14 5 15 4 1 3 2 3 2 16 17 18 1 4 J733DB 4 J63 1 3 2 3 2 1 1 4 1 4 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 9 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 J72 1 4 8 8 7 8 8 8 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 6 5 3 2 2 5 6 2 1 1 4 3 4 2 J25 7 8 1 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 7 7 4 4 3 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 11 10 9 8 11 7 6 J73 3 3 3 J1201 J537 4 4 4 1 J203 J707M 1 1 1 2 J106 3 F ANPOWER F ANL OCK GND 2 2 2 5 4 3 2 1 6 2 1 3 5 1 J121 2 3 J710F 1 4 3 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 3 J708M J131 2 1ST 1 B8 B8 8 7 7 2 8 1 2 7 2ST 1 8 J171 A6 A6 J5001F J5003M 5 6 7 2 14 13 12 11 10 9 1 1 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 J708F 1 1 2 J536 24V Interlock switch SW2 HEATERC HEATER1 4 4 Front door sensor PS14 J710M 2 J110F J109M J109F J110M HEATER2 MT3 J704DB J704LB 1 MT2 2 3 4 J704L J704LA J704D J704DA Fuser fan FM2 J26 1 1 3 J305 1 5 J711M 2 4 2 J711F J524D J524DH 3 J524L 1 1 1 4 3 SW1 2 J302 5 1 J1001 PSW LED SWON OF F GND +3. 3V +12R 1 Transfer 2 high-voltage power supply PCA 1 2 J554H J554D 1 2 2 J707F 2 J303 J554L 1 4 GND +3. 3V GND GND +24V +24V +5V N. C. N. C. Power supply fan FM1 Power switch Top of paper sensor PS5 J122 3 2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 1 J304 ACH ACL GND L N FG Registration density sensor 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 J601 7 8 Transfer 1 high-voltage power supply PCA 3 J1001A 2 7 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 J111 1 6 6 8 5 5 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 4 4 3 3 3 2 2 2 14 13 12 11 10 9 J21 J741D 1 J105 Low-voltage power supply ass’y J301 2 1 Registration density belt-perimeter sensor J611 2 3 2 3 M M10 J741H 4 J741L 1 J529 Scanner motor GND +12U 3 9 J71 7 J2001 8 4 Paper feeder J733DH J192 3 2 17 J731 Developing high-voltage power supply PCA 6 7 8 9 10 18 11 J631 J61 J733DA 17 J831 DC controller PCA 19 J832 16 2 12 +3. 3V SCL SDA GND DAT A_ M / DAT A_ M GND CT L 1 _ M CT L 0 _ M PWM- M GND DAT A_ Y / DAT A_ Y GND CT L 1 _ Y CT L 0 _ Y PWM- Y GND +5V GND / BD GND DAT A_ C / DAT A_ C GND CT L 1 _ C CT L 0 _ C PWM- C GND DAT A_ K / DAT A_ K GND CT L 1 _ K CT L 0 _ K PWM- K GND +5V 19 3ST J550 J558L 3 1 3 5 17 3 13 17 15 J632 C Toner level sensor 12 11 10 9 2 2 2 J161 1 3 1 2ST J549 M Toner level sensor J557H J557D 1 J557L 2 3 Y Toner level sensor 5 6 J191 7 1 2 1ST MEM1 1 6 2 5 3 4 J717H J717D 3 4 J717L 2 J101 2 1 2 2ST MEM2 J51 23 J301 1 5 J305ICB 6 J2 USB GND VBUS DD+ GND GND J1 3 J142 10 17 3 6 8 11 13 18 4 8 GND /FAN3LK FAN3PWM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 11 13 14 15 16 19 18 20 21 22 23 4 7 9 10 12 14 19 1 5 6 7 9 10 14 16 GND + 3 . 3 V ST BY GND +24R +5V +24R +24V THERM1(SUB-S) T HERMGND 1 8 6 6 3 6 1 2 5 5 4 4 4 5 2 3ST 1 4 H2 5 1 1 J5003F 1 2 3 H1 3 3 6 3 4 2 2 1 J705D 8 1 J705L J705LH 9 8 1 4 7 7 2 2 2ST 1 J172 2 3 1 3 2 8 2 7 1ST 1 4 J33 1 J502 7 6 5 2 1 J13 2 Environment sensor 1 3 2 4 5 6 2 1 2 1 5 3 6 4 3 4 7 8 FU1 1 1 2 8 3 J5002F 4 2 5 6 6 3 5 5 4 4 4 5 2 4 3ST 1 5 J32 TB2 3 3 6 3 2 2 7 1 1 8 2 1 4ST 1 2 J706L J706LH J31 4 J706D GND THERM 3 J1055 GND THERM 2 HAISHI GND +3.3V GND THERM 1 GND THERM 4 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 Fuser 2 TB1 6 6 J123 3 2 4ST 1 5 Loop sensor1 Loop sensor2 PS7 PS8 2 THERM4(SUB-F) HAI SHI L OOP1 L OOP2 SGND +3. 3V F UHL T HERM2 GND T HERM2 ( SUB- M) T HERM3 ( SUB- R) T HERM3 GND F USEROPEN +3. 3V ENVHUMDT Y GND ENVT EMP Control panel GND / DAT A Y1 DAT A Y1 GND / DAT A M1 DAT A M1 GND / DAT A C1 DAT A C1 GND / DAT A K1 DAT A K1 GND / BD0 DCON OF F VCRST + 3 . 3 V ST BY GND / T OP CL EI CL EO POWERON- C / VDOEN +5V GND L DYPOW L DYCT RL 0 L DYCT RL 1 GND / DAT A YO DAT A YO GND L DMPOW L DMCT RL 0 L DMCT RL 1 GND / DAT A MI DAT A MI GND SDA SCL +3. 3V +5V GND L DKPOW L DKCT RL 0 L DKCT RL 1 GND / DAT A KI DAT A KI GND L DCPOW L DCCT RL 0 L DCCT RL 1 GND / DAT A CI DAT A CI GND / BD1 GND / SCNDEC / SCNACC +2 4 V PSW_ L ED REMOT EON SHI MUKE SWON/ OF F PWRON F SRD2 F SRD1 Z EROX F SR_ CURRMS RL D2 RL D1 F ANL OCK F ANPOWER AUT O_ ON 4 +24V +24V GND GND CST RX CST T X CST SCL K +3. 3V I T BT OP +5V GND FDNS2 FDNS1 RDBL GAI N1 RDBL GAI N0 FRDLED I T BL ED +5V GND RRDLED RDNS2 RDGAI N1 RDGAI N0 RDNS1 GND +3. 3V GND GND +24V +24V 5 18 11 11 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SOL D2 0 SOL D2 1 SOL D2 2 SOL D2 3 SOL D2 4 SOL D2 5 SOL D2 6 SOL D2 7 SOL D2 8 SOL D2 9 Formatter SOL D3 6 SOL D3 7 SOL D3 8 SOL D3 9 SOL D4 0 SOL D4 1 SOL D4 2 SOL D4 3 21 20 19 17 16 15 14 13 12 1 SOL D3 0 SOL D3 1 6 VSS4 VI N4 VSS3 VI N3 VSS2 VI N2 VSS1 VI N1 4 9 GND RT SNS1 T ONL ED GND RT SNS2 T ONL ED GND RT SNS3 T ONL ED GND RT SNS4 T ONL ED 21 20 19 17 9 8 7 6 3 15 12 8 7 12 9 7 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 +24R +24R GND +5R GND GND HVT CL K CHG RS 1 PWMBL 1 PWMDEV1 PWMPRI 1 2 3 PWMRS2 PWMBL 2 PWMDEV2 PWMRS3 PWMBL 3 PWMDEV3 CHG RS 4 PWMBL 4 PWMDEV4 PWMPRI 4 23 22 18 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 5 2 1 19 18 17 16 14 13 11 10 6 5 4 3 2 1 17 16 15 14 13 11 10 8 6 5 4 3 1 +24R +24R GND +5R GND / T R1 OE T R1 L D T R1 SCK T R1 SDAT A GND T RS1 4 T RS1 3 T RS1 2 T RS1 1 GND 18 2 T OPSNS GND +3. 3U 5 17 2 1 SOL D3 2 SOL D3 3 2 +24R +24R GND +5R GND HVT CL K N T R2 PWM N HVT CL K P T R2 PWM P GND T RS2 19 4 16 12 10 8 4 1 F AN2 PWM / F AN2 L K GND F DOORSNS GND +3. 3V 18 13 15 12 9 3 15 13 7 3 2 1 2 J222A J221A 1 1 2 3 2 1 1 2 T H3 PREEXP1 +5V PREEXP2 +5V PREEXP3 +5V PREEXP4 +5V 2 3 T H2 SOL D3 4 SOL D3 5 1 1 4 T H4 N. C. PREEXP1 +5V PREEXP2 +5V PREEXP3 +5V PREEXP4 +5V J304 16 17 14 11 10 8 7 6 1 2 14 11 9 5 6 2 1 1 5V Interlock switch S W3 SW 4 1 2 J12 J11A T H1 2 2 Sub-F Sub-M Fuser output sensor PS6 Sub-R 1 Sub-S A B C D Figure 3-43 General circuit diagram (1 of 2) General circuit diagram 6 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 8 7 8 2 M2 1 2 J515 1 3 4 4 5 5 M 6 6 7 Drum motor 3 7 8 3 2 4 1 3 2 3 M 4 1 4 J525D J525DH 2 1 1 6 J552D J552DH J552L J520 Duplex reverse motor M7 8 4 3 5 2 5 J2 8 5 4 3 5 6 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 SL 1 4 3 2 1 J525L J522D J522DH J522L 1 4 3 2 2 3 4 5 5 M 6 6 7 7 8 8 1 2 1 2 M1 1 2 J517 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 J81A 3 4 J518 1 2 3 7 6 J1002 J1005 5 4 3 2 1 J519 Developer Developer disengagement disengagement motor sensor M6 PS11 M 1 1 4 Fuser motor 3 8 4 4 5 5 M 6 6 ITB motor 3 3 7 8 7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 3 4 J521 3 2 1 2 4 1 3 2 3 M 2 M 1 3 4 1 4 3 3 2 4 5 1 2 8 J1001 10 9 7 J535D J535DH J535L 6 J709D J709DH J709L 1 2 2 2 1 5 4 J1003 3 2 1 J538D J538DH J538L 1 21 J91 17 J92 2 1 8 3 10 9 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 1 J738D J738DH 4 7 4 5 6 5 10 9 J112 8 7 6 3 1 1 2 2 1 2 J511D J511DH J511L 1 6 5 6 7 4 7 8 3 8 1 9 10 2 9 10 5 4 3 2 1 J542DH J542D J542L J541 8 7 6 5 3 1 2 3 J544 1 2 3 J506 1 2 3 2 1 J114L J114D 1 7 2 6 J530D J530DH J531L 3 4 4 2 1 5 1 2 5 3 6 2 J530L 1 6 5 4 3 10 9 J152 8 7 6 2 7 1 1 3 1 2 2 2 J528 5 4 3 2 1 J561D 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 3 1 3 2 J736DH J736D J736L J527 2 M 1 J534 1 2 3 J533 J742D 3 7 4 6 5 4 1 3 2 2 3 1 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 1 Cassette media Cassette media width switch end switch SW7 SW8 J932 J931 1 2 1 1 3 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 J742L J742LH 2 2 3 J739L 1 PS1 Cassette medi a out sensor J739D J739DH Cassette media st ack surface senso r Cassette lifter motor PS4 M9 MP tray media out sensor PS2 J181 J561H 3 1 3 DC controller PCA J114H 1 2 2 SL 7 Last-media sensor PS3 MP tray pickup solenoid SL2 8 J505 Y/M/C drum home- K drum homeposition sensor position sensor PS13 PS12 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 J181A Media sensor 2 J531D J531DH 4 1 PS15 Right door sensor T1 disengagement solenoid SW5 SL5 2 SL T1 alienation switch 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 J181B Media sensor J743D J743DH 2 J738L 3 J743L 1 3 1 2 3 J510 3 J513 2 1 2 1 3 PS9 Fuser pressure release sensor PS10 Face-down bin media full sensor Cassette pickup solenoid SL1 SL 4 2 5 1 SW6 Toner collection box switch 1 J523 Pickup motor 2 M5 J81 1 1 ITB Residual toner full sensor Duplex feed motor M8 Duplex model only 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 2 6 2 M4 J516 1 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 J93 J1 J1006 6 7 Duplex reverse solenoid SL3 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 J81B Duplex model only 2 3 Driver PCA 1 J514 2 Developer motor M3 M +24R GND /PHB_DEV PHB_DEV /PHA_DEV PHA_DEV DEVDTCH SN S GND +5V 1 /3DEVFG /3DEVDEC /3DEVACC 3DEVFR GND GND +24R +24R /3DRUMFG /3DRUMDE C /3DRUMACC 3DRUMF R GND GND +24R +24R /PHB R VRS PHB R VRS /PHA RVRS PHA RVRS /HI SL-ON +24U /FSRFG /FSRDEC /FSRACC FSRFR GND GND +24R +24R /ITBFG /ITBDEC /ITBACC ITBFR GND GND +24R +24R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 GND FLIPMPH B FLIPMI0B FLIPMI1B FLIPMSTBY FLIPMI1A FLIPMI0A FLIPMPH A DUPFEEDMPHB DUPFEEDMI0B DUPFEEDMI1B DUPFEEDMSTBY DUPFEEDMCHI DUPFEEDMI1A DUPFEEDMI0A DUPFEEDMPHA GND /PHB DUPFD PHB DUPFD /PHA DUPFD PHA DUPFD /PHB FEED PHB FEED /PHA FEED PHA FEED +24U /PICK SLON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 +5V GND DEVRIKANHP DEVMPH B DEVMI0B DEVMSTBY DEVMI0A DEVMPH A GND FEEDMPHB FEEDMI0B FEEDMI1B FEEDMSTBY FEEDMCHI FEEDMI1A FEEDMI0A FEEDMPHA CSTSL HFLAPPER FLIPSL2 GND WTSSN S GND TONLED5V TBOXSN S GND PFULLSN S GND +3.3A FSRKAIJYO GND +3.3A TRIKANHP GND TRIKANSL +24V NPCLK GND NPSD_RD NPSD OUT +5V /NPRST NPST ART NPSLDATA NPSLEN NPLED RDOORSN S GND +3.3V N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. DRMHPYM C GND +3.3A DRMHPBK GND +3.3A +3.3V NPTRLED MPFEEDSL +24V MPLASTSN S GND +3.3U MPPEMPTYSN S GND +3.3V ENWW J151 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LIFTMON +24V LIFTSN S GND +3.3R PEMPTY GND +3.3R CSTSIZE22 CSTSIZE21 GND CSTSIZE20 CSTSIZE12 CSTSIZE1 1 GND CSTSIZE10 5 A B C D Figure 3-44 General circuit diagram (2 of 2) Tools for troubleshooting 331 J752 SL J703L PF pickup solenoid SL1 SR3 SR2 SR1 PF cassette media out sensor PF media st ack surface sensor J701D GND PLVL +3.3U J703D AOUT2 2 1 M1 J705 GND J704 DOPEN AOUT1 BOUT2 PICK +24V PSNS J702D +3.3U GND +3.3U PATHS BOUT1 J703H J702LH J702L J701LH J701L 3 PF door switch SW1 1 2 PF pickup motor 1 2 3 1 2 3 J751 1 4 2 7 8 1 4 5 5 6 4 3 J706 L_SIZE2 L_SIZE3 W_SIZE1 W_SIZE3 2 1 +24V 2 3 GND 4 1 2 LIFT SW3 PF cassette media end switch 1 8 1 2 7 GND 3 4 SW2 PF cassette media width switch 6 L_SIZE1 4 3 J707 5 +3.3V 1 1 4 2 2 3 3 2 CLK 4 1 J2007 +24U CMD +24U STS GND GND GND GND STS +24U CMD +24U CLK N.C. +3.3V 5 M2 PF lifter motor 1 6 2 2 Paper feeder controller PCA 3 7 M 4 2 8 1 2 5 3 9 1 J2006 8 7 J2008 4 1 J733LH 1 1 M 1 2 2 3 3 2 4 4 1 1 2 2 5 2 3 4 332 Chapter 3 Solve problems 1 5 2 2 1 3 4 5 6 3 J2003 J2004 4 3 5 4 1 6 1 2 1 J2005 2 5 3 1 4 2 5 3 6 4 2 7 5 J2001 1 3 2 8 J734DA 2 3 J733LA 3 J733LB 4 6 A B C D Figure 3-45 Paper feeder general circuit diagram (1 X 500) J734DB J734DH J2002 W_SIZE2 ENWW PF media feed sensor 6 SL1 PD CST1 media out sensor PD CST1 media PD CST1 media feed sensor stack surface sensor SR1 PD CST1 SR2 SR3 pickup solenoid J851 J951 1 J703L GND J803L 3 2 1 J903L PSNS GND PLVL +3.3U J703D BOUT2 AOUT2 AOUT1 J801D BOUT1 GND +3.3U PSNS GND PLVL +3.3U J803D J802D +3.3U PATHS PICK BOUT1 BOUT2 AOUT2 AOUT1 J901D +24V GND +3.3U PSNS GND PLVL +3.3U J903D J902D +3.3U PATHS 2 PICK BOUT1 BOUT2 AOUT2 AOUT1 1 +24V J903H J902LH J902L J901LH J901L +3.3U J702D GND PATHS +3.3U PICK J803H J802LH J802L J801LH J801L J705 J701D +24V J703H J702LH J702L J701LH J701L DOPEN 2 1 J752 SL 2 PD CST1 pickup motor 1 2 J852 SL J952 4 Paper deck controller PCA 3 Paper deck controller PCA 2 Paper deck controller PCA 1 7 3 6 4 8 7 6 1 2 3 5 4 4 5 6 3 2 9 GND +24U +24U L_SIZE1 GND L_SIZE2 L_SIZE3 W_SIZE1 GND L_SIZE1 GND L_SIZE2 L_SIZE3 W_SIZE1 GND LIFT +24V W_SIZE3 +24V W_SIZE2 LIFT W_SIZE3 GND W_SIZE2 W_SIZE1 L_SIZE1 GND 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 J733LB 1 L_SIZE3 +24V J733LH 2 L_SIZE2 LIFT 1 4 3 2 1 9 GND W_SIZE3 STS W_SIZE2 CLK CMD +3.3V 2 8 J2007C 7 J2002C 1 8 7 6 J2001C 1 J2002B 2 5 3 4 4 3 5 9 8 J2002 7 5 6 2 J2001B 8 2 1 1 3 M2 J751 1 1 2 2 SW1 SL82 PD CST2 pickup motor SL92 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 SL PD CST2 media out sensor PD CST2 media PD CST2 media feed sensor stack surface sensor SR81 PD CST2 SR82 SR83 pickup PD door switch solenoid PD CST3 media out sensor PD CST3 media PD CST3 media feed sensor stack surface sensor SR91 PD CST3 SR92 SR93 pickup solenoid 1 2 3 4 1 8 4 PD CST3 pickup motor 1 2 1 2 J707 J706 5 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 M M J2003 J2004 J2005 J2003B M1 M81 5 1 2 STS 1 3 CMD 2 1 GND 3 2 CLK +3.3V 4 3 4 4 5 5 GND 5 5 1 1 +24U 6 2 1 2 3 4 5 2 1 6 3 2 7 N.C. +24U 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 8 J2004B 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 1 2 J2005B 3 J2003C 4 2 2 3 M 4 M91 5 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 1 1 5 2 2 6 3 J2006B J2004C 4 J804 4 1 SW92 1 5 1 SW93 2 1 2 M J2005C 1 +3.3V 2 CLK 3 CMD 4 1 STS 2 5 2 GND J2007B N.C. 3 1 3 GND 1 2 1 2 3 2 1 3 2 4 1 3 4 1 2 4 5 2 3 1 6 3 4 J704 7 4 5 2 8 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 J2006 2 4 1 3 5 2 4 J2007 +24U 3 +24U 4 2 5 3 6 4 7 2 8 1 1 J807 2 J806 3 M82 4 PD CST2 lifter motor J907 5 M SW82 1 1 6 SW83 2 2 1 7 2 3 4 J733LA PD CST2 media PD CST2 media end switch width switch 3 J2001 PD CST1 lifter motor 4 3 2 SW2 J906 3 8 PD CST1 media width switch 2 SW3 M92 ENWW PD CST1 media end switch 1 5 5 1 A B C D Figure 3-46 Paper deck general circuit diagram (3 X 500) PD CST3 media PD CST3 media end switch width switch PD CST3 lifter motor M J2006C J904 1 Tools for troubleshooting 333 Internal print-quality test pages Print-quality-troubleshooting pages Use the built-in print-quality-troubleshooting pages to help diagnose and solve print-quality problems. button. 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: 3. ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Print Quality Pages Press the Down arrow to highlight the Print PQ Troubleshooting Pages item, and then press the OK button to print the pages. The product returns to the Ready state after printing the print-quality-troubleshooting pages. Follow the instructions on the pages that print out. Figure 3-47 Print-quality troubleshooting procedure hp color LaserJet M750 Printers Print Quality Troubleshooting Procedure 1 334 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Figure 3-48 Yellow print-quality troubleshooting page Yellow Green Figure 3-49 Yellow comparison page Green Yellow Yellow cannot be easily seen unless combined with cyan, so half of each page is yellow and the other half is an amplified version of yellow problems (green half). Compare the yellow on page one with the corresponding green on page two for defects. You can also check the cyan page for defects. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 335 Figure 3-50 Black print-quality troubleshooting page 1 2 3 1. Grids The grids are in inches and millimeters. They are label with letters and numbers so that defects can be described by position and by distance between repeats. 2. Color plane registration (CPR) bars After printing, the box with no extra color in each area on each page shows how far off the CPR of that color is. Each page has two process direction areas and three scan direction areas that are labeled x and y and 1–11. The page should be fed by the long edge. Each square from the center equals 42 microns. 3. Color ramp patches Used to detect offset for the OPC or developer in the image drum or offset in the fuser. NOTE: To get further assistance in print quality troubleshooting, go to www.hp.com/support/colorljM750 and select PQ Troubleshooting Tools. 336 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Diagnostics page Use the diagnostics page to evaluate problems with color plane registration, EP parameters, and print quality. button. 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: 3. ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Print Quality Pages Press the Down arrow the page. to highlight the Diagnostics Page item, and then press the OK button to print HP Color LaserJet M750 Series 1 3 2 5 6 7 8 4 4 ENWW 1 Calibration information 2 Parameters 3 Color density 4 Color plane registration Tools for troubleshooting 337 5 Primary colors 6 Secondary colors 7 Temperature values (21A) 8 Humidity values (21B) 338 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Configuration page Depending on the model, up to three pages print when you print a configuration page. In addition to the main configuration page, the embedded Jetdirect configuration pages print. Configuration page Use the configuration page to view current product settings, to help troubleshoot product problems, or to verify installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper trays, and printer languages. 1. Press the Home button . 2. Open the following menus: ● Administration ● Reports ● Configuration/Status Pages 3. Press the Down arrow 4. Press the Up arrow to highlight the Configuration Page item, and then press the OK button. to highlight the Print item, and then press the OK button. The message Submitted to Queue displays on the control panel until the product finishes printing the configuration page. The product returns to the Ready state after printing the configuration page. NOTE: If the product is configured with EIO cards (for example, an HP Jetdirect Print Server) or an optional hard-disk drive, additional pages will print that provide information about those devices. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 339 Figure 3-51 Configuration page HP Color LaserJet M750 Series 4 1 5 6 2 7 8 3 1 Printer information 2 Installed personalities and options 3 Color density 4 Calibration information 5 Memory 6 Event log 7 Security 8 Paper trays and options 340 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW HP embedded Jetdirect page The second configuration page is the HP embedded Jetdirect page, which contains the following information: HP Color LaserJet M750 Series 1 2 3 4 5 6 Always make sure the status line under the HP Jetdirect configuration lines indicates "I/O Card Ready". ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 341 Finding important information on the configuration pages Certain information, such as the firmware date codes, the IP address, and the e-mail gateways, is especially helpful while servicing the product. This information is on the various configuration pages. Table 3-27 Important information on the configuration pages Type of information Specific information Configuration page Firmware date codes DC controller When you use the remote firmware upgrade procedure, all of these firmware components are upgraded. Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.” Firmware datecode Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.” Embedded Jetdirect firmware version Look on the embedded Jetdirect page, under “HP Jetdirect Configuration.” Accessories and internal storage External disk (optional) All optional devices that are installed on the product should be listed on the main configuration page. Look on the main configuration page, under “Installed Personalities and Options.” Shows model and capacity. Embedded HP Jetdirect Look on the main configuration page, under “Installed Personalities and Options.” Shows model and ID. Total RAM Look on the main configuration page, under “Memory.” Duplex unit Look on the main configuration page, under “Paper Trays and Options.” Additional 500-sheet feeders Additional 500-sheet feeders Look on the main configuration page, under “Paper Trays and Options.” Engine cycles and event logs Engine cycles Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.” Event-log information Look on the main configuration page, under “Event log.” In addition, separate pages print for the optional paper handling devices and the fax accessory. These pages list more-detailed information for those devices. Total page counts and maintenance kit counts are important for ongoing product maintenance. The configuration page lists only the three most recent errors. To see a list of the 50 most recent errors, print an event log from the Diagnostics menu. Event-log information Color-band test The color-band test page shows bands of colors that can indicate whether or not the product is producing colors correctly. 1. Press the Home button . 2. Open the following menus: ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Print Quality Pages 342 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW ENWW 3. Press the Down arrow to highlight the Color Band Test item, and then press the OK button. 4. Press the Down arrow to highlight the Print Test Page item, and then press the OK button. Tools for troubleshooting 343 Print quality troubleshooting tools Repetitive image-defect ruler Use a ruler to measure occurrences of repetitive image defects to help solve image quality problems. Place the ruler next to the first occurrence of the defect on the page. Find the distance between identical defects and use the figure below to identify the component that is causing the defect. NOTE: When printing this defect ruler, verify that any scaling options in the printer driver are disabled. 0 mm 35 mm 42 mm 50 mm 60 mm 79 mm 76 mm 80 mm 94 mm Distance between defects Product components that cause the defect 35 mm Print cartridge (primary charging roller) 42 mm Print cartridge (developer roller) 50 mm Print engine (primary transfer roller) 60 mm Print engine (secondary transfer roller) 76 mm Fuser (fuser film) 79 mm Fuser (pressure roller) 94 mm Print cartridge (OPC) Calibrate the product Calibration is a product function that optimizes print quality. If you experience any image-quality problems, calibrate the product. 344 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW ENWW 1. Press the Home button . 2. Press the Down arrow to highlight the Device Maintenance menu, and then press the OK button. 3. Press the Down arrow to highlight the Calibration/Cleaning menu, and then press the OK button. 4. Press the Down arrow OK button. to highlight the Full Calibration or Quick Calibration setting, and then press the ● Full Calibration: takes about 70 seconds and performs color plane registration, environment change control, and Dmax and Dhalf adjustments. Use Full Calibration if colors are misaligned or appear blurry. Full Calibration runs automatically after a replacement transfer belt (ITB) is installed. Full Calibration must be run manually after a laser scanner is replaced. ● Quick Calibration: takes about 45 seconds and performs Dmax and Dhalf adjustments. Use Quick Calibration if colors are wrong, highlights are missing, or if colors are too dark or too light. Tools for troubleshooting 345 Control-panel menus Administration menu You can perform basic product setup by using the Administration menu. Use the HP Embedded Web Server for more advanced product setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the product IP address or host name in the address bar of a Web browser. Reports menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Reports menu. Table 3-28 Reports menu First level Second level Values Description Configuration/Status Pages Administration Menu Map Print Shows a map of the entire Administration menu and the selected values for each setting. View Current Settings Page Print View Configuration Page Print View Supplies Status Page Print View Shows a summary of the current settings for the product. Printing this page might be helpful if you plan to make changes and need a record of the present configuration. Shows the product settings and installed accessories. Shows the approximate remaining life for the supplies; reports statistics on total number of pages and jobs processed, serial number, page counts, and maintenance information. HP provides approximations of the remaining life for the supplies as a customer convenience. The actual remaining supply levels might be different from the approximations provided. Usage Page Print View File Directory Page Print View Web Services Status Page Print View Color Usage Job Log 346 Chapter 3 Solve problems Print Shows a count of all paper sizes that have passed through the product; lists whether they were simplex, duplex, monochrome, or color; and reports the page count. Shows the file name and folder name for files that are stored in the product memory. Shows the detected Web Services for the product. Shows the number of color and black and white pages that each user has printed. It also indicates from which software program each of the jobs was printed. ENWW Table 3-28 Reports menu (continued) First level Second level Values Description Other Pages Demonstration Page Print Prints a demonstration page. RGB Samples Print Prints color samples for different RGB values. Use the samples as a guide for matching printed colors. CMYK Samples Print Prints color samples for different CMYK values. Use the samples as a guide for matching printed colors. PCL Font List Print Prints the available PCL fonts. PS Font List Print Prints the available PS fonts. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 347 General Settings menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the General Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-29 General Settings menu First level Second level Third level Date/Time Settings Date/Time Format Date Format Fourth level Values Description DD/MMM/YYYY Specify the date and time and configure date/time settings. MMM/DD/YYYY YYYY/MMM/DD Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM) 24 hours Date/Time Energy Settings Sleep Schedule Select the format that the product uses to show the date and time, for example 12hour format or 24hour format. Time Zone Select the time zone from a list. Date Select the date from a pop-up calendar. Time Select the time from a pop-up keypad. Adjust for Daylight Savings Checkbox If you are in an area that uses daylight savings time, select the Adjust for Daylight Savings check box. A list of scheduled events displays. + (Add) Configure the product to automatically wake up or go to sleep at specific times on specific days. Using this feature saves energy. Edit Delete NOTE: You must configure the date and time settings before you can use the Sleep Schedule feature. Event Type Wake Sleep Select whether to add or edit a Wake event or a Sleep event, and then select the time and the days for the wake or sleep event. Event Time Event Days 348 Chapter 3 Solve problems Select days of the week from a list. ENWW Table 3-29 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Sleep Timer Settings Sleep/Auto Off After Third level Fourth level Values Enable Set the number of minutes after which the product enters Sleep Mode/Auto Off After. Use the arrow buttons on the control panel to increase or decrease the number of minutes. Disable Range: 0 to 120 minutes Default = 60 minutes Description NOTE: For units sold in Europe (Blue Angel), there will be no option to disable sleep. NOTE: Setting this value to “0” will cause the product to attempt to enter sleep as soon as possible. Wake/Auto On to These Events All Events* Network port Power button only All Events: product enters a Suspend state, and not Deep Suspend. Network port: product enters both a Suspend state, and at Deep Suspend state. Both network jobs, and any jobs listed in All Events wake the product. Power button only: product will not enter a Deep Suspend, but it will power off and you must press the power button to restart the product. Optimum Speed/ Energy Usage Faster first page* Save energy Save more energy Save most energy ENWW Specifies how much the fuser cools down between print or copy jobs. To maximize the product speed, select the Faster first page option. To maximize energy conservation, select the Save most energy option. Or, select one of the other settings to compromise between speed and energy conservation. Tools for troubleshooting 349 Table 3-29 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Print Quality Adjust Color Highlights Cyan -5 to 5 Set the default printquality values and trigger cleaning actions for optimum print quality. If you are using specific types of paper or placing the product in extreme environments, you might need to make adjustments in this menu. Magenta Yellow Black Default Highlights are the brightest color-values in an image. For each color, select a setting to adjust the darkness or lightness of highlights on the printed page. Decrease the value to lighten the highlights. Increase the value to darken the highlights. Default: Resets all the color-density settings to the factory default values. Midtones Cyan -5 to 5 Midtones are the middle-range colorvalues in an image. For each color, select a setting to adjust the darkness or lightness of midtones on the printed page. Decrease the value to lighten the midtones. Increase the value to darken the midtones. -5 to 5 Shadows are the darkest color-values in an image. For each color, select a setting to adjust the darkness or lightness of shadows on the printed page. Decrease the value to lighten the shadows. Increase the value to darken the shadows. Magenta Yellow Black Shadows Cyan Magenta Yellow Black Default Default: Resets all the color-density settings to the factory default values. 350 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-29 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Image Registration Adjust Tray Print Test Page Values Description Shift the margin alignment to center the image on the page from top to bottom and from left to right. You can also align the image on the front with the image printed on the back. Use the Adjust Tray menu to adjust the registration settings for each tray. Before adjusting these values, print a registration test page. It provides alignment guides in the X and Y directions so you can determine which adjustments are necessary. You can adjust values for X1 Shift, X2 Shift, Y1 Shift, and Y2 Shift. Use the Print Test Page option to print a page to test the image registration. It provides alignment guides in the X and Y directions so you can determine which adjustments are necessary. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 351 Table 3-29 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description X1 Shift -5.00 mm to 5.00 mm X is the direction that is perpendicular to the way the paper passes through the product. This is also known as the scan direction. X1 is the scan direction for a single-sided page or for the second side of a two-sided page. X2 is the scan direction for the first side of a two-sided page. Y1 Shift X2 Shift Y2 Shift Y is the direction that the paper feeds through the product. Y1 is the feed direction for a singlesided page or for the second side of a twosided page. Y2 is the feed direction for the first side of a twosided page. Auto Sense Mode Tray 1 Sensing Full sensing Expanded sensing* Transparency Only Configure which paper types the product should automatically sense. The following settings are available: Full sensing: Use this setting if you don't want media type misprints and can accept slower performance and possible decreased cartridge life. Expanded sensing: The product senses only the first page and assumes the rest of the pages are the same type. Transparency Only: The product senses only the first page. The product distinguishes transparencies from other paper types. 352 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-29 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Tray X Sensing Values Description Expanded sensing* When Configuring the Auto Sense Mode option for Tray 1 and Tray 2, the variable represents the highest number of trays installed on the product. Transparency Only Adjust Paper Types Select from a list of paper types that the product supports. The available options are the same for each paper type. Print Mode Select from a list of print modes. Changing the Print Mode setting is usually the first step in trying to resolve print-quality problems. Problems can include toner not sticking well to the page, a faint image of the page repeated on the same or following page, incorrect gloss level, etc. Resistance Mode Normal mode Use this setting to correct print quality problems in lowhumidity environments with highly resistive paper. Use the Up option to solve print quality problems that are related to poor tonertransfer. Use the Down option in the event that small, “pinhole” defects occur. Up Down Humidity Mode Normal High Pre-Rotation Mode Off On ENWW Use this setting to correct print quality problems in highhumidity environments. Use the High setting if you are in a high-humidity environment and you are seeing problems with low toner density on the first page of a job. Turn on if horizontal lines appear on pages. Using this feature increases the firstpage-out time by a few seconds. Tools for troubleshooting 353 Table 3-29 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Fuser Temp Mode Normal If you continue to see ghost images on your print jobs after adjusting the Print Mode setting, set this feature by using the Up option or Down option. Using this mode increases wear on product parts and might also slow down the printing process. Up Down Paper Curl Mode Normal Reduced If excessive curling of paper occurs in warm, high-humidity environments above 23° C (73° F), use the Reduced setting. Using this setting slows printing and increases the frequency of consumable replacements. Restore Modes Optimize Normal Paper Standard* Smooth Use to optimize various print modes that address print quality issues. Use the Smooth setting to correct print quality problems when using very smooth paper of normal weight. Heavy Paper Standard* Smooth Envelope Control Normal* Reduced Temp 354 Chapter 3 Solve problems Use this setting to correct print quality problems when using very smooth, heavyweight paper 129-216 g/m2 (32-58 lb). The Smooth setting should be used if you are having print quality problems with very smooth, heavy paper. If envelopes are sticking together in the output bin, use this setting to reduce the fuser temperature. ENWW Table 3-29 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Environment Fourth level Values Description Normal* Enable if the product is operating in a low temperature environment and you are having problems with print quality, such as blisters in the printed image. Low Temp Line Voltage Normal* Low Voltage Tray 1 Normal* Alternate Background Normal* Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 ENWW Enable if the product is operating in a low voltage environment and you are having problems with print quality, such as blisters in the printed image. Affects how often the product performs an internal cleaning procedure. Use the Alternate setting if you are having problems with extra toner on pages. In this mode, the product performs the cleaning procedure after each job that is printed from Tray 1. Using this mode increases wear on all the toner cartridges. Use if pages are printing with a shaded background. Using this feature might reduce gloss levels. Use the Alternate 1 setting if you are seeing a shaded background on the entire page. Use the Alternate 2 setting if you are seeing thin vertical lines on the background. The Alternate 3 setting applies the Alternate 1 setting and the Alternate 2 setting at the same time. Use this setting if the first two settings do not correct the problem. Tools for troubleshooting 355 Table 3-29 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Uniformity Control Fourth level Values Description Normal* This setting might help correct uniformity in print quality issues, such as a mottled appearance due to poor transfer of toner onto the page. The Alternate 1 setting increases the T1 transfer bias and can be used for any media type. The Alternate 2 setting decreases the fuser temperature and reduces the throughput. Use this setting if you are experiencing mottled output due to poor fusing on normal or light paper types. The Alternate 3 setting applies the Alternate 1 setting and the Alternate 2 setting at the same time. Use this setting if the first two settings do not correct the problem. Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 Tracking Control On* Off Registration Normal* Alternate 356 Chapter 3 Solve problems Normally, this setting should be set to On. Tracking control algorithm is turned ON/OFF. It is not expected that the customer will ever need to change this setting. Use this setting if you are having trouble with color-planes shifting or overlapping on the page. Use the Alternate setting if you are seeing color mis-registration problems. ENWW Table 3-29 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Transfer Control Fourth level Values Description Normal* Corrects transfer issues in print jobs. Turn this feature on if green, mottled images are printed on the page. Note that using this mode can increase problems with blurry images or specks of toner on the leading or trailing edge of the paper. The Alternate 1 setting reduces the T1 bias and should be used when re-transfer occurs. The Alternate 2 setting increases the inter-page gap. Using this setting reduces throughput and might decrease the printcartridge life. The Alternate 3 setting applies the Alternate 1 setting and the Alternate 2 setting at the same time. Use this setting if the first two settings do not correct the problem. Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 Fuser Temp Normal* If you are seeing a faint image of the page repeated at the bottom of the page or on the following page, you should first make sure the Adjust Paper Types setting and the Print Mode setting are correct for the type of paper you are using. If you continue to see ghost images on your print jobs, set the Fuser Temp feature to the Alternate setting. Alternate Restore Optimize Resolution Returns all the settings in the Optimize menu to the factory-default values. Image Ret 3600 1200 x 1200dpi ENWW Sets the resolution at which the product prints. Tools for troubleshooting 357 Table 3-29 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Edge Control Third level Fourth level Values Description Off Determines how edges are rendered. Edge Control has two components: adaptive halftoning and trapping. Adaptive halftoning increases edge sharpness. Trapping reduces the effect of color-plane misregistration by overlapping the edges of adjacent objects slightly. Select one of the following options: Light Normal* Maximum Off: Turns off both trapping and adaptive halftoning. Light: Sets trapping at a minimal level, and adaptive halftoning is on. Normal: Trapping is at a medium level and adaptive halftoning is on. Maximum: Trapping is at the highest level, and adaptive halftoning is on. 358 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-29 General Settings menu (continued) First level Jam Recovery Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Auto* This product provides a jam recovery feature that reprints jammed pages. Select one of the following options: Off On Auto: The product attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available. This is the default setting. Off: The product does not attempt to reprint jammed pages. Because no memory is used to store the most recent pages, performance is optimal. NOTE: When using this option, if the product runs out of paper and the job is being printed on both sides, some pages can be lost. On: The product always reprints jammed pages. Additional memory is allocated to store the last few pages printed. This might cause overall performance to suffer. Auto Recovery Enabled Disabled* ENWW The product attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available. This is the default setting. Tools for troubleshooting 359 Table 3-29 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Manage Stored Jobs Sort Stored Jobs By Third level Fourth level Values Description Job Name* This option allows you list to the jobs either Alphabetically or Chronologically. Date Quick Copy Job Held Timeout Off* 1 Hour 4 Hours 1 Day Sets a maximum storage-time limit for stored Quick Copy and Proof and Hold jobs. If a stored job is not printed during this period, it is deleted. 1 Week Quick Copy Job Storage Limit 1-100 Default = 32 Configure global settings for jobs that are stored in the product memory. The Quick Copy Job Storage Limit feature specifies the number of Quick Copy and Proof and Hold jobs that can be stored on the product. The maximum allowed value is 100. Default Folder Name Enable Retrieve from USB 360 Chapter 3 Solve problems Type the name for the stored jobs folder that is accessible to all users. Enabled Disabled* Enables the product to open a file from a USB device. ENWW Table 3-29 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Hold Off Print Job Values Description Enabled* Enable this feature if you want to prevent print jobs from starting while a user is initiating a copy job from the control panel. Held print jobs start printing after the copy job is finished, provided that no other copy job is in the print queue. Disabled Restore Factory Settings Address Book Calibration Restores all product settings to their factory defaults. Copy Digital Send E-mail Fax General Print Security General Print Settings menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the General Print Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-30 General Print Settings menu First level Manual Feed Second level Values Description Enabled Enable or disable the manual-feed feature, which allows the user to feed paper into the product by hand. When this feature is enabled, the user can select manual feed from the control panel as the paper source for a job. If a tray is not specified as part of a job, manual feed is selected. Disabled* Courier Font Regular* Dark ENWW Select which version of the Courier font you want to use. The factory default setting is Regular, which uses an average stroke width. The Dark setting can be used if a heavier Courier font is needed. Tools for troubleshooting 361 Table 3-30 General Print Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Wide A4 Values Description Enabled Changes the printable area of A4size paper. If enabled, eighty 10pitch characters can be printed on a single line of A4 paper. Disabled* Suppress Blank Pages No* Yes Print PS Errors Enabled Disabled* Print PDF Errors Enabled Disabled* Personality Auto* PCL POSTSCRIPT PDF PCL Form Length Range: 5 – 128 Default = 60 Selects whether a PostScript (PS) error page is printed when the product encounters a PS error. Selects whether a PDF error page is printed when the product encounters a PDF error. Configures the default print language or personality for the product. Normally you should not change the product language. If you change the setting to a specific product language, the product does not automatically switch from one language to another unless specific software commands are sent to it. Controls the PCL print-command options. PCL is a set of product commands that Hewlett-Packard developed to provide access to product features. Use the Form Length feature to select the user-soft default vertical form length. Orientation Portrait* Landscape Font Source Internal* USB Font Number Range: 0 – 110 Default = 0 362 Chapter 3 Solve problems Select the orientation that is most often used for copy or scan originals. Select the Portrait option if the short edge is at the top, or select the Landscape option if the long edge is at the top. Selects the font source for the user-soft default font. The list of available options varies depending on the installed product options. Specifies the font number for the user-soft default font using the source that is specified in the Font Source menu. The product assigns a number to each font and lists it on the PCL font list. The font number displays in the Font # column of the printout. ENWW Table 3-30 General Print Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Values Description Font Pitch Range: 0.44 – 99.99 If the Font Source option and the Font Number setting indicate a contour font, use this feature to select a default pitch (for a fixedspaced font). Default = 10 Font Point Size Range: 4.00 – 999.75 Default = 12.00 If the Font Source option and the Font Number setting indicate a contour font, then use this feature to select a default point size (for a proportional-spaced font). Symbol Set Select from a list of symbol sets. Select any one of several available symbol sets from the control panel. A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font. The factory default value for this option is PC-8. Either PC-8 or PC-850 are recommended for linedraw characters. Append CR to LF No* Selects whether a carriage return (CR) is appended to each line feed (LF) encountered in backwardscompatible PCL jobs (pure text, no job control). Select Yes to append the carriage return. The default setting is No. Some environments, such as UNIX, indicate a new line by using only the line-feed control code. This option allows the user to append the required carriage return to each line feed. Yes Media Source Mapping Standard* Classic Use to select and maintain input trays by number when you are not using the product driver, or when the software program has no option for tray selection. The following options are available: Standard: Tray numbering is based on newer HP LaserJet models. Classic: Tray numbering is based on HP LaserJet 4 and older models. Default Print Options menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Default Print Options menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 363 Table 3-31 Default Print Options menu First level Second level Number of Copies Default Paper Size Default Custom Paper Size X Dimension Values Description Range: 1 – 32000 Default = 1 Sets the default number of copies for a copy job. This default applies when the Copy function or the Quick Copy function is initiated from the product Home screen. Select from a list of sizes that the product supports. Configures the default paper size used for print jobs. Range: 3 – 8.5 inches Configures the default paper size that is used when the user selects Custom as the paper size for a print job. Default = 8.5 inches Y Dimension Range: 5 – 14 inches Default = 14 inches Use Inches Enabled* Disabled Sides 1-sided* NOTE: Available only when duplexing is enabled. 2-sided Specifies whether the original document is printed on one or both sides, and whether the copies should be printed on one or both sides. For example: select the 1sided original, 2-sided output option when the original is printed on one side, but you want to make two-sided copies. Select the Orientation setting to specify portrait or landscape orientation and to select the way the second sides are printed. 2-Sided Format Book-style* NOTE: Available only when duplexing is enabled. Flip-style Edge-to-Edge Normal (recommended)* Edge-to-Edge output 364 Chapter 3 Solve problems Configures the default style for 2sided print jobs. If the Book-style option is selected, the back side of the page is printed with the right side up. This option is for print jobs that are bound along the left edge. If the Flip-style option is selected, the back side of the page is printed upside-down. This option is for print jobs that are bound along the top edge. Use to avoid shadows that can appear along the edges of copies when the original document is printed close to the edges. ENWW Display Settings menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Display Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-32 Display Settings menu First level Values Description Range: -10 to 10 Default = 0 Sets the brightness of the control panel display. The default is 0. This item also controls the viewing angle at which the display is visible. Language Select from a list of languages that the product supports. Sets the language. The default language is English. Show IP address Display* Use this feature to display or hide the IP address on the controlpanel display. Display Brightness Second level Hide Inactivity Timeout Range: 10 – 300 seconds Default = 60 Clearable Warnings On Job* Idle Timeout: The time period, in seconds, after which an idle TCP print data connection is closed (default is 60 seconds, 0 disables the timeout). Sets whether a warning is cleared on the control panel or when another job is sent. Job: The warning message disappears at the end of the job. On: The warning message remains until you press the OK button. Continuable Events Auto-continue (10 seconds)* Touch OK to continue Determines product behavior when the system generates an Auto Continuable error. On: Allows the product to continue printing. Off: Stops the product from printing until the error is cleared by the user. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 365 Manage Supplies menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Manage Supplies menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-33 Manage Supplies menu First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Print Supplies Status Supply Settings Description Use the Supplies Status menu to configure how the product reacts when supplies are reaching the end of their estimated life. Black Cartridge Very Low Settings Stop Prompt to continue* Continue Select what the product should do when the print cartridge is very near the end of its estimated life. Stop: The product stops until you replace the cartridge. Prompt to continue: The product stops until you clear the prompt message. After the prompt message is cleared, there will not be another message indicating that the supply needs to be replaced. Continue: The product provides an alert message, but it continues printing. There will not be another message indicating that the supply needs to be replaced. Low Threshold Settings 366 Chapter 3 Solve problems 1-100% Set the percentage at which the product notifies you when the supply is very low. ENWW Table 3-33 Manage Supplies menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Color Cartridges Very Low Settings Fourth level Values Description Stop Select what the product should do when the print cartridge is very near the end of its estimated life. Prompt to continue* Continue Stop: The product stops until you replace the cartridge. Prompt to continue: The product stops until you clear the prompt message. Continue: The product provides an alert message, but it continues printing. Low Threshold Settings Cyan 1-100% Set the percentage at which the product notifies you when the supply is very low. Stop Stop: The product stops until you replace the transfer kit. Magenta Yellow Transfer Kit Very Low Settings Prompt to continue* Continue Prompt to continue: The product stops until you clear the prompt message. Continue: The product provides an alert message, but it continues printing. Fuser Kit Low Threshold Settings 1-100% Set the percentage at which the product notifies you when the supply is very low. Very Low Settings Stop Stop: The product stops until you replace the fuser kit. Prompt to continue* Continue Prompt to continue: The product stops until you clear the prompt message. Continue: The product provides an alert message, but it continues printing. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 367 Table 3-33 Manage Supplies menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Low Threshold Settings Restrict Color Use Fourth level Values Description 1-100% Set the percentage at which the product notifies you when the supply is very low. Auto* Mostly color pages Mostly black pages Color/Black Mix Auto* Mostly Color Pages Mostly Black Pages These menu selections allow you to balance the tradeoff between supply life and performance. Auto: The product software uses an algorithm based on printing data to achieve the best output. Mostly Color Pages: This selection provides the highest performance. If most of the printing is in color, this selection will not negatively affect supply life. Mostly Black Pages: This selection conserves the most supply life and is the best choice if most of the printing is done in black and white. Store Usage Data On supplies Not on supplies Supply Messages Low Message On* Off Select how the product displays the supply information. Low Message: Determines whether or not a low supply message is displayed on the control panel. Level Gauge On* Off 368 Chapter 3 Solve problems Level Gauge: Determines whether or not a supply level gauge appears on the control panel. ENWW Table 3-33 Manage Supplies menu (continued) First level Second level Reset Supplies New Fuser Kit Third level Fourth level Values Description No Use this menu to notify the product that a new fuser kit has been installed. Yes New Transfer Kit No Yes Use this menu to notify the product that a new transfer kit has been installed. Manage Trays menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Manage Trays menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-34 Manage Trays menu First level Values Description Use Requested Tray Exclusively* Controls how the product handles jobs that have specified a specific input tray. Two options are available: First Exclusively: The product never selects a different tray when the user has indicated that a specific tray should be used, even if that tray is empty. First: The product pulls from another tray if the specified tray is empty, even though the user specifically indicated a tray for the job. Manually Feed Prompt Always* Unless loaded Indicates whether a prompt should appear when the type or size for a job does not match the specified tray and the product pulls from the multipurpose tray instead. Two options are available: Always: A prompt always displays before using the multipurpose tray. Unless loaded: A message displays only if the multipurpose tray is empty. Size/Type Prompt Display* Do not display Controls whether the tray configuration message displays whenever a tray is closed. Two options are available: Display: This option shows the tray configuration message when a tray is closed. The user is able to configure the tray settings directly from this message. Do not display: This option prevents the tray configuration message from automatically appearing. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 369 Table 3-34 Manage Trays menu (continued) First level Values Description Use Another Tray Enabled* Turns on or off the control-panel prompt to select another tray when the specified tray is empty. Two options are available: Disabled Enabled: When this option is selected, the user is prompted either to add paper to the selected tray or to choose a different tray. Disabled: When this option is selected, the user is not given the option of selecting a different tray. The product prompts the user to add paper to the tray that was initially selected. Alternative Letterhead Mode Disabled* Enabled Duplex Blank Pages Auto* Yes Use this option to load letterhead or preprinted paper into the tray the same way for all print jobs, whether you are printing to one side or both sides of the sheet. When this option is selected, load the paper as you would for printing on both sides. See the user documentation that came with the product for instructions about loading letterhead for printing on both sides. When this option is selected, the product speed slows to the speed required for printing on both sides. Controls how the product handles two-sided jobs (duplexing). Two options are available: Auto: Enables Smart Duplexing, which instructs the product not to process blank pages. Yes: Disables Smart Duplexing and forces the duplexer to flip the sheet of paper even if it is printed on only one side. This might be preferable for certain jobs that use paper types such as letterhead or prepunched paper. Image Rotation Standard Alternate Override A4/Letter Yes* No Prints on letter-size paper when an A4 job is sent but no A4-size paper is loaded in the product (or to print on A4 paper when a lettersize job is sent but no letter-size paper is loaded). This option will also override A3-size paper with ledger-size paper and ledger-size paper with A3-size paper. Network Settings menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Network Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. 370 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-35 Network Settings menu First level Values Description I/O Timeout Range: 5 – 300 sec Sets the I/O timeout period in seconds. I/O timeout refers to the elapsed time before a print job fails. If the stream of data that the product receives for a print job is interrupted, this setting indicates how long the product will wait before it reports that the job has failed. Default = 15 Jetdirect Menu See the table that follows for details. These menus have the same structure. If an additional HP Jetdirect network card is installed in the USB port, then both menus are available. Table 3-36 Jetdirect Menu First level Second level Information Print Sec Report Third level Fourth level Values Description Yes Yes: Prints a page that contains the current security settings on the HP Jetdirect print server. No* No: A security settings page is not printed. TCP/IP Enable On* On: Enables the TCP/ IP protocol. Off Host Name Off: Disables the TCP/ IP protocol. Use the arrow buttons to edit the host name. NPIXXXXXX* ENWW An alphanumeric string, up to 32 characters, used to identify the product. This name is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page. The default host name is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the LAN hardware (MAC) address. Tools for troubleshooting 371 Table 3-36 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level IPV4 Settings Config Method Fourth level Values Description Bootp Specifies the method by which TCP/IPv4 parameters will be configured on the HP Jetdirect print server. DHCP* Auto IP Manual Bootp (Bootstrap Protocol): Use for automatic configuration from a BootP server. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol): Use for automatic configuration from a DHCPv4 server. If selected and a DHCP lease exists, the DHCP Release menu and the DHCP Renew menu are available to set DHCP lease options. Auto IP: Use for automatic link-local IPv4 addressing. An address in the form 169.254.x.x is assigned automatically. If you set this option to the manual setting, use the Manual Settings menu to configure TCP/IPv4 parameters. Manual Settings IP Address Enter the address. Subnet Mask Enter the address. Default Gateway Enter the address. NOTE: This menu is available only if you select the Manual option under the Config Method menu. 372 Chapter 3 Solve problems (Available only if the Config Method option is set to the Manual option.) Configure parameters directly from the product control panel. ENWW Table 3-36 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Default IP Values Description Auto IP* Specify the IP address for the product to default to when the print server is unable to obtain an IP address from the network during a forced TCP/IP reconfiguration (for example, when manually configured to use BootP or DHCP). Legacy NOTE: This feature assigns a static IP address that might interfere with a managed network. Auto IP: A link-local IP address 169.254.x.x is set. Legacy: The address 192.0.0.192 is set, consistent with older HP Jetdirect products. Primary DNS Range: 0 – 255 Default = xxx.xxx.xx.xx Secondary DNS Range: 0 – 255 Default = 0.0.0.0 IPV6 Settings Enable Off On* Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Primary Domain Name System (DNS) Server. Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Secondary DNS Server. Enable or disable IPv6 operation on the print server. Off: IPv6 is disabled. On: IPv6 is enabled. Address Manual Settings Enable Address ENWW Enable and manually configure a TCP/IPv6 address. Tools for troubleshooting 373 Table 3-36 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level DHCPV6 Policy Fourth level Values Description Router Specified Router Specified: The stateful autoconfiguration method to be used by the print server is determined by a router. The router specifies whether the print server obtains its address, its configuration information, or both from a DHCPv6 server. Router Unavailable* Always Router Unavailable: If a router is not available, the print server should attempt to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHCPv6 server. Always: Whether a router is available, the print server always attempts to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHCPv6 server. Primary DNS Secondary DNS Proxy Server Select from a provided list. Specifies the proxy server to be used by embedded applications in the product. A proxy server is typically used by network clients for Internet access. It caches Web pages and provides a degree of Internet security for those clients. To specify a proxy server, enter its IPv4 address or fullyqualified domain name. The name can be up to 255 octets. For some networks, you might need to contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for the proxy server address. 374 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-36 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level ENWW Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Proxy Port Default = 00080 Enter the port number used by the proxy server for client support. The port number identifies the port reserved for proxy activity on your network, and can be a value from 0 to 65535. Idle Timeout Default = 0270 The time period, in seconds, after which an idle TCP print data connection is closed (default is 270 seconds; 0 disables the timeout). Tools for troubleshooting 375 Table 3-36 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Security Secure Web Third level Fourth level Values Description HTTPS Required* For configuration management, specify whether the HP Embedded Web Server will accept communications using HTTPS (Secure HTTP) only, or both HTTP and HTTPS. HTTPS Optional HTTPS Required: For secure, encrypted communications, only HTTPS access is accepted. The print server will appear as a secure site. IPSEC Keep Disable* Specify the IPSec status on the print server. Keep: IPSec status remains the same as currently configured. Disable: IPSec operation on the print server is disabled. 802.1X Reset Keep* Specify whether the 802.1X settings on the print server are reset to the factory defaults. Reset: The 802.1X settings are reset to the factory defaults. Keep: The current 802.1X settings are maintained. Reset Security Yes No* Specify whether the current security settings on the print server will be saved or reset to factory defaults. Yes: Security settings are reset to factory defaults. No: The current security settings are maintained. 376 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-36 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Diagnostics Embedded Tests LAN HW Test Fourth level Values Description Yes Provides tests to help diagnose network hardware or TCP/IP network connection problems. No* Embedded tests help to identify whether a network fault is internal or external to the product. Use an embedded test to check hardware and communication paths on the print server. After you select and enable a test and set the execution time, you must select the Execute option to initiate the test. Depending on the execution time, a selected test runs continuously until either the product is turned off or an error occurs and a diagnostic page is printed. CAUTION: Running this embedded test will erase your TCP/IP configuration. This test performs an internal loopback test. An internal loopback test will send and receive packets only on the internal network hardware. There are no external transmissions on your network. HTTP Test Yes No* Checks operation of HTTP by retrieving predefined pages from the product, and tests the HP Embedded Web Server. Select the Yes option to use this test, or the No option to not use it. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 377 Table 3-36 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level SNMP Test Values Description Yes Checks operation of SNMP communications by accessing predefined SNMP objects on the product. No* Select the Yes option to choose this test, or the No option to not choose it. Data Path Test Yes No* This test helps to identify data path and corruption problems on an HP postscript level 3 emulation product. It sends a predefined PS file to the product, However, the test is paperless; the file will not print. Select the Yes option to choose this test, or the No option to not choose it. Select All Tests Yes No* Use this item to select all available embedded tests. Select the Yes option to choose all tests. Select the No option to select individual tests. Execution Time [H] Range: 1 – 24 hours Default = 1 hour Specify the length of time (in hours) that an embedded test will be run. If you select zero (0), the test runs indefinitely until an error occurs or the product is turned off. Data gathered from the HTTP, SNMP, and Data Path tests is printed after the tests have completed. Execute No* Yes 378 Chapter 3 Solve problems No: Do not initiate the selected tests. Yes: Initiate the selected tests. ENWW Table 3-36 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Ping Test Dest Type Third level Fourth level Values IPv4 This test is used to check network communications. This test sends link-level packets to a remote network host and then waits for an appropriate response. To run a ping test, set the following items: IPv6 Description Dest Type Specify whether the target product is an IPv4 or IPv6 node. Dest IPv4 Range: 0 – 255 Default = 127.0.0.1 Dest IPv6 Enter the IPv4 address. Select from a provided Enter the IPv6 list. address. Default = : : 1 Packet Size Range: 64 – 2048 Default = 64 Timeout Range: 001 – 100 Default = 001 Count Range: 0 – 100 Default = 004 Print Results Specify the size of each packet, in bytes, to be sent to the remote host. Specify the length of time, in seconds, to wait for a response from the remote host. Specify the number of ping test packets to send for this test. Select a value from 0 to 100. To configure the test to run continuously, select 0. Yes No* Execute Yes No* Ping Results Packets Sent Range: 0 – 65535 Default = 00000 ENWW No: Do not initiate the selected tests. Yes: Initiate the selected tests. Shows the number of packets sent to the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed. Tools for troubleshooting 379 Table 3-36 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Packets Received Third level Fourth level Range: 0 – 65535 Shows the number of packets received from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed. The default is 0. Default = 00000 Percent Lost Range: 0 – 100 Default = 000 RTT Min Range: 0 – 4096 Default = 0000 RTT Max Range: 0 – 4096 Default = 0000 RTT Average Range: 0 – 4096 Default = 0000 Ping In Progress Yes No* Values Description Shows the percent (0 to 100) of ping test packets that were sent with no response from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed. Shows the minimum detected roundtriptime (RTT) for packet transmission and response. Shows the maximum detected roundtriptime (RTT) for packet transmission and response. Shows the average round-trip-time (RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response. Shows whether a ping test is in progress. Yes: Indicates a test in progress. No: Indicates that a test completed or was not run. Refresh Yes No* 380 Chapter 3 Solve problems When viewing the ping test results, this item upgrades the ping test data with current results. Select the Yes option to upgrade the data, or the No option to maintain the existing data. However, a refresh automatically occurs when the menu times out or you manually return to the main menu. ENWW Table 3-36 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Link Speed Third level Fourth level Values Description Auto* The link speed and communication mode of the print server must match the network. The available settings depend on the product and installed print server. CAUTION: If you change the link setting, network communications with the print server and network product might be lost. The print server uses auto-negotiation to configure itself with the highest link speed and communication mode allowed. If auto-negotiation fails, either the 100TX Half feature or the 10T Half feature is set depending on the detected link speed of the hub/switch port. (A 1000T half-duplex selection is not supported.) 10T Half 10 Mbps, half-duplex operation. 10T Full 10 Mbps, full-duplex operation. 10T Auto 10 Mbps, half-duplex operation. 100TX Half 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation. 100TX Full Limits autonegotiation to a maximum link speed of 100 Mbps, fullduplex operation.. 100TX Auto 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation. Troubleshooting menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Troubleshooting menu. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 381 In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-37 Troubleshooting menu First level Second level Event Log Third level Fourth level Values Description View* View or print a list of the 1,000 most recent events in the Event Log. For each event, the printed log shows the error number, page count, error code, and description or personality. Print Paper Path Page View* Print 382 Chapter 3 Solve problems Shows how many pages were printed from each tray. ENWW Table 3-37 Troubleshooting menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fax Fax T.30 Trace Fourth level Values Description Print T.30 Report Print Print or configure the fax T.30 trace report. T.30 is the standard that specifies handshaking, protocols, and error correction between fax machines. When to Print Report Never automatically print* Configure the T.30 report to print after certain events. You can choose to print the report after every fax job, every fax job sent, every fax job received, every send error, or every receive error. Print after every fax Print only after fax send jobs Print after any fax error Print only after fax send errors Print only after fax receive errors Fax V.34 Normal* Off Fax Speaker Mode Normal* Diagnostic Fax Log Entries On Off* ENWW Use to disable V.34 modulations if several fax failures have occurred or if phone line conditions require it. Used by a technician to evaluate and diagnose fax issues by listening to the sounds of fax modulations. The standard fax log includes basic information such as the time and whether the fax was successful. The detailed fax log shows the intermediate results of the redial process not shown in the standard fax log. Tools for troubleshooting 383 Table 3-37 Troubleshooting menu (continued) First level Second level Print Quality Pages Values Description Print PQ Troubleshooting Page Print Use to print pages that help you resolve problems with print quality. Diagnostics Page Print Print a diagnostics page. The page includes color swatches and a table of electrophotographic (EP) parameters. Print Test Page Print Print a page to help identify arcing in the high-voltage power supply for each color. The page contains a series of colored bars. If streaks appear on a bar, the high-voltage power supply for the corresponding color might have a problem. Copies Range: 1 – 30 Some problems with the high-voltage power supply do not appear until after several pages have been printed, so this test includes an option to print up to 30 pages. Color Band Test Third level Fourth level Default = 1 Diagnostic Tests Disable Cartridge Check Puts the product into a special mode in which you can remove a toner cartridge and still print internal pages. This can help you identify the source of a problem. When you are finished testing, press the OK button on the product control panel to return to the Troubleshooting menu. To return to normal product operation, press the OK button and reinstall the cartridge. Paper Path Sensors 384 Chapter 3 Solve problems Select from a list of the product sensors. Initiates a test of the paper path sensors. ENWW Table 3-37 Troubleshooting menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Paper Path Test Fourth level Values Description Source Tray Select from a list of the available trays. Generates a test page for testing paper handling features. You can define the path that is used for the test in order to test specific paper paths. Test Duplex Path Off* On Number of Copies Range: 1 – 500 Default = 1 Manual Sensor Test Select from a list of available components. Reset Sensors Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test Select from a list of available components. Reset Sensors ENWW Sets the default number of copies for a copy job. This default applies when the OK or Quick Copy function is initiated from the product Home screen. The factory default setting is 1. Test the product sensors and switches for correct operation. Each sensor is displayed on the control-panel screen, along with its status. Manually trip each sensor and watch for it to change on the screen. Press the Stop button to abort the test. Test the sensors in the trays and bins for correct operation. Each sensor is displayed on the control-panel screen, along with its status. Manually trip each sensor and watch for it to change on the screen. Press the Stop button to abort the test. Tools for troubleshooting 385 Table 3-37 Troubleshooting menu (continued) First level Second level Values Description Component Test Select from a list of available components. Exercise individual parts independently to isolate noise, leaking, or other issues. To start the test, select one of the components. The test will run the number of times specified by the Repeat option. You might be prompted to remove parts from the product during the test. Press the Stop button to abort the test. Continuous Scan 2-sided Scanner Tests Sensors Retrieve Diagnostic Data Third level Fourth level Create device data file Create zipped debug information file Include crash dump files Create files that contain information about the product that can help identify the cause of problems. Clean up debug information Send to E-mail Export to USB Generate Debug Data Start Device Maintenance menu Backup/Restore menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the Backup/ Restore menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. 386 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-38 Backup/Restore menu First level Second level Third level Values Description Backup Data Enable Scheduled Backups Backup Time Enter a time Days Between Backups Enter the number of days Backup Now Export Last Backup Restore Data Insert a USB drive that contains the backup file. Calibration/Cleaning menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the Calibration/Cleaning menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-39 Calibration/Cleaning menu First level Print Cleaning Page Second level Values Description Print Process the cleaning page that was created by using the Create Cleaning Page menu. The process takes up to 1.5 minutes. Clean Laser Glass Quick Calibration The product autonomically cycles the laser glass cover arms to remove debris from the upper surface of the laser glass. Start The product automatically calibrates itself at various times. However, you can calibrate the product immediately if you see problems with print quality. Use this feature to perform a partial calibration. Use this calibration if color density or tone seems incorrect. Before calibrating the product, make sure that the Ready indicator displays on the controlpanel display. If a job is in progress, the calibration occurs when that job is complete. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 387 Table 3-39 Calibration/Cleaning menu (continued) First level Full Calibration Second level Values Description Start The product automatically calibrates itself at various times. However, you can calibrate the product immediately if you see problems with print quality. Use this feature to perform a full calibration, which can take up to three minutes. Use this calibration if the color layers seem to be shifted on the page. Before calibrating the product, make sure that the Ready indicator displays on the controlpanel display. If a job is in progress, the calibration occurs when that job is complete. Restore Calibration Cancel Restore Delay Calibration at Wake/Power On Disabled Enabled* The product automatically reloads previously stored calibration values. Controls the timing of power-on calibration when the product wakes up or is turned on. Wake: Select if you are not using the feature and want to print jobs immediately when the product wakes up or is turned on, before calibration begins. No: The product will calibrate immediately when it wakes up or is turned on. The product will not print any jobs until it finishes calibrating. Yes: Enables the product that is asleep to accept print jobs before it calibrates. It might start calibrating before it has printed all the jobs it has received. This option allows quicker printing when coming out of sleep mode or when you turn the product on, but print quality might be reduced. NOTE: For the best results, allow the product to calibrate before printing. Print jobs performed before calibration might not be of the highest quality. 388 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW USB Firmware Upgrade menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the USB Firmware Upgrade menu. Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the on-screen instructions. Service menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the Service menu. The Service menu is locked and requires a PIN for access. This menu is intended for use by authorized service personnel. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 389 Interpret control-panel messages and event log entries Control-panel message types The control-panel messages and event code entries indicate the current product status or situations that might require action. NOTE: Event log errors do not appear on the control-panel display. Open the event log to view or print the event log errors. A control-panel message displays temporarily and might require that you acknowledge the message by touching the OK button to resume printing or by touching the Stop button to cancel the job. With certain messages, the job might not finish printing or the print quality might be affected. If the message is related to printing and the auto-continue feature is on, the product will attempt to resume printing after the message has appeared for 10 seconds without acknowledgement. For some messages, restarting the product might fix the problem. If a critical error persists, the product might require service. Control-panel messages and event log entries NOTE: Some of the messages in the following sections only appear in the event log. TIP: Some control-panel messages and event log entries refer to a specific product sensor or switch in the recommended action to solve the problem. See the diagrams in the clear jams section of the product troubleshooting manual for sensor and switch locations. 10.0X.Y0 Supply memory error Description The product cannot read or write to at least one print cartridge memory tag or a memory tag is missing from a print cartridge. Memory error ● 10.00.00 (event code) Black print cartridge ● 10.01.00 (event code) Cyan print cartridge ● 10.02.00 (event code) Magenta print cartridge ● 10.03.00 (event code) Yellow print cartridge 390 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW E-label missing ● 10.00.10 (event code) Black print cartridge ● 10.01.10 (event code) Cyan print cartridge ● 10.02.10 (event code) Magenta print cartridge ● 10.03.10 (event code) Yellow print cartridge Recommended action 1. Remove, and then reinstall the indicated print cartridge. 2. If the error reappears, turn the power off, and then on. 3. Check the cartridge e-label. If it is damaged, replace the cartridge. 4. If the error persists, replace the indicated print cartridge. 10.22.50 Description The transfer kit life was reset above the order threshold. A new ITB was installed. Recommended action No action necessary. 10.22.51 Description The transfer kit life was reset above the replace threshold. A new ITB was installed. Recommended action No action necessary. 10.22.52 Description The transfer kit life was reset above the reset threshold. A new ITB was installed. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 391 Recommended action No action necessary. 10.23.50 Description The fuser kit life was reset above the order threshold. A new fuser was installed. Recommended action No action necessary. 10.23.51 Description The fuser kit life was reset above the replace threshold. A new fuser was installed. Recommended action No action necessary. 10.23.52 Description The fuser kit life was reset above the reset threshold. A new ITB was installed. Recommended action No action necessary. 10.23.70 Printing past very low Description The product indicates when fuser kit is very low. The actual remaining fuse kit life might vary. You do not need to replace the fuser kit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. CAUTION: After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty ends. Recommended action If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the fuser kit. See the parts chapter in the repair manual for the fuser kit part number. TIP: Advise the customer that HP recommends that they have replacement supplies available to install when the print quality is no longer acceptable. 392 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 10.39.50 New Document Feeder Kit Description A new document feeder maintenance kit has been installed and New Document Feeder Kit has been selected from the control panel menus. Recommended action No action necessary. 10.39.53 Description Document feeder kit recommend clean prompt. Recommended action Remove the document feeder pick roller, feed roller, and the separation pad assemblies. Clean the rollers and pad with a damp lint-free cloth. 10.39.55 Clean Document Feeder Rollers Description The document feeder separation pad and rollers need to be cleaned. Recommended action Remove the document feeder pick roller, feed roller, and the separation pad assemblies. Clean the rollers and pad with a damp lint free cloth. 10.39.56 Description Scanned past document feeder scheduled cleaning prompt. Recommended action Remove the document feeder pick roller, feed roller, and the separation pad assemblies. Clean the rollers and pad with a damp lint free cloth. 10.39.60 Document Feeder Kit low Description The document feeder pick roller, feed roller, and separation pad are near their end of life. Recommended action No action necessary. 10.39.69 Document Feeder Kit very low Description The document feeder pick roller, feed roller, and separation pad are at their end of life. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 393 Recommended action Order and install a document feeder maintenance kit. 10.39.70 Scanning past very low Description The document feeder pick roller, feed roller, and separation pad are at their end of life. Recommended action Order and install a document feeder maintenance kit. 10.39.71 Document Feeder has stopped Description The document feeder pick roller, feed roller, and separation pad are at their end of life. Recommended action Order and install a document feeder maintenance kit. 10.XX.34 Used supply in use Description The indicated cartridge is used. ● 10.00.34 (event code) Black print cartridge ● 10.01.34 (event code) Cyan print cartridge ● 10.02.34 (event code) Magenta print cartridge ● 10.03.34 (event code) Yellow print cartridge Recommended action Make sure this is a genuine HP supply. NOTE: Removing a cartridge from one product and then installing it in a different product (for testing functionality) will cause this event code. 10.XX.40 Genuine HP supplies installed Description More than one genuine HP print cartridge has been installed. ● 10.00.40 (event code) 394 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Black print cartridge ● 10.01.40 (event code) Cyan print cartridge ● 10.02.40 (event code) Magenta print cartridge ● 10.03.40 (event code) Yellow print cartridge Recommended action No action necessary. 10.XX.41 Unsupported supply in use Description The indicated print cartridge is for a different product. ● 10.00.41 (event code) Black print cartridge ● 10.01.41 (event code) Cyan print cartridge ● 10.02.41 (event code) Magenta print cartridge ● 10.03.41 (event code) Yellow print cartridge Recommended action Remove the indicated print cartridge, and then install the correct cartridge for this product. TIP: See the parts chapter in the product repair manual for the correct cartridge part number. 10.XX.70 Printing past very low Description The product indicates when one of the consumables is very low. The actual remaining consumable life might vary. You do not need to replace the consumable at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. CAUTION: After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty ends. ● ENWW 10.00.70 (event code) Tools for troubleshooting 395 Black print cartridge ● 10.01.70 (event code) Cyan print cartridge ● 10.02.70 (event code) Magenta print cartridge ● 10.03.70 (event code) Yellow print cartridge ● 10.23.70 (event code) The product indicates when the fuser kit is very low. The actual remaining fuser kit life might vary. You do not need to replace the fuser kit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. Recommended action If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the indicated print cartridge or fuser kit. See the parts chapter in the repair manual for the print cartridge or fuser kit part number. TIP: Advise the customer that HP recommends that they have replacement supplies available to install when the print quality is no longer acceptable. 10.YY.15 Install Description The indicated supply has been removed or installed incorrectly. ● 10.00.15 (event code) Black print cartridge ● 10.01.15 (event code) Cyan print cartridge ● 10.02.15 (event code) Magenta print cartridge ● 10.03.15 (event code) Yellow print cartridge ● 10.23.15 Fuser kit ● 10.31.15 Toner collection unit (TCU) Recommended action Replace or install the indicated supply. 396 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW See the parts chapter in the product repair manual for the correct supply or kit part number. 10.YY.25 Wrong cartridge in slot Description The indicated cartridge is installed in the wrong position. ● 10.00.25 (event code) Black print cartridge ● 10.01.25 (event code) Cyan print cartridge ● 10.02.25 (event code) Magenta print cartridge ● 10.03.25 (event code) Yellow print cartridge Recommended action Install the indicated cartridge in the correct position. From left to right, the correct cartridge order follows: ● Yellow ● Magenta ● Cyan ● Black 10.YY.35 Incompatible Description The indicated cartridge is not compatible with this product. ● 10.00.35 (event code) Black print cartridge ● 10.01.35 (event code) Cyan print cartridge ● 10.02.35 (event code) Magenta print cartridge ● 10.03.35 (event code) Yellow print cartridge ● ENWW 10.23.35 (event code) Tools for troubleshooting 397 Fuser CAUTION: The fuser might be hot. Be careful when removing the fuser. Recommended action Install a supply that is designed for this product. See the parts chapter in the product repair manual for the correct supply part number. 11.00.YY Internal clock error Description The product real-time clock has experienced an error. ● 11.00.01: Internal clock battery has zero voltage. ● 11.00.02: Real-time clock has failed. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Set the time and date at the control panel. If the error persists, replace the formatter. 13.00.00 Description Generic jam event code. Recommended action Check the product for a jam. See the Clear jams section in this manual. 13.A3.D3 Description Misfeed jam from tray 3. No-pick jam from tray 3. The leading edge of paper fed from Tray 3 is stopped before SR1 HCI Tray 3 media feed sensor PS3302 (sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period), including a two time retry, after the HCI right cassette pickup solenoid is turned on. Recommended action 1. Open Tray 3, remove any jammed paper, and then close the tray. 2. Inspect the Tray 3 pick, feed, and separation rollers. Clean or replace if necessary. 3. Check the connectors at the feed sensor, solenoid, feed motor, and the controller PCA. 4. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 3 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 3 paper pickup assembly. 5. Use the Component tests to activate the Tray 3 solenoid. Listen for the solenoid to activate. If the solenoid is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 3 paper pickup assembly. 6. Use the Component tests to activate the Tray 3 motor. Listen for the motor to activate. If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 3 pickup motor. 398 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 13.A3.D4 Description Late to tray 3 feed sensor jam, from tray 4. Late to path jam from Tray 4. This jam occurs when the paper does not reach the Tray 3 feed sensor SR1 in designated amount of time after the Tray 4 feed sensor SR1 sensed the leading edge. 500-sheet trays ● The leading edge of paper fed from Tray 4 is stopped before Tray 3 SR1 after passing Tray 4 SR1. High capacity input feeder ● The HCI media feed sensor PS3301 does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period after the Tray 4 cassette media feed sensor PS3305 detects the leading edge of paper. Recommended action 1. Open the lower-right door, remove any jammed paper, and then close the door. 2. Inspect the Tray 4 pick, feed, and separation rollers. Clean or replace if necessary. 3. Check the connectors at the feed sensor, solenoid, feed motor, and the controller PCA. 4. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 4 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 4 paper pickup assembly. 5. Use the Component tests to activate the Tray 4 solenoid. Listen for the solenoid to activate. If the solenoid is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 4 paper pickup assembly. 6. Use the Component tests to activate the Tray 4 motor. Listen for the motor to activate. If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 4 pickup motor. 7. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 3 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 3 paper pickup assembly or HCI crossing paper feed assembly. 13.A3.D5 Description Late to tray 3 feed sensor jam, from tray 5. Late to path jam from Tray 5. This jam occurs when the paper does not reach the Tray 3 feed sensor SR1 in specified amount of time after the Tray 5 feed sensor SR81 sensed the leading edge. Recommended action ENWW 1. Open the lower-right door, remove any jammed paper, and then close the door. 2. Inspect the Tray 5 pick, feed, and separation rollers. Clean or replace if necessary. 3. Check the connectors at the feed sensor, solenoid, feed motor, and the controller PCA. 4. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 5 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 5 paper pickup assembly. 5. Use the Component tests to activate the Tray 5 solenoid. Listen for the solenoid to activate. If the solenoid is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 5 paper pickup assembly. Tools for troubleshooting 399 6. Use the Component tests to activate the Tray 5 motor. Listen for the motor to activate. If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 5 pickup motor. 7. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 3 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 3 paper pickup assembly. 13.A3.D6 Description Late to tray 3 feed sensor jam, from tray 6. Late to path jam from Tray 6. The leading edge of paper fed from Tray 6 is stopped before Tray 3 SR1 after passing Tray 6 SR91. Recommended action 1. Open the lower-right door, remove any jammed paper, and then close the door. 2. Inspect the Tray 6 pick, feed, and separation rollers. Clean or replace if necessary. 3. Check the connectors at the feed sensor, solenoid, feed motor, and the controller PCA. 4. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 6 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 6 paper pickup assembly. 5. Use the Component tests to activate the Tray 6 solenoi. Listen for the solenoid to activate. If the solenoid is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 6 paper pickup assembly. 6. Use the Component tests to activate the Tray 6 motor. Listen for the motor to activate. If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 6 pickup motor. 7. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 3 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 3 paper pickup assembly. 13.A3.FF Description Power on jam, tray 3 feed sensor. Power on residual paper jam. This jam occurs when the paper exists at SR1 at power on or door close. Due to the current firmware timing requirements, the displayed jam code is always 13.FF.FF (the event log will have 13.WX.FF). Recommended action 1. Open the lower-right door, clear any jammed paper, and then close the door. 2. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 3 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever is not properly functioning, check the connectors to the sensor. If the error persists, replace the Tray 3 paper pickup assembly. 13.A4.D4 Description Late to tray 4 feed sensor jam, from Tray 4. No-pick jam from Tray 4. 500-sheet trays ● The leading edge of paper fed from Tray 4 does not reach Tray 4 SR1 in specified amount of time. 400 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW High capacity input feeder ● Tray 4 media feed sensor PS3305 does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period, including two times retry, after the HCI left cassette pickup solenoid is turned on. Recommended action 500-sheet trays a. Open Tray 4, clear any jammed paper, and then close the tray. b. Open the lower-right door, clear any jammed paper, and then close the door. High capacity input feeder a. Open Tray 4, clear any jammed paper, and then close the tray. b. Open Tray 3, release the jam access tray and clear any jammed paper, and then close the tray. 500-sheet trays and high capacity input feeder 1. Inspect the Tray 4 pick, feed, and separation rollers. Clean or replace if necessary. 2. Check the connectors at the feed sensor, solenoid, feed motor, and the controller PCA. 3. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 4 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 4 paper pickup assembly. 4. Use the component tests to activate the Tray 4 solenoid. Listen for the solenoid to activate. If the solenoid is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 4 paper pickup assembly. 5. Use the component tests to activate the Tray 4 motor. Listen for the motor to activate. If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 4 pickup motor. 13.A4.D5 Description Late to path jam from Tray 5. This jam occurs when the paper does not reach the Tray 4 feed sensor SR1 in designated amount of time after the Tray 5 feed sensor SR81 sensed the leading edge. Recommended action ENWW 1. Open the lower-right door, remove any jammed paper, and then close the door. 2. Inspect the Tray 5 pick, feed, and separation rollers. Clean or replace if necessary. 3. Check the connectors at the feed sensor, solenoid, feed motor, and the controller PCA. 4. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 5 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 5 paper pickup assembly. 5. Use the Component tests to activate the Tray 5 solenoid. Listen for the solenoid to activate. If the solenoid is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 5 paper pickup assembly. 6. Use the Component tests to activate the Tray 5 motor. Listen for the motor to activate. If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 5 pickup motor. Tools for troubleshooting 401 13.A4.D6 Description Late to path jam from Tray 6. This jam occurs when the paper does not reach the Tray 4 feed sensor SR1 in designated amount of time after the Tray 6 feed sensor SR91 sensed the leading edge. Recommended action 1. Open the lower-right door, remove any jammed paper, and then close the door. 2. Inspect the Tray 6 pick, feed, and separation rollers. Clean or replace if necessary. 3. Check the connectors at the feed sensor, solenoid, feed motor, and the controller PCA. 4. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 6 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 6 paper pickup assembly. 5. Use the Component tests to activate the Tray 6 solenoid Listen for the solenoid to activate. If the solenoid is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 6 paper pickup assembly. 6. Use the Component tests to activate the Tray 6 motor. Listen for the motor to activate. If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 6 pickup motor. 7. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 4 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 4 paper pickup assembly. 13.A4.FF Description Power on jam, tray 4 feed sensor. Power on residual paper jam. This jam occurs when the paper exists at SR1 at power on or door close. Due to the current firmware timing requirements, the displayed jam code is always 13.FF.FF (the event log will have 13.WX.FF). Recommended action 1. Open the lower-right door, remove any jammed paper, and then close the door. 2. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 4 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever is not properly functioning, check the connectors to the sensor. If the error persists, replace the Tray 4 paper pickup assembly. 13.A5.A5 Description Misfeed jam, from tray 5. Stopped at tray path jam, from Tray 5. Leading edge of paper fed from Tray 5 is stopped before Tray 3 SR81. Recommended action 1. Open Tray 4, clear any jammed paper, and then close the tray. 2. Inspect the Tray 5 pick, feed, and separation rollers. Clean or replace if necessary. 3. Check the connectors at the feed sensor, solenoid, feed motor, and the controller PCA. 402 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 4. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 5 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 5 paper pickup assembly. 5. Use the Component tests to activate the Tray 5 solenoid. Listen for the solenoid to activate. If the solenoid is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 5 paper pickup assembly. 6. Use the Component tests to activate the Tray 5 motor. Listen for the motor to activate. If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 5 pickup motor. 13.A5.D6 Description Late to path jam from Tray 6. This jam occurs when the paper does not reach the Tray 5 feed sensor SR81 in designated amount of time after the Tray 6 feed sensor SR91 sensed the leading edge. Recommended action 1. Open the lower-right door, clear any jammed paper, and then close the door. 2. Inspect the Tray 6 pick, feed, and separation rollers. Clean or replace if necessary. 3. Check the connectors at the feed sensor, solenoid, feed motor, and the controller PCA. 4. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 6 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 6 paper pickup assembly. 5. Use the Component tests to activate the Tray 6 solenoid. Listen for the solenoid to activate. If the solenoid is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 6 paper pickup assembly. 6. Use the Component tests to activate the Tray 6 motor. Listen for the motor to activate. If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 6 pickup motor. 7. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 5 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 5 paper pickup assembly. 13.A5.FF Description Power on jam, tray 5 feed sensor. Power on residual paper jam. This jam occurs when the paper exists at SR81 at power on or door close. Due to the current firmware timing requirements, the displayed jam code is always 13.FF.FF (the event log will have 13.WX.FF). Recommended action 1. Open the lower-right door, clear any jammed paper, and then close the door. 2. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 5 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever is not properly functioning, check the connectors to the sensor. If the error persists, replace the Tray 5 paper pickup assembly. 13.A6.D6 Description Misfeed jam, from tray 6. No-pick jam from tray 6. The leading edge of paper fed from Tray 6 is stopped before SR91. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 403 Recommended action 1. Open Tray 6, clear any jammed paper, and then close the tray. 2. Open the lower-right door, clear any jammed paper, and then close the door. 3. Inspect the Tray 6 pick, feed, and separation rollers. Clean or replace if necessary. 4. Check the connectors at the feed sensor, solenoid, feed motor, and the controller PCA. 5. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 6 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 6 paper pickup assembly. 6. Use the Component tests to activate the Tray 6 solenoid. Listen for the solenoid to activate. If the solenoid is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 6 paper pickup assembly. 7. Use the Component tests to activate the Tray 6 motor. Listen for the motor to activate. If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 6 pickup motor. 13.A6.FF Description Power on jam, tray 6 feed sensor. Power on residual paper jam. This jam occurs when the paper exists at SR91 at power on or door close. Due to the current firmware timing requirements, the displayed jam code is always 13.FF.FF (the event log will have 13.WX.FF). Recommended action 1. Open the lower-right door, clear any jammed paper, and then close the door. 2. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 6 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever is not properly functioning, check the connectors to the sensor. If the error persists, replace the Tray 6 paper pickup assembly. 13.AA.EE Description Door open jam. Tray 3, 4, or 5 right tray access door was opened during print job. Recommended action 1. Close the lower right door. 2. Check the tab of the lower right door that engages the right door sensor. If it is damaged, replace the right door assembly. 3. Use the manual sensor tests to toggle the lower right door sensor (SW1 or SW3301). If a sensor is not properly functioning, replace the sensor. 4. Check the connectors (J192S) on the DC controller PCA and the connector (J751 or J905) on the right door sensor. 13.AB.EE Description Door open jam. Tray 4, 5, or 6 right tray access door was opened during print job. 404 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1. Close the door. 2. Depending on input tray configuration, check the appropriate tab of the lower right door that engages the right door sensor. If it is damaged, replace the right door assembly. 3. Use the manual sensor tests to toggle the middle right door sensors. If a sensor is not properly functioning, replace the sensor. 4. Do one of the following: ● 500-sheet paper feeder: check the connectors (J2003) on the PF controller PCA and the connector (J751) on the PF right door open detection switch SW1. ● 3x500-sheet paper deck: check the connectors (J2005) on the PD controller PCA and the connector (J705) on the PD right door open detection switch. ● High capacity input feeder: check the connectors (J3006) on the HCI controller PCA and the connector (J905) on the HCI right door open detection switch. 13.B2.AX Description Media stay jam at registration sensor PS5. ● 13.B2.A1 (event code) Media input stay jam 1 (registration sensor) paper from tray 1. Paper stays at PS5 – media longer than allowed from Tray 1. ● 13.B2.A2 (event code) Media input stay jam 1 (registration sensor) paper from tray 1. Paper stays at PS5 – media longer than allowed from Tray 2. ● 13.B2.A2 (event code) Media input stay jam 1 (registration sensor) paper from tray 1. Paper stays at PS5 – media longer than allowed from Tray 3. ● 13.B2.A4 (event code) Media input stay jam 1 (registration sensor) paper from tray 1. Paper stays at PS5 – media longer than allowed from Tray 4. ● 13.B2.A5 (event code) Media input stay jam 1 (registration sensor) paper from tray 1. Paper stays at PS5 – media longer than allowed from Tray 5. ● 13.B2.A6 (event code) Media input stay jam 1 (registration sensor) paper from tray 1. Paper stays at PS5 – media longer than allowed from Tray 6. ● ENWW 13.B2.AD (event code) Tools for troubleshooting 405 Media stay jam at registration sensor PS5. Paper stays at PS5 – media longer than allowed from duplexer. Recommended action 1. Open the right door, clear any jammed paper, and then close the door. 2. Check for obstructions in the paper path. 3. Verify that the second transfer roller is seated properly and not worn or deformed. Replaced it if necessary. 4. Verify that the registration assembly shutter is properly functioning. Replace it if it is damaged. 5. Use the manual sensor tests to toggle the TOP sensor (PS5). If the sensor is not properly functioning, replace the registration sensor assembly. 6. Check the connectors (J122S) on the DC controller and (J537) on the PS5 sensor. 13.B2.DX Description ● 13.B2.D1 (event code) Late to registration jam, from Tray 1. This may be a misfeed jam from Tray 1. The leading edge of paper fed from Tray 1 is stopped before PS5. ● 13.B2.D2 (event code) Late to registration jam, from Tray 2. This may be a misfeed jam from Tray 2. The leading edge of paper fed from Tray 2 is stopped before PS5. ● 13.B2.D3 (event code) Late to registration jam, from tray 3. The leading edge of paper fed from Tray 3 is stopped before PS5 after passing SR1. ● 13.B2.D4 (event code) Late to registration jam, from Tray 4. The leading edge of paper fed from Tray 4 is stopped before PS5 after passing SR1. ● 13.B2.D5 (event code) Late to registration jam, from Tray 5. Leading edge of paper fed from Tray 5 is stopped before PS5 after passing SR1. ● 13.B2.D6 (event code) Late to registration jam, from Tray 6. The leading edge of paper fed from Tray 6 is stopped before PS5 after passing SR1. ● 13.B2.DD (event code) 406 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW This jam occurs when the paper does not reach the registration sensor in a designated amount of time after it is reversed from the switchback position during duplex printing. The media either did not reverse (it was either ejected to the output bin or the user grabbed the exposed page during duplex reverse), or is jammed in the duplex reversing path in the product's right door. Duplex re-feed paper is stopped between PS6 and PS5. Recommended action 1. Open the right door, clear any jammed paper, and then close the door. 2. Check for obstructions in the paper path. 3. Verify that the second transfer roller is seated properly and not worn or deformed. Replace it if necessary. 4. Check the pickup, feed, and separation rollers from the source tray. Replace them if they are worn or defective. 5. Verify that the registration assembly shutter is properly functioning. Replace it if it is damaged. 6. Use the manual sensor tests to toggle the TOP sensor (PS5). If the sensor is not properly functioning, replace the registration sensor assembly. 7. Check the connectors (J122S) on the DC controller and (J537) on the PS5 sensor. 8. Use the Component tests to activate the pickup motor and pickup solenoid/clutch for the source tray. If the motor or solenoid/clutch is not properly functioning, replace the motor or solenoid/clutch assembly. 13.B2.FF Description At power on, door close, or auto-flushing: paper stays at PS5. Power on residual paper jam. This jam occurs when the paper exists at PS5 at power on or door close. Due to the current FW timing requirements, the displayed jam code is always 13.FF.FF, only the event log will have 13.WX.FF. Recommended action 1. Open the right door, clear any jammed paper, and then close the door. 2. Use the manual sensor tests to toggle the TOP sensor (PS5). If the sensor is not properly functioning, replace the registration sensor assembly. 13.B4.FF Description At power on, door close, or auto-flushing: paper stays at PS7/PS8 (loop sensors). Power on residual paper jam. This jam occurs when the paper exists at PS7/8 at power on or door close. Due to the current FW timing requirements, the displayed jam code is always 13.FF.FF, only the event log will have 13.WX.FF. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 407 Recommended action 1. Open the right door, clear any jammed paper, and then close the door. 2. Use the manual sensor tests to toggle the Loop sensors (PS7/PS8). If the sensors or levers are not properly functioning, replace the fuser assembly. 13.B9.AZ Description Stopped at fuser jam. This jam occurs when the paper stays at the fuser output sensor PS6 for a designated amount of time after it has reached the fuser output sensor PS6. Z = Fuser mode. ● 13.B9.A1 (event code) Stopped at fuser jam, Auto Sense (Normal)--special case distinguished from typed Normal. ● 13.B9.A2 (event code) Stopped at fuser jam, Normal (typed not from Auto Sense). ● 13.B9.A3 (event code) Stopped at fuser jam, Light media 1 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.B9.A4 (event code) Stopped at fuser jam, Heavy media 1 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.B9.A5 (event code) Stopped at fuser jam, Heavy media 2 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.B9.A6 (event code) Stopped at fuser jam, Heavy media 3 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.B9.A7 (event code) Stopped at fuser jam, Glossy media 1 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.B9.A8 (event code) Stopped at fuser jam, Glossy media 2 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.B9.A9 (event code) Stopped at fuser jam, Glossy media 3 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.B9.AA (event code) Stopped at fuser jam, Glossy film (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.B9.AB (event code) Stopped at fuser jam, OHT (either typed or from Auto Sense). 408 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW ● 13.B9.AC (event code) Stopped at fuser jam, Label. ● 13.B9.AD (event code) Stopped at fuser jam, Envelope 1. ● 13.B9.AE (event code) Stopped at fuser jam (engine fuser mode). ● 13.B9.AF (event code) Stopped at fuser jam (unknown fuser mode). Recommended action 1. Open the right door, and then clear any jammed paper. 2. Make sure that the paper meets HP specifications. 3. Remove the fuser, and then clear any jammed paper. CAUTION: The fuser might be hot. 4. Replace the fuser, and then close the door. 5. Check for obstructions in the paper path. 6. Verify that the second transfer roller is seated properly and not worn or deformed. Replace it if necessary. 7. Check the paper path rollers at the fuser and paper delivery assembly for blockage or damage. Replace the fuser or paper delivery assembly if necessary. 8. Use the manual sensor tests to toggle the fuser output sensor (PS6). If the sensor is not properly functioning, replace the fuser assembly. 9. Use the components tests to activate the fuser motor (M4). If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the motor. 13.B9.CZ Description Fuser wrap jam. This jam occurs when the paper does not reach the fuser output sensor (PS6) in a designated amount of time after the paper reached the fuser output sensor (PS6). It is determined that the paper is being wrapped around the fuser roller. Z = Fuser mode. ● 13.B9.C1 (event code) Fuser wrap jam, Auto Sense (Normal)--special case distinguished from typed Normal. ● 13.B9.C2 (event code) Fuser wrap jam, Normal (typed not from Auto Sense). ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 409 ● 13.B9.C3 (event code) Fuser wrap jam, Light media 1 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.B9.C4 (event code) Fuser wrap jam, Heavy media 1 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.B9.C5 (event code) Fuser wrap jam, Heavy media 2 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.B9.C6 (event code) Fuser wrap jam, Heavy media 3 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.B9.C7 (event code) Fuser wrap jam, Glossy media 1 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.B9.C8 (event code) Fuser wrap jam, Glossy media 2 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.B9.C9 (event code) Fuser wrap jam, Glossy media 3 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.B9.CA (event code) Fuser wrap jam, Glossy film (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.B9.CB (event code) Stopped at fuser jam, OHT (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.B9.CC (event code) Stopped at fuser jam, Label. ● 13.B9.CD (event code) Stopped at fuser jam, Envelope 1. ● 13.B9.CE (event code) Stopped at fuser jam (engine fuser mode). ● 13.B9.CF (event code) Stopped at fuser jam (unknown fuser mode). Recommended action 1. Open the right door. 2. Remove the fuser, and then remove any paper wrapped around the fuser roller. CAUTION: 3. The fuser might be hot. Replace the fuser, and then close the door. 410 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 4. Perform a cleaning page procedure to make sure that all of the toner is removed from the fuser roller. 5. Use the manual sensor tests to toggle the fuser output sensor (PS6). If the sensor is not properly functioning, replace the fuser assembly. 6. If the error persists, the fuser roller or pressure roller might be damaged. Replace the fuser. 13.B9.DZ Description Fuser delivery delay jam. This jam occurs when the paper does not reach the fuser output sensor (PS6) in a designated amount of time after the paper reached the fuser output sensor (PS6). ● 13.B9.D0 (event code) Leading edge of paper is stopped between PS5 and PS6 – unknown source tray. ● 13.B9.D1 (event code) Leading edge of paper is stopped between PS5 and PS6 – fed from Tray 1. ● 13.B9.D2 (event code) The leading edge of paper is stopped between PS5 and PS6 – fed from Tray 2. ● 13.B9.D3 (event code) The leading edge of paper is stopped between PS5 and PS6 – fed from Tray 3. ● 13.B9.D4 (event code) The leading edge of paper is stopped between PS5 and PS6 – fed from Tray 4. ● 13.B9.D5 (event code) The leading edge of paper is stopped between PS5 and PS6 – fed from Tray 5. ● 13.B9.D6 (event code) The leading edge of paper is stopped between PS5 and PS6 – fed from Tray 6. ● 13.B9.DD (event code) The leading edge of paper is stopped between PS5 and PS6 – fed from duplexer. Recommended action 1. Open the right door, and then remove any jammed paper. 2. Remove the fuser, and then remove any jammed paper. CAUTION: ENWW The fuser might be hot. 3. Replace the fuser, and then close the door. 4. Make sure that the paper meets HP specifications. 5. Check for obstructions in and around the fuser. Tools for troubleshooting 411 6. Use the manual sensor tests to toggle the fuser output sensor (PS6). If the sensor is not properly functioning, replace the fuser assembly. 7. Check connections (J516) on the fuser motor and (J81A) on the DC controller. 8. Use the components tests to toggle the fuser motor (M4). If the sensor is not properly functioning, replace the motor. 13.B9.FF Description Power on jam, fuser output sensor. At power on, door close, or auto-flushing: paper stays at PS6. This jam occurs when the paper exists at PS6 at power on or door close. Due to the current FW timing requirements, the displayed jam code is always 13.FF.FF, only the event log will have 13.WX.FF. Recommended action 1. Open the right door, and then remove any jammed paper. 2. Remove the fuser, and then remove any jammed paper. CAUTION: 3. The fuser might be hot. Use the Manual sensor tests to toggle the fuser exit sensor. If the sensor or lever is not properly functioning, replace the fuser assembly. 13.B9.YZ Fuser Area Jam Description Paper Jam at fuser sensor. Y= A: Paper Stay Jam D: Paper Delay Jam C: Wrap Jam B: Multi-Feed Jam 1. Customers report experiencing reoccurring 13.B9.YZ paper jams in the fuser area. The paper is pulled partway into the fuser before jamming. The jam happens when feeding paper from ANY of the input trays. 2. Customers report experiencing non-clearable 13.B9.YZ paper jams in the fuser area. The paper is pulled partway into the fuser before jamming. The jam happens when feeding paper from ANY of the input trays. 412 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1. Solution for reoccurring 13.B9.YZ paper jams in the fuser area: Inspect the fuser guide, if broken, and then order part # RC2-6551-000CN and replace the guide. The guide can easily be installed as a CSR A. Figure 3-52 Fuser guide location 2. Solution for non-clearable 13.B9.YZ paper jams in the fuser area. a. Determine if the delivery rollers (located at where the paper exits to the top output bin) move when the product is turned ON. b. Run the Fuser Motor test from the Troubleshooting/Component Test menus to check if the rollers move or not. c. If the rollers do not move, then replace the paper delivery assembly, part number RM1-6165-000CN Figure 3-53 Paper deliver assembly gear For a 13.B9.DZ jam, make sure media is within specifications, check for obstructions in the fuser, and check that the T2 roller is installed properly. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 413 13.BA.EE Description This jam occurs when the front door is opened during a print job. Recommended action 1. Close the front door. 2. Check the projection tabs of the front door that engage the door sensor (SW2 and PS14). If either tab is damaged, replace the appropriate part. 3. Check the connectors (SW2 - J241/J242 and PS14 - J171S) on the DC controller PCA and the connector (SW2 - J708F and PS14 - J536S) on the door open detection switch SW2 and PS14. 13.BB.EE Description This jam accrues when the stapler stacker jam access, right door, or Tray 3, 4, 5, or 6 right tray access door was opened during print job. Recommended action 1. Check the upper or lower right doors to make sure that they are closed. 2. Check the projection tabs of the right doors that engage the door sensor (SW1 or SW3301). If either tab is damaged, replace the appropriate part. 3. Use the Manual sensor test to activate the door switch. Replace the switch if it is not properly functioning. 4. Check the appropriate connectors on the DC controller PCA and the appropriate connector on the paper feeder or stapler stacker assembly. 13.E1.DZ Description Late to standard bin sensor (output bin). This jam occurs when the leading edge of the paper does not reach the face-down output bin full sensor (PS10) in the designated amount of time after activating PS6. Z = Fuser mode. ● 13.E1.D1 (event code) Late to standard bin sensor, Auto Sense (Normal)--special case distinguished from typed Normal. ● 13.E1.D2 (event code) Late to standard bin sensor, Normal (typed not from Auto Sense). ● 13.E1.D3 (event code) Late to standard bin sensor, Light media 1 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.E1.D4 (event code) 414 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Late to standard bin sensor, Heavy media 1 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.E1.D5 (event code) Late to standard bin sensor, Heavy media 2 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.E1.D6 (event code) Late to standard bin sensor, Heavy media 3 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.E1.D7 (event code) Late to standard bin sensor, Glossy media 1 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.E1.D8 (event code) Late to standard bin sensor, Glossy media 2 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.E1.D9 (event code) Late to standard bin sensor, Glossy media 3 (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.E1.DA (event code) Late to standard bin sensor, Glossy film (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.E1.DB (event code) Late to standard bin sensor, OHT (either typed or from Auto Sense). ● 13.E1.DC (event code) Late to standard bin sensor, Label. ● 13.E1.DD (event code) Late to standard bin sensor, Envelope 1. ● 13.E1.DE (event code) Late to standard bin sensor. Rough mode (either typed or from Auto Sense). Recommended action 1. Remove any paper form the output bin. 2. Open the right door. 3. Remove the fuser, and then remove any paper wrapped around the fuser roller. CAUTION: ENWW The fuser might be hot. 4. Replace the fuser, and then close the door. 5. Verify that the output gate on the paper delivery assembly and output-bin full sensor flag are properly functioning. 6. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the following sensors: Tools for troubleshooting 415 ● Output-bin-Full Sensor (PS10). If the sensor does not respond, send an onsite technician to replace the paper delivery assembly. ● Fuser Output Sensor (PS6). If the sensor does not respond, replace the fuser. 13.FF.FF Description Jams at multiple sensors. Power on residual paper jam, multiple sensors in multiple subsystems. This jam occurs when the paper exists at multiple sensors at power on or door close. Due to the current FW timing requirements, the displayed jam code is always 13.FF.FF, only the event log will have 13.WX.FF. Recommended action 1. Remove any paper form the output bin. 2. Open the right door. 3. Remove the fuser, and then remove any paper wrapped around the fuser roller. CAUTION: The fuser might be hot. 4. Replace the fuser, and then close the door. 5. View or print the event log to find previous jam errors. Troubleshoot jam errors starting with the most recent. 20.00.00 Insufficient memory: To continue, touch “OK” Description The product has experienced a memory error. You might have tried to transfer too many fonts or macros. Recommended action Touch the OK button to print the transferred data. Some data might be lost. Reduce the page complexity. 21.00.00 Page too complex To continue, touch “OK” Description The page decompression process was too slow for the product. Recommended action Touch the OK button to continue. There may be some data loss. 32.1C.XX Description ● 32.1C.01 (event code) NVRAM backup/restore service backup started. ● 32.1C.02 (event code) NVRAM backup/restore service restore started. 416 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW ● 32.1C.03 (event code) NVRAM backup/restore administrator backup started. ● 32.1C.04 (event code) NVRAM backup/restore administrator restore started. ● 32.1C.05 (event code) Backup/restore complete. ● 32.1C.06 (event code) Data model failed to clone job ticket. ● 32.1C.07 (event code) Backup restore permissions error. ● 32.1C.08 (event code) Not enough disk space to perform backup/restore or network share issue. ● 32.1C.09 (event code) Tried to restore a backup file that was not valid for this product. ● 32.1C.0A (event code) Backup file is invalid. ● 32.1C.0B (event code) Backup is from newer version of FW than what is currently on the product. ● 32.1C.0C (event code) Backup canceled from the HP Embedded Web Server. ● 32.1C.0D (event code) Backup/restore failed, auto-reboot failed, or the product might be busy. ● 32.1C.0E (event code) Backup/restore timeout while communicating with the formatter. ● 32.1C.11 (event code) Backup/restore timeout while communicating with the engine. ● 32.1C.12 (event code) Backup/restore timeout while communicating with the disk. ● 32.1C.13 (event code) Scheduled backup failure. ● ENWW 32.1C.14 (event code) Tools for troubleshooting 417 NVRAM restore timeout while communicating with the formatter. ● 32.1C.17 (event code) NVRAM restore timeout while communicating with the engine. ● 32.1C.18 (event code) Copy subsystem backup failed. ● 32.1C.19 (event code) Backup/restore unknown error. ● 32.1C.1A (event code) Digital Send subsystem backup failed. ● 32.1C.1B (event code) Backup of print subsystem failed. ● 32.1C.1C (event code) Backup of networking subsystem failed. ● 32.1C.1E (event code) Copy subsystem restore failed. ● 32.1C.1F (event code) Fax subsystem restore failed. ● 32.1C.20 (event code) Digital Send subsystem restore failed. ● 32.1C.21 (event code) Restore of print subsystem failed. ● 32.1C.22 (event code) Restore of networking subsystem failed. ● 32.1C.23 (event code) Failed to restore address book subsystem. ● 32.1C.24 (event code) NVRAM backup/restore successful. ● 32.1C.25 (event code) Copy subsystem reset failed. ● 32.1C.26 (event code) Fax subsystem reset failed. 418 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW ● 32.1C.27 (event code) Digital Send subsystem reset failed. ● 32.1C.28 (event code) Reset of print subsystem failed. ● 32.1C.29 (event code) Reset of networking subsystem failed. ● 32.1C.2B (event code) Reset formatter timeout. ● 32.1C.2E (event code) Reset engine timeout. ● 32.1C.2F (event code) Reset failure. Recommended action ● 32.1C.01 (event code) No action necessary ● 32.1C.02 (event code) No action necessary ● 32.1C.03 (event code) No action necessary ● 32.1C.04 (event code) No action necessary ● 32.1C.05 (event code) No action necessary ● 32.1C.06 (event code) Retry ● 32.1C.07 (event code) Retry ● 32.1C.08 (event code) Remove stored jobs and retry Use larger capacity storage device Check network share ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 419 ● 32.1C.09 (event code) Use a valid backup file ● 32.1C.0A (event code) Use a valid backup file Reboot and observe state of product Do a partition clean using the Preboot menu ● 32.1C.0B (event code) Use a valid backup file, or put correct firmware version on the product ● 32.1C.0C (event code) No action necessary ● 32.1C.0D (event code) Reboot and then retry the backup/restore ● 32.1C.0E (event code) Turn the product off, and then on, and retry ● 32.1C.11 (event code) Turn the product off, and then on, and retry ● 32.1C.12 (event code) Turn the product off, and then on, and retry ● 32.1C.13 (event code) Turn the product off, and then on, and retry ● 32.1C.14 (event code) Turn the product off, and then on, and retry ● 32.1C.17 (event code) Turn the product off, and then on, and retry ● 32.1C.1B (event code) Turn the product off, and then on, and retry ● 32.1C.1C (event code) Turn the product off, and then on, and retry ● 32.1C.21 (event code) Turn the product off, and then on, and retry If the error persists, clear the firmware image from the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 420 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW ● 32.1C.22 (event code) Turn the product off, and then on, and retry If the error persists, clear the firmware image from the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. ● 32.1C.24 (event code) Turn the product off, and then on, and retry ● 32.1C.28 (event code) Turn the product off, and then on, and retry ● 32.1C.29 (event code) Turn the product off, and then on, and retry ● 32.1C.2B (event code) Turn the product off, and then on, and retry ● 32.1C.2E (event code) Turn the product off, and then on, and retry ● 32.1C.2F (event code) Turn the product off, and then on, and retry 33.02.01 Description A used part with data was replaced in the device. Used board/disk installed. Recommended action Turn the product power off, and then on again. If the error persists, escalate this problem to your Global Business unit. 33.02.02 Description A Save/Recover status error has occurred on the product and one, or both, of the Save/Recover features are disabled. Recommended action Turn the product power off, and then on again. If the error persists, escalate this problem to your Global Business unit. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 421 33.02.03 Description The Save/Recover backup feature has failed, and the Save/Recover features are disabled, but the product continues to function. Recommended action Turn the product power off, and then on again. If the error persists, escalate this problem to your Global Business unit. 33.03.01 Description The controller encountered an unexpected data length for the Storage ID value. Recommended action Turn the product power off, and then on again. If the error persists, escalate this problem to your Global Business unit (return the product ICB to the Global Business unit with a full diagnostic log from the product). 33.03.02 Description The controller encountered an unexpected data length value for the engine to recover the DCC NVRAM value. Recommended action Turn the product power off, and then on again. If the error persists, escalate this problem to your Global Business unit (return the product ICB to the Global Business unit with a full diagnostic log from the product). 40.00.01 USB I/O buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK” Description The USB buffer overflowed during a busy state. Recommended action 1. Touch the OK button to print the transferred data. Some data might be lost. 2. Check the host configuration. 40.00.02 Embedded I/O buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK” Description Too much data was sent to the embedded HP Jetdirect print server. An incorrect communications protocol might be in use. 422 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1. Touch the OK button to print the transferred data. Some data might be lost. 2. Check the host configuration. 40.00.04 Unsupported USB accessory detected To continue, touch “OK” Description The connection between the product and the USB device has been broken. Recommended action Press the OK button to clear the error message and continue printing. Remove, and then reinstall the USB device. 40.00.05 Embedded I/O bad transmission To continue, touch “OK” Description The USB device has been removed. Recommended action Press the OK button to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.) Install the USB device. 40.08.0X USB storage accessory removed Description X = 0 or 1; information code Secure file erase is enabled. Recommended action No action necessary. 40.0X.05 USB storage accessory removed Description X = 1, 2, 3, 5, or 6; information code The USB storage accessory was removed. Recommended action No action necessary. 41.01.YZ Description An unknown misprint error occurred on the product. Y = Type, Z = Tray ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 423 ● Y = 0: Photo Media (1, 2, or 3) ● Y = 1: Auto Sense (Normal) ● Y = 2: Normal (typed not from Auto Sense) ● Y = 3: Light media 1, 2, or 3 mode ● Y = 4: Heavy media 1 ● Y = 5: Heavy media 2 ● Y = 6: Heavy media 3 ● Y = 7: Glossy media 1 ● Y = 8: Glossy media 2 ● Y = 9: Glossy media 3 ● Y = A: Glossy film ● Y = B: OHT ● Y = C: Label ● Y = D: Envelope 1, 2, or 3 mode ● Y = E: Rough ● Y = F: Other mode ● Z = 0: From unknown tray ● Z = 1: From Tray 1 ● Z = 2: From Tray 2 ● Z = 3: From Tray 3 ● Z = 4: From Tray 4 ● Z = 5: From Tray 5 ● Z = 6: From Tray 6 ● Z = 7: From Tray 7 ● Z = 8: From Tray 8 ● Z = 9: From Tray 9 ● Z = D: From duplexer Recommended action Turn the product power off, and then on again. 424 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 41.02.00 Error Description A beam detected misprint error. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. If the error persists, replace the laser/scanner assembly. 41.02.0Z Error Description A beam detected misprint error. ● Z = 5: Black drum station ● Z = 6: Cyan drum station ● Z = 7: Magenta drum station ● Z = 8: Yellow drum station Recommended action Turn the product power off, and then on again. If the error persists, replace the laser/scanner assembly. 41.03.YZ Unexpected size in Tray Description The product detected a different paper size than expected. ● Y=0 Size mismatch. Detected media is longer or shorter than expected. ● Y=A Size mismatch. Detected media too long. ● Y=B Size mismatch. Detected media too short. ● Z=1 Source is Tray 1. ● Z=2 Source is Tray 2. ● Z=3 Source is Tray 3. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 425 ● Z=4 Source is Tray 4. ● Z=5 Source is Tray 5. ● Z=6 Source is Tray 6. Recommended action Make sure that the tray is loaded with the correct paper size and that the sliding paper guides are correctly adjusted. Use the Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test to verify that the tray paper switch is correctly functioning. If the error persists, replace the lifter assembly. 41.03.YZ Unexpected size in Tray To use another tray, touch "Options" Description The product detected a different paper size than expected. Y = Size mismatch, Z = Source ● Y = 0: Detected paper is longer or shorter than expected ● Y = A: Detected paper too long ● Y = B: Detected paper too short ● Y = C: Unexpected size ● Y = D: Detected media too wide ● Y = E: Detected media too narrow ● Z = 1: Tray 1 ● Z = 2: Tray 2 ● Z = 3: Tray 3 ● Z = 4: Tray 4 ● Z = 5: Tray 5 ● Z = 6: Tray 6 ● Z = D: Duplexer 426 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1. Make sure that the tray is loaded with the correct paper size and that the sliding paper guides are correctly adjusted. 2. Use the Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test to verify that the tray paper switch is correctly functioning. 3. If the error persists, replace the lifter assembly. 41.04.YZ Description An unknown misprint error occurred on the product. Y = Type, Z = Tray ENWW ● Y = 0: Photo Media (1, 2, or 3) ● Y = 1: Auto Sense (Normal) ● Y = 2: Normal (typed not from Auto Sense) ● Y = 3: Light media 1, 2, or 3 mode ● Y = 4: Heavy media 1 ● Y = 5: Heavy media 2 ● Y = 6: Heavy media 3 ● Y = 7: Glossy media 1 ● Y = 8: Glossy media 2 ● Y = 9: Glossy media 3 ● Y = A: Glossy film ● Y = B: OHT ● Y = C: Label ● Y = D: Envelope 1, 2, or 3 mode ● Y = E: Rough ● Y = F: Other mode ● Z = 0: From unknown tray ● Z = 1: From Tray 1 ● Z = 2: From Tray 2 ● Z = 3: From Tray 3 ● Z = 4: From Tray 4 ● Z = 5: From Tray 5 ● Z = 6: From Tray 6 Tools for troubleshooting 427 ● Z = 7: From Tray 7 ● Z = 8: From Tray 8 ● Z = 9: From Tray 9 ● Z = D: From duplexer Recommended action 1. Turn the product power off, and then on. 2. If the error persists, replace the laser/scanner assembly. 41.05.YZ Unexpected type in Tray Description The product detected a different paper type than expected. Y = Expected type, Z = Detected type ● Y = 0: Unknown ● Y = 1: Normal paper ● Y = 3: LBP transparency ● Y = 4: Glossy paper ● Y = 5: Gloss film ● Y = 6: Non-assured transparency ● Y = 7: Heavy paper ● Y = 8: Light paper ● Y = 9: Rough paper ● Y = A: Extra heavy glossy paper (glossy paper 3) ● Y = B: Heavy glossy paper (glossy paper 2) ● Y = C: Heavy paper 3 ● Y = D: Heavy paper 2 ● Z = 1: Normal paper ● Z = 3: LBP transparency ● Z = 4: Glossy paper ● Z = 5: Gloss film ● Z = 6: Non-assured transparency ● Z = 7: Heavy paper ● Z = 8: Light paper 428 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW ● Z = A: Extra heavy glossy paper (glossy paper 3) ● Z = B: Heavy glossy paper (glossy paper 2) ● Z = C: Heavy paper 3 ● Z = D: Heavy paper 2 Recommended action 1. Load the tray with the size and type of paper indicated, or use another tray if available. 2. If this message displays and the tray is loaded with the correct paper type, check the print driver settings to make sure that they match the tray type settings. 3. Clean the media sensor. 4. If the error persists, replace the paper pickup assembly. 41.05.YZ Unexpected type in Tray To use another tray, touch "Options" Description The product detected a different paper type than expected and another tray is available for use. Y = Expected type, Z = Detected type ENWW ● Y = 0: Unknown ● Y = 1: Normal paper ● Y = 3: LBP transparency ● Y = 4 Glossy paper ● Y = 5: Gloss film ● Y = 6: Non-assured transparency ● Y = 7: Heavy paper ● Y = 8: Light paper ● Y = 9: Rough paper ● Y = A: Extra heavy glossy paper (glossy paper 3) ● Y = B: Heavy glossy paper (glossy paper 2) ● Y = C: Heavy paper 3 ● Y = D: Heavy paper 2 ● Z = 1: Normal paper ● Z = 3: LBP transparency ● Z = 4: Glossy paper ● Z = 5: Gloss film ● Z = 6: Non-assured transparency Tools for troubleshooting 429 ● Z = 7: Heavy paper ● Z = 8: Light paper ● Z = A: Extra heavy glossy paper (glossy paper 3) ● Z = B: Heavy glossy paper (glossy paper 2) ● Z = C: Heavy paper 3 ● Z = D: Heavy paper 2 Recommended action 1. Load the tray with the size and type of paper indicated, or use another tray if available. 2. If this message displays and the tray is loaded with the correct paper type, check the print driver settings to make sure that they match the tray type settings. 3. Clean the paper sensor. 4. If the error persists, replace the paper pickup assembly. 41.07.YZ Error To continue, touch “OK” Description A media transportation error has occurred. ● Y=0 Photo media 1, Photo media 2, Photo media 3, Designated media 2, Designated media 3, or N/A, typed or AutoSense. ● Y=1 AutoSense (Normal): special case distinguished from typed Normal. ● Y=2 Normal: typed (not AutoSense). ● Y=3 Light media 1, 2, or 3: typed or AutoSense. ● Y=4 Heavy media 1: typed or AutoSense. ● Y=5 Heavy media 2: typed or AutoSense. ● Y=6 Heavy media 3: typed or AutoSense. ● Y=7 Glossy media 1: typed or AutoSense. 430 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW ● Y=8 Glossy media 2: typed or AutoSense. ● Y=9 Glossy media 3: typed or AutoSense. ● Y=A Glossy film: typed or AutoSense. ● Y=B OHT: typed or AutoSense. ● Y=C Label. ● Y=D Envelope 1, Envelope 2, or Envelope 3. ● Y=E Rough (designated media 1): typed or AutoSense. ● Z=1 Tray 1. ● Z=2 Tray 2. ● Z=3 Tray 3. ● Z=4 Tray 4. ● Z=5 Tray 5. ● Z=6 Tray 6. ● Z=D Duplexer. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. If the error persists, replace the DC controller PCA. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 431 41.WX.YZ Error To use another tray, touch "Options" Description A printer error has occurred. WX = ● 02: Beam detected misprint error ● 06: ITB top detection error ● 07: Optional input source delay ● 08: Media transportation error ● 09: Sub-thermistor abnormally high temperature ● 10: Pickup failure ● 11: Illegal duplex ● 18: Scan line inclination adjustment request ● 19: T2 roller HV ● 20: Image drum HV Y = fuser mode ● 0: Photo paper 1, Photo paper 2, Photo paper 3, Designated paper 2, Designated paper 3, or NA, typed or Autosense ● 1: Autosense (normal): special case distinguished from typed Normal ● 2: Normal, typed (not Autosense) ● 3: Light paper 1, 2, or 3, typed or Autosense ● 4: Heavy paper 1, typed or Autosense ● 5: Heavy paper 2, typed or Autosense ● 6: Heavy paper 3, typed or Autosense ● 7: Glossy paper 1, typed or Autosense ● 8: Glossy paper 2, typed or Autosense ● 9: Glossy paper 3, typed or Autosense ● A: Glossy film, typed or Autosense ● B: Transparency, typed or Autosense ● C: Label ● D: Envelope 1, Envelope 2, Envelope 3 ● E: Rough (designated paper 1), typed or Autosense ● F: reserved for future fuser mode 432 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Z = source tray ● 1: Tray 1 ● 2: Tray 2 ● 3: Tray 3 ● D: Duplexer Recommended action 1. To clear message, touch the OK button. 2. If the message reappears, turn the product off, and then on. 3. If the error persists, replace the DC controller PCA. 42.XX.YY Description Internal system failure. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on, and retry. If the error persists, clear the firmware image from the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.00.00 Description Print Notification Provider internal error. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Resend the print job. If the error persists, run the Partial Clean from the Preboot menu. 47.00.XX Description Backchannel internal error Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Resend the print job. If the error persists, execute the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.01.XX Description Image transformer internal error. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 433 Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Resend the print job. If the error persists, execute the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.02.XX Description Job parser internal error. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Resend the print job. If the error persists, execute the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.03.XX Description Print job internal error. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Resend the print job. If the error persists, execute the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.04.XX Description Print spooler 9100 internal error. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Resend the print job. If the error persists, execute the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.05.00 Description Print spooler framework internal error. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Resend the print job. If the error persists, execute the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.06.XX Description Print App internal error. 434 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Resend the print job. If the error persists, execute the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.WX.YZ Printer calibration failed To continue, touch “OK” Description The device is unable to access or implement one of the image patterns files. Y = calibration type, Z = event ● 47.FC.00 (event code) Color plane registration (CPR) Image not found at system initialization. ● 47.FC.01 (event code) CPR Store Image failure. ● 47.FC.02 (event code) CPR Image not found. ● 47.FC.03 (event code) CPR Print engine execution failure. ● 47.FC.10 (event code) Consecutive Dmax Dhalf Image not found at system initialization. ● 47.FC.11 (event code) Consecutive Dmax Dhalf Store image failure. ● 47.FC.12 (event code) Consecutive Dmax Dhalf Image not found. ● 47.FC.13 (event code) Consecutive Dmax Dhalf Print engine execution failure. ● 47.FC.20 (event code) Error Diffusion Image not found at system initialization. ● 47.FC.21 (event code) Error Diffusion Store image failure. ● 47.FC.22 (event code) Error Diffusion Image not found. ● 47.FC.23 Error Diffusion Print engine execution failure. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 435 ● 47.FC.30 (event code) Drum Speed Adjustment Image not found at system initialization. ● 47.FC.31 (event code) Drum Speed Adjustment Store image failure. ● 47.FC.32 (event code) Drum Speed Adjustment Image not found. ● 47.FC.33 (event code) Drum Speed Adjustment Print engine execution failure. ● 47.FC.40 (event code) Pulse Width Modulation Image not found at system initializatione. ● 47.FC.41 (event code) Pulse Width Modulation Store image failure. ● 47.FC.42 (event code) Pulse Width Modulation Image not found. ● 47.FC.43 (event code) Pulse Width Modulation Print engine execution failure. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. If the error persists, reload the firmware. 48.01.XX Error Description A job framework internal error has occurred. XX values range from 0 to 9 and 0A to 0C. All enumerations have the same description and recommended action. Recommended action No action necessary. 49.XX.YY Error To continue turn off then on Description A firmware error has occurred. This error can be caused by corrupted print jobs, software applications issues, non-product specific print drivers, poor-quality USB or network cables, bad network connections or incorrect configurations, invalid firmware operations, or unsupported accessories. 436 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. If the error persists, check the following: ● The error might be caused by a network connectivity problem, such as a bad interface cable, a bad USB port, or an invalid network configuration setting. ● The error might be caused by the print job, such as an invalid print driver, a problem with the software application, or a problem with the file you are printing. ● Upgrading the product firmware might help resolve the error. See the product user guide for more information. ● If the error persists, escalate this problem to your Global Business unit. 50.WX.YZ Fuser error To continue turn off then on Description The fuser has experienced an error. W = fuser error code, X = fuser mode, Y = previous printer sleep state, Z = next printer sleep state Fuser modes ● Normal—Auto Sense ● Normal ● Light 1 ● Heavy 1 ● Heavy 2 ● Heavy 3 ● Glossy 1 ● Glossy 2 ● Glossy 3 ● Glossy Film ● Transparency ● Label ● Envelope 1 ● Rough Sleep states ENWW ● Standby level 1 (no temperature control) ● Standby level 2 (high temperature control) Tools for troubleshooting 437 ● Standby level 3 (middle temperature control) ● Standby level 2 (low temperature control) ● Middle sleep ● Deep sleep ● Power off Recommended action W = 1 or W = 2 50.1X or 50.2X Low fuser temperature and fuser warm-up failure 1. Remove and then reseat the fuser. Make sure there is no residual paper in the fuser. Make sure the device is not located in front of a vent or window where cool air may interfere with the ability of the fuser to heat up. 2. Check the product power source. Make sure the power source meets product requirements. Make sure this is the only device using the circuit. 3. Replace the fuser. 4. Check the connector (J704) between the fuser and the printer. If it is damaged, replace the fuser drive assembly or fuser. 5. If the error persists, replace the low-voltage power supply. 6. If this product has been previously serviced, check the connector (J131) on the DC controller PCA and the connectors (J109 and J110) on the power line between the low-voltage power supply assembly and the fuser. W=3 50.3X High fuser temperature 1. Remove and then reseat the fuser. 2. Check the paper type setting using the product menus and in the printer driver. Make sure that they match and are correct for the type of media being used. 3. Replace the fuser. 4. If the error persists, replace the low-voltage power supply. 5. If this product has been previously serviced, check the connector (J131) on the DC controller PCA. W=4 50.4X Drive circuit fault 1. Check the power source. Make sure the power source meets product requirements. 438 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW NOTE: If the power source does not meet the power frequency requirement of 43 to 67Hz, the fuser temperature control does not work properly and causes this error. 2. If the error persists, replace the low-voltage power supply. 3. If this product has been previously serviced, check the connector (J21) on the DC controller PCA. W=7 50.7X Fuser pressure-release mechanism failure 1. Remove and then reseat the fuser. Make sure there is no residual paper in the fuser. 2. Check the fuser pressure-release sensor flag. If it is damaged, replace the fuser. 3. Use the sensor test in the Manual sensor test to verify that the fuser pressure-release sensor (PS9) is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the fuser gear assembly. 4. Use the fuser pressure-release drive test in the component test to verify that the fuser motor (M4) is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the fuser motor. 5. If the error persists, replace the low-voltage power supply. 6. If this product has been previously serviced, check the connector (J181) on the DC controller PCA. W=8 50.8X Low fuser temperature 2 1. Remove and then reseat the fuser. Make sure there is no residual paper in the fuser. Make sure the device is not located in front of a vent or window where cool air may interfere with the ability of the fuser to heat up. 2. Check the product power source. Make sure the power source meets product requirements. Make sure this is the only device using the circuit. 3. Replace the fuser. 4. Check the connector (J704) between the fuser and the printer. If it is damaged, replace the fuser drive assembly or fuser. 5. If the error persists, replace the low-voltage power supply. 6. If this product has been previously serviced, check the connector (J131) on the DC controller PCA and the connectors (J109 and J110) on the power line between the low-voltage power supply assembly and the fuser. W=9 50.9X High fuser temperature 2 ENWW 1. Remove and then reseat the fuser. 2. Check the paper type setting using the product menus and in the printer driver. Make sure that they match and are correct for the type of media being used. Tools for troubleshooting 439 3. Replace the fuser. 4. If this product has been previously serviced, check the connector (J131) on the DC controller PCA. W=A 50.AX Low fuser temperature 3 1. Remove and then reseat the fuser. Make sure there is no residual paper in the fuser. Make sure the device is not located in front of a vent or window where cool air may interfere with the ability of the fuser to heat up. 2. Check the product power source. Make sure the power source meets product requirements. Make sure this is the only device using the circuit. 3. Replace the fuser. 4. Check the connector (J704) between the fuser and the printer. If it is damaged, replace the fuser drive assembly or fuser. 5. If this product has been previously serviced, check the connector (J131) on the DC controller PCA and the connectors (J109 and J110) on the power line between the low-voltage power supply assembly and the fuser. W=B 50.BX High fuser temperature 3 1. Remove and then reseat the fuser. 2. Check the paper type setting using the product menus and in the printer driver. Making sure that they match and are correct for the type of media being used. 3. Replace the fuser. 4. Check the connector (J704) between the fuser and the printer. If it is damaged, replace the fuser drive assembly or fuser. 5. If this product has been previously serviced, check the connector (J131) on the DC controller PCA. 51.00.YY Error To continue turn off then on Description An error with the laser/scanner assembly has occurred in the product. ● 51.00.10: Beam detect error ● 51.00.19: Laser malfunction ● 51.00.20: Black laser scanner error ● 51.00.21: Cyan laser scanner error ● 51.00.22: Magenta laser scanner error ● 51.00.23: Yellow laser scanner error 440 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Check the flat flexible cable (FFC) connections to the laser scanners. 3. Replace the laser scanner. 52.00.00 or 52.20.00 To continue turn off then on Description Laser/scanner error ● XX = 00 Laser/scanner motor startup error ● XX = 20 Laser/scanner rotation error Recommended action Use the scanner motor (M10) drive test in the component test to test the motor. If the motor does not run, replace the laser/scanner assembly. NOTE: Listen for a high pitched whine from the motor. If the laser/scanner assembly has been removed or replaced, check the connectors (J831 and J832) on the laser-driver PCA and the connectors (J61 and J62) on the DC controller PCA. 54.0X.07 Description Drum home position sensor failure X = 5 black, X = 6 cyan, X = 7 magenta, X = 8 yellow Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. If the error persists, replace the main drive assembly. 3. If the product has had parts removed or replaced, check the connector (J181) on the DC controller PCA. 54.11.05 or 54.12.05 Description Media sensor is not functioning properly. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 441 Recommended action 1. Clean the media sensor with a lint-free cloth, and then turn the product off and then on. 2. 54.11.05: If the error persists replace the paper pickup assembly. The threshold level for the media sensor (Media sensor value ) is located on a label on the paper pickup assembly. Use the Service menu to input this value into the product memory after replacing the paper pickup assembly. -or54.12.05: If the error persists replace the right door assembly. 3. 54.11.05: If the product has had parts removed or replace check the connector (J542) on the media sensor and the connector (J112) on the DC controller PCA. -or54.12.05: If the product has had parts removed or replace check the connector (J114) on the media sensor and the connector (J152) on the DC controller PCA. 54.XX.YY Error Description A sensor error has occurred. Recommended action 54.00.03: Environmental sensor failure 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. If the environment sensor has been removed or replaced, check the connector (J2) on the environment sensor and the connector (J108) on the DC controller PCA. 3. If the error persists, replace the environment sensor assembly. 54.00.06 or 54.00.14 or 54.00.19: Registration density sensor failure 1. Open and close the right door (or turn on and then off the power switch) to perform the color plane registration. 2. If the error persists, replace the registration density sensor assembly. 54.01.05: Paper sensor is out of calibration range 1. Turn the product off, and then clean the paper sensor with a lint-free cloth. Turn the product on. 2. If the error persists, replace the paper pickup assembly. 54.06.21: Primary laser/scanner beam detect abnormality 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. If the error persists, replace the laser/scanner assembly. 3. If the product has had parts removed or replaced, check the connector (J110-C/M or J111-C/M) on the DC controller PCA. 54.0X.0B or 54.0X.0C: Density sensor out of range error or Dhalf calibration failure 442 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW X = 0 black, X = 1 cyan, X = 2 magenta, X = 3 yellow 1. Check the supplies status page to make sure the toner cartridges are not past their useful life. 2. Check the ITB for damage. 3. Make sure the CPR sensor is not contaminated with toner or paper dust. Clean the sensor with compressed air and soft brush. 4. If error persists, replace the registration sensor assembly. 54.0X.0D or 54.0X.0E: Optical memory element abnormal or CPR sensor out of range X = 0 black, X = 1 cyan, X = 2 magenta, X = 3 yellow 1. Check the supplies status page to make sure the toner cartridges are not past their useful life. 2. Check the ITB for damage. 3. Make sure the CPR sensor is not contaminated with toner or paper dust. Clean the sensor with compressed air and soft brush. 4. If error persists, replace the registration sensor assembly. 55.XX.YY DC controller error To continue turn off then on Description The communication link between the formatter and DC controller was lost. ● 55.00.00: Internal communication error ● 55.00.01: DC controller memory error ● 55.00.03: DC controller no engine response ● 55.00.04: DC controller communications timeout ● 55.01.06: DC controller NVRAM abnormal read/write ● 55.02.06: DC controller NVRAM not accessible Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Perform an engine test. 3. Verify the connectors on the DC controller. 4. If the error persists, replace the DC controller. 56.00.01 Illegal Input Printer Error To continue turn off then on Description The product experienced a communication error with the optional paper tray. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 443 Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Remove, and then reseat the optional tray. 3. Check the input connectors for damage. Replace a damaged connector. 4. Remove any third-party hardware. 5. Upgrade the firmware. 6. If the error persists, replace the DC controller. 56.00.02 Selected media output bin unavailable Description The bin selected for output is unavailable. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Remove any third-party hardware. 3. Attempt the remote firmware update again. 4. If the error persists, escalate this problem to your Global Business unit. 56.00.03 Media input path operation error Description A tray is open, and is blocking the paper path, above the selected tray. Recommended action 1. Close the open tray. 2. If all trays are closed, use the sensor tests to check the tray closed sensors for the above trays. 3. If the error persists, escalate this problem to your Global Business unit. 57.00.0Y Error To continue turn off then on Description Fan error Recommended action 57.00.01 Power supply fan (FM1) failure 1. Turn the product off, and then on. Listen for fan noise at the front lower-left corner of the product. If no noise is heard, replace the power supply fan (FM1). 2. If this part has been removed or replaced, check the connector (J21) on the DC controller PCA and the connector (J106) on the low-voltage power supply assembly. 444 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 57.00.02 Fuser fan (FM2) faliure 1. Turn the product off, and then on. Listen for fan noise at the front lower-right corner of the product. If no noise is heard, replace the fuser fan (FM2). 2. If this part has been removed or replaced, check the connector (J121) on the DC controller PCA and the intermediate connector (J524). 57.00.03 Formatter fan (FM3) failure 1. Turn the product off, and then on. Listen for fan noise at the lower back-center of the product. If no noise is heard, replace the formatter fan (FM3). 2. If this part has been removed or replaced, check the connector (J142) on the intermediate connect board. 57.00.04 Cartridge fan motor 4 (FM4) malfunction 1. Turn the product off, and then on. Listen for fan noise at the left-side, upper-center, of the product. If no noise is heard, replace the cartridge fan (FM4). 2. If this part has been removed or replaced, verify that the connectors (J142S) on the DC Comptroller board and (J143SL) on the fan are connected correctly and undamaged. 57.00.05 Sub power supply fan (scanner power supply) (FM5) failure 1. Turn the product off, and then on. Listen for fan noise at the back-side, upper-right, of the product. If no noise is heard, replace the Sub power supply fan (scanner power supply) (FM5). 2. If this part has been removed or replaced, verify that the connector (J308) on the Sub Power Supply PCA is connected correctly and undamaged. 58.00.02 environmental sensor malfunction Description The product has experienced an environmental sensor error. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Verify that the connector (J33S) on the DC controller PCA and the sensor (J502S) are connected correctly and undamaged. 3. If the error persists, replace the environmental sensor. 58.00.04 Error To continue turn off then on Description The low-voltage power supply is defective. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 445 Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Check the connector (J143) on the DC controller PCA. 3. If the error persists, replace the low voltage power supply. 59.00.YY Error To continue turn off then on Description Printing error Recommended action 59.00.30 or 59.00.40 Fuser motor (M4) start up error or fuser motor (M4) rotational error 1. Use the fuser motor (M4) drive test in the component test to verify that the fuser motor is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the fuser motor assembly. 2. If the product has been serviced, check the connector (J516) on the fuser motor and the connector (J81) on the DC controller PCA. 59.00.90 or 59.00.A0 ITB motor (M1) start up error or ITB motor (M1) abnormal rotational error 1. Use the ITB motor (M1) drive test in the component test to verify that the ITB motor is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the ITB motor assembly. 2. If the product has been serviced, check the connector (J517) on the ITB motor and the connector (J81) on the DC controller PCA. 59.00.C0 Developer alienation motor (M6) error 1. Use the developer engagement and disengagement drive test in the component test to verify that the disengagement mechanism is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the ITB motor assembly. 2. Use the sensor test in the Manual sensor test to verify that the developer disengagement sensor (PS11) is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the main drive assembly. 3. If the product has been serviced, check the connector (J518) on the developer disengagement motor, the connector (J1005) on the driver PCA and the connector (J91) on the DC controller PCA. 59.00.F0 T1 alienation mechanism failure 1. Make sure that the ITB is correctly installed. 2. Use the T1 roller alienation switch (SW5) test in the Manual sensor test to verify that the switch is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the main drive assembly. 446 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 3. Use the T1 roller engagement and disengagement drive test in the component test to verify that the T1 roller disengagement mechanism is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the fuser drive assembly. 4. If the product has been serviced, check the connector (J181) on the DC controller PCA. 59.0X.50 Error To continue turn off then on Description Motor startup error 59.05.50 = black 59.06.50 = cyan 59.07.50 = magenta 59.08.50 = yellow Recommended action 59.05.50 Black image drum start up error (ITB motor; M1) 1. Use the ITB drum motor (M1) drive test in the Component test to verify that the motor is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the ITB motor assembly. 2. If the product has been serviced, check the connector (J517) on the ITB motor and the connector (J81) on the DC controller PCA. 59.06.50 or 59.07.50 or 59.08.50 CMY drum motor (M2) start up error 1. Use the drum motor (M2) drive test in the Component test to verify that the motor is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the drum motor assembly. 2. If the product has been serviced, check the connector (J515) on the drum motor and the connector (J81) on the DC controller PCA. 59.0X.60 Error To continue turn off then on Description Motor rotational error 59.05.60 = black 59.06.60 = cyan 59.07.60 = magenta 59.08.60 = yellow Recommended action 59.05.60 Black image drum start up error (ITB motor; M1). ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 447 1. Use the ITB drum motor (M1) drive test in the Component test to verify that the motor is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the ITB motor assembly. 2. If the product has been serviced, check the connector (J517) on the ITB motor and the connector (J81) on the DC controller PCA. 59.06.60 or 59.07.60 or 59.08.60 CMY drum motor (M2) rotation error 1. Use the drum motor (M2) drive test in the Component test to verify that the motor is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the drum motor assembly. 2. If the product has been serviced, check the connector (J515) on the drum motor and the connector (J81) on the DC controller PCA. 59.0X.70 Error To continue turn off then on Description Motor abnormal rotation 59.05.70 = black 59.06.70 = cyan 59.07.70 = magenta 59.08.70 = yellow Recommended action 59.05.70 Black developer motor abnormal start up error (ITB motor; M1) 1. Use the ITB drum motor (M1) drive test in the Component test to verify that the motor is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the ITB motor assembly. 2. If the product has been serviced, check the connector (J517) on the ITB motor and the connector (J81) on the DC controller PCA. 59.06.70 or 59.07.70 or 59.08.70 CMY developer motor (M3) abnormal start up error 1. Use the developer motor (M3) drive test in the Component test to verify that the motor is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the developer motor assembly. 2. If the product has been serviced, check the connector (J514) on the developer motor and the connector (J81) on the DC controller PCA. 59.0X.80 Error To continue turn off then on Description Developer motor failure Recommended action 59.05.80 448 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Black developer motor failure error (ITB motor; M1) 1. Use the ITB drum motor (M1) drive test in the Component test to verify that the motor is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the ITB motor assembly. 2. If the product has been serviced, check the connector (J517) on the ITB motor and the connector (J81) on the DC controller PCA. 59.06.80 or 59.07.80 or 59.08.80 CMY developer motor (M3) failure error 1. Use the developer motor (M3) drive test in the Component test to verify that the motor is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the developer motor assembly. 2. If the product has been serviced, check the connector (J514) on the developer motor and the connector (J81) on the DC controller PCA. 60.00.0Y Tray lifting error Description Tray lift motors error Recommended action 60.00.02 Media input Tray 2 lift-up motor (M9) failure 1. Use the Tray 2 paper surface sensor (PS4) test in the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the lifter drive assembly. 2. Open and close Tray 2 and listen at the back of the product for the sound of the lifer motor (M9) operating. If it does not operate, replace the lifter drive assembly. 3. If the product has been serviced, check the intermediate connector (J742) and the connector (J151) on the DC controller PCA. 4. If the error persists, replace the cassette tray. 60.00.03 or 60.00.04 Media input Tray 3 lift-up motor (M2) failure or media input Tray 4 lift-up motor (M2) failure 1. Use the Tray 3 paper surface sensor (SR2) or Tray 4 paper surface sensor (SR2) test in the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the lifter drive assembly. NOTE: Both the Tray 3 and Tray 4 paper surface sensors are designated as SR2. The first one listed in the Tray/Bin manual test is Tray 3, the second one listed is for Tray 4. 2. Open and close Tray 3 or Tray 4 and listen at the back of the product for the sound of the lifer motor (M2) operating. If it does not operate, replace the lifter drive assembly. NOTE: Both the Tray 3 and Tray 4 lifter motors are designated as M2. Listen for the appropriate motor to operate. 3. ENWW If the product has been serviced, check the connector (J2003) on the paper feeder controller PCA, the intermediate connector (J702) and the connector (J2006) on the paper feeder controller PCA. Tools for troubleshooting 449 TIP: Check the connector (J2006) on the paper feeder controller PCA associated with the tray. 4. If the error persists, replace the cassette tray. 60.00.05 or 60.00.06 Media input Tray 5 lift-up motor (M82) failure or media input Tray 6 lift-up motor (M92) failure 1. Use the Tray 5 paper surface sensor (SR82) or Tray 6 paper surface sensor (SR92) test in the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the lifter drive assembly. 2. Open and close Tray 5 or Tray 6 and listen at the back of the product for the sound of the lifter motor (M82 or M92) operating. If it does not operate, replace the lifter drive assembly. 3. If the product has been serviced, check the connector (J2003) on the paper feeder controller PCA, the intermediate connector (J702), and the connector (J2006) on the paper feeder controller PCA. TIP: Check the connector (J2006) on the paper feeder controller PCA associated with the tray. 4. If the error persists, replace the cassette tray. 60.10.0Y Media input source pickup mechanism malfunction Description ● 60.10.01 Media input source 1 pickup mechanism malfunction ● 60.10.02 Media input source 2 pickup mechanism malfunction ● 60.10.03 Media input source 3 pickup mechanism malfunction ● 60.10.04 Media input source 4 pickup mechanism malfunction ● 60.10.05 Media input source 5 pickup mechanism malfunction ● 60.10.06 Media input source 6 pickup mechanism malfunction Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Use the Paper Pick-up motor (M5, M1, M82, M92, M3301, M3304) test in the Component test to verify that the pickup motor is properly functioning. If the pickup motor is not functioning, replace the Paper Pick-up assembly. 3. If the error persists, escalate this problem to your Global Business unit. 61.00.01 Description Color table read failure. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. If the error persists, reload the firmware. If the error still persists, perform a firmware upgrade. 450 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW If the firmware upgrade does not resolve the problem, replace the hard disk. 62.00.00 No system To continue turn off then on Description The product experienced an internal system failure. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Reload the firmware. 3. Perform a firmware upgrade. 4. If the error persists, replace the hard disk. 69.11.YY Error To continue, touch “OK” Description This message displays to indicate an error during a duplex operation. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. 70.00.00 Error To continue turn off then on Description The product experienced a DC controller failure. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. If the error persists, replace the DC controller. 80.0X.YY Embedded Jetdirect Error Description Embedded HP JetDirect print server critical error. ● 80.01.80 (event code) No heartbeat ● 80.01.81 (event code) Reclaim timeout ● 80.01.82 (event code) Invalid data length ● 80.01.8B (event code) Invalid max outstanding packet header field ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 451 ● 80.01.8C (event code) Invalid channel mapping response ● 80.03.01 (event code) No PGP buffers ● 80.03.02 (event code) Channel table full ● 80.03.03 (event code) Producer index not reset ● 80.03.04 (event code) Consumer index not reset ● 80.03.05 (event code) Queue position size too small ● 80.03.06 (event code) Transport overflow ● 80.03.07 (event code) No overflow packets ● 80.03.08 (event code) Invalid identify response ● 80.03.09 (event code) Invalid channel map return status ● 80.03.10 (event code) Invalid reclaim return status ● 80.03.12 (event code) Datagram invalid buffer ● 80.03.13 (event code) Max stream channels ● 80.03.14 (event code) Max datagram channels ● 80.03.15 (event code) Card reset failed ● 80.03.16 (event code) 452 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Self test failure ● 80.03.17 (event code) Unknown PGP packet ● 80.03.18 (event code) Duplicate I/O channel Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. If the error persists, replace the formatter. 81.WX.00 Wireless Network Error To continue turn off then on Description A wireless network component on the product has failed. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. If the error persists, turn the product off, reseat the wireless network component, and then turn the product on. 3. If the error persists, replace the wireless network component. 81.WX.YZ Embedded Jetdirect Error To continue turn off then on Description The product experienced an embedded HP Jetdirect print server critical error. ● 81.02.00 (event code): Wireless Networking Event ● 81.03.00 (event code): Access Point Wireless Networking Event ● 81.04.00 (event code): Jetdirect Inside Networking Event ● 81.07.00 (event code): Internal Wireless Networking Event ● 81.08.00 (event code): Internal Access Point Wireless Networking Event ● 81.09.00 (event code): Internal Jetdirect Inside Networking Event Recommended action ENWW 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Turn the product off, reseat the EIO accessory, and then turn the product on. 3. If the error persists, replace the formatter. Tools for troubleshooting 453 98.00.0X Corrupt data in X volume Description Data corruption has occurred in the firmware volume. ● 98.00.01 Corrupt data in firmware volume Reinstall firmware ● 98.00.02 Corrupt data in solutions volume Re-install accessory solutions ● 98.00.03 Corrupt data in configuration volume Re-configure the product ● 98.00.04 Corrupt data in job data volume All job data was erased Recommended action 98.00.01 or 98.00.02 or 98.00.03 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Use the Clean Disk item in the Preboot menu. 3. Reload the firmware. 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Rerun the file erase function. 98.00.04 99.00.01 Upgrade not performed file is corrupt Description Remote firmware upgrade (.bdl) was not performed. The file is corrupt. Recommended action The firmware file is corrupt. Download the firmware file and attempt the upgrade again. 99.00.02 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive Description Remote firmware upgrade (.bdl) was not performed. Timeout during receipt. Recommended action The I/O timed out during the firmware download. The most common cause is an issue with the network environment. Ensure a good connection to the product, and attempt the upgrade again or upgrade using the easy-access USB port. 99.00.03 Upgrade not performed error writing to disk Description Remote firmware upgrade (.bdl) was not performed. An error occurred when writing to the hard disk. 454 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1. Download the firmware again, and then attempt the upgrade again. 2. If the error persists, perform the clean disk/format disk process. 3. Download the firmware from the Preboot menu, and then attempt the upgrade again. 4. If the error persists, replace the hard disk. 99.00.04 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. I/O timeout when reading rest of header. Recommended action The most common cause is an issue with the network environment. Make sure that there is a good connection to the device and attempt the upgrade again, or upgrade using the easy-access USB port. 99.00.05 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. I/O timeout when reading image data. Recommended action The most common cause is an issue with the network environment. Make sure that there is a good connection to the device and attempt the upgrade again, or upgrade using the easy-access USB port. 99.00.06 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. Unexpected read error when reading header number and size. Recommended action 1. Download the RFU file and attempt the upgrade again. 2. If the error persists, replace the hard disk. 99.00.07 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. Unexpected read error when reading rest of header. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 455 Recommended action 1. Download the RFU file and attempt the upgrade again. 2. If the error persists, replace the hard disk. 99.00.08 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. Unexpected read error when reading image data. Recommended action 1. Download the RFU file and attempt the upgrade again. 2. If the error persists, replace the hard disk. 99.00.09 Upgrade canceled by user Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. The RFU was canceled by the user. Recommended action Resend the RFU. 99.00.10 Upgrade canceled by user Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. Job canceled when reading header number and size. Recommended action Resend the RFU. 99.00.11 Upgrade canceled by user Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. Job canceled when reading rest of header. Recommended action Resend the RFU. 99.00.12 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. 456 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Header number is 1 but header size doesn’t match version 1 size. Recommended action Download the RFU file again. Make sure that you download the file for the correct product model. Resend the RFU. 99.00.13 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. Header number is 2 but header size doesn’t match version 2 size. Recommended action Download the RFU file again. Make sure that you download the file for the correct product model. Resend the RFU. 99.00.14 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. The file is invalid. Recommended action Download the RFU file again. Make sure that you download the file for the correct product model. Resend the RFU. 99.00.2X Description ● 99.00.20 (event log) The bundle is not for this product. ● 99.00.21 (event log) The bundle is not signed with the correct signature, or the signature is invalid. ● 99.00.22 (event log) The bundle header version is not supported by this firmware. ● 99.00.23 (event log) The package header version is not supported by this firmware. ● 99.00.24 (event log) The format of the bundle is invalid. ● 99.00.25 (event log) The format of the package is invalid. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 457 ● 99.00.26 (event log) A CRC32 check did not pass. ● 99.00.27 (event log) An I/O error occurred while downloading the bundle. Recommended action Download the correct firmware file from www.hp.com/support/colorljM750, and then resend the firmware upgrade. 99.00.27 only: Turn the product off, and then on again. Resend the firware upgrade. If the error persists, try the sending the upgrade by another method (USB or HP Embedded Web Server). 99.01.XX Description ● 99.01.00 ● 99.01.10 ● 99.01.20 ● 99.01.21 A firmware install error has occurred. Recommended action Reload the firmware. 99.02.01 Description Firmware installation was successful. Recommended action No action necessary. 99.02.09 Description Firmware upgrade cancelled by user. Recommended action No action necessary. 99.05.56 Description Firmware install error: IoctlSetBaudRate failed 458 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1. Perform a clean disk from the Preboot menu. 2. Reload latest version of firmware via USB drive. 3. If the issue persists, replace the formatter assembly. 99.09.60 Unsupported disk Description Preboot menu error. The hard disk currently installed is not recognized or supported by the product. Recommended action Install the correct hard disk for this product. If the recommended hard disk is installed and this error persists, run the Clean Disk procedure from the Preboot menu (Administrator /Clean Disk) and then reload the firmware. 99.09.61 Unsupported disk Description Preboot menu error. The installed disk is installed in a product configured for a encrypted hard disk. Recommended action Open the Preboot menu, and then select Lock Disk to lock the disk. 99.09.62 Unknown disk Description Preboot menu error. The installed disk was previously locked in another product. Recommended action Install a new disk or use the Preboot menu to unlock this disk. If the disk is to be reused in a different product, execute the Clean Disk procedure from the Preboot menu, and then reload firmware and lock the disk. NOTE: The hard disk drive may no longer be encrypted. Go to the EWS Security tab to encrypt the hard disk drive. 99.09.63 Incorrect disk Description A new or blank disk has been installed in a device which previously had an encrypted disk. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 459 Recommended action Follow the procedure to load firmware on a new hard disk, and then lock it to this product. 99.09.64 Disk malfunction Description A fatal hard disk failure has occurred. Recommended action Replace the hard disk drive. 99.09.65 Disk data error Description Disk data corruption has occurred. Recommended action Execute the Clean Disk procedure from the Preboot menu, and then resend the RFU. 99.09.66 No disk installed Description A disk drive is not installed in the product. Recommended action 1. Install a compatible hard disk drive. 2. If a compatible hard disk is installed, reseat the hard disk to make sure it is correctly connected. 3. If the error persists, replace the hard disk drive. 99.09.67 Disk is not bootable please download firmware Description The product has a non-secure disk installed as the boot disk, and it has been replaced with a new service part. A new firmware image needs to be downloaded to the device. Recommended action 1. Press any button to continue to the main Preboot menu. 2. Press the Help button to see the help text for the error. 3. Select the Administration menu. NOTE: If there is a password assigned to the Administrator, a prompt to enter the password displays. 4. Select the Download item. 5. The user can now download a new firmware bundle to the product. 460 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 99.09.68 Description The secondary encrypted disk has been removed from this device. Recommended action Reinstall the secondary encrypted storage device. 99.XX.YY Description Firmware installation error Recommended action Reload the firmware. full Remove all paper from bin Description The specified output bin is full. Recommended action Empty the bin to continue printing. almost full Description Toner collection bottle is almost full. ● 10.31.60 (event code) Toner collection unit Recommended action Replace the toner collection unit. low OR Supplies low Description The product indicates when a supply level, or more than one supply, is low. Actual print cartridge life might vary. You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. When multiple supplies are low, more than one event code is recorded. ● 10.00.60 (event code) Black print cartridge ● 10.01.60 (event code) Cyan print cartridge ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 461 ● 10.02.60 (event code) Magenta print cartridge ● 10.03.60 (event code) Yellow print cartridge ● 10.23.60 (event code) Fuser kit ● 10.22.60 (event code) Transfer kit Recommended action If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the supply. HP recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. NOTE: When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, the HP Premium Protection Warranty ends. very low OR Supplies very low Description The product indicates when a supply level, or more than one supply, is very low. Actual print cartridge life might vary. You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. When multiple supplies are low, more than one event code is recorded. ● 10.00.70 (event code) Black print cartridge ● 10.01.70 (event code) Cyan print cartridge ● 10.02.70 (event code) Magenta print cartridge ● 10.03.70 (event code) Yellow print cartridge ● 10.23.70 (event code) Fuser kit ● 10.22.70 (event code) Transfer kit 462 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the supply. HP recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. NOTE: When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, the HP Premium Protection Warranty ends. lifting Description The product is in the process of lifting paper in the indicated tray. ● X=2 Tray 2 ● X=3 Tray 3 ● X=4 Tray 4 ● X=5 Tray 5 ● X=6 Tray 6 Recommended action No action necessary. [File System] device failure To clear press OK Description The specified device has failed. Recommended action Press the OK button to clear the error. [File System] file operation failed To clear press OK Description A PJL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation. Recommended action Press the OK button to clear the error. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 463 [File System] file system is full To clear press OK Description A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system, because the file system was full. Recommended action Press the OK button to clear the error. [File System] is not initialized Description This file-storage component must be initialized before use. Recommended action Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system. [File System] is write protected Description The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it. Recommended action Press the OK button to clear the error. Accept bad signature Description The product is performing a remote firmware upgrade, and the code signature is invalid. Recommended action Download the correct firmware upgrade file for this product, and then reinstall the upgrade. See the product user guide for more information. Bad optional tray connection Description The optional tray is not connected, not connected correctly, or a connection is not working correctly. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off. 2. Remove and reinstall the optional tray. 3. Reconnect connectors for the tray. 4. Turn the product on. 464 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Calibration reset pending Description A calibration reset occurs when all jobs are processed. Recommended action To begin the reset sooner, cancel all jobs by pressing the Stop button . Canceling Description The product is canceling the current job. Recommended action No action is necessary. Canceling Description The product is canceling the current job . Recommended action No action is necessary. Checking engine Description The product is conducting an internal test. Recommended action No action is necessary. Checking paper path Description The product is checking for possible paper jams. Recommended action No action is necessary. Chosen personality not available To continue, touch “OK” Description A print job requested a product language (personality) that is not available for this product. The job will not print and will be cleared from memory. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 465 Recommended action Print the job by using a product driver for a different print language, or add the requested language to the product (if possible). To see a list of available personalities, print a configuration page. Cleaning do not grab paper Description The product is performing an automatic cleaning cycle. Printing will continue after the cleaning is complete. Recommended action No action is necessary. Cleaning... Description The product is performing an automatic cleaning cycle. Printing will continue after the cleaning is complete. Recommended action No action is necessary. Clearing event log Description This message is displayed while the event log is cleared. The product exits the menus when the event log has been cleared. Recommended action No action is necessary. Clearing paper path Description The product is attempting to eject jammed paper. Recommended action Check progress at the bottom of the display. Close front door Description The front door of the product is open. Recommended action 1. Close the door. 2. Use the manual sensor test to verify that the front-door switch is properly functioning. If the switch fails the test, replace the switch. 466 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 3. Check the sensor flag on the front-door assembly. If it is damaged, replace the front-door assembly. 4. If the product has been recently serviced, check the connector (J708) on the 24V interlock switch and the connector (J121) on the DC controller PCA. Close lower right door Description The optional paper feeder right door is open. Recommended action 1. Open and then close the door. 2. Use the right-door switch (SW1) test in the tray/bin manual sensor test to verify that the switch is properly functioning. If the switch fails the test, replace the switch. 3. Check the sensor flag on the right door assembly. If it is damaged, replace the lower right door assembly. Close middle right door Description The 1 x 500-sheet optional paper feeder right door is open. Recommended action 1. Close the door. 2. Use the right-door switch (SW1) test in the tray/bin manual sensor test to verify that the switch is properly functioning. If the switch fails the test, replace the switch. 3. Check the sensor flag on the right door assembly. If it is damaged, replace the door assembly. Close right door Description A door on the right side of the product is open. Recommended action 1. Close the right door. 2. If the error persists, use the manual sensor test to verify that the right door opening/closing sensor is properly functioning. If the sensor fails, replace the right door switch. 3. Check the right door sensor flag. If it is damaged, replace the right door. 4. If this product was previously serviced, reconnect the connector (J708) on the 24V interlock switch and the connector (J181) on the DC controller PCA. Close upper right door For help press ? Description The upper-right door of the product is open. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 467 Recommended action 1. Close the door. 2. Use the right-door switch (SP15) test in the Manual sensor test to verify that the switch is properly functioning. If the switch fails the test, replace the switch. 3. Check the sensor flag on the right door assembly. If it is damaged, replace the door assembly. 4. If the product has been recently serviced, check the connector (J708) on the 24V interlock switch and the connector (J181) on the DC controller PCA. Cooling device Description The product is cooling. Customers may report seeing a Cooling Device message displayed on the product control panel and experience a noticeable decrease in print speed. This is typically seen during long, continuous print runs (greater than 1,000 pages) and is more common in high temperature/high humidity environments. When this message is displayed, the product will print for several seconds and then pause several seconds before printing again. This will continue until the current job finishes or the job is canceled. After the product has completed the job, or the user cancels the current job, the product may require several minutes to cool sufficiently to continue printing at normal print speeds. Recommended action No action is necessary. This is normal behavior for this product and is done to protect the toner cartridges from overheating. Advise a customer who is experiencing this condition to allow the product to cool down before beginning to print again. The customer can avoid this scenario by ensuring the product is in a location that is within the product's specifications for temperature and humidity and by avoiding long, continuous printing situations by breaking down print jobs into smaller sections with some delay in between. Data received To print last page, press OK Description The product is waiting for the command to print the last page. Recommended action Press the OK button to print the last page of the job. Event log is empty Description No product events are in the log. 468 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action No action is necessary. Expected drive missing Description The product cannot find the encrypted hard drive. Recommended action Install the encrypted hard drive. HP Secure Hard Drive disabled Description The drive has been encrypted for another product. Recommended action Remove the drive or use the HP Embedded Web Server for more information. Incompatible Description The indicated supply is not compatible with this product. ● 10.00.35 (event code) Black print cartridge ● 10.01.35 (event code) Cyan print cartridge ● 10.02.35 (event code) Magenta print cartridge ● 10.03.35 (event code) Yellow print cartridge ● Fuser kite 10.23.35 (event code) Recommended action Replace the supply with one that is designed for this product. Incompatible supplies Description Print cartridges or other supply items are installed that were not designed for this product. The product cannot print with these supplies installed. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 469 Event codes are supply specific. Recommended action Touch the OK button to identify the incompatible supplies. Replace the supplies with those that are designed for this product. Initializing... Description The product is starting. Recommended action No action is necessary. Wait until the Ready message displays on the control-panel. Install Description A supply item is either not installed or installed incorrectly. ● Black cartridge 10.00.15 (event code) ● Cyan cartridge 10.10.15 (event code) ● Magenta cartridge 10.02.15 (event code) ● Yellow cartridge 10.03.15 (event code) ● Fuser kite 10.23.15 (event code) Recommended action Install the supply item or make sure that the installed supply item is fully seated. Install Close rear door Description The toner collection unit has been removed or has been installed incorrectly. ● Toner collection unit 10.31.15 (event code) Recommended action Replace or reinstall the toner collection unit correctly to continue printing. 470 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Install Fuser Unit Description The fuser has been removed or installed incorrectly. Recommended action CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it. 1. Open the right door. 2. Install or adjust the fuser. 3. Close the right door. Install supplies Description More than one supply is missing or is installed incorrectly. Recommended action Press the OK button to identify the supplies that need to be replaced. Press the OK button a second time for more information about the specific supply. Insert the supply or make sure it is correctly installed and fully seated. Install Transfer Unit Description The transfer unit is either not installed or not installed correctly. Recommended action 1. Open the right door. 2. Install the ITB. NOTE: If the ITB is already installed, remove it, and then reinstall the ITB. 3. Close the right door. 4. If the error persists, use the ITB alienation sensor switch (SW5) in the manual sensor test to verify that the switch is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the main drive assembly. 5. If the error persists, use the T1 roller engagement and disengagement drive test in the component test to verify that the ITB alienation mechanism is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the fuser drive assembly. 6. If the product was recently serviced, check the connector (J181) on the DC controller PCA. Internal disk not functional Description The product internal disk is not working correctly. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 471 Recommended action 1. Turn off the product, and then remove and reinstall the disk. Turn on the product. 2. If the error persists, replace the internal hard drive. Internal disk spinning up Description Internal disk device is spinning up its platter. Jobs that require disk access must wait. Recommended action No action is necessary. Load Tray : [Type], [Size] Description This message displays even though there is media loaded in the tray. Recommended action Use the cassette media present sensor test in the Tray/bin manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is correctly functioning. Make sure that the sensor flag on the media presence sensor is not damaged and moves freely. Reconnect the corresponding connector: ● MP tray: connector (J736) on the MP tray media out sensor and the connector (J152) on the DC controller PCA. ● Printer cassette: connectors (J739 and J742) on the cassette media out sensor and the connector (J151) on the DC controller PCA. ● 1 X 500-sheet paper feeder cassette: connector (J702D) on the paper feeder cassette media out sensor and the connector (J2003) on the paper feeder controller PCA. ● Paper deck cassette 1: connector (J702D) on the paper deck cassette 1 media out sensor and connector (J2003) on the paper deck controller PCA 1 ● Paper deck cassette 2: connector (J802D) on the paper deck cassette 2 media out sensor and connector (J2003B) on the paper deck controller PCA 2. ● Paper deck cassette 3: connector (J902D) on the paper deck cassette 3 media out sensor and connector (J2003C) on the paper deck controller PCA 3. Load Tray : [Type], [Size] To use another tray, touch OK Description This message displays when the indicated tray is selected but is not loaded, and other paper trays are available for use. It also displays when the tray is configured for a different paper type or size than the print job requires. Recommended action Load the correct paper in the tray. 472 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW If prompted, confirm the size and type of paper loaded. Otherwise, press the OK button to select another tray. Loading program Description Programs and fonts can be stored on the product’s file system and are loaded into RAM when the product is turned on. The number specifies a sequence number indicating the current program being loaded. Recommended action No action necessary. NOTE: Do not turn the product off. Manually feed output stack Then touch "OK" to print second sides Description The product has printed the first side of a manual duplex job and is waiting for the user to insert the output stack to print the second side. Recommended action The even-numbered pages of the two-sided document have printed. Follow the next steps to print the oddnumbered pages. 1. Maintaining the same orientation, remove the document from the output bin. Do not discard blank pages. 2. Flip the document over so the printed side is up. 3. Load document in Tray 1. 4. Touch the OK button to print the second side of the job. Manually feed: [Type], [Size] To continue, touch “OK” Description This message displays when manual feed is selected, Tray 1 is not loaded, and other trays are available. Recommended action ● Load tray with requested paper. ● If paper is already in tray, touch the Help button to exit the message, and then touch the OK button to print. ● To use another tray, clear paper from Tray 1, touch the Help button to exit the message, and then touch the OK button. Manually feed: [Type], [Size] To use another tray, touch OK Description This message displays when manual feed is selected, Tray 1 is loaded, and other trays are available. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 473 Recommended action Load tray with requested paper. If paper is already in tray, press the Help button to exit the message, and then press the OK button to print. To use another tray, clear paper from Tray 1, press the Help button to exit the message and then press the OK button. Moving solenoid Description The solenoid is moving as part of a component test. Recommended action To exit press X Moving solenoid and motor Description The solenoid and a motor are moving as part of a component test. Recommended action To exit press X No job to cancel Description You have pressed the stop button, but the product is not actively processing any jobs. Recommended action No action necessary. Paused Description The product is paused, and there are no error messages pending at the display. The I/O continues receiving data until memory is full. Recommended action Press the Stop button. Performing Color Band Test… Description A color-band test is being performed. Recommended action No action necessary. 474 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Performing Paper Path Test… Description A paper-path test is being performed. Recommended action No action necessary. Please wait… Description The product is in the process of clearing data. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing CMYK samples... Description The product is printing the CMYK sample pages. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Color Usage Log... Description The product is printing the Color Usage log. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Configuration... Description The product is printing the Configuration page. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Demo Page... Description The product is printing the Demo page. Recommended action No action necessary. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 475 Printing Diagnostics Page... Description The product is printing the Diagnostics page. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Engine Test... Description The product is printing an Engine Test page. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Event Log... Description The product is printing the Event Log page. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing File Directory... Description The product is printing the File Directory pages. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Font List... Description The product is printing the Font List pages. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Fuser Test Page... Description The product is printing the Fuser Test page. Recommended action No action necessary. 476 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Printing Help Page... Description The product is printing the Help page. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Menu Map... Description The product is printing the Menu Map pages. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing PQ Troubleshooting... Description The product is printing the PQ Troubleshooting pages. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Registration Page... Description The product is printing the Registration pages. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing RGB Samples... Description The product is printing the RGB Sample pages. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing stopped Description Time has expired on the Print/Stop test. Recommended action Press the OK button to continue. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 477 Printing Supplies Status page... Description The product is printing the Supplies Status page. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Usage Page... Description The product is printing the Usage page. Recommended action No action necessary. Processing duplex job... Do not grab paper until job completes Description Paper temporarily comes into the output bin while printing a duplex job. CAUTION: Do not grab paper as it temporarily comes into the output bin. The message disappears when the job is finished. Recommended action No action necessary. Processing job from tray ... Do not grab paper until job completes Description The product is actively processing a job from the designated tray. Recommended action No action necessary. Processing... Description The product is currently processing a job but is not yet picking pages. When paper motion begins, this message is replaced by a message that indicates the tray the job is using. Recommended action No action necessary. Processing... copy of Description The product is currently processing or printing collated copies. The message indicates that copy number of total copies is currently being processed. 478 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action No action necessary. Ready Description The product is online and ready for data. No status or product attendance messages are pending at the display. Recommended action No action is necessary. Ready Description The product is online and ready for data. No status or product attendance messages are pending at the display. The product IP address displays. Recommended action No action is necessary. Remove all toner cartridges Description The product is testing the transfer unit assembly. Recommended action To perform the test, remove all the print cartridges. To cancel the test, press the Stop button . To exit press X Remove at least one toner cartridge Description The product is testing the print-cartridge motor. Recommended action To perform the test, remove at least one print cartridge. To cancel the test, press the Stop button . To exit press X Remove shipping lock from Tray 2 Description The Tray 2 shipping lock was not removed before you turned the product on. Recommended action Open tray 2, and then remove the shipping lock. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 479 Replace Description This alert displays only if the product is configured to stop when a supply reaches the very low threshold. The product indicates when a supply level is at its estimated end of life. The actual life remaining might be different than estimated. The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. HP recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. The product can be configured to stop when the supply level is very low. The supply might still be able to produce acceptable print quality. NOTE: When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, the HP Premium Protection Warranty on that supply ends. ● 10.00.70 (event code) Black print cartridge ● 10.01.70 (event code) Cyan print cartridge ● 10.02.70 (event code) Magenta print cartridge ● 10.03.70 (event code) Yellow print cartridge ● 10.23.70 (event code) Fuser Kit ● 10.31.70 (event code) Toner collection unit ● 10.22.70 (event code) Transfer kit Recommended action Replace the specified supply. Or, configure the product to continue printing by using the Manage Supplies menu. Replace supplies Description This alert displays only if the product is configured to stop when a supplies reach the very low threshold. Two or more supplies have reached the estimated end of life. The product indicates when a supply level is at its estimated end of life. The actual life remaining might be different than estimated. 480 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW The supply does not need to be replaced now, unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. HP recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. NOTE: When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, the HP Premium Protection Warranty on that supply ends. Recorded event codes depend on which supplies are at the end of life. ● 10.00.70 (event code): Black toner cartridge ● 10.01.70 (event code): Cyan toner cartridge ● 10.02.70 (event code): Magenta toner cartridge ● 10.03.70 (event code): Yellow toner cartridge ● 10.23.70 (event code): Fuser kit ● 10.31.70 (event code): Toner collection unit ● 10.22.70 (event code): Transfer kit Recommended action 1. Touch the OK button to find out which supplies need to be replaced. 2. Configure the product to continue printing by using the Manage Supplies menu. Restore Factory Settings Description The product is restoring factory settings. Recommended action No action necessary. Restricted from printing in color Description This message displays when color printing is disabled for the product or when it is disabled for a particular user or print job. Recommended action To enable color printing for the product, change the Restrict color use setting in the Manage Supplies menu. Rotating motor Description A component test is in progress. the component selected is the indicated cartridge motor. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 481 = ● Black ● Cyan ● Magenta ● Yellow Recommended action Press the Stop button when ready to stop this test. To exit press X Rotating Motor Description The product is executing a component test, and the component selected is a motor. Recommended action Press the Stop button when ready to stop this test. To exit press Size mismatch in Tray Description The paper in the listed tray does not match the size specified for that tray. Recommended action 1. Load the correct paper. 2. Verify that the paper is positioned correctly. 3. Close the tray and verify that the control panel lists the correct paper size and type. Reconfigure the size and type if necessary. 4. If necessary, use the control-panel menus to reconfigure the size and type settings for the specified tray. Supplies in wrong positions Description Two or more print-cartridge slots contain the wrong print cartridge. From left to right, the print cartridges should be installed in the following order: ● Yellow ● Magenta ● Cyan ● Black 482 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action Install the correct cartridge in each slot. Tray empty: [Type], [Size] Description The specified tray is empty and the current job does not need this tray to print. ● X=1 Tray 1 ● X=2 Tray 2 ● X=3 Tray 3 ● X=4 Tray 4 ● X=5 Tray 5 ● X=6 Tray 6 Recommended action Refill the tray at a convenient time. NOTE: This could be a false message. If the tray is loaded without removing the shipping lock, the product does not sense that the paper is loaded. Remove the shipping lock, and then load the tray. Tray open Description The specified tray is open or not closed completely. ● Tray 2 open ● Tray 3 open ● Tray 4 open ● Tray 5 open ● Tray 6 open Recommended action Close the tray. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 483 NOTE: If this message appears after the lifter drive assembly was removed or replaced, make sure that the connector on the assembly is correctly connected and fully seated. If the error persists, use the Media size switches (SW2,3 - SW82,83 - SW92,93) test in the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to test the switches. If they do not respond, replace the associated the lifter drive assembly. Tray overfilled Description The tray is filled above the stack-height mark. ● X=2 Tray 2 ● X=3 Tray 3 ● X=4 Tray 4 ● X=5 Tray 5 ● X=6 Tray 6 Recommended action Remove enough paper so that the paper stack does not exceed the limit for the tray. NOTE: If this message displays after lifter drive assembly was removed or replaced, make sure that the connector on the assembly is correctly connected and fully seated. Troubleshooting Description The product is in the troubleshooting process. Recommended action Press the Stop button . To exit press X Type mismatch Tray Description The specified tray contains a paper type that does not match the configured type. 484 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action The specified tray will not be used until this condition is addressed. Printing can continue from other trays. 1. Load the correct paper in the specified tray. 2. At the control panel, verify the type configuration. Unsupported drive installed To continue, touch “OK” Description A non-supported hard drive has been installed. The drive is unusable by this product. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off. 2. Remove the hard drive. 3. Turn the product on. Unsupported supply in use OR Unsupported supply installed To continue, touch “OK” Description A non-supported supply has been installed. OR One of the print cartridges is for a different HP product. ● XX = 00 Black print cartridge ● XX = 01 Cyan print cartridge ● XX = 02 Magenta print cartridge ● XX = 03 Yellow print cartridge Recommended action Install the correct supplies for this product. See the Parts chapter in this manual for supply part numbers. Unsupported tray configuration Description The product has too many optional trays installed. This product supports a maximum of two input/output devices. Input devices include optional paper tray accessories. Some product configurations ship with input/ output devices already installed, for example: ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 485 ● The product may ship with one optional 500- sheet tray installed. A customer may purchase one additional 500-sheet paper tray OR one 3x500 sheet tray with stand and install it on their product. ● If a customer attempts to add an additional paper tray that exceeds the maximum of two input/output devices, the printer will display the following error message: ● Unsupported tray configuration Read this entire message. The maximum number of optional tray accessories for this device is 1 [or 2]. Turn device off, then remove excess tray accessories. Turn device on. The product will not print any pages until the extra tray is removed. Recommended action Turn the product off, remove the unsupported/extra input/output devices, and then turn the product on. Unsupported USB accessory detected Remove USB accessory Description A non-supported USB accessory has been installed. Recommended action Turn the product off, remove the USB accessory, and then turn the product on. USB accessory needs too much power Remove USB and turn off then on Description A USB accessory is drawing too much electrical current. Printing cannot continue. Recommended action Remove the USB accessory. Turn the product off, and then on. Use a USB accessory that uses less power or that contains its own power supply. USB accessory not functional Description A USB accessory is not working correctly. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off. 2. Remove the USB accessory. 3. Insert a replacement USB accessory. Used supply installed To continue, touch “OK” OR Used supply in use Description One of the print cartridges has been previously used. ● XX = 00 486 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Black print cartridge ● XX = 01 Cyan print cartridge ● XX = 02 Magenta print cartridge ● XX = 03 Yellow print cartridge Recommended action If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit. Wrong cartridge in slot Description The indicated slot for a toner cartridge contains a toner cartridge that is not the correct color. The indicated toner cartridge is installed in the wrong position: ● 10.00.25 (event code): Black toner cartridge ● 10.01.25 (event code): Cyan toner cartridge ● 10.02.25 (event code): Magenta toner cartridge ● 10.03.25 (event code): Yellow toner cartridge Recommended action Remove the toner cartridge from that slot, and install a toner cartridge that is the correct color. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 487 Event log messages See the control-panel message and event-log entries section of the product troubleshooting manual for event-log entry descriptions and solutions. Figure 3-54 Sample event log HP Color LaserJet M750 Series 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 Product information 2 Event number 3 Date and time 4 Engine cycles 5 Event log code 6 Firmware version number 7 Description of personality 8 Consecutive Repeats 488 Chapter 3 Solve problems 8 ENWW Print or view an event log NOTE: The event log in the Administration menu shows only a subset of events. For a complete event log, use the Service menu. Print or view the event log from the Administration menu 1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button. 2. Open the following menus: 3. ● Troubleshooting ● Event Log The event log displays on the screen. To print it, touch the Print button. Print or view the event log from the Service menu The service menu event log will show all events and informational posting for the product. This event log will be a more inclusive event list then that from the Administration menu. 1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button. 2. Open the Service menu. 3. On the sign-in screen, select the Service Access Code option from the drop-down list. 4. Enter the following service access code for this product: 11077512. 5. Open the Event Log menu. 6. The event log displays on the screen. To print it, touch the Print button. Clear an event log ENWW 1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button. 2. Open the Service menu. 3. On the sign-in screen, select the Service Access Code option from the drop-down list. 4. Enter the following service access code for this product: 11077512. 5. Open the Event Log menu. 6. Select the Clear Event Log item, and then touch the OK button. Tools for troubleshooting 489 Clear jams Common causes of jams The product is jammed. Cause Solution The paper does not meet specifications. Use only paper that meets HP specifications. See the product user guide. A component is installed incorrectly. Verify that the transfer belt and transfer roller are correctly installed. You are using paper that has already passed through a printer or copier. Do not use paper that has been previously printed on or copied. An input tray is loaded incorrectly. Remove any excess paper from the input tray. Make sure that the stack is below the maximum stack height mark in the tray. The paper is skewed. The input-tray guides are not adjusted correctly. Adjust them so they hold the stack firmly in place without bending it. The paper is binding or sticking together. Remove the paper, flex it, rotate it 180°, or flip it over. Reload the paper into the input tray. The paper is removed before it settles into the output bin. Reset the product, and then resend the print job. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it. During two-sided printing, you removed the paper before the second side of the document was printed. Reset the product and print the document again. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it. The paper is in poor condition. Replace the paper. The internal tray rollers are not picking up the paper. If the paper is heavier than the heaviest supported weight for the tray, it might not be picked from the tray. The rollers are worn. Replace the rollers. The paper has rough or jagged edges. Replace the paper. The paper is perforated or embossed. Perforated or embossed paper does not separate easily. Feed single sheets from Tray 1. Paper was not stored correctly. Replace the paper in the trays. Paper should be stored in the original packaging in a controlled environment. Not all product packing material was removed. Verify that the packing tape, cardboard, and plastic shipping locks have been removed from the product. 490 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Jam locations Use this illustration to identify locations of jams. In addition, instructions appear on the control panel to direct you to the location of jammed paper and how to clear it. Internal areas of the product that might need to be opened to clear jams, have green handles or green labels. WARNING! To avoid electrical shock, remove any necklaces, bracelets, or other metal items before reaching into the inside of the product. NOTE: Sensors in the paper path generate event codes if a jam occurs. For sensor locations, see Paper path jam sensors. For jam event code information, see Event codes for jams. Figure 3-55 Jam locations 1 2 3 4 5 6 ENWW 1 Output bin 2 Upper right door 3 Tray 1 area 4 Tray 2, Tray 3, and optional Trays 4, 5, and 6 5 Middle right door 6 Lower right door Clear jams 491 Figure 3-56 Paper path jam sensors PS10 PS6 PS7 PS8 Y M PS5 C B SR1 SR1 SR81 SR91 Note: Both the 1 X 500-sheet feeder and the 3 X 500-sheet feeder use a SR1 tray feed sensor. Table 3-41 Paper path jam sensors Sensor Description PS5 Registration sensor PS6 Fuser output sensor PS7 Loop sensor PS8 PS10 Bin full sensor SR1 Tray 3 feed sensor SR1 Tray 4 feed sensor SR81 Tray 5 feed sensor SR91 Tray 6 feed sensor 492 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-42 Event codes for jams Jam event code Jammed paper location 13.A3.D3 Leading edge of paper fed from Tray 3 is stopped before SR1 13.A3.D4 Leading edge of paper fed from Tray 4 is stopped before SR1 after passing Tray 4 SR1 13.A3.D5 Leading edge of paper fed from Tray 5 is stopped before SR1 after passing Tray 4 SR1 13.A3.D6 Leading edge of paper fed from Tray 6 is stopped before SR1 after passing Tray 4 SR1 13.A3.FF At auto-flushing : Paper stays at SR1 13.A4.D4 Leading edge of paper fed from Tray 4 is stopped before Tray 4 SR1 13.A4.D5 Leading edge of paper fed from Tray 5 is stopped before Tray 4 SR1 after passing SR81 13.A4.D6 Leading edge of paper fed from Tray 6 is stopped before Tray 4 SR1 after passing SR81 13.A4.FF At auto-flushing : Paper stays at Tray 4 SR1 13.A5.D5 Leading edge of paper fed from Tray 5 is stopped before SR81 13.A5.D6 Leading edge of paper fed from Tray 6 is stopped before SR81 after passing SR91 13.A5.FF At auto-flushing: paper stays at SR81 13.A6.D6 Leading edge of paper fed from Tray 6 is stopped before SR91 13.A6.FF At auto-flushing : Paper stays at SR91 13.B2.A1 Paper stays at PS5 – media longer than allowed from Tray 1 13.B2.A2 Paper stays at PS5 - media longer than allowed from Tray 2 13.B2.A3 Paper stays at PS5 - media longer than allowed from Tray 3 13.B2.A4 Paper stays at PS5 - media longer than allowed from Tray 4 13.B2.A5 Paper stays at PS5 - media longer than allowed from Tray 5 13.B2.A6 Paper stays at PS5 - media longer than allowed from Tray 6 13.B2.AD Paper stays at PS5 - media longer than allowed from Duplexer 13.B2.D1 Leading edge of paper fed from Tray 1 is stopped before PS5 13.B2.D2 Leading edge of paper fed from Tray 2 is stopped before PS5 13.B2.D3 Leading edge of paper fed from Tray 3 is stopped before PS5 after passing SR1 13.B2.D4 Leading edge of paper fed from Tray 4 is stopped before PS5 after passing SR1 13.B2.D5 Leading edge of paper fed from Tray 5 is stopped before PS5 after passing SR1 13.B2.D6 Leading edge of paper fed from Tray 6 is stopped before PS5 after passing SR1 13.B2.DD Duplex re-feed paper is stopped between PS6 and PS5 13.B2.FF At power on, door close, or auto-flushing: paper stays at PS5 13.B4.FF At power on, door close, or auto-flushing : paper stays at PS7/PS8 13.B9.Az Paper stays at PS6 NOTE: z is the fuser mode, see Fuser modes for jam event codes (Z). ENWW Clear jams 493 Table 3-42 Event codes for jams (continued) Jam event code Jammed paper location 13.B9.Cz Paper is wrapping at fuser NOTE: z is the fuser mode, see Fuser modes for jam event codes (Z). 13.B9.D1 Leading edge of paper is stopped between PS5 and PS6 – fed from tray 1 13.B9.D2 Leading edge of paper is stopped between PS5 and PS6 – fed from Tray 2 13.B9.D3 Leading edge of paper is stopped between PS5 and PS6 – fed from Tray 3 13.B9.D4 Leading edge of paper is stopped between PS5 and PS6 – fed from Tray 4 13.B9.D5 Leading edge of paper is stopped between PS5 and PS6 – fed from Tray 5 13.B9.D6 Leading edge of paper is stopped between PS5 and PS6 – fed from Tray 6 13.B9.DD Leading edge of paper is stopped between PS5 and PS6 – fed from Duplexer 13.B9.FF At power on, door close, or auto-flushing: paper stays at PS6 13.E1.Dz Leading edge of paper is stopped before PS10 after passing PS6 NOTE: z is the fuser mode, see Fuser modes for jam event codes (Z). 13.00.EE Door was opened during printing 13.AA.EE Tray 3, 4, or 5 right tray access door was opened during print job 13.AB.EE Tray 4, 5, 6 right tray access door was opened during print job 13.BB.EE Front door was opened during print job 13.BA.EE Right door was opened during print job 13.FF.FF Jams at multiple sensors Fuser modes for jam event codes (Z) ● 1 = Normal auto sense ● 2 = Normal non-auto sense ● 3 = Light 1 to 3 ● 4 = Heavy 1 ● 5 = heavy 2 ● 6 = Heavy 3 ● 7 = Glossy 1 ● 8 = Glossy 2 ● 9 = Glossy 3 ● A = Glossy film ● B = Transparancy 494 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW ENWW ● C = Label ● D = Envelope 1 to 3 Clear jams 495 Clear jams in the upper-right door WARNING! The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it. 1. Open the upper-right door. 2. Gently pull the paper out of the pickup area. 496 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 3. If paper is visible entering the bottom of the fuser, gently pull downward to remove it. CAUTION: Do not touch the transfer roller. Contaminants on the roller can affect print quality. 4. Paper could be jammed inside the fuser where it would not be visible. Open the fuser jam access door. If paper is jammed inside the fuser, gently pull it straight up to remove it. If the paper tears, remove all paper fragments. WARNING! Even if the body of the fuser has cooled, the rollers that are inside could still be hot. Do not touch the fuser rollers until they have cooled. If no paper is found but the product still reports a jam, remove the fuser to check for jammed paper inside the fuser cavity. Remove any paper, and then reinstall the fuser. NOTE: Make sure that the fuser is reinstalled correctly before closing the upper right door. 5. Close the upper-right door. ENWW Clear jams 497 Clear jams in the lower-right door 1. Open the lower-right door. 2. If paper is visible, gently pull the jammed paper up or down to remove it. 3. Close the lower-right door. 498 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams in Tray 1 1. If jammed paper is visible in Tray 1, clear the jam by gently pulling the paper straight out. Press the OK button to clear the message. 2. If you cannot remove the paper, or if no jammed paper is visible in Tray 1, close Tray 1 and open the upper right door. ENWW Clear jams 499 3. Gently pull the paper out of the pick up area. 4. Close the upper right door. 500 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams from Tray 2, Tray 3, or an optional tray CAUTION: Opening a tray when paper is jammed can cause the paper to tear and leave pieces of paper in the tray, which might cause another jam. Be sure to clear jams from the upper and lower right door before opening a tray. 1. Open the tray and make sure that the paper is stacked correctly. Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of paper. To access jammed paper from the tray cavity, remove the tray from the product. 2. Close the tray. 3. If the jam is in Tray 3, you also can open the door on the right side of the tray, remove the jammed paper, and then close the door. ENWW Clear jams 501 Clear jams in the output bin area 1. If paper is visible from the output bin, grasp the leading edge and remove it. 502 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Jam causes and solutions Jams in the output bin Table 3-43 Causes and solutions for delivery delay jam Cause Solution The output-bin full sensor flag is damaged. Examine the output-bin full sensor flag for damage. If the flag is damaged, replace the paper delivery assembly. See Output-bin-full sensor (PS10) for troubleshooting information. Poor contact of the output-bin full sensor connector. If the product was recently repaired, check and reconnect the connector (J181) on the DC controller PCA and the intermediate connector (J743). The output bin full sensor (PS10) is defective. Check the output bin full sensor (PS10) using the manual sensor test. See Outputbin-full sensor (PS10) for troubleshooting information. Poor contact of the fuser-motor (M4) connector. Reconnect the connectors of the fuser motor (J516), and the DC controller PCA (J81). The fuser motor (M4) is defective. Execute the fuser-motor driving test in the component test (see Component test ). If the motor is defective, replace the fuser motor (M4). Jams in the fuser and transfer area Table 3-44 Causes and solutions for fuser delivery delay jams Cause Solution The fuser-output sensor connctor has a poor connection. Reconnect connector J131 on the DC controller PCA. The fuser-output sensor (PS6) is defective. Check the fuser-output sensor (PS6) with the manual sensor test. See Fuser output sensor (PS6). If the sensor is defective, replace the fuser. Table 3-45 Causes and solutions for wrapping jams ENWW Cause Solution The fuser roller or pressure roller is dirty. Print a cleaning page. See Process a cleaning page. The fuser roller or the pressure roller is worn or deformed. Replace the fuser. The output bin full sensor has a poor connection. Reconnect the connector J181 on the DC controller PCA, and the intermediate connector J743. The output bin full sensor is defective. Run the manual sensor test to verify the output bin full sensor is functioning properly. See Output-bin-full sensor (PS10). If not, replace the fuser gear assembly. Clear jams 503 Table 3-46 Causes and solutions for fuser delivery stationary jams Cause Solution The fuser roller or pressure roller is worn or deformed. Replace the fuser. The fuser-delivery roller is deformed. The gear of the fuser-delivery roller is damaged. Poor contact of the fuser-output sensor connector. Reconnect the connector J131 on the DC controller PCA. The fuser-output sensor (PS6) is defective. Run the manual sensor test to verify that the fuser-output sensor is functioning properly. See Fuser output sensor (PS6). If it is not, replace the fuser. Jams in the duplex area (duplex models only) Table 3-47 Causes and solutions for duplexing reverse jams Cause Solution The duplex reverse roller is worn or deformed. Replace the fuser. The duplex feed roller is worn or deformed. Replace the right door. Poor contact of the duplex reverse-motor (M7) connector Reconnect the connectors (J520) on the duplex reverse motor, intermediate connectors (J552L and J552D), connector (J1006) on the driver PCA, and connectors (J93; J92; J91) on the DC controller PCA. The duplex reverse motor is defective. Replace the duplex drive assembly. Table 3-48 Causes and solutions for duplex repick jams Cause Solution The duplex re-pickup sensor lever is set incorrectly or damaged. Check the sensor lever to make sure it is set correctly. If it is damaged, replace the right door assembly. The spring of the duplex re-pickup sensor lever is unhooked. Check the spring and place it in correct position. Poor contact of the duplex reverse solenoid (SL3) connector Reconnect the intermediate connectors (J522L and J522D), connector (J1005) on the driver PCA, and connectors (J93; J92; J91) on the DC controller PCA. The duplex reverse solenoid is defective. Replace the duplex-drive assembly. The duplex flapper is damaged or malfunctioning. Replace the delivery assembly. The duplex reverse solenoid is defective. Replace the duplex-drive assembly. The duplex flapper is damaged or malfunctioning. Replace the paper delivery assembly. The duplex repick roller is worn or damaged. Replace the registration sensor assembly. The duplex repick clutch is defective. Run the solenoid drive test in component test (see Component tests) to verify that the duplex repick clutch is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the duplex drive assembly. 504 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-49 Causes and solutions for residual media jams Cause Solution Poor contact of the fuser loop-sensor connector and fuser loop sensor 1 and 2. Reconnect the connectors of the fuser loop sensor 1 and 2 (J13) and the connector (J131) on the DC controller PCA. The loop sensor is defective. Run the manual sensor test. See Fuser loop sensors (PS7 and PS8) for information. If the sensor is defective, replace fuser. See Tray/Bin manual sensor test. The spring of the fuser-output-sensor lever is unhooked. Check the spring of the fuser and right door and place it in the correct position. The fuser-output sensor lever is damaged. Replace the sensor (PS6). Poor contact of the fuser-output sensor connector. Reconnect connector (J1055) of the fuser-output sensor and connector (J131) on the DC controller PCA. The fuser-output sensor is defective. Run the manual sensor test to make sure the fuser-delivery sensor is functioning properly. See Fuser output sensor (PS6) for information. If the sensor is defective, replace the fuser. The duplex pickup sensor lever is damaged. Replace the right door assembly. NOTE: Even if jammed paper is visible in Tray 1, clear the jam from the inside of the product by opening the right door. Jams in Tray 1, Tray 2 and internal paper path Table 3-50 Causes and solutions for pickup delay jam 1: tray pickup ENWW Cause Solution The tray 1 pick up roller or the tray 1 separation pad is worn or deformed. Replace the tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad. Poor contact of the tray 1 media-presencesensor connector Reconnect the connectors of the tray media-feed sensor intermediate connectors (J531L and J531D), and the connector (J152) on the DC controller. Poor contact of the TOP sensor connector. Reconnect the intermediate connector (J554L and J554D) of the TOP sensor and connector (J122) on the DC controller PCA. The TOP sensor is defective. Run the manual sensor test to verify that the TOP sensor is functioning properly. If not, replace the registration assembly. Poor contact of the MP-pickup-solenoid drive connector Reconnect the connector of the tray pickup solenoid intermediate connectors (J530L and J530D), and the connector (J152) on the DC controller PCA. The MP-pickup solenoid is defective. Execute the tray-pickup-solenoid driving test in the component test (see Component tests). If the solenoid is defective, replace the right door assembly. Poor contact of the pickup-motor drive connector (M5) Reconnect the pickup-motor connector (J523) and connector (J260), intermediate connectors (J535L and J535D), and the connector (J1003) on the DC controller PCA. The pickup motor is defective. Execute the pickup-motor driving test in the component test (see Component tests). If the motor is defective, replace the paper pickup assembly. Clear jams 505 Table 3-51 Causes and solutions for pickup delay jams Tray 2 Cause Solution Poor contact of the pickup motor drive connector. Reconnect the connector J91on the DC controller PCA . The pickup motor is defective. Execute the Tray 2 pickup motor test in the component test (see Component tests). If the motor is defective, replace the paper pickup assembly. The pickup roller is worn or deformed. Replace the pickup roller. The tray 2 separation roller is worn or deformed. Replace the separation roller. Poor contact of the TOP sensor connector. Reconnect the connector J122 on the DC controller PCA. The TOP sensor (PS5) is defective. Run the manual sensor test to verify that the TOP sensor is functioning properly. See TOP (top-of-page) sensor (PS5) for information. If it is not, replace the registration sensor assembly. Poor contact of the Tray 2 pickup solenoid drive connector. Reconnect the connector J1003 on the DC controller PCA. The Tray 2 pickup solenoid is defective. Run the Tray 2 pickup solenoid test in the component test See Component test (special-mode test) to verify that the Tray 2 pickup solenoid is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the paper pickup assembly. Table 3-52 Causes and solutions for pickup stationary jams Cause Solution Multiple feed of media Replace any worn or deformed parts (tray separation pad, tray feed roller, MP tray pickup roller or MP tray separation pad). Check the separation pad and MP tray separation pad to see if they are firmly seated and coupled with the torque limiter. Replace the separation pad and feed roller for the associated tray. If the MP tray pickup roller if defective, replace the roller. If the MP tray separation pad is defective, replace the separation pad assembly. The secondary transfer roller is not set correctly. Place the secondary-transfer-roller unit in the correct position. The secondary-transfer roller is worn or deformed. Replace the secondary-transfer-roller assembly. Poor contact of the drum drive connector Reconnect the connectors of the ITB motor (J517) and the DC controller PCA (J81). The drum motor is defective. Execute the drum motor driving test in the component test (see Component tests). If the motor is defective, replace the motor. The ITB does not rotate smoothly. Replace the ITB. The TOP sensor lever is incorrectly positioned or damaged Check the sensor lever to make sure it is correctly positioned . If it is damaged, replace the registration sensor assembly. Poor contact of the TOP sensor connector Reconnect the connector J122 on the DC controller PCA. The TOP sensor is defective. Run the manual sensor test to verify that the TOP sensor (PS5) is functioning properly. See TOP (top-of-page) sensor (PS5) for information. If it is not, replace the registration sensor assembly. 506 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-53 Causes and solutions for residual media jams Cause Solution A piece of paper remains at the sensor detecting the jam. Make sure that all paper, including small bits of paper, are removed from the product when a jam is removed. The sensor detecting a residual media jam is not working. Test each sensor using the manual sensor test. See Manual sensor test for information. If the sensor does not respond, replace the component indicated: If service was recently performed on the product, a sensor connector might be disconnected. ● TOP sensor (PS5): Replace the registration sensor assembly. ● Fuser-output sensor (PS6): Replace the fuser. ● Fuser loop sensors 1 and 2 (PS7 and PS8): Replace the fuser. Run the manual sensor tests to verify which sensor detects the media. See Manual sensor test or Tray/Bin manual sensor test for information. Reconnect the corresponding sensor connector: ● TOP sensor: Connector (J122) on the DC controller PCA ● Fuser-output sensor: Connector (J131) on the DC controller PCA ● Fuser Loop sensor 1 or 2: Connector (J131) on the DC controller PCA Jams in Tray 3, 4, 5, and 6 Table 3-54 Causes and solutions for pickup delay and pickup stationary jams ENWW Cause Solution The paper-feeder pickup roller is worn or deformed. Replace the pickup roller. The paper-feeder separation roller is worn or deformed. Replace the separation roller. The paper-feeder feed roller is worn or deformed. Replace the feed roller. Poor contact of the paper-feeder media-feed sensor connectors Disconnect and reconnect the sensor connector. A tray feed sensor is defective. Run the manual sensor test to verify that the paper-feeder media feed sensor is functioning properly. See Tray/Bin manual sensor test for information. If it is not, replace the paper pickup assembly of the specific tray. Poor contact of a paper-feeder pickup solenoid drive connector Disconnect and reconnect the sensor connector. The paper-feeder pickup solenoid is defective. Run the solenoid drive test in the component test (see Component tests) to verify that the paper-feeder pickup solenoid is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the paper pickup assembly of the specific tray. Poor contact of paper-feeder pickup motor drive connector. Disconnect and reconnect the sensor connector. The paper-feeder pickup motor is defective. Run the pickup motor drive test in the component test (see Component tests) to verify that the paper-feeder pickup motor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the pickup assembly of the specific tray. Multiple feed of media If the tray 3 pickup roller, separation roller, or feed roller is worn or deformed, replace any defective parts. Clear jams 507 Table 3-54 Causes and solutions for pickup delay and pickup stationary jams (continued) Cause Solution The paper-feeder media-feed sensor lever is set incorrectly or damaged. Check the sensor lever to make sure it is set correctly. If it is damaged, replace the paper-feeder assembly. The spring of the paper-feeder media-feed sensor lever is unhooked. Check the spring and place it in correct position. Poor contact of the paper-feeder media-feed sensor connector. Reconnect the connector (J406) on the connector PCA and connector (J22) of the paper-feeder media feed sensor. A tray feed sensor is defective. Run the manual sensor test to verify that the tray feed sensor is functioning properly. See Tray/Bin manual sensor test for information. If it is not, replace the pickup assembly of the specific tray. Table 3-55 Causes and solutions for residual media jams Cause Solution The sensor that detects residual paper jams is set incorrectly or damaged. Run the manual sensor test to verify which sensor detects the paper. See Tray/Bin manual sensor test for information. Check the sensor lever to make sure it is set correctly. If it is damaged, replace the corresponding pickup assembly. The spring of the sensor lever that detects residual paper jams is unhooked. Run the manual sensor test to verify which sensor detects the paper. See Tray/Bin manual sensor test for information. Check the spring of the sensor lever to make sure it is set correctly. Poor contact exists in the sensor that detects residual paper jams. Run the manual sensor test to verify which sensor detects the paper. See Tray/Bin manual sensor test for information. Disconnect and reconnect the sensor connector. The sensor that detects residual paper jams is defective. Run the manual sensor test to verify which sensor detects the paper. See Tray/Bin manual sensor test for information. Disconnect and reconnect the sensor connector. 508 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Change jam recovery This product provides a jam recovery feature that reprints jammed pages. The following options are available: ● Auto — The product attempts to reprint jammed pages when enough memory is available. This is the default setting. ● Off — The product does not try to reprint jammed pages. Because no memory is used to store the most recent pages, performance is optimal. NOTE: When using this option, if the product runs out of paper and the job is being printed on both sides, some pages can be lost. ● On — The product always reprints jammed pages. Additional memory is allocated to store the last few pages printed. This might cause overall performance to suffer. Set the jam recovery feature ENWW 1. Press the Home button . 2. Open the following menus: ● Administration ● General Settings ● Jam Recovery 3. Press the Down arrow or Up arrow / button to highlight the appropriate setting, and then press the OK button. 4. Press the Home button to return to the Ready state. Clear jams 509 Solve paper-handling problems Product feeds multiple sheets Product feeds multiple sheets Cause Solution The input tray is overfilled. Open the tray and verify that the paper stack is below the maximum stack height mark. Remove excess paper from the input tray. Print paper is sticking together. Remove paper, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or flip it over, and then reload it into the tray. NOTE: Do not fan paper. Fanning can cause static electricity, which can cause paper to stick together. Paper does not meet the specifications for this product. Use only paper that meets HP paper specifications for this product. Trays are not properly adjusted. Make sure that the paper guides match the size of paper being used. Tray 2 feeds multiple sheets. Make sure Tray 2 is not overfilled. Open the tray and verify that the paper stack is below the maximum stack height mark. Remove paper from Tray 2 to avoid jams. Product feeds incorrect page size Product feeds incorrect page size Cause Solution The correct size paper is not loaded in the tray. Load the correct size paper in the tray. The correct size paper is not selected in the software program or printer driver. Confirm that the settings in the software program and printer driver are correct, because the software program settings override the printer driver and control panel settings, and the printer driver settings override the control panel settings. The correct size paper for the tray is not selected in the product control panel. From the control panel, select the correct size paper for the tray. The paper size is not configured correctly for the tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the paper size for which the tray is configured. The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the paper guides are touching the paper. Product pulls from incorrect tray Product pulls from incorrect tray Cause Solution You are using a driver for a different product. Use a driver for this product. The specified tray is empty. Load paper in the specified tray. 510 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Product pulls from incorrect tray Cause Solution The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the paper size for which the tray is configured. The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the guides are touching the paper. Paper does not feed automatically Paper does not feed automatically Cause Solution Manual feed is selected in the software program. Load Tray 1 with paper, or, if the paper is loaded, press the OK button. The correct size paper is not loaded. Load the correct size paper. The input tray is empty. Load paper into the input tray. Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the product and remove any paper in the paper path. The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the paper size for which the tray is configured. The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the rear and width paper guides are touching the paper. The Manually Feed Prompt item is set to Always. The product always prompts for manual feed, even if the tray is loaded. Open the tray, reload the media, and then close the tray. The Use Requested Tray setting on the product is set to Exclusively, and the requested tray is empty. The product will not use another tray. Load the requested tray. Or, change the Manually Feed Prompt setting to Unless loaded, so that the product prompts for manual feed only when the tray is empty. Or, change the setting from Exclusively to First on the Manage Trays menu. The product can use other trays if no media is loaded in the specified tray. Paper does not feed from Tray 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 Paper does not feed from Tray 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 ENWW Cause Solution The correct size paper is not loaded. Load the correct size paper. The input tray is empty. Load paper in the input tray. The correct paper type for the input tray is not selected in the product control panel. From the product control panel, select the correct paper type for the input tray. Trays configured for a paper type with a specific weight range will not match a print job that specifies an exact weight, even if the specified weight is within the weight range. Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the product and remove any paper in the paper path. Closely inspect the fuser area for jams. Solve paper-handling problems 511 Paper does not feed from Tray 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 Cause Solution None of the optional trays appear as input tray options. The optional trays only display as available if they are installed. Verify that any optional trays are correctly installed. Verify that the printer driver has been configured to recognize the optional trays. An optional tray is incorrectly installed. Print a configuration page to confirm that the optional tray is installed. If not, verify that the tray is correctly attached to the product. The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the paper size for which the tray is configured. The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the guides are touching the paper. Output is curled or wrinkled Output is curled or wrinkled Cause Solution Paper does not meet the specifications for this product. Use only paper that meets the HP paper specifications for this product. Paper is damaged or in poor condition. Remove paper from the input tray and load paper that is in good condition. Product is operating in an excessively humid environment. Verify that the printing environment is within humidity specifications. You are printing large, solid-filled areas. Large, solid-filled areas can cause excessive curl. Try using a different pattern. Paper used was not stored correctly and might have absorbed moisture. Remove paper and replace it with paper from a fresh, unopened package. Paper has poorly cut edges. Remove paper, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or turn it over, and then reload it into the input tray. Do not fan paper. If the problem persists, replace the paper. The specific paper type was not configured for the tray or selected in the software. Configure the software for the paper (see the software documentation). Configure the tray for the paper. The paper has previously been used for a print job. Do not re-use paper. Product will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly Product will not duplex (print 2-sided jobs) or duplexes incorrectly Cause Solution You are trying to duplex on unsupported paper. Verify that the paper is supported for duplex printing. The printer driver is not set up for duplex printing. Set up the printer driver to enable duplex printing. 512 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Product will not duplex (print 2-sided jobs) or duplexes incorrectly ENWW Cause Solution The first page is printing on the back of preprinted forms or letterhead. Load preprinted forms and letterhead in Tray 1 with the letterhead or printed side down, with the top of the page leading into the product. For Tray 2 and 3, load the paper printed side up with the top of the page toward the right of the product. The product model does not support automatic 2-sided printing. The HP Color LaserJet M750n does not support automatic 2-sided printing. The product configuration is not set for duplexing. In Windows, run the automatic configuration feature: 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Printers (for Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (for Windows XP). 2. Right-click the HP product icon, and then click Properties or Printing Preferences. 3. Click the Device Settings tab. 4. Under Installable Options, click Update Now in the Automatic Configuration list. Solve paper-handling problems 513 Use manual print modes Try the following multi-purpose (MP) modes to see if they solve the image-quality problems. To access the manual print modes, open the following menus: ● Administration ● General Settings ● Print Quality ● Adjust Paper Types Table 3-56 MP modes under the Adjust Paper Types sub menu Print Mode ● AUTOSENSE MODE ● NORMAL MODE ● LIGHT MODE ● HEAVY MODE ● CARDSTOCK MODE ● TRANSPARENCY MODE ● TRANSPARENCY MODE 2 ● ENVELOPE MODE ● LABEL MODE ● TOUGH MODE ● EXTRA TOUGH MODE ● HEAVY GLOSSY MODE ● X-HVY GLOSSY MODE ● ROUGH MODE ● CARD GLOSSY MODE ● 4MM TRNS MODE ● LIGHT ROUGH MODE NOTE: RESISTANCE MODE 514 Chapter 3 Solve problems Not all print modes are available for all paper types. Set to Up to resolve print-quality issues caused by poor secondary transfer in low-humidity environments with resistive or rough surface media. ENWW Table 3-56 MP modes under the Adjust Paper Types sub menu (continued) HUMIDITY MODE With glossy film, set to High when the product is in a highhumidity environment and print-quality defects occur on HP Tough Paper or Opaque film. With transparencies, set to High when the product is in a highhumidity environment and print-quality defects occur on color transparencies on the first page of a print job. With all other paper types, set to High when the product is in a high-humidity environment and light density occurs on the first page of a print job. FUSER TEMP MODE If you are seeing a faint image of the page repeated at the bottom of the page or on the following page, first make sure the Paper Type and Print Mode settings are correct for the type of paper you are using. If you continue to see ghost images on your print jobs, set the Fuser Temp feature to one of the Alternate settings . Try the ALTERNATE 1 setting first and see if it solves the problem. If you continue to see the problem, try ALTERNATE 2 and then ALTERNATE 3. Using the ALTERNATE 2 and ALTERNATE 3 settings might cause an extra delay between jobs. PAPER CURL MODE Use in high-humidity and high-temperature environments. The REDUCED setting decreases fuser temperature and increases the interpage gap. Table 3-57 MP modes under the Optimize submenu NORMAL PAPER Set to SMOOTH when printing on smooth paper of normal weight. HEAVY PAPER Set to SMOOTH when printing on smooth, heavy media types. LIGHT MEDIA Set to SMOOTH when printing on smooth, light media types. ENVELOPE CONTROL Set to REDUCED TEMP if envelopes are sticking due to moisture in the envelop adhesive. ENVIRONMENT Set to LOW TEMP if the product is operating in a low-temperature environment and you are having problems with print quality such as blisters in the printed image. LINE VOLTAGE Set to LOW VOLTAGE if the product is operating in a low-voltage environment and you are having problems with print quality such as blisters in the printed image. TRAY1 Set to ALTERNATE if you are seeing marks on the back side of the paper when printing from Tray 1. This sets the product to initiate a clean sequence every time a job finishes when the product is set for Any Size and Any Type for Tray 1. BACKGROUND Set to ALTERNATE 1 when a background occurs all over the page. Set to ALTERNATE 2 when thin vertical lines appear on the page. Set to ALTERNATE 3 when the other alternatives do not correct the problem. CLEANING CONTROL Changes the control of toner purge. Toner purge is executed with the CRG in contact with the ITB. Toner purge is executed right after this mode is selected at the control panel. ALTERNATE 1: Use this option when ITB cleaning failure occurs during lower coverage printing or when abnormal noise occurs from ITB cleaning blade. ENWW Use manual print modes 515 Table 3-57 MP modes under the Optimize submenu (continued) MEDIA TEMP Use ALTERNATE 1to preventing media in the output bin from sticking together. UNIFORMITY CONTROL Set to ALTERNATE 1 to improve uniformity on any paper type. Set to ALTERNATE 2 to improve uniformity on normal and light paper types. Set to ALTERNATE 3 when the other alternatives do not correct the problem. PRE-ROTATION Set to ALTERNATE 1 when horizontal banding occurs with the drum pitch, or when 53 mm band occurs after leaving engine for a long period of time. Set to ALTERNATE 2 when the problems like fade finger (trailing edge toner starvation) occur after high coverage continuous printing. REGISTRATION Set to ALTERNATE when color misregistration occurs. TRANSFER CONTROL Set to ALTERNATE 1 to reduce primary transfer bias and to resolve low density or blotchy images. Set to ALTERNATE 2 to resolve ghosting outlines that look like a finger or fingers. Set to ALTERNATE 3 when the other alternatives do not correct the problem. MOISTURE CONTROL Set to ALTERNATE when image failure occurs due to water drops. 516 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Solve image-quality problems Occasionally, you might encounter problems with print quality. The information in the following sections helps you identify and resolve these issues. Print quality examples Some print quality problems arise from low or very low cartridges or other supplies. The solution is to replace the low or very low supplies. Some print quality problems arise from use of inappropriate paper. ● Use paper that meets HP paper specifications. ● The surface of the paper is too rough. Use paper that meets HP paper specifications. ● The printer driver setting or paper tray setting might be incorrect. Be sure that you have configured the paper tray at the product control panel and have also selected the correct driver setting for the paper that you are using. ● The print mode might be set incorrectly, or the paper might not meet recommended specifications. ● The transparencies you are using are not designed for proper toner adhesion. Use only transparencies designed for HP Color LaserJet products. ● The moisture content of the paper is uneven, too high, or too low. Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper. ● Some areas of the paper reject toner. Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper. ● The letterhead you are using is printed on rough paper. Use a smoother, xerographic paper. If this solves your problem, consult with the printer of your letterhead to verify that the paper used meets the specifications for this product. ● Several optimize print modes can be used to address print quality issues. See the print modes section of this manual. If you are having problems with light streaks in an image, use the Administration menu to print the supplies status page. If none of the cartridges has reached its estimated end of life, remove the cartridges from the product, and then reinstall them. The product initiates a cleaning mechanism that might correct the light streaks. The following examples depict letter-size paper that has passed through the product short-edge first. These examples illustrate problems that would affect all the pages that you print, whether you print in color or in black only. The topics that follow list the typical cause and solution for each of these examples. Problem Print is light or faded on entire page. ENWW Sample Cause Solution Poor contacts exist on the ITB unit and the product grounding unit. Clean the grounding contacts. If the problem remains after cleaning, check the contacts for damage. Replace any deformed or damaged parts. Poor secondary transfer contacts exist on the secondary transfer roller and the ITB. Clean the contacts. If the problem remains after cleaning, check the contacts for damage. Replace any deformed or damaged parts. Solve image-quality problems 517 Problem Print is light or faded in a particular color. Sample Cause Solution Poor primary transfer bias contacts on the ITB unit and product. Clean the contacts of the color that produces the light print. If the problem remains after cleaning, check the contacts for damage. Replace any deformed or damaged parts. Poor primary charging bias contacts with the print cartridge and product. Poor developing bias contacts with the print cartridge and product. Image is too dark. The registration density (RD) sensor is defective. Replace the RD sensor. Page is blank. The imaging high-voltage power-supply is defective (no developing bias output). Replace the imaging high-voltage power-supply . The page is all black or a solid color. Poor contact exists in the primary charging bias or developing bias contacts between the print cartridge and the product. Clean each contact of the color that produces the all black or solid color. If the problem remains after cleaning, check the contacts for damage. Replace any deformed or damaged parts. Replace the affected print cartridge. White spots appear in an image Poor conductivity caused by dirt on the static eliminator. Clean the static eliminator. The primary transfer roller is deformed or has deteriorated. Replace the ITB. The secondary transfer roller is deformed or has deteriorated. Replace the secondary-transfer-roller. 518 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Problem The back of the page is dirty. Vertical streaks or bands appear on the page. Sample Cause Solution The secondary transfer roller is dirty. Replace the secondary transfer roller. The fuser inlet guide or separation guide is dirty. Clean the dirty parts. If the dirt does not come off, replace the guide. The pressure roller is dirty. Run the cleaning page several times. If the dirt does not come off, install a fuser cleaning kit. If the issue persists, replace the fuser. Scratches are present on the circumference of the photosensitive drum. Replace the print cartridge of the color that matches the defect. Scratches are present on the circumference of the fuser roller. Replace the fuser. Scratches are present on the circumference of the ITB. Replace the ITB. The ITB drive roller is deformed or has deteriorated. The ITB cleaning mechanism is malfunctioning. Vertical white lines appear in a particular color. The laser beam window is dirty. Execute the Clean Laser Glass item in the Calibration/Cleaning submenu (in the Device Maintenance menu) If the error persists, manually clean the window and remove any foreign substances. Vertical white lines appear in all colors. Horizontal lines appear on the page. ENWW Scratches are present on the circumference of the developing cylinder or photosensitive drum. Replace the affected print cartridge. The laser/scanner-unit mirror is dirty. Replace the laser/scanner assembly. Horizontal scratches on the fuser roller. Replace the fuser. Scratches are present on the circumference of the ITB. Replace the affected print cartridge. Repetitive horizontal lines appear. Use the repetitive defects ruler to identify the dirty roller. Clean the roller. If the roller cannot be cleaned, replace the fuser. Horizontal scratches are present on the photosensitive drum. Replace the print cartridge of the color that matches the defect. Horizontal scratches are present on the fuser roller. Replace the fuser. If the problem persists, replace the affected print cartridge. Replace the ITB. Solve image-quality problems 519 Problem A horizontal white line appears on the page. Image in a particular color does not print in the correct color. Dropouts appear. The toner is not fully fused to the paper. Sample Cause Solution Repetitive horizontal white lines appear. Use the repetitive defects ruler to identify the dirty roller. Clean the roller. If the roller cannot be cleaned, replace the roller. Horizontal scratches are present on the photosensitive drum. Replace the print cartridge of the color that matches the defect. Scratches are present on the circumference of the ITB. Replace the ITB. Poor contact exists in the primary charging bias or developing bias contacts between the print cartridge and the product. Clean each contact of the color that produces the missing color. If the problem remains after cleaning, check the contacts for damage. Replace any deformed or damaged parts. The print cartridge (primary charging roller, developing roller, or photosensitive drum) is defective. Replace the print cartridge of the color that matches the defect. The imaging high-voltage power-supply is defective (no primary charging bias or developing bias output). Replace the imaging high-voltage power-supply. The laser/scanner unit is defective. Replace the laser/scanner assembly. The secondary transfer roller is deformed or has deteriorated. Replace the secondary-transfer-roller. The primary charging roller, developing roller, or photosensitive drum is deformed or has deteriorated. Replace the print cartridge of the color that matches the defect. The fuser roller is deformed or has deteriorated. Replace the fuser. The transfer 1 high-voltage power-supply PCA is defective (no transfer 1 bias output). Replace the transfer 1 high-voltage power-supply. The transfer 2 high-voltage power-supply PCA is defective (no transfer 2 bias output). Replace the transfer 2 high-voltage power-supply. The fuser roller or pressure roller is scarred or deformed. Replace the fuser. The fuser control circuit is defective. Replace the low-voltage power supply. The thermistor is defective. Replace the fuser. The fuser heater is defective. 520 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Problem Some color is misregistered. Toner smears appear on the media. The printed page contains misformed characters. Text or graphics are skewed on the printed page. The printed page contains wrinkles or creases. ENWW Sample Cause Solution The product is incorrectly calibrated. Calibrate the product. The ITB unit is defective. If the ITB does not rotate smoothly or a cleaning malfunction occurs (ITB is dirty), replace the ITB. The drive gear of the ITB motor is worn or chipped. Check each drive gear between the ITB drive roller and the ITB motor. If the gear is worn or chipped, replace the drive unit. The RD sensor is defective. Open and close the right door several times to clean the RD sensor. If the problem persists, replace the RD sensor. The laser/scanner unit is defective. Replace the laser/scanner assembly. The print cartridge is defective. Replace the print cartridge of the affected color. The product has residual media. Remove the residual media. Poor contact exists in the primary charging bias or developing bias contacts between the print cartridge and the product. Clean each contact of the color that produces the missing color. If the problem remains after cleaning, check the contacts for damage. Replace any deformed or damaged parts. The fuser inlet guide is dirty. Clean the fuser inlet guide. The product is experiencing page skew. See the “Text or graphics are skewed on the printed page” row in this table. The laser/scanner unit is defective. Replace the laser/scanner assembly. The registration shutter spring is unhooked. Check the spring and place it in the correct position. The registration shutter spring is deformed. Replace the cassette pickup assembly. The roller or media feed guide is dirty. Clean any dirty components. A feed roller is deformed or has deteriorated. Replace any deformed or deteriorated rollers. The paper feed guide is damaged. Replace the paper-feed-guide unit. Solve image-quality problems 521 Problem The front of the page is dirty. Sample Cause Solution The photosensitive drum is dirty. Replace the print cartridge. The fuser roller or pressure roller is dirty. Execute a cleaning page to clean the contaminate off the fuser. If the dirt does not come off, replace the fuser. NOTE: Cleaning the fuser with HP tough paper provides better results than with plain paper. You might need to execute the cleaning process several times to remove all contaminates on the fuser. Repetitive horizontal lines Damaged or dirty roller. See repetitive image defect ruler. Clean the indicated roller. If the contaminate does not come off, replace appropriate roller or assembly. Pages have flecks of toner Dirty paper path. Execute a cleaning page to clean the contaminate off the fuser. The cleaning page may need to be run several time to clean the fuser. Do not replace the fuser. NOTE: Cleaning the fuser with HP tough paper provides better results than with plain paper. You might need to execute the cleaning process several times to remove all contaminates on the fuser. A fuser cleaning kit (CC468-67919) is available. Pages have one or more skewed color planes (can appear on the right or left side of the page) 522 Chapter 3 Solve problems Print cartridge incorrectly installed or damaged. Remove, and then reinstall the print cartridge associated with the defect. ENWW Clean the product Over time, particles of toner and paper accumulate inside the product. This can cause print-quality problems during printing. Cleaning the product eliminates or reduces these problems. Clean the paper path and print-cartridge areas every time that you change the print cartridge or whenever print-quality problems occur. As much as possible, keep the product free from dust and debris. To clean the product exterior, use a soft, water-moistened cloth. Clean the paper path NOTE: If you are processing a cleaning page to clean the fuser, repeat the process 1 to 6 times until the paper comes out clean. Process a cleaning page ENWW 1. Press the Home button . 2. Open the following menus: ● Device Maintenance ● Calibration/Cleaning to highlight the Print Cleaning Page item, and then press the OK button. 3. Press the Down arrow 4. The product prints a cleaning page, and then returns to the main menu. Discard the printed page. Clean the product 523 Solve performance problems Problem Cause Solution Pages print but are totally blank. The document might contain blank pages. Check the document that you are printing to see if content appears on all of the pages. The product might be malfunctioning. To check the product, print a Configuration page. All of the print cartridges might be very low on toner. Replace the toner cartridges if a Supplies very low message is displayed. Heavier paper types can slow the print job. Print on a different type of paper. Proper fusing may require a slower print speed to ensure the best print quality. Complex pages can print slowly. Simplify the page. The product might not be pulling paper correctly. Make sure paper is loaded in the tray correctly. The paper is jamming in the product. Clear the jam. The USB cable might be defective or incorrectly connected. ● Disconnect the USB cable at both ends and reconnect it. ● Try printing a job that has printed in the past. ● Try using a different USB cable. Pages print very slowly. Pages did not print. Other devices are running on your computer. 524 Chapter 3 Solve problems The product might not share a USB port. If you have an external hard drive or network switchbox that is connected to the same port as the product, the other device might be interfering. To connect and use the product, you must disconnect the other device or you must use two USB ports on the computer. ENWW Solve connectivity problems Solve direct-connect problems If you have connected the product directly to a computer, check the cable. ● Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product. ● Verify that the cable is not longer than 2 m (6.5 ft). Replace the cable if necessary. ● Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product. Replace the cable if necessary. Solve network problems Check the following items to verify that the product is communicating with the network. Before beginning, print a configuration page. See Configuration page. Problem Solution Poor physical connection Verify that the product is attached to the correct network port using a cable of the correct length. Verify that cable connections are secure. Look at the network port connection on the back of the product, and verify that the amber activity light and the green link-status light are lit. If the problem continues, try a different cable or port on the hub. The computer is unable to communicate with the product. Use the command prompt to ping the product from your computer. For example: ping 192.168.45.39 Verify that the ping displays round-trip times, which indicates that it is working. If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then verify that the network settings, the product, and the computer are all configured for the same network. Incorrect link and duplex settings Hewlett-Packard recommends leaving this setting in automatic mode (the default setting). See the user guide. Incorrect IP address for the product on the computer Use the correct IP address. The IP address is listed on the configuration page. New software programs have caused compatibility problems. Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the correct printer driver. Your computer or workstation is set up incorrectly. Check the network drivers, printer drivers, and the network redirection. The protocol is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect. ENWW If the IP address is correct, delete the product and then add it again. Verify that the operating system is configured correctly. Review the configuration page to check the status of the protocol. Enable it if necessary. Reconfigure the network settings if necessary. See the user guide. Solve connectivity problems 525 Service mode functions Service menu The Service menu is PIN-protected for added security. Only authorized service people have access to the Service menu. When you select Service from the list of menus, the product prompts you to enter an eightdigit PIN number (Service Access Code). The PIN for the HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M750 Printer Series is 11075013. 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: 3. button. ● Device Maintenance ● Service ● Service Access Code Enter the eight-digit PIN using the arrow buttons. NOTE: Only the Service Access Code can be used to access the Service menu. The message Your user account does not have permission to access the selected item displays if the correct Service Access Code is not used. 4. Press the OK button to enter the PIN and open the Service menu. The following menu items appear in the Service menu: First level Second level Third level Description User Access Code Only the Service Access Code can be used to access the Service menu. The message Your user account does not have permission to access the selected item displays if the correct Service Access Code is not used. Administrator Access Code Only the Service Access Code can be used to access the Service menu. The message Your user account does not have permission to access the selected item displays if the correct Service Access Code is not used. Service Access Code This item allows access to the Service sub menus. 526 Chapter 3 Solve problems Print Event Log Use this item to print the service event log. View Event Log Use this item to view the service event log. Clear Event Log Use this item to clear (erase) the service event log. ENWW First level Test Support Second level Third level Description Cycle Counts Mono Cycle Counts Use this item to reset the mono print job page count. Color Cycle Count Use this item to reset the color print job page count. Refurbish Cycle Count Use this item to reset the refurbish print job page count. Serial Number Use this item to reset the product serial number. Service ID Use this item to reset the product service identification number. Cold Reset Paper Use this item to set the cold reset paper size. New Registration Roller Use this item to reset the registration roller page count. Media Sensor Value Use this item to record the media sensor value found on a replacement paper pickup assembly. Manual Laser Glass Cleaning Use this item to execute a manual laser glass cleaning. The laser shutters are moved away from the laser glass windows so that they can be manually cleaned. Continuous Print from USB Use this item to test print from an external USB. Automatic Calibrations Use this item to enable automatic calibrations. Product resets Restore factory-set defaults 1. Press the Home button . 2. Open the following menus: 3. ENWW ● Administration ● General Settings ● Restore Factory Settings Press the Down arrow button to highlight and select Restore, and then press the OK button. Service mode functions 527 Preboot menu options If an error occurs while the product is booting, an error message appears on the control-panel display. This error may prevent the unit from booting up, which makes accessing menus impossible. To assist in these cases, the user can access the Preboot menus. The preboot menus allow several operations to be performed in an attempt to correct the cause of the error. The Error menu item will not be seen if an error did not occur. Access the Preboot menu 1. Turn the product on. 2. Press the Stop 3. Use the Down arrow 4. Press the OK button to select a menu item. button when the Ready, Data, and Attention LEDs are illuminated solid. button to navigate the Preboot menu options. Table 3-58 Preboot menu options (1 of 5) Menu option First level Continue Second level Third level Description Selecting the Continue item exits the Preboot menu and continues the normal boot process. If a selection is not made in the initial menu within 30 seconds, the product returns to a normal boot (the same as selecting Continue. If the user navigates to another menu, the timeout does not apply. Sign In 528 Chapter 3 Solve problems Enter the Administrator PIN or Service PIN if one is required to access the Preboot menu. ENWW Table 3-58 Preboot menu options (1 of 5) (continued) Menu option First level Second level Administrator Tools Third level Description This item navigates to the Administrator sub menus. If authentication is required (and the user is not already signed in) the Sign In displays. The user is required to sign in. Download Format Disk This item initiates a preboot firmware download process. A USB device interface or a Network connection can be used to download firmware. Network See Product updates. USB Device See Product updates. This item reinitializes the disk and formats all disk partitions. CAUTION: Selecting the Format Disk item removes all data. A delete confirmation prompt is not provided. The system is not bootable after this action—a firmware download must be performed to return the system to a bootable state. Insure you have the latest firmware available before completing this operation. Partial Clean This item reinitializes the disk (removing all data except the firmware repository where the master firmware bundle is downloaded and saved). CAUTION: Selecting the Partial Clean item removes all data except the firmware repository. A delete confirmation prompt is not provided. This allows user to reformat the disk by removing the firmware image from the active directory without having to download new firmware code (product remains bootable). Change Password Select this item to set or change the administrator password. Clear Password Select the Clear Password item to remove a password from the Administrator menu. Before the password is actually cleared, a message will be shown asking to confirm that the password should be cleared. Press the OK button to confirm the action. When the confirmation prompt appears, press the OK button to clear the password. ENWW Preboot menu options 529 Table 3-59 Preboot menu options (2 of 5) Menu option First level Second level Third level Administrator Tools Manage Disk Clear disk Select the Clear disk item to enable an external device for job storage. Job storage is normally enabled only for the Boot device. This will be grayed out unless the 99.09.68 error is displayed. Lock Disk Select the Lock Disk item to lock (mate) a new secure disk to this product. continued Description The secure disk already locked to this product will remain accessible to this product. Use this function to have more then one encrypted disk accessible by the product when using them interchangeably. The data stored on the secure disk locked to this product always remains accessible to this product. Leave Unlocked Select the Leave Unlocked item to use a new secure disk in an unlocked mode for single service event. The secure disk that is already locked to this product will remain accessible to this product and uses the old disk's encryption password with the new disk. The secure disk that is already locked to this product remains accessible to this product. Clear Disk PWD Select the Clear Password item to continue using the nonsecure disk and clear the password associated with the yet to be installed secure disk. CAUTION: Data on the missing secure disk will be permanently inaccessible. Retain Password Select the Retain Password item to use the non-secure disk for this session only, and then search for the missing secure disk in future sessions. Boot Device Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk and unlock it if required. This might take a long time. NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. ATA secure-erase command one pass over write. Erases entire disk including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk. Erase/Unlock Select the Erase and Unlock item to cryptographically erase all data on disk and unlock the disk to allow access to it from any product. NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. Erases the crypto key. The disk becomes a non-encrypted disk. Get Status 530 Chapter 3 Solve problems This item provides disk status information if any is available. ENWW Table 3-60 Preboot menu options (3 of 5) Menu option First level Second level Administrator Tools Manage Disk Internal Device continued continued Third level Description Select the Internal Device item to erase the internal device or get status about the internal device. Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk and unlock it if required. This might take a long time. NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. ATA secure-erase command one pass over write. Erases the entire disk, including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk. Erase/Unlock Select the Erase and Unlock item to cryptographically erase all data on disk and unlock the disk to allow access to it from any product. NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. Erases the crypto key. The disk becomes a non-encrypted disk. Get Status External Device This item provides disk status information if any is available. Select the External Device item to erase the internal device or get status about the internal device. Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk and unlock it if required. This might take a long time. NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. ATA secure-erase command one pass over write. Erases the entire disk, including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk. Erase/Unlock Select the Erase and Unlock item to cryptographically erase all data on disk and unlock the disk to allow access to it from any product. NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. Erases the crypto key. The disk becomes a non-encrypted disk. Get Status ENWW This item provides disk status information if any is available. Preboot menu options 531 Table 3-61 Preboot menu options (4 of 5) Menu option First level Administrator Tools Configure LAN continued Second level Third level Description Select the Configure LAN item to setup the network settings for the PreBoot menu firmware upgrade. Network Setup The network can be configured obtain the network settings from a DHCP server or as static. IP Mode [ ] [DHCP] Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition from the DHCP server. [Static] Use this item to manually assign the network addresses. IP Address Use this item to manually enter the IP addresses. Subnet Mask Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask. Default Gateway Use this item to manually enter the default gateway. Save and Exit Select the Save and Exit item to save the manual settings. Third level Description Table 3-62 Preboot menu options (5 of 5) Menu option First level Administrator Tools Startup Options continued Second level Select the Startup Options item to specify options that can be set for the next time the product is turned on and initializes to the Ready state. Show Revision Not currently functional: Check the Show Revision item to allow the product to initialize and show the firmware version when the device reaches the Ready state. When the product power is turned on the next time, the Show Revision item is unchecked so the firmware revision is not shown. Cold Reset Check the Cold Reset item to clear the IP address and all customer settings (this item also returns all settings to factory defaults). NOTE: Skip Disk Load Items in the Service menu are not reset. This item allows the device to be started without loading the third party applications. This means that files including Accessible Architecture on the disk will not be available at bootup. This is useful for troubleshooting problems with the hard disk without having to remove the hard disk. It also applies to flash file system disks on DIMMs. In this case, this function will cause the printer to configure the HP firmware first, followed by the third-party applications. NOTE: The files on the disk will be available after the printer enters the Ready state. Skip Cal 532 Chapter 3 Solve problems Select the Skip Cal item to initialize the product the next time the power is turned on without calibrating. ENWW Table 3-62 Preboot menu options (5 of 5) (continued) Menu option First level Second level Administrator Tools Startup Options Lock Service continued continued Third level Description CAUTION: Select the Lock Service item to lock the Service menu access (both PreBoot and Device Maintenance application). Service personnel must have the Administrator remove the Lock Service setting before they can enter the Service menu. Skip FSCK Check the Skip FSCK item to allow the product to initialize without scanning the disk. If the product is crashing on Step 4/8, checking this item may isolate the problem. Once the device is turned on the next time, the Skip FSCK item is unchecked and the disk scan is not skipped. First Power Not currently functional: This item allows the product initialize as if it is the first time it has been turned on. For example, the user is prompted to configure first time settings like Select Date/Time, Select Language, and other settings). Check this item so that it is enabled for the next time the product power is turned on. When the product power is turned on the next time, this item is unchecked so that the pre-configured settings are used during configuration and the first time setting prompt is not used. Embedded Jetdirect Off Check the Embedded Jetdirect Off item to disable the embedded Jetdirect. By default this item is unchecked so that Jetdirect is always enabled. WiFi Accessory JetDirect Off Check the WiFi Accessory JetDirect Off item to disable the WiFi JetDirect Accessories. This item is unchecked so that JetDirect is always enabled by default. ENWW Preboot menu options 533 Table 3-63 Preboot menu options (5 of 5) Menu option First level Administrator Tools Diagnostics Second level Third level Description The Diagnostics feature helps to diagnose hardware failures and allow service technicians to identify and replace only the hardware components that have failed on a device. [x] Memory []Do not run Enables testing of system memory (RAM). []Short Enabled by default. []Long [x] Disk [] Do not run Enables testing of the disk drive. [] Short Enabled by default. [] Long NOTE: This test takes a long time to execute. [] Optimized [x] ICB Enables testing of the ICB board. Enabled by default. [x] CPB Enables testing of the CPB board. Enabled by default. [x] Interconnect Enables a quick ping test for connectivity. Enabled by default. Checks for the presence of the boot disk, checks for connectivity with the control panel, checks I2C communications with the controller used for power management. Remote Admin Start Telnet Stop Telnet Refresh IP The Remote Admin feature provides the service technician a valuable way to access a printer in its BIOS environment without physically having to be at the device. The product acts as a Telnet server which is a wellaccepted standard networking protocol for transmitting textual data. This implementation allows any standard Telnet client to display the BIOS screen as well as receive keyboard input for navigation and allows the user to interact with the BIOS as if he were standing right at the device. System Triage Service Tools Copy Logs Copy Logs will place existing log files onto a USB Thumbdrive inserted into the device. The drive must be FAT32 formatted. This item requires the Service access code. Reset Admin Password Use this item to clear the Administrator password. Subsystems For manufacturing use only. Do not change these values. 534 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Product updates To download the most recent firmware upgrade for the product, go to www.hp.com/support/colorljM750. Determine the installed revision of firmware Print a configuration page to determine the installed revision of firmware. See Configuration page on page 339. On the configuration page, look in the section marked Device Information for the firmware datecode and firmware revision. Firmware datecode and firmware revision examples ● 20100831 (firmware datecode) ● 103067_104746 (firmware revision) Perform a firmware upgrade The firmware bundle is a xxxxxxx.bdl file. This file requires an interactive upgrade method. You cannot upgrade the printer using the traditional FTP, LPR or Port 9100 methods of upgrading. Use one of the following methods to upgrade the firmware for this product. Embedded Web Server 1. Open an browser window. 2. Enter the product IP address in the URL line. 3. Select the Firmware upgrade link from within the Troubleshooting tab. NOTE: If you get a warning screen, follow the instructions for setting an administrator password from the Security tab. 4. Browse to the location that the firmware upgrade file was downloaded to, and then select the firmware file. Select the Install button to perform the upgrade. NOTE: Do not close the browser window until the Embedded Web Server (EWS) displays the confirmation page. 5. ENWW Select Restart Now from the EWS confirmation page, or turn the product off, and then on again using the power switch. Product updates 535 USB storage device (Preboot menu) 1. Copy the xxxxxxx.bdl file to a portable USB flash memory storage device (thumb drive). 2. Turn the product on. 3. Press the Stop button when the Ready, Data and Attention LEDs illuminate solid. 4. Press the down arrow button to highlight Administrator, and then press the OK button. 5. Press the down arrow button to highlight Download, and then press the OK button. 6. Insert the portable USB storage device with the xxxxxxx.bdl file on it. NOTE: If the error message No USB Thumbdrive Files Found appears on the control-panel display, you might need to connect the storage device to the external USB connection on the formatter or try using a different portable storage device. 7. Press the down arrow button to highlight USB Thumbdrive, and then press the OK button. 8. Press the down arrow button to highlight the xxxxxxx.bdl file, and then press the OK button. NOTE: The upgrade process can take up to 10 minutes to complete. TIP: If there is more than one xxxxxxx.bdl file on the storage device, make sure that you select the correct file for this product. 9. When the message Complete appears on the control-panel display, press the Back button 3 times. 10. When the message Continue appears on the control-panel display, press the OK button. The product will initialize. 11. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade firmware version was installed. See Configuration page on page 339 and Determine the installed revision of firmware on page 535. 536 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW USB storage device (control-panel menu) 1. Copy the xxxxxxx.bdl file to a portable USB flash memory storage device (thumbdrive). 2. Turn the product on, and then wait until it reaches the Ready state. 3. Press the Home button or OK button. 4. Press the down arrow button to highlight Device Maintenance, and then press the OK button. 5. Press the down arrow button to highlight USB Firmware Upgrade, and then press the OK button. 6. Insert the portable USB storage device with the xxxxxxx.bdl file on it into the USB port on the front of the product, and then press the OK button. 7. Press the down arrow button to highlight the xxxxxxx.bdl file, and then press the OK button. TIP: If there is more than one xxxxxxx.bdl file on the storage device, make sure that you select the correct file for this product. 8. A prompt to upgrade an older, newer, or reinstall the same version appears. Press the down arrow button to highlight the desired option, and then press the OK button. When the upgrade is complete, the product will initialize. NOTE: The upgrade process can take up to 10 minutes to complete. 9. ENWW When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade firmware version was installed. See Configuration page on page 339 and Determine the installed revision of firmware on page 535. Product updates 537 538 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 4 ENWW Parts and diagrams ● Order parts by authorized service providers ● How to use the parts lists and diagrams ● Assembly locations ● External covers, panels, and doors ● Right door assembly ● Internal components (1 of 9) ● Internal components (2 of 9) ● Internal components (3 of 9) ● Internal components (4 of 9) ● Internal components (5 of 9) ● Internal components (6 of 9) ● Internal components (7 of 9) ● Internal components (8 of 9) ● Internal components (9 of 9) ● 1x250 cassette ● Paper pick-up assembly ● Paper delivery assembly ● Printed circuit assemblies ● 1x500 paper feeder ● 3x500 paper feeder ● Alphabetical parts list ● Numerical parts list 539 Order parts by authorized service providers Order parts, accessories, and supplies Table 4-1 Order parts, accessories, and supplies Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply Order genuine HP parts or accessories www.partsurfer.hp.com Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. Order using HP software For information about using the HP software to order parts, accessories, and supplies, see the product user guide. Related documentation and software Table 4-2 Related documentation and software Item Description Part number HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M750 Printer Series User Guide Product user guide D3L08-90907 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M750 Printer Series Service Manual English service manual (this manual) D3L08-90966 540 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Supplies part numbers Table 4-3 Supplies part numbers Item Description Part number HP LaserJet print cartridges with HP ColorSphere toner Black print cartridge CE270A (new) CE270-67901 (service) Cyan print cartridge CE271A (new) CE271-67901 (service) Yellow print cartridge CE272A (new) CE272-67901 (service) Magenta print cartridge CE273A (new) CE273-67901 (service) Customer self repair parts Each kit includes parts and installation instructions. The customer self repair (CSR) level indicates the expected difficulty the customer will experience when replacing this part: ● A = Mandatory customer replaceable ● B = Optional–customer may request service replacement ● C = Service replaceable only Item Part number CSR level Tray 2 replacement kit CE710-67907 A CF235-67917 A Tray label kit 5851-5600 A 1x500-sheet feeder (Tray 3) kit CE860-67901 A ● Tray 2 cassette ● Tray label kit ● Tray 2 shipping lock document for just the tray ● Installation instructions 1x500 sheet tray 3-6 replacement kit; gray ENWW ● 1X500 sheet tray - cassette; gray ● Tray label kit ● 1x500-sheet feeder ● Installation instructions Order parts by authorized service providers 541 Item Part number CSR level 3x500-sheet feeder (Trays 4, 5, and 6) with stand kit CE725-67901 A D3L08-67903 B D3L08-67904 B CE707-67901 B D3L08-67901 A Fuser kit 110 volt: CE707-67912 A ● Fuser assembly 220 volt: CE707-67913 ● Installation instructions ● 3x500-sheet feeder with stand ● Installation instructions Encrypted hard disk drive kit ● Encrypted hard disk drive, 320 GB ● Disk drive cradle ● Installation instructions U.S. Government hard disk drive, ● FIPS 140 HDD ● Disk drive cradle ● Installation instructions Solid-state memory ● Solid-state module, 8GB ● Solid-state module retainer ● Installation instructions Formatter kit ● Formatter PCA ● Formatter tray ● Screws ● PCI X Guide ● Face plate I/O label ● Installation instructions Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) maintenance kit ● ITB assembly ● Secondary transfer roller assembly ● Tray 2 pick-up roller assembly ● Tray 2 separation roller assembly ● Tray 3, 4, 5, 6 pick-up rollers ● Tray 3, 4, 5, 6 feed roller assembly ● Installation instructions 542 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams CC522-67910 A ENWW Item Part number CSR level Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) repair kit CC522-67911 A CC522-67912 A CE980-67901 A CC522-67928 A CE710-69007 A CC522-67909 A ● ITB assembly ● Secondary transfer roller assembly ● Installation instructions Secondary transfer roller (T2) kit ● Secondary transfer roller assembly ● Installation instructions Toner collection unit kit ● Waste toner box assembly ● Toner cleaning cloth ● Installation instructions Tray 1 paper pick-up roller and separation pad kit ● Paper pick-up roller ● Separation pad ● Installation instructions Tray 2 paper pick-up roller kit ● Paper pick-up roller assembly ● Separation roller assembly ● Installation instructions Tray 3, 4, 5, and 6 paper pick-up roller kit ● Paper pick-up roller assembly ● Feed roller assembly ● Installation instructions Service replacement parts Item Part number DC controller assembly Simplex: CE707-67906 ● DC controller assembly Duplex: CE708-67902 ● Installation instructions Front cover assembly kit ENWW ● Front cover assembly ● HP logo jewel CE707-67902 Order parts by authorized service providers 543 Item Part number Fuser drive unit CE707-67904 ● Fuser drive assembly ● Installation instructions Inner door assembly ● Inner door assembly ● Four color cartridge labels Interconnect board (ICB) PCA ● ICB PCA ● Installation instructions CC522-67906 CE707-67907 Main drive assembly Simplex: CE707-67905 ● Main drive assembly Duplex: CE708-67901 ● Installation instructions Paper pick-up assembly ● Paper pick-up assembly ● Installation instructions CE707-67903 Toner vacuum kit 110 volt: CC468-69002 ● Toner vacuum 220 volt: CC468-69003 ● Instructions for use Tray 2 gray handle kit ● Tray 2 gray handle ● Installation instructions 1x500/3x500 gray handle kit ● 1x500/3x500 gray handle ● Installation instructions 544 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams CC522-67940 CC522-67941 ENWW Accessories part numbers Table 4-4 Accessories part numbers ENWW Item Description Part number Optional 1x500-sheet tray Optional tray to increase paper capacity. CE860A Optional 3x500-sheet tray and feeder unit Optional tray to increase paper capacity. CE725A USB cable 2-meter A-to-B cable C6518A Power cord China 220V - 10A 8121-0943 Taiwan 110V - 13A 8121-0964 Korea 220V - 10A 8121-0731 Japan 110V - 12A 8121-1143 India 220V - 6A 8121-0564 Asia Pacific 220V - 10A 8121-0739 Australia/New Zealand 220V - 10A 8121-0837 Israel 220V - 10A 8121-1004 Denmark 220V - 10A 8121-0733 South Africa 220V - 10A 8121-0737 Switzerland 220V - 10A 8121-0738 Brazil 110V - 10A 8121-0734 Argentina 220V - 10A 8121-0729 North America 110V - 13A 8121-1141 Israel - Unique cord 8120-8913 Switzerland - Unique cord 8121-0844 Rest of World - Standard 2-wire RJ-11 8121-0811 Order parts by authorized service providers 545 How to use the parts lists and diagrams The figures in this chapter show the major subassemblies in the product and their component parts. A parts list table follows each exploded view assembly diagram. Each table lists the item number, the associated part number, and the description of each part. If a part is not listed in the table, then it is not a field replacement unit (FRU). CAUTION: Be sure to order the correct part. When looking for part numbers for electrical components, pay careful attention to the voltage that is listed in the description column. Doing so will ensure that the part number selected is for the correct model. NOTE: In this manual, the abbreviation “PCA” stands for “printed circuit-board assembly.” Components described as a PCA might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and sensors. 546 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Assembly locations Paper delivery assembly Paper pick-up assembly 1x250 cassette Right door assembly ENWW Assembly locations 547 External covers, panels, and doors Figure 4-1 External covers, panels, and doors *A01 1 2 *A01 11 *A01 4 10 10 *A01 Right door assembly *A03 3 (J1) (J2) *A02 5 9 *A01 6 8 7 548 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-5 External covers, panels, and doors ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Cover, top RM1-7148-000CN 1 2 Door, toner collection unit access RC2-7034-000CN 1 3 Cable, USB RK2-2901-000CN 1 4 Cover, rear RM1-7147-000CN 1 5 Cover, right rear RM1-7142-000CN 1 6 Cover, handle, lower-right, rear RC2-6626-000CN 1 7 Cover, handle, lower-right, front RC2-6627-000CN 1 8 Cover, right front assembly (includes control panel) RM1-7144-000CN 1 9 Cover, front assembly CE707-67902 1 10 Cover, handle, lower-left RC2-6625-000CN 2 11 Cover, left assembly RM1-7143-000CN 1 External covers, panels, and doors 549 Right door assembly Figure 4-2 Right door assembly *A04 *A03 *A02 1 *A05 (J112) (J152) *A01 *A02 (J114D) *A18 *A17 *A15 *A16 *A40 *A10 *A15 *A14 (J542D) (J736D) *A48 A *A07 *A06 *A14 *A13 *A08 *A09 *A20 *A19 *A10 *A12 *A11 *A40 *A40 2 *A22 *A23 SIMPLEX MODEL *A40 *A40 *A46 *A25 *A24 *A27 *A26 *A47 *A21 A *A45 *A44 *A28 4 *A43 *A29 *A30 3 *A30 *A31 *A40 *A36 *A37 *A42 5 *A38 *A39 *A31 *A32 *A33 *A33 *A34 *A35 6 *A41 *A40 550 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-6 Right door assembly Ref ENWW Description Part number Qty Right door assembly, duplex model RM1-6007-000CN 1 Right door assembly, simplex model RM1-6138-000CN 1 1 Roller, secondary transfer, T2 (included in the service kit) CC522-67912 1 2 Door, right upper RC2-7091-000CN 1 3 Roller, paper pick-up, Tray 1 (included in the service kit) CC522-67928 1 4 Lifter plate assembly, Tray 1 RM1-6043-000 1 5 Pick roller and separation pad, Tray 1 (included in the service kit) CC522-67928 1 6 Tray 1 (MP tray) assembly RM1-6045-000CN 1 Right door assembly 551 Internal components (1 of 9) Figure 4-3 Internal components (1 of 9) *A02 1 2 3 *A02 7 8 4 6 *A04 35 9 5 *A03 34 10 (FM2) (J524L) 11 (SW2) 12 *A02 28 29 32 13 *A02 Front cover 14 15 assembly *A02 *A02 16 17 *A02 16 See PCA diagram 30 *A02 33 31 27 18 22 19 20 *A04 21 26 *A01 19 18 23 24 *A02 *A02 25 *A02 552 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-7 Internal components (1 of 9) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Upper cartridge guide assembly RM1-5990-000CN 1 2 Duct, front RC2-7300-000CN 1 3 Stopper, inner door, 1 RC2-6719-000CN 1 4 Stopper, inner door, 2 RC2-6736-000CN 1 5 Door, inner, service kit includes all labels CC522-67906 1 6 Cover, lower front RC2-6737-000CN 1 11 Spring, grounding RC2-7209-000CN 1 12 Hinge, inner door, left RC2-6716-000CN 1 13 Hinge, inner door, right RC2-6712-000CN 1 14 Rail, cartridge auxiliary RC2-6724-000CN 1 15 Mount, cover arm, front RC2-6735-000CN 1 16 Arm, front cover, 1 RC2-6732-000CN 2 17 Mount, inner door toggle RC2-6717-000CN 1 18 Arm, front cover, 2 RC2-6733-000CN 2 19 Mount, stopper arm RC2-6745-000CN 2 20 Mount, inner door rail RC2-6743-000CN 1 21 Spring, compression RU6-2721-000CN 1 22 Lever, inner door pressure RC2-6744-000CN 1 23 Hinge, front cover, left RC2-6713-000CN 1 24 Hinge, front cover, center RC2-6738-000CN 1 25 Hinge, front cover, right RC2-6715-000CN 1 26 Cover, guide RC2-7204-000CN 1 27 Guide, arm, front RC2-6632-000CN 1 28 Lever, push RC2-7198-000CN 1 29 Lever, lift, 2 RC2-7200-000CN 1 30 Microswitch WC4-5251-000CN 1 Internal components (1 of 9) 553 Internal components (2 of 9) Figure 4-4 Internal components (2 of 9) *A02 1 2 3 *A02 7 8 4 *A04 6 35 9 5 *A03 10 12 (FM2) (J524L) 11 *A02 13 *A02 Front cover 14 15 assembly *A02 *A02 22 16 *A02 17 16 See PCA diagram 33 32 (SW2) 28 29 30 *A02 31 27 18 19 20 *A04 21 34 *A01 26 19 18 23 24 *A02 *A02 25 *A02 554 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-8 Internal components (2 of 9) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 31 Holder, interlock switch RC2-6689-000CN 1 32 Fan, fuser RK2-2728-000CN 1 33 Holder, duplexing fan RC2-8357-000CN 1 34 Spring, leaf, grounding RC2-7092-000CN 1 35 Cover, handle guide RC2-6670-000CN 1 Internal components (2 of 9) 555 Internal components (3 of 9) Figure 4-5 Internal components (3 of 9) Paper delivery assembly *A01 SIMPLEX MODEL 1 20 5 19 6 *A01 *A01 7 *A02 DUPLEX MODEL 8 4 1 (J109F) *A01 (M4) (J516) 2 *A01 (J131A) 3 (J522D) (J552D) 19 9 (J525L) (J554L) 11 10 12 14 18 10 13 15 16 *A01 17 Paper pick-up assembly 1x250 cassette 556 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-9 Internal components (3 of 9) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Drive assembly, duplex reverse, duplex model RM1-6005-000CN 1 1 Drive assembly, simplex reverse, simplex model RM1-6120-000CN 1 2 Guide, fuser, front RC2-6546-000CN 1 3 Cover, cable, protective RC2-6832-000CN 1 4 Fuser assembly, 110V (included in service kit) CE707-67912 1 4 Fuser assembly, 220V (included in service kit) CE707-67913 1 5 Guide, fuser, rear RC2-6547-000CN 1 6 Fuser drive assembly CE707-67904 1 7 Fuser motor assembly RM1-6074-000CN 1 8 Gear assembly, fuser RM1-7914-060CN 1 9 Cable, SB joint, low-voltage power supply, duplex model RM1-6867-000CN 1 10 Spring, tension, registration sensor RU6-2710-000CN 2 11 Support, frame, rear RC2-7197-000CN 1 12 Registration sensor assembly RM1-7922-000CN 1 13 Support, frame, front RC2-7196-000CN 1 14 Tray 2 pickup and separation roller assembly (included in service kit) CE710-69007 1 15 Connector, snap tight, black VS1-7207-019CN 1 16 Guide, paper feed RC2-7297-000CN 1 17 Sensor, cassette last paper presence RM1-6164-000CN 1 18 Cover, connector, lower RC2-6642-000CN 1 19 Gear, 18T/29T RU6-0775-000CN 1 20 Label, fuser insert RU6-8042-000CN 1 Internal components (3 of 9) 557 Internal components (4 of 9) Figure 4-6 Internal components (4 of 9) 1 2 See PCA diagram (M1) (J517) (M2) (J515) (M3) (J514) *A01 *A06 *A01 4 *A06 6 (J1003) (J538D) (J535D) 3 See PCA diagram (M6) (J518) *A05 *A02 5 (J521) See PCA diagram *A03 8 9 7 13 12 23 (PS15) (J544) 10 (M7) (J520) 14 24 11 15 16 *A01 19 26 25 18 20 *A01 5 *A02 17 DUPLEX MODEL 27 *A01 28 *A01 34 22 33 SIMPLEX MODEL 32 21 39 20 29 38 31 37 30 31 35 *A01 30 *A04 36 Right door assembly 558 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-10 Internal components (4 of 9) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Cover, main drive cable, lower RC2-6574-000CN 1 2 Guide, main drive cable RC2-6659-000CN 1 3 Main drive assembly, duplex model CE708-67901 1 3 Main drive assembly, simplex model CE707-67905 1 4 DC motor assembly RM1-6088-000CN 3 5 Motor, stepping, DC, duplex model RK2-3298-000CN 2 5 Motor, stepping, DC, simplex model RK2-3298-000CN 1 6 Cable, feed joint, duplex model RM1-6846-000CN 1 7 Spring, grounding, second-transfer high-voltage PCA RU6-2772-000CN 1 8 Holder, secondary transfer HVT RC2-6681-010CN 1 9 Cap, T2 contact, second-transfer high-voltage PCA RC2-6691-000CN 1 10 Spring, contact, second-transfer high-voltage PCA RU6-2771-000CN 1 11 Holder, secondary transfer, power dispatching RC2-6682-000CN 1 12 Spring, grounding, second-transfer high-voltage PCA RC2-6700-000CN 1 13 Link, ITB coupling release RC2-6823-000CN 1 14 Spring, tension, duplex model RU6-2671-000CN 1 15 Hook, duplexing spring, duplex model RC2-6932-000CN 1 16 Gear, 25T, duplex model RU6-0771-000CN 1 17 Cover, duplexing gear, duplex model RC2-6931-000CN 1 18 Gear, 25T, duplex model RU6-0772-000CN 1 19 Gear, 74T, duplex model RU6-0773-000CN 1 20 Plate, duplexing drive gear RL1-2266-000CN 1 21 Support, developing coupling RC2-6811-000CN 4 22 Cover, gear, simplex model RC3-0688-000CN 1 23 Sensor, right door WG8-5935-000 1 24 Holder, door sensor, right RC2-6645-000CN 1 25 Arm, ITB coupling release RC2-6824-000CN 1 26 Rail, door link, rear lower RC2-6635-000CN 1 27 Spring, tension, rear RU6-2744-000CN 1 28 Plate, right door link, rear RC2-7273-000CN 1 29 Plate, right door link, fixed, rear RL1-2282-000CN 1 30 Shaft, right door link RU5-4979-000CN 2 Internal components (4 of 9) 559 Internal components (5 of 9) Figure 4-7 Internal components (5 of 9) 1 2 (M1) (J517) (M2) (J515) (M3) (J514) 4 See PCA diagram *A01 *A06 *A01 *A06 6 (J1003) (J538D) (J535D) 3 See PCA diagram (M6) (J518) *A05 *A02 5 (J521) See PCA diagram *A03 8 9 7 13 12 23 (PS15) (J544) 14 24 16 26 25 19 18 10 (M7) (J520) 15 *A01 11 20 *A01 5 *A02 17 DUPLEX MODEL 27 34 22 33 38 31 37 35 *A01 30 20 *A01 SIMPLEX MODEL 32 21 39 *A01 28 30 29 31 *A04 36 Right door assembly 560 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-11 Internal components (5 of 9) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 31 Lock, door link, right RC2-7234-000CN 2 32 Link, right door, 2 rear RC2-7236-000CN 1 33 Link, right door, 2 front RC2-7233-000CN 1 34 Duct, joint RC2-8360-000CN 1 35 Plate, right door link, fixed, front RL1-2281-000CN 1 36 Hinge, right door, front RC2-7094-000CN 1 37 Plate, right door link, front RC2-7272-000CN 1 38 Spring, tension, front RU6-2727-000CN 1 39 Rail, door link, front lower RC2-6634-000CN 1 Internal components (5 of 9) 561 Internal components (6 of 9) Figure 4-8 Internal components (6 of 9) 37 2 1 3 (J831) (J832) (J61) (J62) 39 36 38 35 38 34 *A01 12 7 8 38 11 10 6 5 *A01 4 9 *A03 *A01 33 13 14 32 16 18 17 15 *A01 19 20 31 22 (FM1) (J106) 21 23 41 40 *A04 25 24 29 30 27 *A02 26 *A02 28 562 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-12 Internal components (6 of 9) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 IT belt guide rail assembly RM1-6018-000CN 1 2 IT belt guide rail R1 assembly RM1-6037-000CN 1 3 Toner collection unit (included in the service kit) CE980-67901 1 4 Arm, waste toner, left RC2-7035-000CN 1 5 Cover, waste toner, 3 RC2-6963-000CN 1 6 Plate, arm reinforcement RC2-9649-000CN 1 7 Arm, waste toner, right RC2-7036-000CN 1 8 Spring, tension RU6-2831-000CN 1 9 Waste toner cover assembly (includes Residual Toner Full Sensor) RM1-6012-000CN 1 10 Cover, waste toner, 2 RC2-6962-000CN 1 11 Shutter, exhaust RC2-7010-000CN 1 12 Spring, compression RU6-2683-000CN 1 13 Guide, fuser AC cable RC2-6693-000CN 1 14 Guide, LVT cable RC2-6662-000CN 1 15 Clamp, edge RC2-6663-000CN 1 16 Gear, link worm RU6-0795-000CN 1 17 ITB guide rail assembly RM1-6019-000CN 1 18 Guide, slide RC2-7203-000CN 1 19 Slider, push RC2-7201-000CN 1 20 Lever, lift, 1 RC2-7199-000CN 1 21 Cover, main cross-member cable RC2-6650-000CN 1 22 Guide, main cross-member cable RC2-6600-000CN 1 23 Label, ITB set, RH RU5-8807-000CN 1 24 Rail, ITB guide RC2-7185-000CN 1 25 Label, ITB, RV RU5-8805-000CN 1 26 Rail, ITB guide, F3 RC2-7193-000CN 1 27 Guide, inside cable RC2-6589-000CN 1 28 ITB assembly (included in the service kit; includes transfer roller) CC522-67911 1 29 Fan, power supply RK2-2276-000CN 1 30 Holder, power supply fan RC2-7299-000CN 1 Internal components (6 of 9) 563 Internal components (7 of 9) Figure 4-9 Internal components (7 of 9) 37 2 1 3 (J831) (J832) (J61) (J62) 39 36 38 35 38 34 *A01 12 7 8 38 11 10 6 5 *A01 4 9 *A03 *A01 33 13 14 32 16 18 17 15 *A01 19 20 31 22 (FM1) (J106) 21 23 41 40 *A04 25 24 29 30 27 *A02 26 *A02 28 564 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-13 Internal components (7 of 9) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 31 Duct, fan, 1 RC2-8388-000CN 1 32 Laser scanner assembly RM1-6122-070CN 1 33 Seal, toner supporter guide 1 RC2-7018-000CN 1 34 Toner feed assembly RM1-6040-000CN 1 35 Guide, laser RC2-6628-000CN 1 36 Holder, flat flexible cable RC2-6655-000CN 1 37 Cable assembly, flat-flexible RM1-6804-000CN 1 38 Seal, slide shutter RC3-1014-000CN 3 39 Sheet, slide seal RC3-1013-000CN 1 40 Label, ITB insert, FV RU5-8804-000CN 1 41 Label, ITB insert, FH RU5-8806-000CN 1 Internal components (7 of 9) 565 Internal components (8 of 9) Figure 4-10 Internal components (8 of 9) (J25) (J63) (J733DB) 18 (J741D) (J105) (J304) (J303) (J1304) (J301) 1 See PCA diagram 2 (J733DA) (J707F) (J557D) 16 17 (J21) (J192) (J711F) (J558D) 2 3 (J559D) 3 (J1108) (J560D) (J108) (J203) 15 4 5 (J109F) 6 (J110F) 14 7 *A01 13 (J305) (J302) (J1001) (SW3) (SW4) 10 *A01 12 (J710M) 11 See PCA diagram 9 *A01 566 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams 8 ENWW Table 4-14 Internal components (8 of 9) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Holder, first power dispatching RC2-6680-000CN 1 2 Spring, contact RU6-2767-000CN 2 3 Spring, contact RU6-2768-000CN 2 4 Guide, cross-member cable, rear RC2-6588-000CN 1 5 Stopper, laser RC2-6646-000CN 1 6 Guide, cross-member cable, front RC2-6587-000CN 1 7 Spring, rod RC2-6611-000CN 1 8 Cover, cable, right rear RC2-8424-000CN 1 9 Lifter drive assembly RM1-6039-000CN 1 10 Auto close assembly RM1-6036-000CN 1 11 Holder, switch RC2-6666-000CN 1 12 Cable, switch RM1-6830-000CN 1 13 Low voltage power supply assembly, 110V RM1-6753-000CN 1 13 Low voltage power supply assembly, 220V RM1-6754-000CN 1 14 Guide, cable RC3-0684-000CN 1 15 Cable, low-voltage AC joint RM1-6811-000CN 1 16 Cable, low-voltage power supply RM1-6807-000CN 1 17 Cable, low-voltage power supply, test RM1-6813-000CN 1 18 Cable, left, high-voltage power supply to low-voltage power supply RM1-6833-000CN 1 Internal components (8 of 9) 567 Internal components (9 of 9) Figure 4-11 Internal components (9 of 9) *A02 See PCA diagram *A06 *A04 (J101) (FM3) (J142) 2 (J557H) 3 (J716H) (J116) (J717H) (J718H) (J558H) (J559H) (J560H) 18 17 (J1001A) 5 8 7 1 (J72) *A02 See PCA diagram A *A01 *A05 6 See PCA diagram *A02 10 11 *A05 9 *A04 12 14 13 15 *A05 16 13 *A04 *A03 (J303ICB) (J770) *A05 16 A 568 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams 4 19 ENWW Table 4-15 Internal components (9 of 9) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Clamp, edge, D RC2-6674-000CN 1 2 Guide, cable, right RC2-6842-000CN 1 3 Guide, cable, upper RC2-6841-000CN 1 4 Cable, PNL-H-HI RM1-6849-000CN 1 5 Spacer, DC controller PCA VT2-5176-004CN 5 6 Guide, DC cont. support cable RC2-6665-000CN 1 7 Cable, primary transfer RM1-6822-000CN 1 8 Cable, rear RM1-6863-000CN 1 9 Formatter case RM1-6065-000CN 1 10 Plate, FFC protective RC2-9687-000CN 1 11 Holder, paper pick-up connector RC2-6638-000CN 1 12 Connector, 8-pin, paper-pick-up VS1-7514-008CN 1 13 Plate, box pillar RC2-6673-000CN 2 14 Guide, imaging HVT cable RC2-6661-000CN 1 15 Cover, imaging HVT cable RC2-6573-000CN 1 16 Cross-member, cover, left RC2-6760-000CN 2 17 Holder, formatter fan RC2-6648-000CN 1 18 Fan, formatter RK2-3301-000CN 1 19 Core, ring WE8-6639-000CN 1 Internal components (9 of 9) 569 1x250 cassette Figure 4-12 1x250 cassette 570 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-16 1x250 cassette Ref ENWW Description Part number Qty Tray 2 replacement, gray CE710-67907 1 1x250 cassette 571 Paper pick-up assembly Figure 4-13 Paper pick-up assembly 1 *A01 572 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-17 Paper pick-up assembly Ref ENWW Description Part number Qty Paper pick-up assembly CE707-67903 1 Paper pick-up assembly 573 Paper delivery assembly Figure 4-14 Paper delivery assembly 574 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-18 Paper delivery assembly Ref ENWW Description Part number Qty Paper delivery assembly RM1-6165-000CN 1 Paper delivery assembly 575 Printed circuit assemblies Figure 4-15 PCAs 1 1 2 1 10 3 4 5 9 6 1 8 7 576 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-19 PCAs ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Toner remaining detect PCA RM1-6779-000CN 4 2 Primary transfer high-voltage PCA RM1-7004-000CN 1 3 Driver PCA (duplex model) RM1-6742-000CN 1 3 Driver PCA (simplex model) RM1-6783-000CN 1 4 DC Controller PCA (duplex model) CE708-67902 1 4 DC Controller PCA (simplex model) CE707-67906 1 5 Secondary transfer high-voltage PCA RM1-6802-000CN 1 6 Imaging high-voltage PCA RM1-6800-000CN 1 7 Environment sensor PCA RK2-2884-000CN 1 8 Power switch PCA RM1-6759-000CN 1 9 Low-voltage power supply PCA (110V) RM1-6753-000CN 1 9 Low-voltage power supply PCA (220V) RM1-6754-000CN 1 Not shown Formatter, replacement kit D3L08-67901 1 Not shown Formatter, replacement kit (China) D3L08-67902 10 Inter connect board (ICB) PCA CE707-67907 1 Printed circuit assemblies 577 1x500 paper feeder The 1x500 paper feeder is referred to as the 1x500PF. 1x500PF external components Figure 4-16 1x500PF external components 1 *A03 5 6 6 4 *A04 *A02 7 *A03 *A01 *A07 *A04 *A04 8 3 10 2 *A04 *A04 9 *A06 578 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams *A05 ENWW Table 4-20 1x500PF external components ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Handle, lock, rear (1x500PF) RC2-9303-000CN 1 2 Cover, right front (1x500PF) RC2-9320-000CN 1 3 Link, right door, lower (1x500PF) RC2-9327-000CN 1 4 Cover, rear (1x500PF) RC2-9330-000CN 1 5 Cover, left (1x500PF) RC2-9331-000CN 1 6 Cover, handle, lower (1x500PF) RC2-9332-000CN 2 7 Link, right door, upper (1x500PF) RC2-9335-000CN 1 8 Right door assembly (1x500PF) RM1-6946-000CN 1 9 Cover, right lower assembly (1x500PF) RM1-6948-000CN 1 10 Cover, upper front assembly (1x500PF) RM1-6949-000CN 1 1x500 paper feeder 579 1x500PF internal components Figure 4-17 1x500PF internal components *A26 *A27 (J2004) (J704) (J703D) *A28 (J2005) (J2003) (J733LA) (J733LB) (J702D) (J2001) (J705) (J701D) (J2002) *A30 *A29 (J734DA) (J734DB) 6 3 *A07 *A04 *A06 *A21 *A22 *A25 *A23 *A04 *A03 *A01 *A19 *A15 (M1) (J704) *A02 *A17 *A06 *A18 *A06 *A06 *A06 2 *A05 *A24 *A09 *A19 *A08 *A11 *A33 *A19 *A10 *A31 (SW1) (J705) *A15 *A19 *A06 *A24 1 *A11 *A14 *A12 *A20 *A10 *A06 *A16 *A13 *A32 *A06 *A06 7 8 5 8 *A06 *A31 *A06 4 9 580 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-21 1x500PF internal components ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Switch, bottom (1x500PF) WC2-5512-000CN 1 2 Motor, pick-up (1x500PF) RK2-1331-000CN 1 3 Lifter drive assembly (1x500PF) RM1-3819-000CN 1 4 Cassette (1x500PF) CF235-67917 1 5 Paper pick-up assembly (1x500PF) RM1-6944-000CN 1 6 Paper feeder driver PCA (1x500PF) RM1-6987-000CN 1 8 Roller, feed, paper feeder (included in service kit) CE710-67908 2 9 Label, cassette number (1x500PF) 5851-5600 1 A03 Connector, 8P (1x500PF) VS1-7514-008CN 1 1x500 paper feeder 581 1x500PF PCA Figure 4-18 1x500PF PCA 1 582 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-22 1x500PF PCA ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Paper feeder driver PCA (1x500PF) RM1-6987-000CN 1 1x500 paper feeder 583 3x500 paper feeder The 3x500 paper feeder is referred to as the 3x500PF. 3x500PF external components Figure 4-19 3x500PF external components 1 7 14 *A01 8 *A01 *A01 10 9 *A02 *A01 3 12 14 11 2 4 *A01 6 13 5 *A01 584 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-23 3x500PF external components ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 4 Cover, right corner (3x500PF) RC2-9343-000CN 1 5 Cover, right lower, 1 (3x500PF) RC2-9346-000CN 1 6 Cover, right lower, 2 (3x500PF) RC2-9347-000CN 1 7 Cover, rear (3x500PF) RC2-9348-000CN 1 8 Cover, left (3x500PF) RC2-9349-000CN 1 9 Cover, left lower (3x500PF) RC2-9350-000CN 1 10 Cover, rear lower (3x500PF) RC2-9357-000CN 1 12 Right door assembly (3x500PF) RM1-6953-000CN 1 13 Front lower cover assembly (3x500PF) RM1-6958-000CN 1 14 Screw, stepped (3x500PF) RS5-9099-000CN 3 3x500 paper feeder 585 3x500PF internal components Figure 4-20 3x500PF internal components (J33LA) (J33LB) (J2001) (J2003) (J2002) 12 (J2001B) (J2002B) 11 *A19 (J701D) (J2003B) 12 (J2001C) *A07 5 (J702D) 5 (J801D) (J2003C) *A19 (J802D) 5 (J901D) (J902D) *A07 10 *A16 *A21 *A09 *A10 *A03 *A05 18 (J33LH) *A14 *A15 1 *A17 *A15 *A12 *A08 *A02 *A06 (M1) (J704) (M81) (J804) (M91) (J904) *A20 *A04 *A20 3 *A01 (SW1) 13 14 2 *A13 *A15 *A15 *A15 17 *A11 *A18 15 15 16 *A15 *A01 7 9 17 *A18 *A15 *A18 16 (J2004) *A18 4 (J2004B) (J703D) (J704) (J2004C) (J803D) (J804) 4 6 (J2005) 19 586 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams 8 (J705) (J903D) (J904) 4 ENWW Table 4-24 3x500PF internal components ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Motor, stepping, DC (3x500PF) RK2-1331-000CN 3 2 Rail, cassette, right (3x500PF) RL1-1390-000CN 3 3 Rail, cassette, left (3x500PF) RL1-1391-000CN 3 4 Cable, paper pick-up option (3x500PF) RM1-3575-000CN 3 5 Cable, multisensor (3x500PF) RM1-3647-000CN 3 6 Cable, door open switch (3x500PF) RM1-3651-000CN 1 7 Lifter drive assembly (3x500PF) RM1-3819-000CN 3 8 Cassette (3x500PF) CF235-67917 1 9 Paper pick-up assembly (3x500PF) RM1-6944-000CN 3 10 Feeder PCA (3x500PF) RM1-6989-000CN 1 11 Cable, engine interface (3x500PF) RM1-6991-000CN 1 12 Cable, PCA joint (3x500PF) RM1-6992-000CN 2 13 Switch, button (3x500PF) WC2-5512-000CN 1 14 Roller, pick-up (included in the service kit; 3x500PF) CC522-67909 1 16 Caster, double lock, front (3x500PF) RC1-9896-000CN 2 17 Caster, rear RC3-2994-000 1 18 Connector, 8P (3x500PF) VS1-7500-008CN 1 19 Label, cassette number (3x500PF) 5851-5600 1 3x500 paper feeder 587 3x500PF cassette Figure 4-21 3x500PF cassette 588 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-25 3x500PF cassette Ref ENWW Description Part number Qty Cassette (3x500PF) CF235-67917 3 3x500 paper feeder 589 3x500PF PCAs Figure 4-22 3x500PF PCAs 1 1 1 590 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-26 3x500PF PCAs ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Feeder PCAs (3x500PF) RM1-6989-000CN 3 3x500 paper feeder 591 Alphabetical parts list Table 4-27 Alphabetical parts list Description Part number Table and page Arm, front cover, 1 RC2-6732-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Arm, front cover, 2 RC2-6733-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Arm, ITB coupling release RC2-6824-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Arm, waste toner, left RC2-7035-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Arm, waste toner, right RC2-7036-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Auto close assembly RM1-6036-000CN Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 Cable assembly, flat-flexible RM1-6804-000CN Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 Cable, door open switch (3x500PF) RM1-3651-000CN 3x500PF internal components on page 587 Cable, engine interface (3x500PF) RM1-6991-000CN 3x500PF internal components on page 587 Cable, feed joint, duplex model RM1-6846-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Cable, left, high-voltage power supply to low-voltage power supply RM1-6833-000CN Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 Cable, low-voltage AC joint RM1-6811-000CN Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 Cable, low-voltage power supply RM1-6807-000CN Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 Cable, low-voltage power supply, test RM1-6813-000CN Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 Cable, multisensor (3x500PF) RM1-3647-000CN 3x500PF internal components on page 587 Cable, paper pick-up option (3x500PF) RM1-3575-000CN 3x500PF internal components on page 587 Cable, PCA joint (3x500PF) RM1-6992-000CN 3x500PF internal components on page 587 Cable, PNL-H-HI RM1-6849-000CN Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 Cable, primary transfer RM1-6822-000CN Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 Cable, rear RM1-6863-000CN Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 592 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-27 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page Cable, SB joint, low-voltage power supply, duplex model RM1-6867-000CN Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Cable, switch RM1-6830-000CN Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 Cable, USB RK2-2901-000CN External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 Cap, T2 contact, second-transfer high-voltage PCA RC2-6691-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Cassette (1x500PF) CF235-67917 1x500PF internal components on page 581 Cassette (3x500PF) CF235-67917 3x500PF internal components on page 587 Cassette (3x500PF) CF235-67917 3x500PF cassette on page 589 Caster, double lock, front (3x500PF) RC1-9896-000CN 3x500PF internal components on page 587 Caster, rear RC3-2994-000 3x500PF internal components on page 587 Clamp, edge RC2-6663-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Clamp, edge, D RC2-6674-000CN Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 Connector, 8-pin, paper-pick-up VS1-7514-008CN Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 Connector, 8P (1x500PF) VS1-7514-008CN 1x500PF internal components on page 581 Connector, 8P (3x500PF) VS1-7500-008CN 3x500PF internal components on page 587 Connector, snap tight, black VS1-7207-019CN Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Core, ring WE8-6639-000CN Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 Cover, cable, protective RC2-6832-000CN Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Cover, cable, right rear RC2-8424-000CN Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 Cover, connector, lower RC2-6642-000CN Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Cover, duplexing gear, duplex model RC2-6931-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Cover, front assembly CE707-67902 External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 Cover, gear, simplex model RC3-0688-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Alphabetical parts list 593 Table 4-27 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Cover, guide RC2-7204-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Cover, handle guide RC2-6670-000CN Internal components (2 of 9) on page 555 Cover, handle, lower (1x500PF) RC2-9332-000CN 1x500PF external components on page 579 Cover, handle, lower-left RC2-6625-000CN External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 Cover, handle, lower-right, front RC2-6627-000CN External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 Cover, handle, lower-right, rear RC2-6626-000CN External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 Cover, imaging HVT cable RC2-6573-000CN Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 Cover, left (1x500PF) RC2-9331-000CN 1x500PF external components on page 579 Cover, left (3x500PF) RC2-9349-000CN 3x500PF external components on page 585 Cover, left assembly RM1-7143-000CN External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 Cover, left lower (3x500PF) RC2-9350-000CN 3x500PF external components on page 585 Cover, lower front RC2-6737-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Cover, main cross-member cable RC2-6650-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Cover, main drive cable, lower RC2-6574-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Cover, rear RM1-7147-000CN External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 Cover, rear (1x500PF) RC2-9330-000CN 1x500PF external components on page 579 Cover, rear (3x500PF) RC2-9348-000CN 3x500PF external components on page 585 Cover, rear lower (3x500PF) RC2-9357-000CN 3x500PF external components on page 585 Cover, right corner (3x500PF) RC2-9343-000CN 3x500PF external components on page 585 Cover, right front (1x500PF) RC2-9320-000CN 1x500PF external components on page 579 Cover, right front assembly (includes control panel) RM1-7144-000CN External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 594 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-27 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page Cover, right lower assembly (1x500PF) RM1-6948-000CN 1x500PF external components on page 579 Cover, right lower, 1 (3x500PF) RC2-9346-000CN 3x500PF external components on page 585 Cover, right lower, 2 (3x500PF) RC2-9347-000CN 3x500PF external components on page 585 Cover, right rear RM1-7142-000CN External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 Cover, top RM1-7148-000CN External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 Cover, upper front assembly (1x500PF) RM1-6949-000CN 1x500PF external components on page 579 Cover, waste toner, 2 RC2-6962-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Cover, waste toner, 3 RC2-6963-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Cross-member, cover, left RC2-6760-000CN Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 DC Controller PCA (duplex model) CE708-67902 PCAs on page 577 DC Controller PCA (simplex model) CE707-67906 PCAs on page 577 DC motor assembly RM1-6088-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Door, inner, service kit includes all labels CC522-67906 Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Door, right upper RC2-7091-000CN Right door assembly on page 551 Door, toner collection unit access RC2-7034-000CN External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 Drive assembly, duplex reverse, duplex model RM1-6005-000CN Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Drive assembly, simplex reverse, simplex model RM1-6120-000CN Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Driver PCA (duplex model) RM1-6742-000CN PCAs on page 577 Driver PCA (simplex model) RM1-6783-000CN PCAs on page 577 Duct, fan, 1 RC2-8388-000CN Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 Duct, front RC2-7300-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Duct, joint RC2-8360-000CN Internal components (5 of 9) on page 561 Environment sensor PCA RK2-2884-000CN PCAs on page 577 Alphabetical parts list 595 Table 4-27 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Fan, formatter RK2-3301-000CN Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 Fan, fuser RK2-2728-000CN Internal components (2 of 9) on page 555 Fan, power supply RK2-2276-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Feeder PCA (3x500PF) RM1-6989-000CN 3x500PF internal components on page 587 Feeder PCAs (3x500PF) RM1-6989-000CN 3x500PF PCAs on page 591 Formatter case RM1-6065-000CN Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 Formatter, replacement kit D3L08-67901 PCAs on page 577 Formatter, replacement kit (China) D3L08-67902 PCAs on page 577 Front lower cover assembly (3x500PF) RM1-6958-000CN 3x500PF external components on page 585 Fuser assembly, 110V (included in service kit) CE707-67912 Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Fuser assembly, 220V (included in service kit) CE707-67913 Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Fuser drive assembly CE707-67904 Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Fuser motor assembly RM1-6074-000CN Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Gear assembly, fuser RM1-7914-060CN Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Gear, 18T/29T RU6-0775-000CN Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Gear, 25T, duplex model RU6-0771-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Gear, 25T, duplex model RU6-0772-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Gear, 74T, duplex model RU6-0773-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Gear, link worm RU6-0795-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Guide, arm, front RC2-6632-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Guide, cable RC3-0684-000CN Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 Guide, cable, right RC2-6842-000CN Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 Guide, cable, upper RC2-6841-000CN Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 596 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-27 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page Guide, cross-member cable, front RC2-6587-000CN Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 Guide, cross-member cable, rear RC2-6588-000CN Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 Guide, DC cont. support cable RC2-6665-000CN Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 Guide, fuser AC cable RC2-6693-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Guide, fuser, front RC2-6546-000CN Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Guide, fuser, rear RC2-6547-000CN Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Guide, imaging HVT cable RC2-6661-000CN Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 Guide, inside cable RC2-6589-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Guide, laser RC2-6628-000CN Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 Guide, LVT cable RC2-6662-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Guide, main cross-member cable RC2-6600-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Guide, main drive cable RC2-6659-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Guide, paper feed RC2-7297-000CN Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Guide, slide RC2-7203-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Handle, lock, rear (1x500PF) RC2-9303-000CN 1x500PF external components on page 579 Hinge, front cover, center RC2-6738-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Hinge, front cover, left RC2-6713-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Hinge, front cover, right RC2-6715-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Hinge, inner door, left RC2-6716-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Hinge, inner door, right RC2-6712-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Hinge, right door, front RC2-7094-000CN Internal components (5 of 9) on page 561 Alphabetical parts list 597 Table 4-27 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Holder, door sensor, right RC2-6645-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Holder, duplexing fan RC2-8357-000CN Internal components (2 of 9) on page 555 Holder, first power dispatching RC2-6680-000CN Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 Holder, flat flexible cable RC2-6655-000CN Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 Holder, formatter fan RC2-6648-000CN Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 Holder, interlock switch RC2-6689-000CN Internal components (2 of 9) on page 555 Holder, paper pick-up connector RC2-6638-000CN Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 Holder, power supply fan RC2-7299-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Holder, secondary transfer HVT RC2-6681-010CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Holder, secondary transfer, power dispatching RC2-6682-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Holder, switch RC2-6666-000CN Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 Hook, duplexing spring, duplex model RC2-6932-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Imaging high-voltage PCA RM1-6800-000CN PCAs on page 577 Inter connect board (ICB) PCA CE707-67907 PCAs on page 577 IT belt guide rail assembly RM1-6018-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 IT belt guide rail R1 assembly RM1-6037-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 ITB assembly (included in the service kit; includes transfer roller) CC522-67911 Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 ITB guide rail assembly RM1-6019-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Label, cassette number (1x500PF) 5851-5600 1x500PF internal components on page 581 Label, cassette number (3x500PF) 5851-5600 3x500PF internal components on page 587 Label, fuser insert RU6-8042-000CN Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Label, ITB insert, FH RU5-8806-000CN Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 598 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-27 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page Label, ITB insert, FV RU5-8804-000CN Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 Label, ITB set, RH RU5-8807-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Label, ITB, RV RU5-8805-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Laser scanner assembly RM1-6122-070CN Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 Lever, inner door pressure RC2-6744-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Lever, lift, 1 RC2-7199-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Lever, lift, 2 RC2-7200-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Lever, push RC2-7198-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Lifter drive assembly RM1-6039-000CN Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 Lifter drive assembly (1x500PF) RM1-3819-000CN 1x500PF internal components on page 581 Lifter drive assembly (3x500PF) RM1-3819-000CN 3x500PF internal components on page 587 Lifter plate assembly, Tray 1 RM1-6043-000 Right door assembly on page 551 Link, ITB coupling release RC2-6823-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Link, right door, 2 front RC2-7233-000CN Internal components (5 of 9) on page 561 Link, right door, 2 rear RC2-7236-000CN Internal components (5 of 9) on page 561 Link, right door, lower (1x500PF) RC2-9327-000CN 1x500PF external components on page 579 Link, right door, upper (1x500PF) RC2-9335-000CN 1x500PF external components on page 579 Lock, door link, right RC2-7234-000CN Internal components (5 of 9) on page 561 Low voltage power supply assembly, 110V RM1-6753-000CN Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 Low voltage power supply assembly, 220V RM1-6754-000CN Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 Low-voltage power supply PCA (110V) RM1-6753-000CN PCAs on page 577 Low-voltage power supply PCA (220V) RM1-6754-000CN PCAs on page 577 Alphabetical parts list 599 Table 4-27 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Main drive assembly, duplex model CE708-67901 Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Main drive assembly, simplex model CE707-67905 Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Microswitch WC4-5251-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Motor, pick-up (1x500PF) RK2-1331-000CN 1x500PF internal components on page 581 Motor, stepping, DC (3x500PF) RK2-1331-000CN 3x500PF internal components on page 587 Motor, stepping, DC, duplex model RK2-3298-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Motor, stepping, DC, simplex model RK2-3298-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Mount, cover arm, front RC2-6735-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Mount, inner door rail RC2-6743-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Mount, inner door toggle RC2-6717-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Mount, stopper arm RC2-6745-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Paper delivery assembly RM1-6165-000CN Paper delivery assembly on page 575 Paper feeder driver PCA (1x500PF) RM1-6987-000CN 1x500PF internal components on page 581 Paper feeder driver PCA (1x500PF) RM1-6987-000CN 1x500PF PCA on page 583 Paper pick-up assembly CE707-67903 Paper pick-up assembly on page 573 Paper pick-up assembly (1x500PF) RM1-6944-000CN 1x500PF internal components on page 581 Paper pick-up assembly (3x500PF) RM1-6944-000CN 3x500PF internal components on page 587 Pick roller and separation pad, Tray 1 (included in the service kit) CC522-67928 Right door assembly on page 551 Plate, arm reinforcement RC2-9649-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Plate, box pillar RC2-6673-000CN Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 Plate, duplexing drive gear RL1-2266-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Plate, FFC protective RC2-9687-000CN Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 600 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-27 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page Plate, right door link, fixed, front RL1-2281-000CN Internal components (5 of 9) on page 561 Plate, right door link, fixed, rear RL1-2282-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Plate, right door link, front RC2-7272-000CN Internal components (5 of 9) on page 561 Plate, right door link, rear RC2-7273-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Power switch PCA RM1-6759-000CN PCAs on page 577 Primary transfer high-voltage PCA RM1-7004-000CN PCAs on page 577 Rail, cartridge auxiliary RC2-6724-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Rail, cassette, left (3x500PF) RL1-1391-000CN 3x500PF internal components on page 587 Rail, cassette, right (3x500PF) RL1-1390-000CN 3x500PF internal components on page 587 Rail, door link, front lower RC2-6634-000CN Internal components (5 of 9) on page 561 Rail, door link, rear lower RC2-6635-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Rail, ITB guide RC2-7185-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Rail, ITB guide, F3 RC2-7193-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Registration sensor assembly RM1-7922-000CN Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Right door assembly (1x500PF) RM1-6946-000CN 1x500PF external components on page 579 Right door assembly (3x500PF) RM1-6953-000CN 3x500PF external components on page 585 Right door assembly, duplex model RM1-6007-000CN Right door assembly on page 551 Right door assembly, simplex model RM1-6138-000CN Right door assembly on page 551 Roller, feed, paper feeder (included in service kit) CE710-67908 1x500PF internal components on page 581 Roller, paper pick-up, Tray 1 (included in the service kit) CC522-67928 Right door assembly on page 551 Roller, pick-up (included in the service kit; 3x500PF) CC522-67909 3x500PF internal components on page 587 Roller, secondary transfer, T2 (included in the service kit) CC522-67912 Right door assembly on page 551 Alphabetical parts list 601 Table 4-27 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Screw, stepped (3x500PF) RS5-9099-000CN 3x500PF external components on page 585 Seal, slide shutter RC3-1014-000CN Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 Seal, toner supporter guide 1 RC2-7018-000CN Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 Secondary transfer high-voltage PCA RM1-6802-000CN PCAs on page 577 Sensor, cassette last paper presence RM1-6164-000CN Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Sensor, right door WG8-5935-000 Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Shaft, right door link RU5-4979-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Sheet, slide seal RC3-1013-000CN Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 Shutter, exhaust RC2-7010-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Slider, push RC2-7201-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Spacer, DC controller PCA VT2-5176-004CN Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 Spring, compression RU6-2721-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Spring, compression RU6-2683-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Spring, contact RU6-2767-000CN Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 Spring, contact RU6-2768-000CN Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 Spring, contact, second-transfer high-voltage PCA RU6-2771-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Spring, grounding RC2-7209-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Spring, grounding, second-transfer high-voltage PCA RU6-2772-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Spring, grounding, second-transfer high-voltage PCA RC2-6700-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Spring, leaf, grounding RC2-7092-000CN Internal components (2 of 9) on page 555 Spring, rod RC2-6611-000CN Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 Spring, tension RU6-2831-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 602 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-27 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page Spring, tension, duplex model RU6-2671-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Spring, tension, front RU6-2727-000CN Internal components (5 of 9) on page 561 Spring, tension, rear RU6-2744-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Spring, tension, registration sensor RU6-2710-000CN Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Stopper, inner door, 1 RC2-6719-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Stopper, inner door, 2 RC2-6736-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Stopper, laser RC2-6646-000CN Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 Support, developing coupling RC2-6811-000CN Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Support, frame, front RC2-7196-000CN Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Support, frame, rear RC2-7197-000CN Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Switch, bottom (1x500PF) WC2-5512-000CN 1x500PF internal components on page 581 Switch, button (3x500PF) WC2-5512-000CN 3x500PF internal components on page 587 Toner collection unit (included in the service kit) CE980-67901 Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Toner feed assembly RM1-6040-000CN Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 Toner remaining detect PCA RM1-6779-000CN PCAs on page 577 Tray 1 (MP tray) assembly RM1-6045-000CN Right door assembly on page 551 Tray 2 pickup and separation roller assembly (included in service kit) CE710-69007 Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 Tray 2 replacement, gray CE710-67907 1x250 cassette on page 571 Upper cartridge guide assembly RM1-5990-000CN Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 Waste toner cover assembly (includes Residual Toner Full Sensor) RM1-6012-000CN Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 Alphabetical parts list 603 Numerical parts list Table 4-28 Numerical parts list Part number Description Table and page 5851-5600 Label, cassette number (1x500PF) 1x500PF internal components on page 581 5851-5600 Label, cassette number (3x500PF) 3x500PF internal components on page 587 CC522-67906 Door, inner, service kit includes all labels Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 CC522-67909 Roller, pick-up (included in the service kit; 3x500PF) 3x500PF internal components on page 587 CC522-67911 ITB assembly (included in the service kit; includes transfer roller) Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 CC522-67912 Roller, secondary transfer, T2 (included in the service kit) Right door assembly on page 551 CC522-67928 Roller, paper pick-up, Tray 1 (included in the service kit) Right door assembly on page 551 CC522-67928 Pick roller and separation pad, Tray 1 (included in the service kit) Right door assembly on page 551 CE707-67902 Cover, front assembly External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 CE707-67903 Paper pick-up assembly Paper pick-up assembly on page 573 CE707-67904 Fuser drive assembly Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 CE707-67905 Main drive assembly, simplex model Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 CE707-67906 DC Controller PCA (simplex model) PCAs on page 577 CE707-67907 Inter connect board (ICB) PCA PCAs on page 577 CE707-67912 Fuser assembly, 110V (included in service kit) Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 CE707-67913 Fuser assembly, 220V (included in service kit) Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 CE708-67901 Main drive assembly, duplex model Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 CE708-67902 DC Controller PCA (duplex model) PCAs on page 577 CE710-67907 Tray 2 replacement, gray 1x250 cassette on page 571 CE710-67908 Roller, feed, paper feeder (included in service kit) 1x500PF internal components on page 581 CE710-69007 Tray 2 pickup and separation roller assembly (included in service kit) Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 CE980-67901 Toner collection unit (included in the service kit) Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 604 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-28 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page CF235-67917 Cassette (1x500PF) 1x500PF internal components on page 581 CF235-67917 Cassette (3x500PF) 3x500PF internal components on page 587 CF235-67917 Cassette (3x500PF) 3x500PF cassette on page 589 D3L08-67901 Formatter, replacement kit PCAs on page 577 D3L08-67902 Formatter, replacement kit (China) PCAs on page 577 RC1-9896-000CN Caster, double lock, front (3x500PF) 3x500PF internal components on page 587 RC2-6546-000CN Guide, fuser, front Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 RC2-6547-000CN Guide, fuser, rear Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 RC2-6573-000CN Cover, imaging HVT cable Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 RC2-6574-000CN Cover, main drive cable, lower Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RC2-6587-000CN Guide, cross-member cable, front Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 RC2-6588-000CN Guide, cross-member cable, rear Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 RC2-6589-000CN Guide, inside cable Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RC2-6600-000CN Guide, main cross-member cable Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RC2-6611-000CN Spring, rod Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 RC2-6625-000CN Cover, handle, lower-left External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 RC2-6626-000CN Cover, handle, lower-right, rear External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 RC2-6627-000CN Cover, handle, lower-right, front External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 RC2-6628-000CN Guide, laser Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 RC2-6632-000CN Guide, arm, front Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-6634-000CN Rail, door link, front lower Internal components (5 of 9) on page 561 RC2-6635-000CN Rail, door link, rear lower Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RC2-6638-000CN Holder, paper pick-up connector Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 Numerical parts list 605 Table 4-28 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number Description Table and page RC2-6642-000CN Cover, connector, lower Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 RC2-6645-000CN Holder, door sensor, right Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RC2-6646-000CN Stopper, laser Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 RC2-6648-000CN Holder, formatter fan Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 RC2-6650-000CN Cover, main cross-member cable Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RC2-6655-000CN Holder, flat flexible cable Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 RC2-6659-000CN Guide, main drive cable Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RC2-6661-000CN Guide, imaging HVT cable Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 RC2-6662-000CN Guide, LVT cable Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RC2-6663-000CN Clamp, edge Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RC2-6665-000CN Guide, DC cont. support cable Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 RC2-6666-000CN Holder, switch Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 RC2-6670-000CN Cover, handle guide Internal components (2 of 9) on page 555 RC2-6673-000CN Plate, box pillar Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 RC2-6674-000CN Clamp, edge, D Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 RC2-6680-000CN Holder, first power dispatching Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 RC2-6681-010CN Holder, secondary transfer HVT Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RC2-6682-000CN Holder, secondary transfer, power dispatching Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RC2-6689-000CN Holder, interlock switch Internal components (2 of 9) on page 555 RC2-6691-000CN Cap, T2 contact, second-transfer high-voltage PCA Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RC2-6693-000CN Guide, fuser AC cable Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 606 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-28 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page RC2-6700-000CN Spring, grounding, second-transfer high-voltage PCA Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RC2-6712-000CN Hinge, inner door, right Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-6713-000CN Hinge, front cover, left Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-6715-000CN Hinge, front cover, right Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-6716-000CN Hinge, inner door, left Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-6717-000CN Mount, inner door toggle Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-6719-000CN Stopper, inner door, 1 Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-6724-000CN Rail, cartridge auxiliary Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-6732-000CN Arm, front cover, 1 Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-6733-000CN Arm, front cover, 2 Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-6735-000CN Mount, cover arm, front Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-6736-000CN Stopper, inner door, 2 Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-6737-000CN Cover, lower front Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-6738-000CN Hinge, front cover, center Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-6743-000CN Mount, inner door rail Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-6744-000CN Lever, inner door pressure Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-6745-000CN Mount, stopper arm Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-6760-000CN Cross-member, cover, left Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 RC2-6811-000CN Support, developing coupling Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RC2-6823-000CN Link, ITB coupling release Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RC2-6824-000CN Arm, ITB coupling release Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Numerical parts list 607 Table 4-28 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number Description Table and page RC2-6832-000CN Cover, cable, protective Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 RC2-6841-000CN Guide, cable, upper Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 RC2-6842-000CN Guide, cable, right Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 RC2-6931-000CN Cover, duplexing gear, duplex model Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RC2-6932-000CN Hook, duplexing spring, duplex model Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RC2-6962-000CN Cover, waste toner, 2 Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RC2-6963-000CN Cover, waste toner, 3 Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RC2-7010-000CN Shutter, exhaust Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RC2-7018-000CN Seal, toner supporter guide 1 Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 RC2-7034-000CN Door, toner collection unit access External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 RC2-7035-000CN Arm, waste toner, left Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RC2-7036-000CN Arm, waste toner, right Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RC2-7091-000CN Door, right upper Right door assembly on page 551 RC2-7092-000CN Spring, leaf, grounding Internal components (2 of 9) on page 555 RC2-7094-000CN Hinge, right door, front Internal components (5 of 9) on page 561 RC2-7185-000CN Rail, ITB guide Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RC2-7193-000CN Rail, ITB guide, F3 Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RC2-7196-000CN Support, frame, front Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 RC2-7197-000CN Support, frame, rear Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 RC2-7198-000CN Lever, push Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-7199-000CN Lever, lift, 1 Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 608 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-28 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page RC2-7200-000CN Lever, lift, 2 Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-7201-000CN Slider, push Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RC2-7203-000CN Guide, slide Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RC2-7204-000CN Cover, guide Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-7209-000CN Spring, grounding Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-7233-000CN Link, right door, 2 front Internal components (5 of 9) on page 561 RC2-7234-000CN Lock, door link, right Internal components (5 of 9) on page 561 RC2-7236-000CN Link, right door, 2 rear Internal components (5 of 9) on page 561 RC2-7272-000CN Plate, right door link, front Internal components (5 of 9) on page 561 RC2-7273-000CN Plate, right door link, rear Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RC2-7297-000CN Guide, paper feed Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 RC2-7299-000CN Holder, power supply fan Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RC2-7300-000CN Duct, front Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RC2-8357-000CN Holder, duplexing fan Internal components (2 of 9) on page 555 RC2-8360-000CN Duct, joint Internal components (5 of 9) on page 561 RC2-8388-000CN Duct, fan, 1 Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 RC2-8424-000CN Cover, cable, right rear Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 RC2-9303-000CN Handle, lock, rear (1x500PF) 1x500PF external components on page 579 RC2-9320-000CN Cover, right front (1x500PF) 1x500PF external components on page 579 RC2-9327-000CN Link, right door, lower (1x500PF) 1x500PF external components on page 579 RC2-9330-000CN Cover, rear (1x500PF) 1x500PF external components on page 579 Numerical parts list 609 Table 4-28 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number Description Table and page RC2-9331-000CN Cover, left (1x500PF) 1x500PF external components on page 579 RC2-9332-000CN Cover, handle, lower (1x500PF) 1x500PF external components on page 579 RC2-9335-000CN Link, right door, upper (1x500PF) 1x500PF external components on page 579 RC2-9343-000CN Cover, right corner (3x500PF) 3x500PF external components on page 585 RC2-9346-000CN Cover, right lower, 1 (3x500PF) 3x500PF external components on page 585 RC2-9347-000CN Cover, right lower, 2 (3x500PF) 3x500PF external components on page 585 RC2-9348-000CN Cover, rear (3x500PF) 3x500PF external components on page 585 RC2-9349-000CN Cover, left (3x500PF) 3x500PF external components on page 585 RC2-9350-000CN Cover, left lower (3x500PF) 3x500PF external components on page 585 RC2-9357-000CN Cover, rear lower (3x500PF) 3x500PF external components on page 585 RC2-9649-000CN Plate, arm reinforcement Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RC2-9687-000CN Plate, FFC protective Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 RC3-0684-000CN Guide, cable Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 RC3-0688-000CN Cover, gear, simplex model Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RC3-1013-000CN Sheet, slide seal Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 RC3-1014-000CN Seal, slide shutter Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 RC3-2994-000 Caster, rear 3x500PF internal components on page 587 RK2-1331-000CN Motor, pick-up (1x500PF) 1x500PF internal components on page 581 RK2-1331-000CN Motor, stepping, DC (3x500PF) 3x500PF internal components on page 587 RK2-2276-000CN Fan, power supply Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RK2-2728-000CN Fan, fuser Internal components (2 of 9) on page 555 RK2-2884-000CN Environment sensor PCA PCAs on page 577 610 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-28 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page RK2-2901-000CN Cable, USB External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 RK2-3298-000CN Motor, stepping, DC, duplex model Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RK2-3298-000CN Motor, stepping, DC, simplex model Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RK2-3301-000CN Fan, formatter Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 RL1-1390-000CN Rail, cassette, right (3x500PF) 3x500PF internal components on page 587 RL1-1391-000CN Rail, cassette, left (3x500PF) 3x500PF internal components on page 587 RL1-2266-000CN Plate, duplexing drive gear Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RL1-2281-000CN Plate, right door link, fixed, front Internal components (5 of 9) on page 561 RL1-2282-000CN Plate, right door link, fixed, rear Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RM1-3575-000CN Cable, paper pick-up option (3x500PF) 3x500PF internal components on page 587 RM1-3647-000CN Cable, multisensor (3x500PF) 3x500PF internal components on page 587 RM1-3651-000CN Cable, door open switch (3x500PF) 3x500PF internal components on page 587 RM1-3819-000CN Lifter drive assembly (1x500PF) 1x500PF internal components on page 581 RM1-3819-000CN Lifter drive assembly (3x500PF) 3x500PF internal components on page 587 RM1-5990-000CN Upper cartridge guide assembly Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RM1-6005-000CN Drive assembly, duplex reverse, duplex model Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 RM1-6007-000CN Right door assembly, duplex model Right door assembly on page 551 RM1-6012-000CN Waste toner cover assembly (includes Residual Toner Full Sensor) Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RM1-6018-000CN IT belt guide rail assembly Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RM1-6019-000CN ITB guide rail assembly Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RM1-6036-000CN Auto close assembly Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 Numerical parts list 611 Table 4-28 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number Description Table and page RM1-6037-000CN IT belt guide rail R1 assembly Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RM1-6039-000CN Lifter drive assembly Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 RM1-6040-000CN Toner feed assembly Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 RM1-6043-000 Lifter plate assembly, Tray 1 Right door assembly on page 551 RM1-6045-000CN Tray 1 (MP tray) assembly Right door assembly on page 551 RM1-6065-000CN Formatter case Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 RM1-6074-000CN Fuser motor assembly Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 RM1-6088-000CN DC motor assembly Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RM1-6120-000CN Drive assembly, simplex reverse, simplex model Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 RM1-6122-070CN Laser scanner assembly Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 RM1-6138-000CN Right door assembly, simplex model Right door assembly on page 551 RM1-6164-000CN Sensor, cassette last paper presence Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 RM1-6165-000CN Paper delivery assembly Paper delivery assembly on page 575 RM1-6742-000CN Driver PCA (duplex model) PCAs on page 577 RM1-6753-000CN Low voltage power supply assembly, 110V Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 RM1-6753-000CN Low-voltage power supply PCA (110V) PCAs on page 577 RM1-6754-000CN Low voltage power supply assembly, 220V Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 RM1-6754-000CN Low-voltage power supply PCA (220V) PCAs on page 577 RM1-6759-000CN Power switch PCA PCAs on page 577 RM1-6779-000CN Toner remaining detect PCA PCAs on page 577 RM1-6783-000CN Driver PCA (simplex model) PCAs on page 577 RM1-6800-000CN Imaging high-voltage PCA PCAs on page 577 RM1-6802-000CN Secondary transfer high-voltage PCA PCAs on page 577 RM1-6804-000CN Cable assembly, flat-flexible Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 612 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-28 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page RM1-6807-000CN Cable, low-voltage power supply Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 RM1-6811-000CN Cable, low-voltage AC joint Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 RM1-6813-000CN Cable, low-voltage power supply, test Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 RM1-6822-000CN Cable, primary transfer Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 RM1-6830-000CN Cable, switch Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 RM1-6833-000CN Cable, left, high-voltage power supply to low-voltage power supply Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 RM1-6846-000CN Cable, feed joint, duplex model Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RM1-6849-000CN Cable, PNL-H-HI Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 RM1-6863-000CN Cable, rear Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 RM1-6867-000CN Cable, SB joint, low-voltage power supply, duplex model Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 RM1-6944-000CN Paper pick-up assembly (1x500PF) 1x500PF internal components on page 581 RM1-6944-000CN Paper pick-up assembly (3x500PF) 3x500PF internal components on page 587 RM1-6946-000CN Right door assembly (1x500PF) 1x500PF external components on page 579 RM1-6948-000CN Cover, right lower assembly (1x500PF) 1x500PF external components on page 579 RM1-6949-000CN Cover, upper front assembly (1x500PF) 1x500PF external components on page 579 RM1-6953-000CN Right door assembly (3x500PF) 3x500PF external components on page 585 RM1-6958-000CN Front lower cover assembly (3x500PF) 3x500PF external components on page 585 RM1-6987-000CN Paper feeder driver PCA (1x500PF) 1x500PF internal components on page 581 RM1-6987-000CN Paper feeder driver PCA (1x500PF) 1x500PF PCA on page 583 RM1-6989-000CN Feeder PCA (3x500PF) 3x500PF internal components on page 587 RM1-6989-000CN Feeder PCAs (3x500PF) 3x500PF PCAs on page 591 RM1-6991-000CN Cable, engine interface (3x500PF) 3x500PF internal components on page 587 Numerical parts list 613 Table 4-28 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number Description Table and page RM1-6992-000CN Cable, PCA joint (3x500PF) 3x500PF internal components on page 587 RM1-7004-000CN Primary transfer high-voltage PCA PCAs on page 577 RM1-7142-000CN Cover, right rear External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 RM1-7143-000CN Cover, left assembly External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 RM1-7144-000CN Cover, right front assembly (includes control panel) External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 RM1-7147-000CN Cover, rear External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 RM1-7148-000CN Cover, top External covers, panels, and doors on page 549 RM1-7914-060CN Gear assembly, fuser Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 RM1-7922-000CN Registration sensor assembly Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 RS5-9099-000CN Screw, stepped (3x500PF) 3x500PF external components on page 585 RU5-4979-000CN Shaft, right door link Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RU5-8804-000CN Label, ITB insert, FV Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 RU5-8805-000CN Label, ITB, RV Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RU5-8806-000CN Label, ITB insert, FH Internal components (7 of 9) on page 565 RU5-8807-000CN Label, ITB set, RH Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RU6-0771-000CN Gear, 25T, duplex model Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RU6-0772-000CN Gear, 25T, duplex model Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RU6-0773-000CN Gear, 74T, duplex model Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RU6-0775-000CN Gear, 18T/29T Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 RU6-0795-000CN Gear, link worm Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RU6-2671-000CN Spring, tension, duplex model Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RU6-2683-000CN Spring, compression Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 614 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-28 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page RU6-2710-000CN Spring, tension, registration sensor Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 RU6-2721-000CN Spring, compression Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 RU6-2727-000CN Spring, tension, front Internal components (5 of 9) on page 561 RU6-2744-000CN Spring, tension, rear Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RU6-2767-000CN Spring, contact Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 RU6-2768-000CN Spring, contact Internal components (8 of 9) on page 567 RU6-2771-000CN Spring, contact, second-transfer high-voltage PCA Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RU6-2772-000CN Spring, grounding, second-transfer high-voltage PCA Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 RU6-2831-000CN Spring, tension Internal components (6 of 9) on page 563 RU6-8042-000CN Label, fuser insert Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 VS1-7207-019CN Connector, snap tight, black Internal components (3 of 9) on page 557 VS1-7500-008CN Connector, 8P (3x500PF) 3x500PF internal components on page 587 VS1-7514-008CN Connector, 8-pin, paper-pick-up Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 VS1-7514-008CN Connector, 8P (1x500PF) 1x500PF internal components on page 581 VT2-5176-004CN Spacer, DC controller PCA Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 WC2-5512-000CN Switch, bottom (1x500PF) 1x500PF internal components on page 581 WC2-5512-000CN Switch, button (3x500PF) 3x500PF internal components on page 587 WC4-5251-000CN Microswitch Internal components (1 of 9) on page 553 WE8-6639-000CN Core, ring Internal components (9 of 9) on page 569 WG8-5935-000 Sensor, right door Internal components (4 of 9) on page 559 Numerical parts list 615 616 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW A ENWW Service and support ● Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement ● HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet toner cartridge limited warranty statement ● Color LaserJet Fuser Kit, Transfer Kit, and Roller Kit Limited Warranty Statement ● Data stored on the toner cartridge ● End User License Agreement ● Customer self-repair warranty service ● Customer support 617 Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement HP PRODUCT DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY HP Color LaserJet M7505n, M750dn, M750xh One-year on-site warranty HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new. HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects. HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product. HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use. Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country/region to country/region, state to state, or province to province. HP's limited warranty is valid in any country/region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country/region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU. 618 Appendix A Service and support ENWW HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet toner cartridge limited warranty statement This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship. This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refilled, refurbished, remanufactured or tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary use. To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP's option, HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU. ENWW HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet toner cartridge limited warranty statement 619 Color LaserJet Fuser Kit, Transfer Kit, and Roller Kit Limited Warranty Statement This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship until the printer provides a low-life indicator on the control panel. This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refurbished, remanufactured or tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary use. To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of the problem) or contact HP customer support. At HP’s option, HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU. 620 Appendix A Service and support ENWW Data stored on the toner cartridge The HP toner cartridges used with this product contain a memory chip that assists in the operation of the product. In addition, this memory chip collects a limited set of information about the usage of the product, which might include the following: the date when the toner cartridge was first installed, the date when the toner cartridge was last used, the number of pages printed using the toner cartridge, the page coverage, the printing modes used, any printing errors that might have occurred, and the product model. This information helps HP design future products to meet our customers' printing needs. The data collected from the toner cartridge memory chip does not contain information that can be used to identify a customer or user of the toner cartridge or their product. HP collects a sampling of the memory chips from toner cartridges returned to HP's free return and recycling program (HP Planet Partners: www.hp.com/recycle). The memory chips from this sampling are read and studied in order to improve future HP products. HP partners who assist in recycling this toner cartridge might have access to this data, as well. Any third party possessing the toner cartridge might have access to the anonymous information on the memory chip. ENWW Data stored on the toner cartridge 621 End User License Agreement PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT: This End-User License Agreement (“EULA”) is a contract between (a) you (either an individual or the entity you represent) and (b) HewlettPackard Company (“HP”) that governs your use of the software product (“Software”). This EULA does not apply if there is a separate license agreement between you and HP or its suppliers for the Software, including a license agreement in online documentation. The term “Software” may include (i) associated media, (ii) a user guide and other printed materials, and (iii) “online” or electronic documentation (collectively “User Documentation”). RIGHTS IN THE SOFTWARE ARE OFFERED ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT YOU AGREE TO ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA. BY INSTALLING, COPYING, DOWNLOADING, OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THIS EULA, DO NOT INSTALL, DOWNLOAD, OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE. IF YOU PURCHASED THE SOFTWARE BUT DO NOT AGREE TO THIS EULA, PLEASE RETURN THE SOFTWARE TO YOUR PLACE OF PURCHASE WITHIN FOURTEEN DAYS FOR A REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE; IF THE SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED ON OR MADE AVAILABLE WITH ANOTHER HP PRODUCT, YOU MAY RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT. 1. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. The Software may include, in addition to HP proprietary software (“HP Software”), software under licenses from third parties (“Third Party Software” and “Third Party License”). Any Third Party Software is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the corresponding Third Party License. Generally, the Third Party License is in a file such as “license.txt” or a “readme” file. You should contact HP support if you cannot find a Third Party License. If the Third Party Licenses include licenses that provide for the availability of source code (such as the GNU General Public License) and the corresponding source code is not included with the Software, then check the product support pages of HP's website (hp.com) to learn how to obtain such source code. 2. LICENSE RIGHTS. You will have the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA: 3. a. Use. HP grants you a license to Use one copy of the HP Software. “Use” means installing, copying, storing, loading, executing, displaying, or otherwise using the HP Software. You may not modify the HP Software or disable any licensing or control feature of the HP Software. If this Software is provided by HP for Use with an imaging or printing product (for example, if the Software is a printer driver, firmware, or add-on), the HP Software may only be used with such product (“HP Product”). Additional restrictions on Use may appear in the User Documentation. You may not separate component parts of the HP Software for Use. You do not have the right to distribute the HP Software. b. Copying. Your right to copy means you may make archival or back-up copies of the HP Software, provided each copy contains all the original HP Software’s proprietary notices and is used only for back-up purposes. UPGRADES. To Use HP Software provided by HP as an upgrade, update, or supplement (collectively “Upgrade”), you must first be licensed for the original HP Software identified by HP as eligible for the Upgrade. To the extent the Upgrade supersedes the original HP Software, you may no longer use such HP Software. This EULA applies to each Upgrade unless HP provides other terms with the Upgrade. In case of a conflict between this EULA and such other terms, the other terms will prevail. 622 Appendix A Service and support ENWW 4. TRANSFER. a. Third Party Transfer. The initial end user of the HP Software may make a one-time transfer of the HP Software to another end user. Any transfer will include all component parts, media, User Documentation, this EULA, and if applicable, the Certificate of Authenticity. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the transferred Software will agree to this EULA. Upon transfer of the HP Software, your license is automatically terminated. b. Restrictions. You may not rent, lease or lend the HP Software or Use the HP Software for commercial timesharing or bureau use. You may not sublicense, assign or otherwise transfer the HP Software except as expressly provided in this EULA. 5. PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. All intellectual property rights in the Software and User Documentation are owned by HP or its suppliers and are protected by law, including applicable copyright, trade secret, patent, and trademark laws. You will not remove any product identification, copyright notice, or proprietary restriction from the Software. 6. LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the HP Software, except and only to the extent that the right to do so is allowed under applicable law. 7. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. HP and its affiliates may collect and use technical information you provide in relation to (i) your Use of the Software or the HP Product, or (ii) the provision of support services related to the Software or the HP Product. All such information will be subject to HP’s privacy policy. HP will not use such information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent necessary to enhance your Use or provide support services. 8. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Notwithstanding any damages that you might incur, the entire liability of HP and its suppliers under this EULA and your exclusive remedy under this EULA will be limited to the greater of the amount actually paid by you for the Product or U.S. $5.00. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, PERSONAL INJURY, OR LOSS OF PRIVACY) RELATED IN ANY WAY TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF HP OR ANY SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND EVEN IF THE ABOVE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. Some states or other jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. 9. U.S. GOVERNMENT CUSTOMERS. Software was developed entirely at private expense. All Software is commercial computer software within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to US FAR 48 CFR 12.212 and DFAR 48 CFR 227.7202, use, duplication and disclosure of the Software by or for the U.S. Government or a U.S. Government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in this End User License Agreement, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable mandatory federal laws. 10. COMPLIANCE WITH EXPORT LAWS. You will comply with all laws, rules, and regulations (i) applicable to the export or import of the Software, or (ii) restricting the Use of the Software, including any restrictions on nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons proliferation. 11. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS. HP and its suppliers reserve all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. © 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Rev. 04/09 ENWW End User License Agreement 623 Customer self-repair warranty service HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair (CSR) parts to minimize repair time and allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement. If during the diagnosis period, HP identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will ship that part directly to you for replacement. There are two categories of CSR parts: 1) Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory. If you request HP to replace these parts, you will be charged for the travel and labor costs of this service. 2) Parts for which customer self repair is optional. These parts are also designed for Customer Self Repair. If, however, you require that HP replace them for you, this may be done at no additional charge under the type of warranty service designated for your product. Based on availability and where geography permits, CSR parts will be shipped for next business day delivery. Same-day or four-hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography permits. If assistance is required, you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will help you over the phone. HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether a defective part must be returned to HP. In cases where it is required to return the defective part to HP, you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time, normally five (5) business days. The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping material. Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement. With a customer self repair, HP will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine the courier/carrier to be used. 624 Appendix A Service and support ENWW Customer support Get telephone support for your country/region Have the product name, serial number, date of purchase, and problem description ready. Get 24-hour Internet support Download software utilities, drivers, and electronic information ENWW Country/region phone numbers are on the flyer that was in the box with your product or at www.hp.com/support/. ● In the US, go to www.hp.com/support/colorljM750. ● Outside the US, go to www.hp.com/support. Select your country/region. Click Product Support & Troubleshooting. Enter the product name, and then select Search. ● In the US, go to www.hp.com/support/colorljM750. Click Drivers & Software. ● Outside the US, go to www.hp.com/support. Select your country/region. Click Drivers & Software. Enter the product name (for example, “LaserJet M575”), and then select Search. Order additional HP service or maintenance agreements www.hp.com/go/carepack Register your product www.register.hp.com Customer support 625 626 Appendix A Service and support ENWW B ENWW Product specifications ● Physical specifications ● Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions ● Environmental specifications 627 Physical specifications Table B-1 Product dimensions Product Height Depth Width Weight HP Color LaserJet M750n 465 mm (18 in) 586 mm (23 in) 544 mm (21.4 in) 53.3 kg (117.3 lb) HP Color LaserJet M750dn 465 mm (18 in) 586 mm (23 in) 544 mm (21.4 in) 53.5 kg (117.8 lb) HP Color LaserJet M750xh 885 mm (34.8 in) 688 mm (27 in) 745 mm (29.3 in) 84 kg (184.8 lb) Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions See www.hp.com/support/colorljM750 for current information. CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the product is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. This will damage the product and void the product warranty. Environmental specifications Environmental condition Recommended Allowed Temperature (product and print cartridge) 17° to 25°C (63° to 77°F) 15° to 27°C (59° to 81°F) Relative humidity 30% to 70% relative humidity (RH) 10% to 70% RH Altitude N/A 0 m (0 ft) to 3000 m (9842 ft) 628 Appendix B Product specifications ENWW C ENWW Regulatory information ● FCC regulations ● Environmental product stewardship program ● Declaration of Conformity ● Certificate of Volatility ● Safety statements 629 FCC regulations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. NOTE: Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class A limits of Part 15 of FCC rules. 630 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Environmental product stewardship program Protecting the environment Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment. Ozone production This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O3). Power consumption Power usage drops significantly while in Ready or Sleep mode mode, which saves natural resources and saves money without affecting the high performance of this product. Hewlett-Packard printing and imaging equipment marked with the ENERGY STAR® logo is qualified to the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's ENERGY STAR specifications for imaging equipment. The following mark will appear on ENERGY STAR qualified imaging products: Additional ENERGY STAR qualified imaging product model information is listed at: www.hp.com/go/energystar Toner consumption EconoMode uses less toner, which might extend the life of the toner cartridge. HP does not recommend the full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time, the toner supply might outlast the mechanical parts in the toner cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade and is no longer acceptable, consider replacing the toner cartridge. Paper use This product’s automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) and N-up printing (multiple pages printed on one page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources. Plastics Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life. HP LaserJet print supplies It’s easy to return and recycle your HP LaserJet toner cartridges after use—free of charge—with HP Planet Partners. Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet toner cartridge and supplies package. You help reduce the toll on the environment further when you return multiple cartridges together rather than separately. ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 631 HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that are environmentally sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, customer use and recycling. When you participate in the HP Planet Partners program, we ensure your HP LaserJet toner cartridges are recycled properly, processing them to recover plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons of waste from landfills. Since this cartridge is being recycled and used in new materials, it will not be returned to you. Thank you for being environmentally responsible! NOTE: Use the return label to return original HP LaserJet toner cartridges only. Please do not use this label for HP toner cartridges, non-HP cartridges, refilled or remanufactured cartridges or warranty returns. For information about recycling your HP toner cartridges please go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Return and recycling instructions United States and Puerto Rico The enclosed label in the HP LaserJet toner cartridge box is for the return and recycling of one or more HP LaserJet toner cartridges after use. Please follow the applicable instructions below. Multiple returns (more than one cartridge) 1. Package each HP LaserJet toner cartridge in its original box and bag. 2. Tape the boxes together using strapping or packaging tape. The package can weigh up to 31 kg (70 lb). 3. Use a single pre-paid shipping label. OR 1. Use your own suitable box, or request a free bulk collection box from www.hp.com/recycle or 1-800-340-2445 (holds up to 31 kg (70 lb) of HP LaserJet toner cartridges). 2. Use a single pre-paid shipping label. Single returns 1. Package the HP LaserJet toner cartridge in its original bag and box. 2. Place the shipping label on the front of the box. Shipping For US and Puerto Rico HP LaserJet toner cartridge recycling returns, use the pre-paid, pre-addressed shipping label contained in the box. To use the UPS label, give the package to the UPS driver during your next delivery or pick-up, or take it to an authorized UPS drop-off center. (Requested UPS Ground pickup will be charged normal pick-up rates) For the location of your local UPS drop-off center, call 1-800-PICKUPS or visit www.ups.com. If you are returning the package with the FedEx label, give the package to either the U.S. Postal Service carrier or FedEx driver during your next pick-up or delivery. (Requested FedEx Ground pickup will be charged normal pick-up rates). Or, you can drop off your packaged toner cartridge(s) at any U.S. Post Office or any FedEx shipping center or store. For the location of your nearest U.S. Post Office, please call 1-800-ASK-USPS or visit www.usps.com. For the location of your nearest FedEx shipping center/store, please call 1-800GOFEDEX or visit www.fedex.com. For more information, or to order additional labels or boxes for bulk returns, visit www.hp.com/recycle or call 1-800-340-2445. Information subject to change without notice. 632 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Residents of Alaska and Hawaii Do not use the UPS label. Call 1-800-340-2445 for information and instructions. The U.S. Postal Service provides no-cost cartridge return transportation services under an arrangement with HP for Alaska and Hawaii. Non-U.S. returns To participate in HP Planet Partners return and recycling program, just follow the simple directions in the recycling guide (found inside the packaging of your new product supply item) or visit www.hp.com/recycle. Select your country/region for information on how to return your HP LaserJet printing supplies. Paper This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN12281:2002. Material restrictions This HP product does not contain added mercury. This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end-of-life. The batteries contained in or supplied by Hewlett-Packard for this product include the following: HP Laser Jet MFP M750 Type Carbon monofluoride lithium Weight 0.8 g Location On formatter board User-removable No For recycling information, you can go to www.hp.com/recycle, or contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org. ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 633 Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service, or go to: www.hp.com/recycle. Electronic hardware recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware. For more information about recycling programs go to: www.hp.com/recycle. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at: www.hp.com/go/ reach. Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies containing chemical substances (for example, toner) can be obtained by accessing the HP Web site at www.hp.com/go/msds or www.hp.com/hpinfo/community/ environment/productinfo/safety. For more information To obtain information about these environmental topics: ● Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products ● HP’s commitment to the environment ● HP’s environmental management system ● HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program ● Material Safety Data Sheets Visit www.hp.com/go/environment or www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment. 634 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Declaration of Conformity Declaration of Conformity according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1 Manufacturer's Name: Hewlett-Packard Company Manufacturer's Address: 11311 Chinden Boulevard DoC#: BOISB-0905-00 rel.1.0 Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA declares, that the product Product Name: HP LaserJet Enterprise M750 Series Including: CE860A – 500-sheet paper tray CE725A – 3x500-sheet paper tray and stand Regulatory Model Number2) BOISB-0905-00 Product Options: ALL Print Cartridges: CE270A, CE271A, CE272A, CE273A conforms to the following Product Specifications: SAFETY: IEC 60950-1:2005 / EN60950-1: 2006 IEC 60825-1:2007 / EN 60825-1:2007 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product) IEC 62311:2007 / EN62311:2008 GB4943-2001 EMC: CISPR22:2005 +A1 / EN55022:2006 +A1 - Class A1), 2) EN 61000-3-2:2006 EN 61000-3-3:1995 +A1 +A2 EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2 FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A2) / ICES-003, Issue 4 GB9254-2008, GB17625.1-2003 ENERGY USE: Regulation (EC) No. 1275/2008 ENERGY STAR® Qualified Imaging Equipment Typical Electricity Consumption (TEC) Test Procedure Supplementary Information: The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, the EuP Directive 2005/32/EC and carries the CE-Marking ENWW accordingly. Declaration of Conformity 635 This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1. The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems. 2. The product meets the requirements of EN55022 & CNS13438 Class A in which case the following applies: “Warning – This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.” 3. 3) For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number(s). Boise, Idaho USA October 2010 For regulatory topics only: European Contact: Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 140, D-71034, Böblingen (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143) www.hp.com/go/certificates USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho 83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000) 636 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Certificate of Volatility Figure C-1 Certificate of Volatility (1 of 2) Model: HP LaserJet Enterprise M750 Series Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility Part Number: Address: CLJ M750n / D3L08A Hewlett Packard Company CLJ M750dn / D3L09A 11311 Chinden Blvd CLJ M750xh / D3L10A Boise, ID 83714 Volatile Memory Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)? Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: DDR2 - DRAM 1 GB Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Yes User Modifiable: Yes Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: No Steps to clear memory: Used for temporary storage during the process of jobs, and for applications that are running on the OS. When the printer is powered off, the memory is erased. Function: Steps to clear memory: Function: Steps to clear memory: No User Modifiable: Yes Function: No Non-Volatile Memory Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)? Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: SPI Flash 4 MB Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: ICB EEPROM 32KB Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Yes No User Modifiable: Yes No User Modifiable: Yes Function: Steps to clear memory: Contains the boot code and factory product configuration data required for the device to function. User modifications are limited to downloading digitally signed HP firmware images. There are no steps to clear this data. Function: Steps to clear memory: Backup device for critical system counters and product configuration information. There are no steps to clear this data. Function: Steps to clear memory: No Mass Storage Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)? Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below ENWW Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: Self Encrypting Hard Disk, SATA 1 and SATA 2 320 GB Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: Solid State Storage 8 GB User Modifiable: Yes No User Modifiable: Yes No Function: Steps to clear memory: Stores customer data, OS, applications, digitally signed firmware images, persistent data, and temporary data used for processing and system functions. (Note: HDD is standard on D3L10A model, optional on D3L08A and D3L09A models) There are several ways to erase this: 1. Erase and Unlock Encrypted Disk - This changes the encryption keys rendering all data unreadable. 2. Secure Storage Erase Erases temporary files and job data by overwriting information one or three times 3. Secure Disk Erase - Industry standard ATA Secure Erase. Overwrites all data on the hard drive. 4. Secure File Erase - Erases files when jobs finish processing by overwriting them one or three times. Function: Steps to clear memory: Stores customer data, OS, Industry standard ATA Secure Certificate of Volatility 637 Figure C-2 Certificate of Volatility (2 of 2) Device (SSD) applications, persistent data, and temporary data used for processing and system functions. User modifications are limited to downloading digitally signed HP firmware images. (Note: SSD is standard on D3L08A and D3L09A models. Erase. Overwrites all data on the device. USB Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)? Yes No If Yes please describe below Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3rd party application loading. USB ports can be disabled. Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device)? Yes No If Yes please describe below Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded. RF/RFID Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone, Yes No If Yes please describe below Bluetooth) Purpose: Frequency: Bandwidth: Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP): Specifications: Other Transmission Capabilities Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything Yes No If Yes please describe below: other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Purpose: Frequency: Bandwidth: Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP): Specifications: Other Capabilities Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data Yes No If Yes please describe below: whatsoever? Purpose: Specifications: Author Information Name: Title: Email: Business Unit: Date Prepared: 07/09/2013 638 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Safety statements Laser safety The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation. WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation. Canadian DOC regulations Complies with Canadian EMC Class A requirements. « Conforme à la classe A des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques. « CEM ». » VCCI statement (Japan) Power cord instructions Make sure your power source is adequate for the product voltage rating. The voltage rating is on the product label. The product uses 220-240 Vac and 50/60 Hz. Connect the power cord between the product and a grounded AC outlet. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the product, use only the power cord that is provided with the product. EMC statement (China) ENWW Safety statements 639 Power cord statement (Japan) EMC statement (Korea) EMI statement (Taiwan) Laser statement for Finland Luokan 1 laserlaite Klass 1 Laser Apparat HP Color LaserJet M750n, M750dn, M750xh, laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (2007) mukaisesti. VAROITUS ! Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. VARNING ! Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. HUOLTO HP Color LaserJet M750n, M750dn, M750xh - kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja. VARO ! Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen. 640 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW VARNING ! Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 775-795 nm Teho 5 m W Luokan 3B laser. ENWW Safety statements 641 GS statement (Germany) Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert warden. Das Gerät ist kein Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gemäß BildscharbV. Bei ungünstigen Lichtverhältnissen (z. B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen auf dem Display und damit zu Einschränkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. Substances Table (China) Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (Turkey) Türkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (Ukraine) Обладнання відповідає вимогам Технічного регламенту щодо обмеження використання деяких небезпечних речовин в електричному та електронному обладнанні, затвердженого постановою Кабінету Міністрів України від 3 грудня 2008 № 1057 642 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Eurasian Conformity (Belarus, Kazakhstan, Russia) ENWW Safety statements 643 644 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Index Symbols/Numerics 1 x 500-sheet paper feeder assembly components, removing 211 3 x 500-paper feeder assembly components, removing 225 A accessories ordering 540 accessories installed, information 342 acoustic specifications 628 Administration menu, control panel 251, 346 after-service checklist 84 B Backup/Restore menu, control panel 265, 386 bands, troubleshooting 519 batteries included 633 before-service checklist 84 blank pages troubleshooting 524 blank pages, troubleshooting 518 buffer overflow errors 422 C cable, USB troubleshooting 524 Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control panel 266, 387 calibration information, printed 337 process 40 Canadian DOC regulations 639 cartridge developing unit engagement and disengagement 35 life detection 35 memory tag 35 ordering 541 part number 541 presence detection 35 toner level detection 35 cartridges error messages 480 recycling 631 removing 85 replace message 480 warranty 619 cautions iii characters, troubleshooting 521 circuit diagram 330 clean the paper path cleaning page printing 523 cleaning product 523 cleaning page 387 clock error message 398 color diagnostic test 342 troubleshooting 337, 520 components diagnostic tests 304 configuration page 273 configuration pages information 342 printing 339 connectivity solving problems 525 control panel Administration menu 251, 346 assembly, removing 108 Backup/Restore menu 265, 386 Calibrate/Cleaning menu 266, 387 Display Settings menu 258, 365 General Settings menu 251, 348 Manage Supplies menu 259, 366 Manage Trays menu 260, 369 messages, numerical list 390 messages, types of 390 Network Settings menu 261, 370 Print Options menu 256, 363 Print Settings menu 255, 361 Reports menu 251, 346 Service menu 267, 389 Supplies menu 248 Trays menu 250 Troubleshooting menu 264, 381 USB Firmware Upgrade menu 266, 389 control-panel menus 346 retrieve job from device memory 247 Retrieve Job From USB 247 Sign In 247 conventions, document iii counts 526 page, reset 526 reset after replacing formatter 526 See also pages counts covers control-panel assembly, removing 108 front-door assembly, removing 117 identification and location 106 left, removing 110 rear, removing 111 right-door assembly, removing 120 right-front, removing 108 right-rear, removing 114 top, removing 115 creases, troubleshooting 521 crooked pages troubleshooting 521 customer support online 625 D dark image, troubleshooting 518 date codes for firmware 342 manufacture 341 DC controller PCA, removing 197 DC controller, operation 8 defeating interlocks 277 delivery unit delivery drive assembly (simplex models), removing 181 demo page 273 determine the problem source 268 developing stage 30 diagnostics 337 component 304 engine 276 LED 273 networks 377 page, printing 337 See also tests; troubleshooting diagrams 539 Display Settings menu, control panel 258, 365 disposal, end-of-life 633 document conventions iii doors. See covers driver PCA removing 207 drum cleaning stage 33 duplex paper path 62 duplexing unit duplex drive assembly (duplex models), removing 179 jam causes 504 E EIO cards buffer overflow 422 electrical specifications 628 electronic hardware recycling 634 electrostatic discharge (ESD) 82 end-of-life disposal 633 engine diagnostics 276 engine speed paper type 58 engine test button 279 engine-control system 7 environment, specifications 628 environmental stewardship program 631 error messages numerical list 390 types of 390 ESD electrostatic discharge (ESD) 82 Eurasian conformity 643 event log 273 clear 489 information 342 print 489 view 489 event-log messages 390, 488 F faded print 517 fans fuser, removing 192 power-supply fan and fan duct, removing 190 FCC regulations 630 field-replaceable units (FRUs) replacing 82 Finnish laser safety statement 640 firmware date codes 342 version information 341 firmware, downloading new 535 flowcharts troubleshooting 269 formatter case, removing 123 PCA, removing 100 resets after replacing 526 formatter fan removing 194 formatter lights 273 FRUs (field-replaceable units) replacing 82 fuser jam causes 503 jams 496 motor, removing 188 operation 58 part number 542 fuser drive assembly removing 164 fusing stage 32 G General Settings menu, control panel 251, 348 H high-voltage power supply removing, first transfer 203 removing, imaging (developing) 202 removing, second transfer 205 HP Customer Care 625 HP Jetdirect print server configuration page 341 lights 273 humidity requirements 628 humidity values, printed 337 I ICB PCA removing 194 image quality calibration process 40 print, troubleshooting 517 imaging drums diagnostic test 278 installation 82 screws 82 verify for optional accessories 339 See also replacing parts interlocks defeating 277 intermediate transfer belt (ITB) 98 internal clock errors 398 interpret control-panel messages and event log entries 390 ITB part number 542, 543 ITB cleaning stage 33 ITB unit operation 37 J jams common causes of 490 detection theory 64 diagnostic test for 279 duplex area 504 fuser 496 fuser area 503 locations 491 lower right door 498 output bin 502, 503 recovery 509 Tray 1 499 Tray 1 and Tray 2 505 Tray 2 501 Tray 3 501 Tray 3, 4, and 5 507 Tray 4 501 Tray 4, 5, or 6 498 Tray 5 501 Tray 6 501 upper right door 496 Japanese VCCI statement 639 Jetdirect print server lights 273 K Korean EMC statement 640 L laser beam exposure stage 29 laser safety statements 639, 640 laser scanner cautions for servicing 82 laser/scanner assembly, removing 125 operations 23 LEDs. See lights left cover, removing 110 license, software 622 lifter-drive assembly removing 138 light print, troubleshooting 517 lights formatter 273 troubleshooting with 273 lines, troubleshooting 519 link speed settings 381 loose toner, troubleshooting 520 low-voltage power supply removing 199 lower right door jams 498 M main drive assembly removing 150 Manage Supplies menu, control panel 259, 366 Manage Trays menu, control panel 260, 369 manual print modes 514 material restrictions 633 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 634 memory information 339 insufficient 416 print cartridge 35 supply errors 390 memory chip, toner cartridge description 621 menus, control panel Administration 251, 346 Backup/Restore 265, 386 Calibrate/Cleaning 266, 387 Display Settings 258, 365 General Settings 251, 348 Manage Supplies 259, 366 Manage Trays 260, 369 Network Settings 261, 370 Print Options 256, 363 Print Settings 255, 361 Reports 251, 346 Service 267, 389 Supplies 248 Trays 250 Troubleshooting 264, 381 USB Firmware Upgrade 266, 389 menus, control-panel retrieve job from device memory 247 Retrieve Job From USB 247 Sign In 247 mercury-free product 633 messages numerical list 390 types of 390 model number 341 motors developing motor, removing 187 developing-disengagement, removing 189 drum motor, removing 186 fuser, removing 188 ITB, removing 184 paper path 46 N Network Settings menu, control panel 261, 370 networks diagnostics 377 HP embedded Jetdirect configuration page 341 link speed settings 381 notes iii O online support 625 operating environment specifications 628 operations engine-control system 7 laser/scanner 23 print cartridge memory 35 ordering 500-sheet tray 545 print cartridge 541 product documents 540 supplies and accessories 540 output bin jam causes 503 jams 502 output quality print, troubleshooting 517 P pages blank 524 not printing 524 printing slowly 524 skewed 521 pages count 526 reset 526 See also counts paper pickup assembly, removing 128 stop in path for testing 304 wrinkled 521 paper delivery assembly removing 176 paper jams locations 491 paper movement operation 43 paper path diagnostic test 279 operation 54 stop movement for testing 304 paper-path test, sensors 303 parameters, EP, troubleshooting 337 part number 500-sheet tray 545 print cartridge 541 parts 539 parts lists and diagrams 1x500 paper feeder 578 3x500 paper feeder 584 cassette 570 covers, panels, and doors 548 internal components 552, 554, 556, 558, 560, 562, 564, 566, 568 paper delivery assembly 574 paper pick-up assembly 572 printed circuit assemblies 576 right door components 550 using 546 password Service menu PIN 526 pick-up rollers part numbers 543 port configuration information 341 power consumption 628 power supply troubleshooting 271 power switch PCA removing 209 pre-exposure stage 28 pre-troubleshooting checklist 268 primary charging stage 28 primary transfer stage 31 print cartridge developing unit engagement and disengagement 35 life detection 35 memory tag 35 ordering 541 part number 541 presence detection 35 toner level detection 35 print cartridges diagnostic test 278 error messages 480 removing 85 replace message 480 Print Options menu, control panel 256, 363 print quality built-in troubleshooting pages 334 manual print modes 514 test pages 334 troubleshooting 517 Print Quality menu options 514 Print Settings menu, control panel 255, 361 Print Test Page 351 printing modes, manual 514 stop for testing 304 troubleshooting 524 problem source determine 268 problem-solving event-log messages 390, 488 messages, types of 390 networks 377 Process Cleaning Page 387 product specifications 627 Q quality print, troubleshooting 517 R recycling 631 electronic hardware 634 HP printing supplies returns and environmental program 632 removal order removing order 84 removal strategy removing and replacing 82 removing parts 1 x 500-sheet paper feeder assembly 211 3 x 500-sheet paper feeder assembly 225 after-service checklist 84 before-service checklist 84 control-panel assembly 108 DC controller PCA 197 delivery drive assembly (simplex models) 181 developing motor 187 developing-disengagement motor 189 driver PCA 207 drum motor 186 duplex drive assembly (duplex models) 179 environmental sensor 210 formatter case 123 formatter fan 194 formatter PCA 100 front-door assembly 117 fuser 90 fuser drive assembly 164 fuser fan 192 fuser gear assembly 168 fuser motor 188 high-voltage power supply, first transfer 203 high-voltage power supply, second transfer 205 ICB PCA 194 imaging (developing) highvoltage power supply 202 intermediate transfer belt 98 ITB motor 184 laser/scanner assembly 125 left cover 110 lifter-drive assembly 138 low-voltage power supply 199 main drive assembly 150 paper delivery assembly 176 paper pickup assembly 128 pickup roller (tray 1) 91 pickup roller (tray 2) 95 power switch PCA 209 power-supply fan and fan duct 190 print cartridges 85 rear cover 111 registration sensor assembly 135 residual toner full sensor 145 residual-toner-feed assembly 182 right-door assembly 120 right-front cover 108 right-rear cover 114 secondary transfer roller 97 separation pad (Tray 1) 92 separation roller (tray 2) 94 service approach 83 toner-collection unit 88 tools, required 83 top cover 115 repair approach 83 replace supplies message 480 replacing parts about 82 after-service checklist 84 before-service checklist 84 screws 82 service approach 83 tools, required 83 Reports menu, control panel 251, 346 retrieve job from device memory menu 247 Retrieve Job From USB menu 247 roller pickup roller (Tray 1), removing 91 pickup roller (Tray 2), removing 95 rollers separation roller (Tray 2), removing 94 S safety statements 639, 640 screwdrivers, required 83 screws installing 82 types of 83 secondary transfer roller part number 543 secondary transfer roller, removing 97 secondary transfer stage 31 sensor tests manual developer alienation sensor (PS11) 288 front-door opening/closing switch (PS14) 281 fuser loop sensors 1 and 2 (PS7 and PS8) 285 fuser output sensor (PS 6) 287 fuser pressure-release sensor (PS9) 286 ITB alienation switch (SW5) 289 output-bin-full sensor (PS10) 303 right-door opening/closing sensor (PS15) 282 TOP sensor (PS5) 284 tray 3 paper size sensors (SW2 and SW3) 297 tray 4 paper size sensors (SW2 and SW3) 301 sensor tests manual tray/bin tray 1 paper sensor (PS2) 292 tray 2 paper sensor (PS1) 293 tray 2 paper size switches (SW7 and SW8) 295 tray 2 paper surface (PS4) 294 tray 3 door opening/closing sensor (SW1) 300 tray 3 feed sensor (SR1) 299 tray 3 paper sensor (SR1) 297 tray 3 paper sensor (SR3) 296 tray 4 door opening/closing door sensor (SW1) 301 tray 4 feed sensor (X) 301 tray 4 paper sensor (SR3) 301 tray 4 paper surface sensor (SR2) 301 tray 5 door opening/closing sensor (SW1) 302 tray 5 feed sensor (SR81) 302 tray 5 paper sensor (SR83) 302 tray 5 paper size sensors (SW82 and SW83) 302 tray 5 paper surface sensor (SR82) 302 tray 6 door opening/closing sensor (SW1) 302 tray 6 feed sensor (SR91) 302 tray 6 paper sensor (SR93) 302 tray 6 paper size sensors (SW92 and SW93) 302 tray 6 paper surface sensor (SR92) 302 sensors diagnostic tests 303 environmental, removing 210 fuser gear assembly, removing 168 paper path 45 registration sensor assembly, removing 135 residual toner full sensor, removing 145 tests, manual 280 tests, manual tray/bin 290 separation stage 32 service approach 83 Service menu options 526 Service menu, control panel 267, 389 Sign In menu 247 skew prevention 55 skewed pages troubleshooting 521 smeared toner, troubleshooting 521 software software license agreement 622 solenoids paper path 46 solve problems 243 solving direct-connect problems 525 network problems 525 specifications 627 electrical and acoustic 628 operating environment 628 static, precautions for 82 status messages, types of 390 status page 273 stop printing for test 304 streaks, troubleshooting 519 supplies error messages 480 memory errors 390 ordering 540 recycling 631 replace message 480 Supplies menu, control panel 248 support online 625 T Taiwan EMI statement 640 technical support online 625 temperature values, printed 337 temperature requirements 628 test page engine 279 tests color band 342 component tests list and descriptions (1 of 2) 305 component tests list and descriptions (2 of 2) 307 disable cartridge check 278 manual sensor 280 networks 377 paper path 279 paper-path sensors 303 print/stop 304 tray/bin manual sensor 290 text, troubleshooting 521 tips iii toner loose, troubleshooting 520 smeared, troubleshooting 521 toner cartridges memory chips 621 recycling 631 warranty 619 toner collection unit part number 543 removing 88 tools, required 83 transfer stage 31 transfer unit operation 37 Tray 1 jams 499 Tray 2 jams 501 tray selection - use requested tray 369 trays jam causes 505, 507 Trays menu, control panel 250 troubleshooting 243, 337 about 268 blank pages 524 checklist 244, 268 clean the paper path 523 color 337 configuration page 273 configuration pages for 339 control panel messages, numerical 390 demo page 273 direct-connect problems 525 duplexing 512 EP parameters 337 event log 273 flowchart 269 jams in duplex area 504 jams in fuser area 503 jams in output bin 503 jams in Tray 1 and Tray 2 505 jams in Tray 3, 4, and 5 507 lights, using 273 lines, printed pages 519 network problems 525 pages not printing 524 pages printing slowly 524 power 271 print quality 517 problem source 268 reports and tools 273 service approach 83 skewed pages 521 status page 273 text 521 toner smear 521 USB cables 524 wrinkles 521 See also diagnostics Troubleshooting menu, control panel 264, 381 U understand the lights on the formatter heartbeat LED 274 heartbeat LED, product 274 heartbeat LED, product operating 276 updates, downloading product 535 upper right door jams 496 USB Firmware Upgrade menu, control panel 266, 389 USB port troubleshooting 524 Use Requested Tray 369 V version, hardware firmware 341 vertical lines, troubleshooting 519 W warnings iii warranty customer self repair 624 license 622 product 618 toner cartridges 619 waste disposal 634 Web sites customer support 625 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 634 white spots, troubleshooting 518 wiring diagram 330 wrinkles, troubleshooting 521 © 2013 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. www.hp.com *D3L08-90966* *D3L08-90966* D3L08-90966
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.7 Linearized : No Author : HP LaserJet Content Design & Delivery Create Date : 2013:08:09 09:10:28-06:00 Keywords : Edition, 1, 8/2013 Modify Date : 2013:08:09 09:33:37-06:00 Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26 Metadata Date : 2013:08:09 09:33:37-06:00 Format : application/pdf Title : HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M750 Service Manual - ENWW Creator : HP LaserJet Content Design & Delivery Subject : Edition 1 8/2013 Document ID : uuid:72fe4132-d282-43e9-82fe-9290d5b534ec Instance ID : uuid:a5ead6af-de02-4b1b-bf7f-e4251e8d8175 Startup Profile : Print Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 678EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools